1998-2001 Honda Accord v-6 B7xa

Introduction
General Info
-How to Use This Manual
T h i s s u p p l e m e n t c o n t a i n s i n f o r m a t i o n for t h e '98-01 A C C O R D V 6
S e d a n a n d '98-01 A C C O R D C O U P E V 6 . R e f e r t o t h e '98-01
A C C O R D a n d A C C O R D C o u p e S e r v i c e M a n u a l , P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 , f o r
service p r o c e d u r e s a n d data n o t i n c l u d e d in this s u p p l e m e n t .
T h e f i r s t p a g e o f e a c h s e c t i o n is m a r k e d w i t h a b l a c k t a b t h a t
lines u p w i t h o n e o f the t h u m b index tabs o n this page a n d the
back cover. Y o u can quickly find the first page of each section
w i t h o u t looking t h r o u g h a full table of contents. T h e s y m b o l s
p r i n t e d at t h e t o p c o r n e r o f each p a g e c a n also be u s e d as a
quick reference s y s t e m .
Specifications
Maintenance
Engine Electrical
Safety Messages
Y o u r s a f e t y , a n d t h e s a f e t y o f o t h e r s , is v e r y i m p o r t a n t . T o h e l p
y o u make i n f o r m e d decisions, w e have provided safety
messages a n d other safety information t h r o u g h o u t this m a n u a l .
O f c o u r s e , it is n o t p r a c t i c a l o r p o s s i b l e t o w a r n y o u a b o u t a l l t h e
hazards associated w i t h servicing this vehicle. Y o u m u s t use
your own good judgment.
Y o u w i l l f i n d i m p o r t a n t safety i n f o r m a t i o n in a v a r i e t y o f f o r m s
including:
Safety Labels
on the vehicle.
Safety Messages
preceded b y a safety alert s y m b o l ^
and
one of three signal w o r d s , DANGER, W A R N I N G , or CAUTION.
These signal w o r d s m e a n :
inHT^TTcTini
Y o u W I L L b e K I L L E D o r S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
you don't follow instructions.
WMMzIMM
Y o u C A N b e K I L L E D o r S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
you don't follow instructions.
firaOTJTItfll
Y o u C A N b e H U R T if y o u d o n ' t f o l l o w
instructions.
instructions
h o w t o service this vehicle correctly a n d safely.
A l l i n f o r m a t i o n c o n t a i n e d i n t h i s m a n u a l is b a s e d o n t h e l a t e s t
p r o d u c t i n f o r m a t i o n available at t h e t i m e of printing. W e reserve
t h e r i g h t t o m a k e c h a n g e s at a n y t i m e w i t h o u t n o t i c e . N o part o f
t h i s p u b l i c a t i o n m a y be r e p r o d u c e d , s t o r e d in retrieval s y s t e m ,
or t r a n s m i t t e d , in a n y f o r m b y a n y m e a n s , electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text,
figures and tables.
A s y o u r e a d t h i s m a n u a l , y o u w i l l f i n d i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t is
p r e c e d e d b y a I NOTICE | s y m b o l . T h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s m e s s a g e is
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
First E d i t i o n 9/2000
HONDA MOTOR C O . ,
All Rights Reserved
LTD.
S p e c i f i c a t i o n s a p p l y t o U.S.A. a n d C a n a d a S e r v i c e Publication
Office
A s sections with "include S R S components;
special p r e c a u t i o n s are required w h e n servicing.
m a r k e d sections are n o t included in this m a n u a l .
1998-01 A c c o r d V - 6
S u p p l e m e n t
Engine
Fuel and Emissions

*Transaxle
Steering
*Brakes
(Including ABS )
Body
*Heatincj,Ventilation
and Air Conditioning
Body Electrical
^Restraints
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS)

The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS includes a driver's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag
located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-01 models) located in the front seat-backs.
Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in the '98-01 Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) Service Manual,
P/N 61S8008. Items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components.
Servicing, disassembling or replacing these items w i l l require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be
done by and authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, w h i c h could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
collision, all SRS service w o r k must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the frontal airbags (and/or side airbags on some '00-01 models).
Do not b u m p the SRS unit, Otherwise, the system may fail in case of a collision, or the airbags may deploy w h e n the
ignition switch is ON (II).
SRS electrical w i r i n g harnesses are indicated w i t h y e l l o w color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the
front seats ('00-01 models) and around the floor ('00-01 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these
circuits.
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes
-1998 Model
1-2

-1999 Model
1-3

-2000 Model
1-4

- 2001 Model
1-5
Identification Number Locations
1-6
Warning/Caution Label Locations
1-7
Under-hood Emission Control Label
1-8
Parts Marking Locations
1-12
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes -1998 Model
Vehicle Identification Number
rrrrrm
1HG CG1 6 4 * W A 000001

c de f
Engine Number
J 3 0 A 1 - 1000001
g h
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

1HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A.
HONDA, Passenger vehicle
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
CG1: ACCORD V6/J30A1
CG2: ACCORD COUPE V6/J30A1
Body Type and Transmission Type
1: 2-door Coupe/5-speed Manual
2: 2-door Coupe/4-speed Automatic
6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
US model
Canada model
4: LX, LX V6
4: LX, LX V6
5: EX, EX V6
5:EX,EXV6
6: EX-L
Check Digit
Model Year
W: 1998
Factory Code
A: Marysville, Ohio Factory in U.S.A.
h. Serial Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : US model
800001 : Canada model
a. Engine Type
J 3 0 A 1 : 3.0 fi SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 5000001
Transmission Type
B7XA: 4-speed Automatic
P2A8:
5-speed Manual
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
B-80P
G-87P
NH-578
NH-592P
NH-612M
RP-25P
RP-29P
R-94
YR-508P
Color
Mystic Blue Pearl *
Dark Emerald Pearl
Taffeta White
Flamenco Black Pearl
Regent Silver Metallic
Black Currant Pearl
Raisin Pearl
San Marino Red
Heather Mist Metallic *
Note1
Note2
* Note 1: US m o d e l o n l y
* Note 2: Canada m o d e l only
V e h i c l e Identification
Number and Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety
S t a n d a r d Certification.
Number a n d C a n a d i a n
COLOR LABEL
INT. C O L O R
TYPE E
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
K A S 8 4 AO A
1-2
Chassis and Paint Codes -1999 Model

Engine Number
J30A1 - 2000001
1 H G C G 1 6 4 * X A 000001
a
cdef g h

1HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A.
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
US model
Canada model
4: LX, LX V6
4: LX
5: EX, W X V6
5: EX
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
X:1999
g. Factory Code
h. Serial Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : US model
8 0 0 0 0 1 - : Canada model
a. Engine Type
J 3 0 A 1 : 3.0 6 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 000001
a. Transmission Type
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
G-87P
NH-578
NH-592P
NH-612M
NH-623M
RP-25P
R-94
YR-508M
Color
Dark Emerald Pearl
Taffeta White
Flamenco Black Pearl
Regent Silver Metallic
Satin Silver Metallic
B l a c k c u r r a n t Pearl *
San Marino Red *
Heather Mist Metallic
# N o t e 2
Note1
Note1
* Note 1: US m o d e l only
* Note 2: Canada m o d e l only
Number and Federal
Number and Canadian
1-3
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes - 2000 Model
Vehicle identification Number
1HG C G 5 5 4 * Y A 000001
Engine Number
J30A1 - 3000001
cde f g h

1 HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A.
b . Line, Body and Engine Type
Body Type and Transmission Type
Vehicle Grade (Series)
US model
Canada model
4: LX, LX V6
4: LX
5: EX, EX V6
5: EX
Check Digit
Model Year
Y: 2000
Factory Code
Serial Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 U S model
800001 - : Canada model
a. Engine Type
J30A1: 3.0 fi SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 7500001
B7XA: 4-speed Automatic (Ohio)
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
B-92P
G-87P
NH-578
NH-623M
RP-31M
R-94
YR-524M
Color
Nighthawk Black Pearl
Dark Emerald Pearl
Taffeta White
Signet Silver Metallic
San Marino Red
Naples Gold Metallic
#Note
#Note
* Note : US m o d e l only
Number and Federal
Standard Certification.
Number and Canadian
COLOR LABEL
INT. C O L O R
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KA S84 AO A
Paint Code
1-4
Chassis and Paint Codes - 2001 Model

J30A1 - 4000001
1HG C G 5 5 4 * 1 A 000001
Engine Number
cdef g h

JHM: HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
1HG: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG INC., U.S.A.
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
US model
Canada model
4: LX, LX V6
4: LX
5: EX, EX V6
5: EX
Check Digit
Model Year
1:2001
Factory Code
C: Saitama in Japan (Sayama).
Serial Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : US model
800001 - : Canada model
a. Engine Type
J 3 0 A 1 : 3.0 fi SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 000001
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
B-92P
B-96P
G-87P
NH-578
NH-623M
R-94
R-507P
RP-31M
YR-524M
Color
Nighthawk Black Pearl
Eternal Blue Pearl *
Dark Emerald Pearl *
Taffeta White
San Marino Red *
Firepepper Pearl
Signet Silver Metallic *
Naples Gold Metallic
Note2
Note1
# N o t e 1
Note1
Note2
* Note 1: US m o d e l only
* Note 2: Canada m odel only
Vehicle Identification
Number and Federal
Vehicle Identification
Number and Canadian
COLOR LABEL
INT. C O L O R
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KA S84 AO A
Paint Code
1-5
General Information
1-6
Warning/Caution Label Locations
1 -
General Information
Under-hood Emission Control Label (1998 Model)
Emission Group Identification
Engine and Evaporative Families
Example:
Engine Family:
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA

REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998
MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
W HNX V 03.0 FF1

a
SPARK PLUG GAP

NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.
WHNXV03, OFfl
TWC/H02S (2)
WHNXR0130AAA
EGR/SFI
6.1 30-96 PROCEDURES)
3.0L
CATALYST
30VHGXBG
HONDA
MOTOR CO. , LTD
(5dD)
P8C-A00
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA TLEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA A N D STATE OF
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998
NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
TIER 1/LEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 1 A N D
STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR
VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA L E V
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
CALIFORNIA U L E V
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA A N D STATE
OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
1-8
r r r
a. Model Year
W: 1998
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
e. Sequence Characters
Evaporative Family:
W HNX R 0130 AAA
a b
a. Model Year
W: 1998
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity

Example:
Engine Family:
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION
TO CANISTER
-|

REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999
MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
EWP
\ VALVE
X HNX V 03 0 FF1
a b
SPARK PLUG GAP
CATALYST
HJ
30VHGXBG
G3)
H O N D A MOTOR CO. , LTD
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA TLEV
NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
TIER 1/LEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 1 AND
STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 1999 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR
VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA LEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA AND STATE OF
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
CALIFORNIA ULEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA AND STATE
OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
c d
a. Model Year
X: 1999
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
X HNX Ft 0130 AAA
rr
a b
c d
a. Model Year
X:1999
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
General information
Example:
Engine Family:
VEHICLE
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION
TO CANISTER
^

NLEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000
MODEL YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS
AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 2000 MODEL YEAR NEW
LEV PASSENGER CARS.
EVAP PURGE
\ VALVE
Y HNX V 03.0 FF1
a b
SPARK PLUG GAP
cd

TWC/H02S (2)
EGR/SFI
CATALYST
30VHGFFG
H O N D A MOTOR CO. , LTD
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS, A N D CALIFORNIA
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.
a. Model Year
Y: 2000
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
Y HNX R 0130 AAA
ab
c d
a. Model Year
Y: 2000
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
1-10

Example;
Engine Family:
VEHICLE
EMISSION CONTROL

NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA
VALVE LASH
(COLD)
(IN) 0. 220. 02mm

!EX)0. 300. 02mm
SPARK PLUG GAP
1.0-1.1mm
INFORMATION
IAC VALVE
m^jmMmJ^
REGULATOR
EVAP
CANISTER CANISTER
'
PURGE
f
VALVE
E V A P
if\
,,l
1
vK/
1 HNX V 03.0 M5U
ST
\ w
a b
cd

1 HNXV03.OM5U
1 HNXR01 30AAF
3.0L
TWC/H02S (2)
EGR/SF1
OBO II
CERTIFIED
IA BYPASS CONTROL/
THERMAL VALVE
CATALYST
( T T 1
IHJ
HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD
/
J \
FRONT
30VAGFFG
O
P8C-AQ3
FEDERAL
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS, A N D CALIFORNIA
CANADIAN TIER 1
REGULATIONS A N D CANDIAN TIER 1 STANDARDS
FOR 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS.
a. Model Year
1:2001
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
Evaporative Family:
1 HNX R 0130 AAF
a b
a. Model Year
1: 2001
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
General Information
Parts Marking
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked w i t h the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original
parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts w i l l have self-adhesive labels, and a replacement engine and
transmission will have the VIN plate attached w i t h a break-off bolt.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.
1-12
specs
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits
Engine Electrical
Engine A s s e m b l y
Cylinder Head
Engine Block
Engine Lubrication
Cooling
Fuel a n d E m i s s i o n s
Automatic T r a n s m i s s i o n and Differential
Steering
Suspension
Brakes
Air Conditioning
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-12
2-13
'2-13
2-13
Design Specifications
Dimensions
Weight (U.S.A.)
Weight (CANADA)
Engine
Starter
Automatic T r a n s m i s s i o n
Steering
Suspension
Wheel Alignment
Brakes
Tires
Air Conditioning
Electrical Ratings
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-16
Body Specifications
Illustration
2-17

Engine Electrical
I g n i t i o n coil
Measurement
Stem
Qualification
Primary w i n d i n g resistance
at 68F (20C)
Secondary w i n d i n g resistance
at 68F (20C)
Ignition wire
Resistance
Type
S e r v i c e Limit
0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 2 il
1.71 20.3 k i i
1 - 4 - 2 - 5 - 3 - 6
Firing order
Spark plug
S t a n d a r d or N e w
12 V
Rated voltage
at 68F (20C)
25 k Q m a x .
N G K : PZFR5F-11
DENSO; PKJ16CR-L11
1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in.)
Gap
A t idle (check
Ignition timing
1.3 m m (0.05 in.)
A / T (in M o r B ) : 1 0 2 B T D C at 680 + 50 r p m
t h e red m a r k )
Alternator belt
Tension adjustment
Alternator
Output
A u t o adjuster type
A t 13.5 V a n d
100 A
normal engine
temperature
Starter
Output
1.6 k W
C o m m u t a t o r mica depth
0.4-0.5 mm
0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
( 0 . 0 1 6 - 0 . 0 2 0 in.)
Commutator runout
0.02 m m (0.001 in.) m a x .
0.05 m m (0.002 in.)
C o m m u t a t o r O.D.
2 8 . 0 - 2 8 . 1 m m ( 1 . 1 0 2 - 1 . 1 0 6 in.)
27.5 m m (1.083 in.)
Brush length
1 5 . 8 - 1 6 . 2 m m ( 0 . 6 2 - 0 . 6 4 in.)
11.0 m m (0.43 in.)
Brush spring tension (new)
1 5 . 7 - 1 7 . 7 N ( 1 . 6 0 - 1 . 8 0 kgf, 3 . 5 3 - 3 . 9 7 Ibs)
Engine Assembly
Measurement
Item
Compression
Minimum
9 3 0 kPa (9.5 k g f / c m , 135 psi)
o p e n t h r o t t l e . (See D e s i g n S p e c s f o r
Maximum
2 0 0 kPa (2.0 k g f / c m , 28 psi)
ratio.)
2-2
Qualification
P r e s s u r e C h e c k at 2 0 0 r p m w i t h w i d e
variation
S e r v i c e Limit
specs
Cylinder Head
Item
Measurement
Qualification
S e r v i c e Limit
Head
Warpage
Height
120.95 - 121.05 m m ( 4 . 7 6 2 - 4.766 in.)
Camshaft
End play
0 . 0 5 - 0 . 2 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 8 in.)
C a m s h a f t - t o - h o l d e r oil c l e a r a n c e
0 . 0 5 0 - 0 . 0 8 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 0 3 5 in.)
0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
Total runout
0.03 m m (0.001 in.) m a x .
0.04 m m (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height
0.05 m m (0.002 in.)
Intake, p r i m a r y
Intake, m i d
Intake,
0.20 m m (0.008 in.)
34.615 m m (1.3628 in.)

36.210 m m (1.4256 in.)
31.188 m m (1.2279 in.)
secondary
Exhaust
Valves
C l e a r a n c e (cold)
S t e m O.D.
Stem-to-guide clearance
0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.)
Exhaust
0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m ( 0 . 0 1 1 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
Intake
5 . 4 8 5 - 5 . 4 9 5 m m ( 0 . 2 1 5 9 - 0 . 2 1 6 3 in.)
5.455 m m (0.2148 in.)
Exhaust
5 . 4 5 0 - 5 . 4 6 0 m m ( 0 . 2 1 4 6 - 0 . 2 1 5 0 in.)
5.420 m m (0.2134 in.)
0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 1 8 in.)
0.08 m m (0.003 in )
0 . 0 5 5 - 0 . 0 8 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 1 in.)
0.12 m m (0.005 in )
Intake
Exhaust
V a l v e seats
Width
Stem installed height
Valve springs
Valve guides
Free l e n g t h
I.D.
Installed height
Rocker a r m s
Arm-to-shaft clearance
36.076 m m (1.4203 in.)
Intake
Intake
1 . 2 5 - 1 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 4 9 - 0 . 0 6 1 in.)
2.00 m m (0.079 in.)
Exhaust
1 . 2 5 - 1 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 4 9 - 0 . 0 6 1 in.)
2.00 m m (0.079 in )
Intake
4 6 . 7 5 - 4 7 . 5 5 m m (1.841 - 1 . 8 7 2 in.)
47.80 m m (1.882 in.)
Exhaust
4 6 . 6 8 - 4 7 . 4 8 m m ( 1 . 8 3 8 - 1 . 8 6 9 in.)
47.73 m m (1.879 in.)
Intake
51.03 m m (2.009 in.)
Exhaust
53.48 m m (2.106 in.)
Intake
5 . 5 1 5 - 5 . 5 3 0 m m ( 0 . 2 1 7 1 - 0 . 2 1 7 7 in.)
5.55 m m (0.219 in.)
Exhaust
5 . 5 1 5 - 5 . 5 3 0 m m (0.2171 - 0 . 2 1 7 7 in.)
5.55 m m (0.219 in.)
Intake
2 1 . 2 0 - 2 2 . 2 0 m m ( 0 . 8 3 5 - 0 . 8 7 4 in.)
_ _
Exhaust
2 0 . 6 3 - 2 1 . 6 3 m m ( 0 . 8 1 2 - 0 . 8 5 2 in.)
Intake
0 . 0 2 6 - 0 . 0 6 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 6 in.)
0.067 m m (0.0026 in.)
Exhaust
0 . 0 2 6 - 0 . 0 7 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 0 - 0 . 0 0 3 0 in.)
0.077 m m (0.0030 in.)
2-3

Engine Block
Measurement
Item
Block
Qualification
0.07 m m (0.003 in.) m a x .
0.10 m m (0.004 ir.
Bore diameter
86.000-86.015 m m
86.065 m m
( 3 . 3 8 5 8 - 3 . 3 8 6 4 in.)
(3.3884 in.)
0.05 m m (0.002 in )
Bore taper
0.5 m m (0.02 in.)
Reboring limit
Piston
S e r v i c e Limit
W a r p a g e of deck
S k i r t O.D.at 16.0 m m {0.63 in.) f r o m
85.975-85.985 m m
b o t t o m of skirt
( 3 . 3 8 4 8 - 3 . 3 8 5 2 in.)
(3.3844 in.)
Clearance in c y l i n d e r
0.015-0.040 m m
0.08 m m (0.003 in.)
85.965 m m
( 0 . 0 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 1 6 in.)
Ring groove w i d t h
Piston rings
Ring-to-groove clearance
Top
1 . 2 2 0 - 1 . 2 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 8 0 - 0 . 0 4 8 4 in.)
Second
1 . 2 2 0 - 1 . 2 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 8 0 - 0 . 0 4 8 4 in.)
1.25 m m (0.049 in )
Oil
2 . 8 0 5 - 2 . 8 2 5 m m ( 0 . 1 1 0 4 - 0 . 1 1 1 2 in.)
2.85 m m (0.112 in )
0 . 0 3 5 - 0 . 0 6 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 4 - 0 . 0 2 4 in.)
0.13 m m (0.005 in )
0 . 0 3 0 - 0 . 0 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 2 - 0 . 0 0 2 2 in.)
0.13 m m (0.005 in.)
0 . 2 0 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
0.60 m m (0.024 in.)
0 . 0 4 0 - 0 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 1 6 - 0 . 0 2 2 in.)
0.70 m m (0.028 in.)
0 . 2 0 - 0 . 7 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 2 8 in.)
0.80 m m (0.031 in.)
21.962-21.965 m m
21.954 m m
Top
Second
Ring end gap
Top
Second
Oil
Piston pin
O.D.
1.25 m m (0.049 in )
( 0 . 8 6 4 6 - 0 . 8 6 4 8 in.)
(0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance
-0.0050-+0.0010 mm
0.004 m m (0.0002 in.)
Pin-to-rod clearance
0.005-0.014 m m
( - 0 . 0 0 0 2 0 - + 0 . 0 0 0 0 4 in.)
Connecting rod
0.019 m m (0.0007 in.)
( 0 . 0 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 0 6 in.)
21.970-21.976 m m
Small-end bore diameter
( 0 . 8 6 5 0 - 0 . 8 6 5 2 in.)
Large-end bore diameter
Crankshaft
Nominal
56.0 m m (2.20 in.)
End play installed on crankshaft
0 . 1 5 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
Main journal diameter
71.976-72.000 m m
Rod journal diameter
52.976-53.000 m m
Rod/main journal taper
0.005 m m (0.0002 in.) m a x .
Rod/main journal out-of-round
0.005 m m (0.0002 in.) m a x .
0.010 m m (0.0004 in.)
End play
0 . 1 0 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
0.45 m m (0.018 in )
0.45 m m (0.018 in.)
( 2 . 8 3 3 7 - 2 . 8 3 4 6 in.)
( 2 . 0 8 5 7 - 2 . 0 8 6 6 in.)
Runout
0.020 m m (0.0008 in.) m a x .
Crankshaft
M a i n b e a r i n g - t o - j o u r n a l oil
0 . 0 2 0 - 0.044 m m (0.0008
bearings
clearance
Rod bearing
clearance
2-4
0.010 m m (0.0004 in.)
0.03 m m (0.0012 in.)

0.0017 in.)
0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 4 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 1 7 in.)
0.050 m m (0.0020 in.)
0.050 m m (0.002 in.)
Engine Lubrication
Item
Engine oil
Measurement
Qualification
Service Limit
5.0 % (5.3 U S q t , 4.4 I m p qt) f o r e n g i n e o v e r h a u l
Capacity
4.4 (4.6 U S qt, 3.9 I m p qt) f o r oil c h a n g e , i n c l u d i n g f i l t e r

4.0 % (4.2 U S q t , 3.5 I m p qt) f o r oil c h a n g e , w i t h o u t f i l t e r
Oil p u m p
0.20 m m (0.008in.)
Inner-to-outer rotor clearance
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
P u m p housing-to-outer rotor clearance
0 . 1 4 - 0 . 1 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 7 in.)
0.20 m m (0.008 in.)
P u m p h o u s i n g - t o - o u t e r r o t o r axial
0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 7 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 3 in.)
0.12 m m (0.005 in.)
clearance
Oil p r e s s u r e w i t h oil t e m p e r a t u r e at
176F (80C)
at idle
at 3,000 r p m
7 0 k P a (0.7 k g f / c m , 1 0 psi)
2
490 kPa (5.0 k g f / c m , 71 psi)
Cooling
Item
Measurement
Radiator
Coolant capacity (includes engine,
Reservoir
Coolant capacity
Radiator cap
O p e n i n g pressure
Thermostat
Opening temperature
heater, hoses and reservoir)
Qualification
Engine overhaul
Opening temperature
'01 m o d e l s
S e r v i c e Limit
| 0.6 ft (0.6 U S q t , 0.5 I m p qt)

2
9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 k g f / c m , 1 4 - 18 psi)
Begins to open
169-176F(76-80C)
194F(90C)
10.0 m m (0.39 in.) m i n .
V a l v e lift at f u l l y o p e n
Thermostat
C o o l a n t c h a n g e j 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p qt)
Fully o p e n
'98-00 m o d e l s
7.5 ft (7.9 U S q t , 6.6 I m p qt)
Begins t o open
Fully o p e n
V a l v e lift at f u l l y o p e n
163~171F (73~77C)
190F(88C)
10.0 m m (0.39 in.) m i n .
Radiator fan
Thermoswitch " O N " temperature
196~203F (91-95C)
switch
Thermoswitch "OFF" temperature
S u b t r a c t 5 - 1 5 F ( 3 - 8 C ) f r o m actual " O N " t e m p e r a t u r e
Fan t i m e r " O N " t e m p e r a t u r e
217-232F(103-111C)
Fan t i m e r " O F F " t e m p e r a t u r e
S u b t r a c t 5 - 2 3 F (3 13C) f r o m actual " O N " t e m p e r a t u r e
Fuel and Emissions

Measurement
Item
Fuel p r e s s u r e
Pressure w i t h regulator
regulator
v a c u u m hose disconnected
Fuel t a n k
Capacity
Engine idle
Idle s p e e d w i t h h e a d l i g h t s
Qualification
S e r v i c e Limit
2 8 0 - 3 3 0 kPa ( 2 . 9 - 3 . 4 k g f / c m , 4 1 - 4 8 psi)
64.8 ft (17.1 U S g a l , 14.3 I m p gal)
IndorE
680 5 0 r p m
and radiator fan off

Idle CO %
0.1 m a x .
2-5

Automatic Transmission and Differential
Measurement
Item
ATF (Automatic
Capacity
Qualification
Use Honda
ATF-Z1
Transmission
Service Limit
For f l u i d c h a n g e : 2.9 fi (3.1 U S q t , 2.6 I m p q t )

For o v e r h a u l : 7.2 fi (7.6 U S q t , 6.3 I m p qt)
Fluid)
ATF pressure
Line p r e s s u r e
A t 1,500 r p m i n
llorE
8 0 0 - 8 6 0 kPa
7 6 0 kPa
2
( 8 . 2 - 8 . 8 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 130 psi)
(7.7 k g f / c m , 110 psi)
7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa
7 5 0 kPa
position
4th clutch pressure
A t 2,000 r p m in
H
3rd clutch pressure
position
A t 2,000 r p m in
H
position
2nd clutch pressure
A t 1,500 r p m in
1st c l u t c h p r e s s u r e
A t 1,500 r p m in
[U p o s i t i o n
CD p o s i t i o n
Torque converter
Stall s p e e d : C h e c k with v e h i c l e on
Clutches
C l u t c h e n d plate-to-top d i s c
(8.1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi)
(7.6 k g f / c m , 110 psi)
7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa
7 5 0 kPa
2
(8.1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi)
(7.6 k g f / c m , 110 psi)
7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa
7 5 0 kPa
2
( 8 . 1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi)
(7.6 k g f / c m , 110 psi)
7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa
7 5 0 kPa
2
( 8 . 1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi)
(7.6 k g f / c m , 1 1 0 psi)
2,250-2,550 rpm
level g r o u n d
1st
1.2-1.4 m m
( 0 . 0 4 7 - 0 . 0 5 5 in.)
clearance
2nd
0.85-1.05 m m
3rd
0.55-0.75 m m
4th
0.55-0.75 m m
( 0 . 0 3 3 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)
( 0 . 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 3 0 in.)
( 0 . 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 3 0 in.)
Clutch return spring free length
1st
45.7 m m (1.80 in.)
43.7 m m (1.72 in.)
2nd
63.0 m m (2.48 in.)
61.0 m m (2.40 in.)
3rd, 4th
33.5 m m (1.32 in.)
31.5 m m (1.24 in,)
1.94 m m (0.076 in.)
Clutch disc thickness

Clutch plate thickness
I s l a n d 2nd clutch end plate thickness
3rd and 4th clutch end plate thickness
2-6
1st
2.0 m m (0.079 in.)
W h e n discolored
2nd
2.0 m m (0.079 in.)
W h e n discolored
3rd
2.3 m m (0.091 in.)
W h e n discolored
4th
2.0 m m (0.079 in.)
W h e n discolored
Markl
3.10 m m (0.122 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 2
3.20 m m (0.126 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 3
3.30 m m (0.130 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 4
3.40 m m (0.134 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 6
2.60 m m (0.102 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 7
2.70 m m (0.106 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 8
2.80 m m (0.110 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 9
2.90 m m (0.114 in.)
W h e n discolored
MarkO
3.00 m m (0.118 in.)
W h e n discolored
Markl
2.10 m m (0.083 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 2
2.20 m m (0.087 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 3
2.30 m m (0.091 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 4
2.40 m m (0.094 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 5
2.50 m m (0.098 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 6
2.60 m m (0.102 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 7
2.70 m m (0.106 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 8
2.80 m m (0.110 in.)
W h e n discolored
Mark 9
2.90 m m (0.114 in.)
W h e n discolored
specs
Item
Valve body
Measurement
Qualification
S t a t o r s h a f t n e e d l e b e a r i n g c o n t a c t I.D.
Torque converter
A T F p u m p d r i v e g e a r I.D.
Reverse shift
S e r v i c e Limit
W h e n w o r n or
side
( 1 . 0 6 3 0 - 1 . 0 6 3 8 in.)
damaged
ATF p u m p side
29.000-29.021 m m
W h e n w o r n or
ATF p u m p gear thrust clearance

ATF p u m p gear-to-body clearance
27.000-27.021 m m
( 1 . 1 4 1 7 - 1 . 1 4 2 6 in.)
damaged
0 . 0 3 - 0 . 0 5 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
0.07 m m (0.003 in.)
Drive gear
0 . 2 1 0 - 0.265 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 3 - 0 . 0 1 0 4 in.)
Driven gear
0 . 0 7 0 - 0 . 1 2 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 8 - 0 . 0 0 4 9 in.)
14.016-14.034 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 1 8 - 0 . 5 5 2 5 in.)
damaged
A T F p u m p d r i v e n gear shaft O.D.
13.980-13.99 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 0 4 - 0 . 5 5 0 8 in.)
damaged
Fork f i n g e r t h i c k n e s s
5 . 6 0 - 6 . 0 0 m m ( 0 . 2 2 0 - 0 . 2 3 6 in.)
5.40 m m (0.213 in.)
fork
W h e n w o r n or
Park g e a r a n d
damaged
pawl
Servo body
S h i f t f o r k s h a f t b o r e I.D.
14.000-14.010 m m
S h i f t f o r k s h a f t v a l v e b o r e I.D.
37.000-37.039 m m
( 0 . 5 5 1 2 - 0 . 5 5 1 6 in.)
Regulator valve
(1.4585 in.)
S e a l i n g r i n g c o n t a c t I.D.
32.000-32.025 m m
32.050 m m
( 1 . 2 5 9 8 - 1 . 2 6 0 8 in.)
(1.2618 in.)
35.000-35.025 m m
35.05 m m
( 1 . 3 7 8 0 - 1 . 3 7 8 9 in.)
(1.3799 in.)
29.000-29.013 m m
29.050 m m
( 1 . 1 4 1 7 - 1 . 1 4 2 2 in.)
(1.1437 in.)
body
Accumulator
body
Stator shaft
37.045 m m
( 1 . 4 5 6 7 - 1 . 4 5 8 2 in.)
2-7

Automatic Transmission and Differential (cont'd)
Measurement
Item
Mainshaft
Diameter of needle bearing contact
Qualification
Service Limit
at s t a t o r s h a f t
22.984-23.000 m m
( 0 . 9 0 4 9 - 0 . 9 0 5 5 in.)
damaged
at 3 r d g e a r
52.975-52.991 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 2 . 0 8 5 6 - 2 . 0 8 6 3 in.)
damaged
at 4 t h g e a r c o l l a r
33.975-33.991 m m
W h e n w o r n or
area
I.D. o f 3 r d g e a r
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 3 3 7 6 - 1 . 3 3 8 2 in.)
damaged
59.000-59.019 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 2 . 3 2 2 8 - 2 . 3 2 3 6 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f 4th g e a r
40.000-40.016 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 5 7 4 8 - 1 . 5 7 5 4 in.)
damaged
End play of 3rd gear
0 . 0 3 - 0 . 3 1 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 1 2 in.)
0 . 1 0 - 0 . 2 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.)
End play of 4th gear

41 x 7 3 m m t h r u s t s h i m t h i c k n e s s
No. 1
7.85 m m (0.309 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 2
7.90 m m (0.311 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 3
7.95 m m (0.313 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 4
8.00 m m (0.315 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 5
8.05 m m (0.317 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 6
8.10 m m (0.319 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
27 x 47 x 5 m m
5.00 m m (0.197 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Thrust washer thickness
damaged
Length of 4th gear collar
5 8 . 5 - 5 8 . 6 m m ( 2 . 3 0 3 - 2 . 3 0 7 in.)
4th gear collar flange thickness
4 . 4 5 - 4 . 6 0 m m ( 0 . 1 7 5 - 0 . 1 8 1 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
damaged
Sealing ring thickness
32 m m sealing
1 . 8 5 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 3 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.)
1.800 m m (0.071 in.)
1 . 8 5 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 3 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.)
1.800 m m (0.071 in.)
2.025 -
0.081 in.)
2.080 m m (0.082 in.)
0.2354 in.)
5.95 m m (0.2343 in.)
ring
29 m m s e a l i n g
ring
W i d t h of sealing ring groove
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e O.D.
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e b u s h i n g I.D.
5.97 -
4th clutch
11.47 -
11.48 m m (0.4516 -
0.4520 in.)
11.45 m m (0.4508 in.)
3rd clutch
6.018 -
6.030 m m (0.2369 -
0.2374 in.)
6.045 m m (0.2380 in.)
4th clutch
2-8
2.060 m m (0.079 -
3rd clutch
5.98 m m (0.2350 -
11.500 -
11.518mm
11.530 m m
(0.4528 -
0.4535 in.)
(0.4539 in.)
Item
Countershaft
Measurement
Qualification
S e r v i c e Limit
W h e n w o r n or
at 4 t h g e a r
34.975-34.991 m m
( 1 . 3 7 7 0 - 1 . 3 7 7 6 in.)
damaged
at 2 n d g e a r
39.979-40.000 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 5 7 4 0 - 1 . 5 7 4 8 in.)
damaged
at p a r k g e a r
41.964 - 4 1 . 9 8 0 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 6 5 2 1 - 1 . 6 5 2 8 in.)
damaged
at r i g h t e n d
3 8 . 5 0 5 - 38.515 m m
W h e n w o r n or
area
( 1 . 5 1 5 9 - 1 . 5 1 6 3 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f 4th g e a r
41.000-41.016 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 6 1 4 2 - 1 . 6 1 4 8 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f i d l e r g e a r
50.000-50.016 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 9 6 8 5 - 1 . 9 6 9 1 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f r e v e r s e g e a r
46.000-46.016 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 8 1 1 0 1 . 8 1 1 6 in.)
damaged
E n d p l a y o f 1st g e a r
0 . 0 0 - 0 . 3 3 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
E n d p l a y o f 4th g e a r
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 2 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 1 1 in.)
End play of idler gear
0 . 0 1 5 - 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 1 8 in.)
End play of reverse gear
0 . 1 0 - 0 . 2 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 1 0 in.)
Length of distance collar
5 3 . 9 2 - 5 3 . 9 6 m m ( 2 . 1 2 3 - 2 . 1 2 4 in.)
Cotter thickness
1 . 9 9 - 2 . 0 2 m m ( 0 . 0 7 8 - 0 . 0 8 0 in.)
R e v e r s e s e l e c t o r h u b O.D.
5 5 . 8 7 - 5 5 . 9 0 m m ( 2 . 1 9 9 6 - 2 . 2 0 0 8 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
damaged
2-9

Measurement
Item
Secondary shaft
Qualification
S e r v i c e Limit
at 1st g e a r
37.978-37.993 mm
( 1 . 4 9 5 2 - 1 . 4 9 5 8 in.)
damaged
at 2 n d gear
33.986-33.999 mm
W h e n w o r n or
area
I.D. o f 1st g e a r
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 3 3 8 0 - 1 . 3 3 8 5 in.)
damaged
44.000-44.016 mm
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 7 3 2 3 - 1 . 7 3 2 9 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f 2 n d g e a r
40.000-40.016 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 5 7 4 8 - 1 . 5 7 5 4 in.)
damaged
E n d p l a y o f 1st g e a r
0 . 0 7 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
End play of 2 n d gear

3 8 x 56.5 m m s p l i n e d w a s h e r t h i c k n e s s
No. 1
6.85 m m (0.270 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 2
6.90 m m (0.272 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 3
6.95 m m (0.274 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 4
7.00 m m (0.276 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 5
7.05 m m (0.278 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 6
7.10 m m (0.280 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 1
4.90 m m (0.193 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 2
4.95 m m (0.195 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 3
5.00 m m (0.197 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 4
5.05 m m (0.199 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 5
5.10 m m (0.201 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 6
5.15 m m (0.203 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
No. 7
5.20 m m (0.205 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
37 x 55 m m t h r u s t s h i m t h i c k n e s s
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
1 . 9 9 - 2 . 0 2 m m ( 0 . 0 7 8 - 0 . 0 8 0 in.)
Cotter thickness
Sealing ring thickness
1 . 8 9 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 4 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.)
1.800 m m (0.071 in.)
W i d t h of sealing ring groove
2 . 0 2 5 - 2 . 0 6 0 m m ( 0 . 0 8 0 - 0 . 0 8 1 in.)
2.080 m m (0.082 in.)
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e O.D.
7 . 9 7 - 7 . 9 8 m m ( 0 . 3 1 3 8 - 0 . 3 1 4 2 in.)
7.95 m m (0.3130 in.)
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e b u s h i n g I.D.
8 . 0 0 0 - 8 . 0 1 5 m m ( 0 . 3 1 5 0 - 0 . 3 1 5 6 in.)
8.030 m m (0.3161 in.)
13.990-14.000 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 0 8 - 0 . 5 5 1 2 in.)
damaged
Reverse idler
gear
area
at reverse idler
gear shaft
0 . 0 3 - 0 . 3 6 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
End play
I.D.
Thrust washer thickness
Transmission
18.007-18.020 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 7 0 8 9 - 0 . 7 0 9 4 in.)
damaged
0 . 9 7 - 1 . 0 3 m m ( 0 . 0 3 8 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)
h o u s i n g side
Reverse idler
0 . 9 7 - 1 . 0 3 m m ( 0 . 0 3 8 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)
gear shaft holder

side
I.D. o f r e v e r s e i d l e r g e a r s h a f t h o l d e r
2-10
14.006-14.024 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 1 4 - 0 . 5 5 2 1 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f t r a n s m i s s i o n h o u s i n g o f r e v e r s e
14.006-14.024 m m
idler gear shaft contact area
( 0 . 5 5 1 4 - 0 . 5 5 2 1 in.)
specs
Item
Measurement
Standard or New
Qualification
Wire Diameter
Main valve body
(0.063 in.)
(0.409 in.)
(1.319 in.)
Shift valve C spring
0.8 m m
6.6 m m
49.1 m m
(0.031 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.933 in.)
0.7 m m
6.6 m m
35.7 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.406 in.)
0.7 m m
6.6 m m
32.2 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.268 in.)
Shift valve E spring
1.1 m m
8.6 m m
30.1 m m
(0.043 in.)
(0.339 in.)
(1.185 in.)
0.9 m m
7.6 m m
63.0 m m
(0.035 in.)
(0.299 in.)
(2.480 in.)
0.6 m m
5.8 m m
14.5 m m
(0.024 in.)
(0.228 in.)
(0.571 in.)
T o r q u e converter check
1.2 m m
8.6 m m
35.1 m m
valve spring
(0.047 in.)
(0.339 in.)
(1.382 in.)
Servo control valve spring
0.7 m m
6.6 m m
35.7 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.406 in.)
0.7 m m
6.1 m m
17.8 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.240 in.)
(0.701 in.)
5.5 m m
37.4 m m
30.3 m m
(0.217 in.)
(1.472 in.)
(1.193 in.)
Relief v a l v e s p r i n g
Lock-up shift valve s p r i n g
C o o l e r check v a l v e s p r i n g
R e v e r s e CPC v a l v e s p r i n g
Stator reaction spring
body springs
(see p a g e 14-
Regulator valve spring A
164)
Regulator valve spring B
Lock-up control valve spring
Lock-up t i m i n g valve spring
Servo body
Shift valve B spring
s p r i n g s (see
p a g e 14-165)
Shift valve A spring
CPC v a l v e A s p r i n g
CPC v a l v e B s p r i n g
4th a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g A
4th accumulator spring B
3rd accumulator spring A
3rd accumulator spring B
Accumulator
1st a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g B
body springs
(see p a g e 14-
Free L e n g t h
33.5 m m
1.6 m m
Shift valve D spring
Regulator valve
10.4 m m
Modulator valve spring
s p r i n g s (see
p a g e 14-161)
O.D.
1st a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g A
166)
2nd accumulator spring B
2nd accumulator spring A
1.8 m m
14.7 m m
87.5 m m
(0.071 in.)
(0.579 in.)
(3.445 in.)
1.7 m m
9.4 m m
44.0 m m
(0.067 in.)
(0.370 in.)
(1.732 in.)
0.7 m m
6.6 m m
42.9 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.689 in.)
0.65 m m
6.6 m m
34.8 m m
(0.026 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.370 in.)
0.8 m m
7.1 m m
40.4 m m
(0.031 in.)
(0.280 in.)
(1.591 in.)
0.8 m m
7.1 m m
40.4 m m
(0.031 in.)
(0.280 in.)
(1.591 in.)
0.7 m m
6.1 m m
17.8 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.240 in.)
(0.701 in.)
0.7 m m
6.1 m m
17.8 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.240 in.)
(0.701 in.)
2.6 m m
19.6 m m
66.4 m m
(0.102 in.)
(0.772 in.)
(2.614 in.)
2.4 m m
12.8 m m
51.5 m m
(0.094 in.)
(0.504 in.)
(2.028 in.)
2.6 m m
19.6 m m
66.4 m m
(0.102 in.)
(0.772 in.)
(2.614 in.)
2.4 m m
12.8 m m
51.5 m m
(0.094 in.)
(0.504 in.)
(2.028 in.)
2.7 m m
15.0 m m
52.5 m m
(0.106 in.)
(0.591 in.)
(2.067 in.)
2.5 m m
21.6 m m
87.5 m m
(0.098 in.)
(0.850 in.)
(3.445 in.)
2.4 m m
12.6 m m
53.5 m m
(0.094 in.)
(0.496 in.)
(2.106 in.)
2.7 m m
19.6 m m
66.3 m m
(0.106 in.)
(0.772 in.)
(2.610 in.)
N o . of Coils
9.8
21.7
17.2
13.4
10.7
22.4
6.8
14.3
17.2
7.9
2.12
16.5
13.4
14.2
15.6
16.9
16.9
7.9
7.9
9.7
11.5
9.7
11.5
10.3
11.8
12.9
9.9
2-11

Measurement
Item
A/1
differential
Qualification
P i n i o n s h a f t c o n t a c t area I.D.
18.010-18.028 m m
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance
0 . 0 2 3 - 0 . 0 5 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
D r i v e s h a f t c o n t a c t area I.D.
3 0 . 0 2 5 - 3 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 1 . 1 8 2 - 1 . 1 8 3 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance
0 . 0 4 5 - 0 . 0 8 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 in.)
Carrier-to-intermediate shaft clearance
0 . 0 8 0 - 0 . 1 1 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
S e r v i c e Limit
( 0 . 7 0 9 1 - 0 . 7 0 9 8 in.)
carrier
Tapered roller bearing starting t o r q u e
For n e w b e a r i n g
2 . 7 - 3 . 9 N-m
0.1 m m (0.004 in.)
0.12 m m (0.005 in.)
Adjust
( 2 8 - 4 0 k g f - c m , 2 4 - 3 5 ibf-in.)
(preload)
For used bearing
2 . 5 - 3 . 6 N-m
Adjust
( 2 5 - 3 7 k g f - c m , 2 2 - 3 2 Ibf-in.)
A/T differential
Backlash
pinion gear
I.D.
0 . 0 5 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
18.042-18.066 m m
( 0 . 7 1 0 3 - 0 . 7 1 1 3 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance
0.055 - 0 . 0 9 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 7 in.)
0.12 m m (0.005 in.)
Steering
Measurement
Item
Steering wheel
R o t a t i o n a l p l a y m e a s u r e d at o u t s i d e
edge
S t a r t i n g l o a d m e a s u r e d at o u t s i d e
edge
Gearbox
Qualification
With engine
S e r v i c e Limit
0 - 1 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 3 9 in.)
running
With engine
30 N (3.1 kgf, 6.8 lbs)
running
60 5
A n g l e o f rack g u i d e s c r e w l o o s e n e d
f r o m locked position
Pump
Output pressure with shut-off valve
7 , 6 0 0 - 8 , 3 0 0 kpa
closed
( 7 8 - 8 5 kgf/cm ,
1 , 1 1 0 - 1 , 2 1 0 psi)
Power steering
Capacity
Use Genuine
Honda Power
fluid
For f l u i d c h a n g e : 0.4 fi (0.42 U S p t , 0.35 I m p qt)

For s y s t e m o v e r h a u l : 1.1 fi (1.16 U S q t , 0.97 I m p qt)
Steering Fluid
Power steering
D e f l e c t i o n w i t h 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs)
U s e d belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in.)
p u m p belt
applied m i d - w a y between pulleys
N e w belt: 8 . 5 - 1 1 . 0 m m ( 0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 3 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a
T e n s i o n ( m e a s u r e d w i t h belt t e n s i o n
U s e belt: 3 9 0 - 5 4 0 N ( 4 0 - 5 5 kgf, 8 8 - 1 2 0 lbs))
n e w belt t o t h e
gauge)
N e w belt: 7 4 0 - 8 8 0 N ( 7 5 - 9 0 kgf, 1 7 0 - 2 0 0 lbs))
n e w belt s p e c ,
run the engine
for 5 minutes,
t h e n r e a d j u s t it
to the used belt
spec.
2-12
specs
Suspension
Measurement
Item
Wheel alignment
Front
Caster
Front
2 4 8 ' + 1
Total Toe
Front
0 + 2 m m ( 0 + 1 / 1 6 in.)
Rear
Rear
Front w h e e l t u r n i n g angle
Inside w h e e l
Outside w h e e l
Aluminum wheel
Qualification
Camber
Runout
Steel w h e e l
Runout
Wheel bearings
End play
Service Limit
000'1
-030'+1
IN 2 2 ( 1 / 1 6 + 1 / 1 6 in.)
3 8 3 2 ' 2
3103' (Reference)
Axial
0 - 0.7 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 3 in.)
Radial
0 - 0 . 7 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 3 in.)
1.5 m m (0.06 in.)
Axial
0 - 1 . 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 4 in.)
2.0 m m (0.08 in.)
Radial
0 - 1 . 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 4 in.)
1.5 m m (0.06 in.)
Front
0 - 0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
Rear
0 - 0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
2.0 m m (0.08 in.)
Brakes
Measurement
Item
Parking brake
Qualification
S e r v i c e Limit
6 - 9 clicks
Distance travelled w h e n
p u l l e d w i t h 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbs) o f
lever
force
Brake p e d a l
148 m m (5 13/16 in.)
Pedal h e i g h t (carpet r e m o v e d )
Free p l a y
1 ---5 m m ( 1 / 1 6 - 3 / 1 6 in.)
Master cylinder
Piston-to-pushrod clearance
0 - 0 . 4 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 2 in.)
Brake disc
Thickness
Front
Rear
Runout
2 2 . 9 - 2 3 . 1 m m ( 0 . 9 0 - 0 . 9 1 in.)
21.0 m m (0.83 in.)
8 . 9 - 9 . 1 m m ( 0 . 3 5 - 0 . 3 6 in.)
8.0 m m (0.31 in.)

0.10 m m (0.004 in.)
Front
0.10 m m (0.004 in )
Rear
Parallelism
Brake p a d s
0.015 m m (0.0006 in.)
F r o n t a n d rear
Thickness
Front
1 0 . 5 - 1 1 . 5 m m ( 0 . 4 1 - 0 . 4 5 in.)
1.6 m m (0.06 in.)
Rear
8 . 9 - 9 . 1 m m ( 0 . 3 5 5 - 0 . 3 5 8 in.)
1.6 m m (0.06 in.)
Air Conditioning
Measurement
Item
Qualification
Refrigerant
Type
HFC-134a(R-134a)
Capacity or system
450 - 500 g ( 1 5 . 2 - 1 6 . 9 oz)
Refrigerant oil
Type
Capacity of c o m p o n e n t s
-1
S e r v i c e Limit
D E N S O : N D - O I L 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01 A H o r 38899-PR7-A01)

Condenser
25 m f i (5/6 f l oz, 0.9 I m p oz)
Evaporator
40 m f i (1 1/3 fl oz, 1.4 I m p oz)
Each l i n e a n d
10 mfi (1/3 f l oz, 0.4 I m p oz)
hose
Receiver
Compressor
Compressor
(DENSO)
Starter coil resistance

Pulley-to-pressure plate
at68F(20C)
10 m f i (1/3 f l oz, 0.4 I m p oz)

1 6 0 - 1 7 5 m f i (5 1 / 3 - 6 fl oz, 5 . 6 - 6 . 2 I m p oz)
3 . 4 - 3 . 8 ii
0.5 + 0.15 m m (0.02 + 0.006 in.)
clearance
2-13
Qualification
Measurement
Item
DIMENSIONS
Overall length
Specification
4-door
4,795 m m (188.8 in.)
2-door
4,745 m m (186.8 in.)
4-door
1,455 m m (57.3 in.)
1,785 m m (70.3 in.)
Overall w i d t h
Overall height
Wheelbase
Track
2-door
1,405 m m (55.3 in.)
4-door
2,715 m m (106.9 in.)
2-door
2,670 m m (105.1 in.)
Front
1,555 m m (61.2 in.)
Rear
1,535 m m (60.4 in.)
G r o u n d clearance
158 m m (6.2 in.)
Seating capacity
Five
Gross Vehicle W e i g h t Rating
4-door
4,235 lbs
(GVWR)
2-door
4,190 lbs
WEIGHT
Gross Vehicle W e i g h t Rating
4-door
1,920 kg
(CANADA)
(GVWR)
2-door
ENGINE
Type
W E I G H T (U.S.A.)
1,900 kg
W a t e r - c o o l e d , 4 - s t r o k e S O H C VTEC V 6 g a s o l i n e
engine
Cylinder arrangement
60 V 6 - c y l i n d e r , t r a n s v e r s e
Bore and stroke
86.0 x 86.0 m m (3.39 x 3.39 in.)
Displacement
2,997 c m (mft) (183 c u in.)
C o m p r e s s i o n ratio
9.4
Valve train
Belt d r i v e n , S O H C VTEC 4 v a l v e s per c y l i n d e r
Lubrication system
Forced, w e t s u m p , w i t h trochoid p u m p
Oil p u m p d i s p l a c e m e n t
at 6,000 e n g i n e r p m
Water p u m p displacement
at 6,000 e n g i n e r p m
58.4 ft (61.7 U S q t , 51.4 I m p q t ) / m i n u t e

172 ft (182 U S q t , 151 I m p q t ) / m i n u t e
Fuel r e q u i r e d
U N L E A D E D g a s o l i n e w i t h 86 p u m p o c t a n e n u m b e r o r
Type
Gear reduction
higher
STARTER
AUTOMATIC
Normal output
1.6 k W
Nominal voltage
12 V
Hour rating
30 s e c o n d s
Direction of rotation
C l o c k w i s e as v i e w e d f r o m g e a r e n d
Type
Electronically controlled automatic, 4-speed f o r w a r d , 1
Primary reduction
D i r e c t 1:1
reverse
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
Final r e d u c t i o n
2-14
1st
2.534
2nd
1.502
3rd
0.947
4th
0.608
Reverse
1.846
Type
S i n g l e helical g e a r
Gear ratio
4.200
specs
Item
STEERING
Qualification
Measurement
Overall ratio
15.77
T u r n s , lock-to-lock
3.05
380 m m (15.0 in.)
Steering wheel diameter

SUSPENSION
WHEEL
Type
Front
I n d e p e n d e n t d o u b l e w i s h b o n e , c o i l s p r i n g w i t h stabilizer
Rear
Five-link d o u b l e w i s h b o n e
Shock absorber
F r o n t a n d rear
Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
Camber
Front
ALIGNMENT
BRAKES
Rear
-030'
Caster
Front
248'
Total toe
Front
0 m m (0 in.)
Rear
In 2 m m (1/16 in.)
T y p e of service brake
Front
P o w e r - a s s i s t e d s e l f - a d j u s t i n g v e n t i l a t e d disc
Rear
Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Front
59 c m x 2 (9.0 sq i n . x 2)
Mechanical actuating, rear w h e e l s
T y p e of parking brake
Pad f r i c t i o n s u r f a c e area
Rear
TIRES
Specification
P o w e r - a s s i s t e d rack a n d p i n i o n
Type
28 c m x 2 (4.3 sq i n . x 2 )
Size of f r o n t a n d rear t i r e s
P 2 0 5 / 6 5 R 1 5 92V
Size o f s p a r e t i r e s
T135/90D15 100M
AIR
Cooling capacity
CONDITIONING
Compressor
5,240 K c a l / h (20,800 B T U / h )
Type/Manufacturer
Swash plate/DENSO
N u m b e r of cylinders
10
Capacity
177.7 m f i / r e v . (10.84 c u i n / r e v . )
M a x i m u m speed
7,600 r p m
Lubricant capacity
160 mfl (5 1/3 f l oz)
Lubricant type
ND-OIL8
Condenser
Type
Corrugated fin
Evaporator
Type
Corrugated fin
Blower
Type
Sirocco fan
M o t o r input
230W/12 V
Speed control
M a n u a l A/C: 4-speed A u t o A/C: Infinite variable
M a x i m u m capacity
520 m / h (18,300 c u f t / h )
Temperature control
Compressor clutch
Air-mix type
Type
D r y , s i n g l e p l a t e , Poly-V b e l t d r i v e
Electrical p o w e r
40 W m a x i m u m at 12 V
c o n s u m p t i o n at 68F (20C)
Refrigerant
Type
H F C - 1 3 4 a ( R - 1 3 4 a)
Quantity
4 5 0 - 5 0 0 g (15.2 - 1 6 . 9 f l oz)
2-15
Measurement
Item
ELECTRICAL
RATINGS
Specification
Qualification
Battery
12 V - 5 5 A H / 5 h o u r s
Starter
12 V - 1 . 6 k W
12 V - 1 0 0 A
Alternator
Fuses
Under-hood fuse/relay box
100A, 5 0 A , 4 0 A , 3 0 A , 2 0 A , 15A
Under-dash driver's fuse/
3 0 A , 15A, 10A, 7.5A
relay box
Under-dash passenger's
3 0 A , 2 0 A , 10A, 7.5A
fuse/relay box
Light bulbs
Headlight high beam
12 V - 6 0 W
Headlight low beam
12 V - 5 1 W
Front t u r n signal/Front side
12 V - 2 4 W / 2 . 2 CP ( c a n d l e p o w e r ) ( t w o f i l a m e n t s )
marker lights
2-16
Front parking lights
12 V -
Rear t u r n s i g n a l l i g h t s
12 V - 2 1 W
3CP
Brake/Taillights
12 V - 2 1 / 5 W
Taillight
12 V -
High m o u n t brake light
12 V - 2 1 W
Back-up lights
12 V - 2 1 W
License plate light
12 V - 3 C P
Ceiling light
12 V - 8 W
Trunk lights
12 V - 5 W
3CP
Door courtesy lights
12 V - 2 C P
Vanity mirror lights
12 V - 1 . 1 W
Glove box light
12 V - 3 . 4 W
Spotlights
12 V - 4 C P
Gauge lights
12 V - 1 . 2 6 W , 3.78 W
Indicator lights
12 V - L E D , 1 4 V - 0 . 5 6 W , 0.7 W , 1.4 W
Panel a n d pilot lights
14 V - 0 . 5 6 W , 0.84 W
Heater control panel lights
8 V - 1 . 2 W , 14 V - 1 . 1 2 W , 1.4W
Body Specifications
4-door sedan
U n i t ; m m (in.)
specs
(cont'd)
2-17
Body Specifications
(cont'd)
2-door coupe
2-18
Unit: m m
(in.)
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids
3-2
Maintenance Schedule for Normal

Conditions (1998-2000 models)
Listed by Distance/Time
3-4
Maintenance Schedule for Severe

Conditions (1998-2000 models)
3-6

and Severe Conditions (1998-2000 models)
Listed by Maintenance Item
3-8
Conditions (2001 Model)
3-10
Maintenance Schedule for Severe

Conditions (2001 Model)
3-12

and Severe Conditions (2001 Model)
Listed by Maintenance Item ........................................ 3-14
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various w o r k
procedure (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
LUBRICATION POINTS
Engine
Transmission
Brake line (includes ABS line)
Power steering gearbox
Throttle cable end (Dashboard lower panel hole)
Throttle cable end (Throttle link)
Brake master cylinder pushrod
Pedal linkage
Battery terminals
Fuel fill lid
Hood hinges and hood latch
Trunk hinges and latch
Door hinges, upper and lower
Door opening detent
Caliper piston boot, caliper pins, and boots
Brake line joints (Front and rear wheelhouse)
Power steering system
Air conditioning compressor
API SERVICE LABEL
LUBRICANT
API Service Grade: Use SJ "Energy Conserving" grade
oil. The oil container may also display the API
Certification seal shown below. Make sure it says "For
Gasoline Engines/' SAE Viscosity: See chart below.
Honda A T F - Z 1 *
Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid*"
Steering grease P/N 08733-B070E
Silicone grease
Multi-purpose grease
1
Honda White Lithium Grease
Silicone grease
Rust preventives
Genuine Honda Power Steering F l u i d *
Compressor oil: DENSO: ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
For Refrigerant: HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Recommended Engine Oil

Engine oil viscosity for a m b i e n t temperature ranges
30
-20
-10
10
20
30
40 C
* 1 : Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
* 2 : Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease
the life of the system.
* 3 : Always use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic
transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
NOTE:
Lubricate all hinges, latches, and locks once a year.
In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
We recommend Honda White Lithium Grease.
3-2
3-3
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions

(1998-2000 Models)
S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i r s t .
7,500 m i / 12,000 k m /
D o i t e m s in A .
15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 y e a r
D o i t e m s i n A a n d B.
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m /
D o i t e m s in A,
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C.
37,500 mi/ 60,000 km/
45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 y e a r s
Replace c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) . U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
Replace b r a k e f l u i d . U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3 B r a k e F l u i d . Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r .
52,500 m i / 8 4 , 0 0 0 k m /
60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 y e a r s
67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m /
75,000 m i / 1 2 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 y e a r s
Replace c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). C a p a c i t y : 5.6 G (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) . U s e U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
D o i t e m s in A a n d B.
82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m /
Do items in A.
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . 2.9 fl (3.1 U S q t , 2.6 I m p q t ) . U s e H o n d a A T F - Z 1 (see p a g e 14-113).
Replace b r a k e f l u i d . U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3. Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r .
D o i t e m s in A , B, a n d C.
97,500 m i / 1 5 6 , 0 0 0 k m /
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s
I n s p e c t v a l v e c l e a r a n c e ( c o l d ) (see p a g e 6-13).
Intake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.), E x h a u s t : 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
R e p l a c e s p a r k p l u g s (see p a g e 4-24). U s e N G K (PZFR5F-11) o r D E N S O (PKJ 16CR-L11).

G A P : 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in)
Replace t i m i n g belt (see p a g e 6-19) a n d i n s p e c t w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-10).
C h e c k idle s p e e d . S h o u l d be 680 + 50 r p m in M o r E p o s i t i o n (see p a g e 11-68).

LJ Replace c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) . U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
112,500 m i / 1 8 1 , 0 0 0 k m /
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s
3-4
D o t h e i t e m s in A , B, a n d C.
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, a n d C as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l listed.
A
R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil (see p a g e 8-5). - C a p a c i t y w i t h f i l t e r c h a n g e : 4.4 fi (4.6 U S qt, 3.9 I m p qt)

R o t a t e t i r e s . F o l l o w t h e p a t t e r n s h o w n in t h e O w n e r ' s M a n u a l - Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d c o n d i t i o n .
R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil f i l t e r (see p a g e 8-5).

I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear brakes (see p a g e 19-2).
C h e c k p a d s a n d discs f o r w e a r ( t h i c k n e s s ) , d a m a g e , a n d cracks.
C h e c k c a l i p e r s f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s o f m o u n t b o l t s .
C h e c k p a r k i n g brake a d j u s t m e n t . S h o u l d be f u l l y a p p l i e d w i t h i n 6 t o 9 clicks.
I n s p e c t t i e r o d e n d s , s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x , a n d b o o t s (see p a g e 17-12).
C h e c k rack g r e a s e a n d s t e e r i n g l i n k a g e .
Check boots for d a m a g e and leaking grease.
C h e c k f l u i d line f o r d a m a g e a n d leaks.
Inspect suspension c o m p o n e n t s .
Check bolts f o r t i g h t n e s s .
C h e c k c o n d i t i o n o f ball j o i n t b o o t s f o r d e t e r i o r a t i o n a n d d a m a g e .
I n s p e c t d r i v e s h a f t b o o t s . Check b o o t s f o r c r a c k s a n d b o o t b a n d s f o r t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 16-3)* .
I n s p e c t brake h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) . - C h e c k t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r , p r o p o r t i o n i n g c o n t r o l v a l v e , a n d A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e
a n d leakage.
C h e c k all f l u i d levels a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s ; c h e c k f o r leaks. If n e c e s s a r y , a d d A T F (see p a g e 14-112), e n g i n e c o o l a n t , brake f l u i d , a n d
windshield washer fluid.
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
Check f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n .
Check f o r p r o p e r f a n o p e r a t i o n .
I n s p e c t e x h a u s t s y s t e m * . Check c a t a l y t i c c o n v e r t e r heat s h i e l d , e x h a u s t p i p e , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 9-4).
I n s p e c t f u e l lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s * . Check f o r l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , cracks a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; r e t i g h t e n l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d replace
d a m a g e d parts (see p a g e 11-73).
1
Replace air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t .
I n s p e c t a n d a d j u s t d r i v e belt.
L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k b e l t d e f l e c t i o n b y p u s h i n g o n it ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e p u l l e y s .
- P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10).
R e p l a c e t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace it t w i c e as o f t e n (at 15,000 m i l e i n t e r v a l ) if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y in u r b a n areas t h a t h a v e h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n s of s o o t in t h e
air f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s .
Replace it w h e n e v e r a i r f l o w f r o m t h e c l i m a t e c o n t r o l s y s t e m is less t h a n n o r m a l .
1
A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s

e m i s s i o n s w a r r a n t i e s . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s be d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d i n t e r v a l t o e n s u r e l o n g - t e r m
reliability.
* : Refer t o '98-01 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 61S8008)
1
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions

(1998-2000 Models)
S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i r s t . U s e t h i s s c h e d u l e if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n M A I N L Y in C a n a d a o r in a n y o f t h e
f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s ; if o n l y O C C A S I O N A L L Y d r i v e n i n t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s , u s e t h e N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s s c h e d u l e (see p a g e 3-4).
S e v e r e Driving C o n d i t i o n s
Less t h a n 5 m i l e s (8 k m ) p e r t r i p o r , in f r e e z i n g t e m p e r a t u r e s , less t h a n 10 m i l e s (16 k m ) per t r i p
In e x t r e m e l y ; h o t w e a t h e r ( o v e r 90F/32C)
Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving
Trailer t o w i n g
On m u d d y , dusty, or de-iced roads
D r i v i n g in m o u n t a i n o u s c o n d i t i o n s
Replace oil a n d filter.

3,750 m i / 6,000 k m /
D o items in A.
7,500 m i / 1 2 , 0 0 0 k m /
Replace oil and filter.

11,250 m i / 1 8 , 0 0 0 k m /
15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 y e a r
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.

18,750 m i / 30,000 k m /
Do i t e m s in A.
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / 1 1/2 y e a r s :
Replace oil a n d filter

26,250 m i / 42,000 k m /
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s :

33,750 m i / 54,000 k m /
D o i t e m s in A.
37,500 m i / 60,000 k m / 2 1/2 y e a r s :

41,250 m i / 66,000 k m /
45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 y e a r s :
Replace c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.

C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) .
Replace b r a k e f l u i d (see p a g e 1 9 - 7 ) * .
U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3.
Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r .
Do i t e m s in A a n d B.
48,750 m i / 78,000 k m /
R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
5 2 , 5 0 0 m i / 84,000 k m 3 1/2 y e a r s :
56,250 m i / 90,000 k m /
^

60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 y e a r s :
Replace t i m i n g b e l t (see p a g e 6-19) a n d i n s p e c t t h e w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-9) if t h e v e h i c l e is r e g u l a r l y d r i v e n in w e a t h e r o v e r 110F

(43C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 F ( - 2 9 C ) ; If n o t , r e p l a c e t h e b e l t s at 105,000 m i l e s .
D o i t e m s i n A , B a n d C.
;
^
63,750 m i / 1 0 2 , 0 0 0 k m /

67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m 4 1/2 y e a r s :
^
71,250 m i / 1 1 4 , 0 0 0 k m

~..~.~Z1S.
'
75,000mi/120,000 km/5 years:
R e p l a c e c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t )
78,750 m i / 1 2 6 , 0 0 0 " k m /

82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 1/2 y e a r s
Do i t e m s in A.
^
86,250 m i / 1 3 8 , 0 0 0 k m /

""
~~
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s :
Replace b r a k e f l u i d (see p a g e 1 9 - 7 ) * .
Use G e n u i n e H o n d a DOT 3 brake f l u i d ; fill t o b e t w e e n marks o n reservoir.
D o i t e m s i n A , B a n d C.
93,750 m i / 1 5 0 , 0 0 0 k m /
R e p l a c e oil a n d filter.
97,500 m i / 1 5 6 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 1/2 y e a r s :
Do i t e m s in A.
101,250 m i / 1 6 2 , 0 0 0 k m /

^
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s :
I n s p e c t v a l v e c l e a r a n c e ( c o l d ) (see p a g e 6 - 1 3 ) l n t a k e : 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.) E x h a u s t : 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m ( 0 . 0 1 1 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
R e p l a c e s p a r k p l u g s . U s e N G K (PZFR5F-11) o r D E N S O (PKJ16CR-L11). G a p : 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in) (see p a g e 4-24).
Replace t i m i n g belt (see p a g e 6-19), a n d i n s p e c t t h e w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-10) o n l y if t h e belts w a s n o t r e p l a c e d at 60,000 m i l e s .
Check i d l e s p e e d (see p a g e 11-68): 680 + 50 r p m
Replace c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). Use H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2. C a p a c i t y : 5.6 ft (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) .

108,750 m i / 1 7 4 , 0 0 0 k m /
112,500 m i / 1 8 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 1/2 y e a r s :
116,250 m i / 1 8 6 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s A , B, a n d C.
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s :
* : Refer t o '98-01 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 )
1
3-6
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, a n d C as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l .
A
R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil a n d f i l t e r (see p a g e 8-5). C a p a c i t y w i t h f i l t e r c h a n g e : 4.4 fi (4.6 U S q t , 3.9 I m p qt)

I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear b r a k e s , e v e r y 6 m o n t h s if v e h i c l e is d r i v e n less t h a n 7,500 m i l e p e r y e a r (see p a g e 19-2).
Check pads a n d d i s c s f o r w e a r ( t h i c k n e s s ) , d a m a g e , a n d cracks.
Check calipers f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d tightness<of m o u n t b o l t s .
R o t a t e t i r e s , if t h e v e h i c l e has b e e n d r i v e n t h e d i s t a n c e l i s t e d . F o l l o w t h e p a t t e r n s h o w n in t h e O w n e r ' s M a n u a l . (Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d
condition.)
I n s p e c t tie r o d e n d s , s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x , a n d b o o t s (see p a g e 17-12).
Check rack g r e a s e a n d s t e e r i n g l i n k a g e .
Check b o o t s f o r d a m a g e a n d l e a k i n g g r e a s e .
Check f l u i d lines f o r d a m a g e a n d leaks.
Check bolts f o r t i g h t n e s s .
Check c o n d i t i o n o f ball j o i n t b o o t s f o r d e t e r i o r a t i o n a n d d a m a g e .
I n s p e c t d r i v e s h a f t b o o t s . Check b o o t s f o r cracks a n d b o o t b a n d s f o r t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 16-3)* .
1
C h e c k p a r k i n g b r a k e a d j u s t m e n t . S h o u l d be f u l l y a p p l i e d w i t h i n 6 t o 9 c l i c k s .
L u b r i c a t e d o o r locks a n d h i n g e s w i t h H o n d a w h i t e l i t h i u m g r e a s e .
I n s p e c t brake h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) . Check t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r , p r o p o r t i o n i n g c o n t r o l v a l v e , a n d A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e a n d
leakage (see p a g e 1 9 - 3 0 ) * .
C h e c k f l u i d levels a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s ; c h e c k f o r leaks. If n e c e s s a r y , a d d A T F (see p a g e 14-112), e n g i n e c o o l a n t , b r a k e f l u i d , a n d
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
I n s p e c t e x h a u s t s y s t e m . * Check c a t a l y t i c c o n v e r t e r h e a t s h i e l d , e x h a u s t p i p e , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 9-4).
I n s p e c t f u e l lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s . * Check f o r l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , cracks a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; r e t i g h t e n l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d r e p l a c e
C h e c k all l i g h t s . Check f u n c t i o n o f all i n t e r i o r a n d e x t e r i o r l i g h t s , a n d t h e p o s i t i o n s o f t h e h e a d l i g h t s (see p a g e 2 2 - 9 8 ) * .
I n s p e c t t h e v e h i c l e u n d e r b o d y . Check t h e p a i n t f o r d a m a g e , s c r a t c h e s , s t o n e c h i p p i n g , a n d d e n t s .
1
R e p l a c e air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t .
I n s p e c t a n d a d j u s t d r i v e b e l t . L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k t e n s i o n b y p u s h i n g o n e a c h belt ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e
pulleys:
P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10)
Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r , e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air has h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d
d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s ; also r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . Use H o n d a A T F - Z 1 (ATF).
1
A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s

w a r r a n t i e s . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s be d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d i n t e r v a l t o e n s u r e l o n g - t e r m r e l i a b i l i t y .
* : Refer t o '98-00 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 61S8005)
1
3-
Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions

(1998-2000 Models)
Listed by Maintenance Item
If d r i v e n in n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n s , d o i t e m s w i t h a d o t ( ) .
If d r i v e n in s e v e r e c o n d i t i o n s {see p a g e 3-6) o r n o r m a l l y d r i v e n in C a n a d a , d o i t e m s w i t h a circle ( O ) a n d i t e m s w i t h a d o t ( ) .
a
S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r
c o m e s first.
m i l e s x 1000
k m x 1000
years
3.75
7.5
11.25
15
18.75
22.5
26.25
30
33.75
37.5
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
1/2
1 1/2
21/2
Replace e n g i n e oil
Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles {12,000 km) or 12 months Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles
(6,000 km) or 6 months
Replace e n g i n e oil filter
Normal Conditions: Every other oil change Severe Conditions: Every oil change
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t
R e p l a c e air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t
Inspect valve clearance
A d j u s t o n l y if n o i s y .
Replace spark plugs

Replace t i m i n g belt,
N 0 T E 1
and inspect water p u m p
Inspect and adjust drive belts

I n s p e c t idle s p e e d *
Replace e n g i n e c o o l a n t
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d
I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear b r a k e s
o
o
Replace b r a k e f l u i d
Check parking brake a d j u s t m e n t

Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r
N 0 T E 2
Lubricate locks and hinges

R o t a t e t i r e s (Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d c o n d i t i o n at least o n c e a m o n t h )
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering g e a r b o x , and boots
Inspect s u s p e n s i o n c o m p o n e n t s
Inspect driveshaft b o o t s
I n s p e c t b r a k e h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S )
I n s p e c t all f l u i d l e v e l s a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s
Inspect c o o l i n g s y s t e m hoses and c o n n e c t i o n s
Inspect exhaust s y s t e m *
m
m
o
o
m
m
m
m
o
o
o
Inspect fuel lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s *

Check lights and controls
Inspect vehicle under b o d y
NOTE:
1. If t h e v e h i c l e is r e g u l a r l y d r i v e n in v e r y h o t o r c o l d w e a t h e r , o v e r 110F (43C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 F ( - 29C), replace t h i s belt e v e r y 60,000 m i l e s ;
If n o t , r e p l a c e it at 105,000 m i l e s .
2. Replace t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air has a h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y
a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e ; a l s o r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l .
* A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h a n asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s
3-8
41.25
45
48.75
52.5
56.25
60
63.75
67.5
71.25
75
78.75
82.5
86.25
90
93.75
97.5
101.25
105
108.75
112.5
116.25'
120
66
72
78
84
90
96
102
108
114
120
126
132
138
144
150
156
162
168
175
181
187
193
41/2
61/2
71/2
31/2
51/2
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 7,500 m i l e s (12,000 k m ) o r 12 m o n t h s
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 3,750 m i l e s (6,000 k m ) o r 6 m o n t h s
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y o t h e r oil c h a n g e
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y oil c h a n g e
m
o
o
o
o
o
m
o
o
m
m
o
o
o
o
m
m
o
o
o
o
o
o
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
o
o
o
o
o
m
m
m
m
3-9
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions

(2001 Model)
Do i t e m s in A.
7,500 m i / 12,000 k m /
15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 y e a r
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m /
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s
Do i t e m s in A .
37,500 m i / 60,000 k m /
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d D.
45,000 m i / 7 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 3 y e a r s
Do items in A .
52,500 m i / 84,000 k m /
60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 y e a r s
Do i t e m s in A .
67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m /
75,000 m i / 1 2 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 y e a r s
Do i t e m s in A .
82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s in A , B, C, a n d D.
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s
Do items in A.
97.500 m i / 1 5 6 . 0 0 0 k m /
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s
I n s p e c t v a l v e c l e a r a n c e (cold) (see p a g e 6-13).

Intake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.), E x h a u s t : 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m ( 0 . 0 1 1 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
R e p l a c e s p a r k p l u g s (see p a g e 4-24). U s e N G K (PZFR5F-11) o r D E N S O (PKJ 16CR-L11).

G A P : 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in)
R e p l a c e t i m i n g b e l t (see p a g e 6-19) a n d i n s p e c t w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-9).
C h e c k i d l e s p e e d . S h o u l d b e 6 8 0 50 r p m i n M o r [ E p o s i t i o n (see p a g e 11-68).
Do items in A .
112,500 m i / 1 8 1 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o t h e i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C.
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s
120,000
120,000
3-10
mi/192,000 km/6 years

R e p l a c e t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . U s e H o n d a A T F - Z 1 (ATF) ( s e e p a g e 14-113), t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 90,000 m i l e s (144,000 k m ) or 5 y e a r s
mi/192,000 km/10 years
R e p l a c e c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 6 0 , 0 0 0 m i l e s (100,000 k m ) o r 5 y e a r s .
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, C, a n d D as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l l i s t e d .
A
R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil (see p a g e 8-5). - C a p a c i t y w i t h f i l t e r c h a n g e : 4,4 fl (4.6 U S q t , 3.9 I m p qt)

R o t a t e t i r e s . F o l l o w t h e p a t t e r n s h o w n i n t h e O w n e r ' s M a n u a l Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d c o n d i t i o n .
R e p l a c e e n g i n e oil f i l t e r (see p a g e 8-5).

I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear brakes (see p a g e 19-2).
C h e c k p a d s a n d discs f o r w e a r ( t h i c k n e s s ) , d a m a g e , a n d cracks.
C h e c k c a l i p e r s f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s o f m o u n t b o l t s .
C h e c k p a r k i n g brake a d j u s t m e n t . S h o u l d be f u l l y a p p l i e d w i t h i n 6 t o 9 clicks.
I n s p e c t tie r o d e n d s , s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x , a n d b o o t s (see p a g e 17-12).
C h e c k rack grease a n d s t e e r i n g l i n k a g e .
Check boots for d a m a g e and leaking grease.
C h e c k f l u i d line f o r d a m a g e a n d leaks.
Check bolts for tightness.
I n s p e c t d r i v e s h a f t b o o t s . Check b o o t s f o r cracks a n d b o o t b a n d s f o r t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 1 6 - 3 ) * .
I n s p e c t b r a k e h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) . Check t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r , p r o p o r t i o n i n g c o n t r o l v a l v e , a n d A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e
a n d leakage.
C h e c k all f l u i d levels a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s ; c h e c k f o r leaks. If n e c e s s a r y , a d d A T F (see p a g e 14-112), e n g i n e c o o l a n t , brake f l u i d , a n d
Inspect c o o l i n g s y s t e m hoses a n d connections.
C h e c k f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n .
Check for proper fan operation.
I n s p e c t e x h a u s t s y s t e m * . Check c a t a l y t i c c o n v e r t e r h e a t s h i e l d , e x h a u s t p i p e , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 9-4).
I n s p e c t f u e l lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s * . Check f o r l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , cracks a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; r e t i g h t e n l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d replace
1
R e p l a c e air cleaner e l e m e n t .
I n s p e c t a n d a d j u s t d r i v e belt.
L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k belt d e f l e c t i o n b y p u s h i n g o n it ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e p u l l e y s .
- P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10).
Replace t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace it t w i c e as o f t e n (at 15,000 m i l e i n t e r v a l ) if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y in u r b a n areas t h a t h a v e h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n s o f s o o t in t h e
air f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s .
Replace it w h e n e v e r a i r f l o w f r o m t h e c l i m a t e c o n t r o l s y s t e m is less t h a n n o r m a l .
1
R e p l a c e b r a k e f l u i d e v e r y 3 y e a r s ( I n d e p e n d e n t o f D i s t a n c e ) . U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3. Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r (see p a g e 1 1 000).
A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s

e m i s s i o n s w a r r a n t i e s . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s be d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d i n t e r v a l t o e n s u r e l o n g - t e r m
reliability.
* \ Refer t o '98-01 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 )
3-11
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions

12001 Model)
S e r v i c e a t t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r c o m e s f i r s t U s e t h i s s c h e d u l e if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n M A I N L Y in C a n a d a o r in a n y o f t h e
f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s ; if o n l y O C C A S I O N A L L Y d r i v e n in t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s , u s e t h e N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s s c h e d u l e (see p a g e 3-10).
Severe Driving Conditions
. Less t h a n 5 m i l e s (8 k m ) p e r t r i p o r , in f r e e z i n g t e m p e r a t u r e s , less t h a n 10 m i l e s (16 k m ) p e r t r i p
In e x t r e m e l y ; h o t w e a t h e r (over 90F/32C)
Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving
Trailer t o w i n g
O n m u d d y , dusty, or de-iced roads
D r i v i n g in m o u n t a i n o u s c o n d i t i o n s

3,750 m i / 6,000 k m /
7,500 m i / 12,000 k m /

11,250 m i / 1 8 , 0 0 0 k m /
15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 y e a r
f l Do i t e m s i n A a n d B.

18,750 m i / 30.000 k m /
Do i t e m s in A .
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / 1 1/2 y e a r s :
Replace oil and filter

26,250 m i / 42,000 k m /
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s :

3 3 , 7 5 0 m i / 54,000 k m /
Do items in A.
37,500 m i / 60,000 k m / 2 1/2 y e a r s :
41,250 m i / 66,000 k m /
45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 y e a r s :
Clean air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.

f l D o i t e m s in A , B, a n d D.

48,750 m i / 78,000 k m /
Do i t e m s in A.
5 2 , 5 0 0 m i / 84,000 k m 3 1/2 y e a r s :
56,250 m i / 90,000 k m /
60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 y e a r s :
Replace t i m i n g b e l t (see p a g e 6 -19) a n d i n s p e c t t h e w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-9) if t h e v e h i c l e is r e g u l a r l y d r i v e n in w e a t h e r o v e r 110F

(43C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 F ( - 2 9 C ) ; if n o t , r e p l a c e t h e b e l t s at 105,000 m i l e s .
L J D o i t e m s i n A , B a n d C.
60,000 m i / 9 6 , 0 0 0 k m / 3 y e a r s
f l R e p l a c e t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . U s e H o n d a A T F - Z 1 (ATF) (see p a g e 1 4 - x x ) , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 90,000 m i l e s (144,000 k m ) o r 5 y e a r s .
I ~i R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
63,750 m i / 1 0 2 , 0 0 0 k m /
Do items in A.
67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m 4 1/2 y e a r s :
71,250 m i / 1 1 4 , 0 0 0 k m 75,000mi/120,000 km/5 years:
78,750 m i / 1 2 6 , 0 0 0 k m /
Do items in A.
82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 1/2 y e a r s
86,250 m i / 1 3 8 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s i n A , B, C. a n d D.
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s :

93,750 m i / 1 5 0 , 0 0 0 k m /
Do items in A.
97,500 m i / 1 5 6 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 1/2 y e a r s :
101,250 m i / 1 6 2 , 0 0 0 k m /
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s :
i n s p e c t v a l v e c l e a r a n c e (cold) (see p a g e 6-13)lntake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.) E x h a u s t : 0.28 - 0 . 3 2 m m (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
Replace s p a r k p l u g s . U s e N G K (PZFR5F-11) o r D E N S O (PKJ16CR-L11). G a p : 1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in) (see p a g e 4-24).
R e p l a c e t i m i n g b e l t (see p a g e 6-19), a n d i n s p e c t t h e w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-9) o n l y if t h e belts w a s n o t r e p l a c e d at 60,000 m i l e s .
Check i d l e s p e e d (see p a g e 11-68): 6 8 0 5 0 r p m

f ] D o i t e m s in A a n d B.
108,750 m i / 1 7 4 , 0 0 0 k m /
Do i t e m s in A.
112,500 m i / 1 8 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 1/2 y e a r s :
116,250 m i / 1 8 6 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s A , B, a n d C.
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s :
120,000 m i / 2 0 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s
Replace e n g i n e c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.

C a p a c i t y : 5.6 ft (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t ) , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 60,000 m i l e s (100,000 k m ) o r 5 y e a r s .
Replace t i m i n g b e l t (see p a g e 6-19), a n d i n s p e c t t h e w a t e r p u m p (see p a g e 10-9) o n l y if t h e belts w a s n o t r e p l a c e d at 60,000 m i l e s .
3-12
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, C, a n d D as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l ,
A
Replace e n g i n e oil a n d f i l t e r (see p a g e 8-5). C a p a c i t y w i t h filter c h a n g e : 4.4 fl (4.6 U S q t , 3.9 I m p qt)

Inspect f r o n t a n d rear b r a k e s , e v e r y 6 m o n t h s if v e h i c l e is d r i v e n less t h a n 7,500 m i l e p e r y e a r (see p a g e 19-2).
Check p a d s a n d d i s c s f o r w e a r ( t h i c k n e s s ) , d a m a g e , a n d cracks.
Check c a l i p e r s f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s o f m o u n t b o l t s .
Rotate t i r e s , if t h e v e h i c l e h a s b e e n d r i v e n t h e d i s t a n c e listed. F o l l o w t h e p a t t e r n s h o w n in t h e O w n e r ' s M a n u a l . (Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d
condition.)
Inspect t i e r o d e n d s , s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x , a n d b o o t s (see page 17-12).
Check rack g r e a s e a n d s t e e r i n g l i n k a g e .
Check b o o t s f o r d a m a g e a n d l e a k i n g g r e a s e .
Check f l u i d lines f o r d a m a g e a n d leaks.
Inspect s u s p e n s i o n c o m p o n e n t s .
Check b o l t s f o r t i g h t n e s s .
Inspect d r i v e s h a f t b o o t s . Check b o o t s f o r cracks a n d b o o t b a n d s f o r t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 1 6 - 3 ) * .
1
Check p a r k i n g b r a k e a d j u s t m e n t . S h o u l d be f u l l y a p p l i e d w i t h i n 6 t o 9 clicks.
L u b r i c a t e d o o r locks a n d h i n g e s w i t h H o n d a w h i t e l i t h i u m g r e a s e .
Inspect b r a k e h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) . Check t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r , p r o p o r t i o n i n g c o n t r o l v a l v e , a n d A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e a n d
leakage (see p a g e 1 9 - 3 0 ) * .
Check f l u i d levels a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s ; c h e c k f o r leaks. If n e c e s s a r y , a d d A T F (see p a g e 14-112), e n g i n e c o o l a n t , brake f l u i d , a n d
Inspect c o o l i n g s y s t e m h o s e s a n d c o n n e c t i o n s .
Inspect e x h a u s t s y s t e m . * C h e c k c a t a l y t i c c o n v e r t e r heat s h i e l d , e x h a u s t p i p e , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 9-4).
Inspect f u e l lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s . * C h e c k f o r l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , cracks a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; r e t i g h t e n l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d r e p l a c e
d a m a g e d p a r t s (see p a g e 11-73).
Check all l i g h t s . C h e c k f u n c t i o n o f all i n t e r i o r a n d e x t e r i o r l i g h t s , a n d t h e p o s i t i o n s o f t h e h e a d l i g h t s (see p a g e 2 2 - 9 8 ) * .
Inspect t h e v e h i c l e u n d e r b o d y . C h e c k t h e p a i n t f o r d a m a g e , s c r a t c h e s , s t o n e c h i p p i n g , a n d d e n t s .
1
Replace air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t .
Inspect a n d a d j u s t d r i v e belt. L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k t e n s i o n b y p u s h i n g o n e a c h belt ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e
pulleys:
P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10)
Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r , e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air has h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d
d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s ; a l s o r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . Use G e n u i n e H o n d a A T F .
1
Replace b r a k e f l u i d e v e r y 3 y e a r s ( I n d e p e n d e n t o f D i s t a n c e ) . U s e G e n u i n e D O T 3. Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r , (see p a g e 11-000).
A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s

* : Refer t o '98-01 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 )
1
3-13
Maintenance Schedule for Normal and Severe Conditions

(2001 Model)
Listed by Maintenance item
If d r i v e n i n n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n s , d o i t e m s w i t h a d o t < ) .
If d r i v e n i n s e v e r e c o n d i t i o n s (see p a g e 3-6) o r n o r m a l l y d r i v e n i n C a n a d a , d o i t e m s w i t h a c i r c l e (O)
S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r
c o m e s first.
m i l e s x 1000
k m x 1000
years
Replace e n g i n e oil
Replace e n g i n e o i l f i l t e r
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t
Replace air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t
Inspect valve clearance
Replace s p a r k p l u g s
Replace t i m i n q b e l t ,
and inspect water p u m p
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Insoect idle s p e e d *
Replace e n g i n e c o o l a n t
For engine coolant: Normal and Severe Conditions: Every 120,000 miles
(192,000 km) or 10 years, thereafter every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years.
and items with a dot ( # ) .
3.75
6
_
7.5
11.25
15
18.75
22.5
26.25
12
18
24
30
36
42
_
1/2
1
1 1/2
Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6
Normal Conditions: Every other oil change
Severe Conditions: Every oil change
o
A d j ust o n l y if n o i s y .
N 0 T E 1
30
33.75
54
48
2
12 months
months
37.5
60
2 1/2
Normal and Severe Conditions: Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or

10 years, thereafter every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Normal Condition: Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years,

thereafter every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years
Severe Condition: Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years,
thereafter every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d
I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear b r a k e s
Replace brake f l u i d
Check parkinq brake a d j u s t m e n t
R e p l a c e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r
Lubricate locks a n d h i n g e s
R o t a t e t i r e s (Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d c o n d i t i o n at least o n c e a m o n t h )
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering g e a r b o x , a n d boots
Inspect suspension c o m p o n e n t s
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses a n d lines (including A B S )
I n s p e c t all f l u i d l e v e l s a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s
Inspect c o o l i n q s y s t e m hoses a n d c o n n e c t i o n s
Inspect exhaust s y s t e m *
Inspect fuel lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s *
Check liqhts and controls
Inspect vehicle under b o d y
N 0 T E 2
O
o
o
m
m
E v e r y 3 y e a r s ( i n d e p e n d e n t of d i s t a n c e !
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
NOTE:
1. If t h e v e h i c l e is r e g u l a r l y d r i v e n in v e r y h o t o r c o l d w e a t h e r , o v e r 110F (43C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 F ( ~ 2 9 C ) , r e p l a c e t h i s b e l t e v e r y 60,000 m i l e s ;
If n o t , r e p l a c e it at 105,000 m i l e s .
2. Replace t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air h a s a h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y
a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e ; a l s o r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l .
* A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h a n asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s
w a r r a n t i e s . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s b e d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d i n t e r v a l t o e n s u r e l o n g - t e r m r e l i a b i l i t y .
3-14
52.5
56.25
60
63.75
67.5
71.25
45
48.75
75
78.75
72
78
90
96
102
108
84
114
120
126
3
31/2
4
41/2
5
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 7,500 m i l e s (12,000 k m ) o r 12 m o n t h s
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 3,750 m i l e s (6,000 k m ) or 6 m o n t h s
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y o t h e r oil c h a n g e
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y oil c h a n g e
41.25
66
82.5
86.25
132 ~ 138
51/2
90
144
6
93.75
150
97.5
156
61/2
o
101.25
162
105
168
7
108.75
175
112.5
181
71/2
N o r m a l a n d S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 120,000 m i l e s (192,000 k m ) or 10 y e a r s , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 60,000 m i l e s (96,000 k m ) or 5 y e a r s
m
m
IOi
o
o
o
o
o
o
IO!
o
o
o
o
o
o
I O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
120
193
8
::
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 120,000 m i l e s (192,000 k m ) or 6 y e a r s , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 90,000 m i l e s (144,000 k m ) or 5 y e a r s

S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 60,000 m i l e s (96,000 k m ) or 3 y e a r s , t h e r e a f t e r e v e r y 30,000 m i l e s (48,000 k m ) or 2 y e a r s
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
I O
I
Q
Every 3 y e a r s ( i n d e p e n d e n t o f d i s t a n c e )
187
116.25
L o
o
o
c
0
o
Q
0
0
o
o
o
3-15
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special T o o l s
4-2
Starting System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit Diagram
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting
Starter S o l e n o i d T e s t
Starter Performance T e s t
Starter Replacement
Starter Overhaul
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram
Ignition Timing Inspection
Distributor Replacement
Distributor D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y
ICM (Ignition Control Module) Input T e s t
Ignition Coil T e s t
Ignition Wire Inspection and Test
Ignition Coil Troubleshooting
Spark Plug Inspection/Replacement
4-14
4-16
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-24
Charging System
Circuit Diagram
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting
Alternator-Compressor Belt
Inspection and Replacement
Alternator R e p l a c e m e n t
.
A u t o - T e n s i o n e r Inspection
Alternator Overhaul
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-31
4-31
4-33
4-35
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
Cruise Control C o m m u n i c a t i o n Circuit
Troubleshooting
Control Unit Input T e s t
Main S w i t c h T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement
Brake Pedal Position S w i t c h T e s t
Actuator S o l e n o i d T e s t
Actuator T e s t
Actuator/Solenoid/Cable Replacement
Actuator Cable Adjustment
4-41
4-42
4-43
4-45
4-46
4-48
4-49
4-50
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-54
Engine Mount Control System

Circuit Diagram
Troubleshooting
4-55
4-56
4-57
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. No.
Tool Number
A973X-041-XXXXX
07746-0010400
07749-0010000
4-2
Description
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg
Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 m m
Driver
Qty
1
1
1
(D
Starting System
Component Location Index
BATTERY
STARTER
S t a r t e r C i r c u i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 4-5
S o l e n o i d T e s t p a g e 4-6
P e r f o r m a n c e T e s t , p a g e 4-7
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 4-8
O v e r h a u l , p a g e 4-9
4^3
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION S W I T C H
BATTERY
No.41
BLK
(100A)
No.42 (50A)
^BAT"
WHT
ST,
BLK/WHT
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
No.13(7.5A)
BLK/RED
BLU/ORN
BLU/WHT
PCM
TRANSMISSION
RANGE
PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY
SWITCH
/Closed:
\
I B and E l position/
BLK/WHT
BLK
JCL
G101
4-4
ENGINE
Starter Circyit Troubleshooting

NOTE:
Air temperature must be between 59 and 100F (15
and 38C) during this procedure.
After this test, or any subsequent repair, reset the
PCM to clear any Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC);
refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page
11-3).
4. Check the battery condition. Check electrical

connections at the battery and the starter for
looseness and corrosion. Then check the starter
again.
Did the starter
crank the
engine?
Y E S T h e starting system is O K . B
Recommended Procedure:
Use a starter system tester.
Connect and operate the equipment in accordance
w i t h the manufacturer's instructions.
Alternate Procedure
N O - G o to step 5.
5. Make sure the transmission is in neutral, then
disconnect the BLK/WHT w i r e (A) f r o m the starter
solenoid (B). Connect a jumper w i r e f r o m the
battery positive terminal to the solenoid terminal.
1. Hook up the f o l l o w i n g equipment:

Ammeter, 0 - 4 0 0 A
Voltmeter, 0 - 2 0 V (accurate w i t h i n 0.1 volt)
Tachometer, 0 - 1 2 0 0 rpm
/I
A
v
o
Did the starter crank the
engine?
Y E S - G o to step 6.
NO Remove the starter and diagnose its internal
problems.
2. Remove the No. 46 (15 A) fuse f r o m the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
3. With the shift lever in HQ or E, turn the ignition
switch to start (III).
Did the starter
crank the engine
Y E S - The starting system is OK
normally?
NO - If the starter w o n ' t crank at all, go to step 4. If

it cranks the engine erratically or too slowly, go to
step 7. If it w o n ' t disengage f r o m the torque
converter ring gear when y o u release the key,
check for the f o l l o w i n g until y o u find the cause.
Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction
Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch.
6. Check the following items in the order listed until

y o u find the open circuit.
Check the BLK/WHT wire and connectors
between the starter cut relay and the ignition
switch, and between the starter cut relay and the
starter.
Check the ignition switch, refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page 22-55).
Check the transmission range switch and
connector (see page 14-141).
(cont'd)
4-5
Starting System
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S

terminal (A) and the armature housing (ground).
There should be continuity.
7. Check engine speed during cranking.

Is engine speed
above
Starter Solenoid Test
100 rpm?
If there is continuity, go to step 2.

If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
IMO Remove and disassemble the starter, and

Excessively w o r n starter brushes

Open circuit in c o m m u t a t o r brushes
Dirty or damaged helical spline or drive gear
Faulty drive gear clutch
8. Check the cranking voltage and current draw.

Is cranking voltage no less than 8.5 volts,
current draw no more than 380 amps?
and
NO Remove and disassemble the starter, and
Open circuit in starter armature c o m m u t a t o r
segments
Starter armature dragging
Shorted armature w i n d i n g
Excessive drag in engine
9. Remove the starter and inspect its drive gear and
the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace
any damaged parts.
4-6
2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S

and M terminals (B). There should be continuity.
If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.
If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
ENGINE
Starter Performance Test

1. Disconnect the wires f r o m the S terminal (A) and
the M terminal (B).
2. Make a connection as described below using as
heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to
the wire used for the vehicle).
Disconnect the battery also f r o m the body. If the

pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly.
To avoid damaging the starter, do not leave the
battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
3. Connect the battery as s h o w n . If the starter pinion

pops out, it is w o r k i n g properly. To avoid damaging
the starter, do not leave the battery connected for
more than 10 seconds.
12 V
BATTERY
6. Clamp the starter f i r m l y in a vise.

7. Connect the starter to the battery as described in
the diagram below, and confirm that the motor
starts and keeps rotating.
Disconnect the battery f r o m the M terminal. If the

pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil is w o r k i n g
properly. To avoid damaging the starter, do not
leave the battery connected for more than 10
seconds.
EL
12 V
BATTERY
If the electric current and motor speed meet the

specifications w h e n the battery voltage is at 11.5 V,
the starter is w o r k i n g properly.
Specifications:
1.6 kw
80 A or less (Electric current),

2,600 rpm or more (Motor-speed)
4-7
Starting System
Starter Replacement
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write d o w n the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure

the crimped side of the ring terminal (A) is facing
out.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then

disconnect the positive cable, and w a i t at least 3
minutes.
3. Remove the ATF cooler hose f r o m the clamp on the
starter motor.
4. Disconnect the starter cable (A) f r o m the B terminal
on the solenoid, then disconnect the BLK/WHT w i r e
(B) f r o m the S terminal.
C
10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
7. Connect the battery positive cable and negative

cable to the battery.
8. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
the customer's radio station presets.
12 x 1.25 m m
64 N m
(6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
5. Remove the 2 bolts (C) holding the starter, then

remove the starter.
4-8
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly
END COVER
GEAR HOUSING
COVER
(cont'd)
4-9
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-8).
2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning
of this procedure.
Armature Inspection and Test
5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is

below the service limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Diameter
Standard (New): 28.0-28.1 mm (1.102-1.106 in.)
Service Limit:
27.5 mm (1.083 in.)
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage due t o

contact w i t h the permanent magnet. If there is wear
or damage, replace the armature.
6. Measure the commutator runout.
4. Check c o m m u t a t o r (A) surface. If the surface is

dirty or burnt, resurface w i t h emery cloth or a lathe
w i t h i n the f o l l o w i n g specifications, or recondition
w i t h # 500 or # 600 sandpaper (B).
If the commutator runout is within the service

limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
brass chips between the segments.
If the commutator runout is not within the service
limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit:
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
4-10
Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B),
undercut the mica w i t h a hacksaw blade to the
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between
the commutator segments. The undercut should
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D).
Commutator Mica Depth
Standard (New): 0 . 4 0 . 5 mm {0.016
Service Limit:
0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
ENGINE
9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B).

Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core.
If the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
the armature.
0.020 in.)
8. Check for continuity between the segments of the

commutator. If an open circuit exists between any
segments, replace the armature.
10. Check with an ohmmeter that no continuity exists

between the commutator (A) and armature coil
core <B), and between the commutator and
armature shaft (C). If continuity exists, replace the
armature.
(cont'd)
4-11
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Starter Brush Inspection
Starter Brush Holder Test
1 1 . Measure the brush length. If it is not w i t h i n the

service l i m i t replace the brush holder assembly.
12. Check that there is no continuity between the ( + )

brush holder (A) and ( ) brush holder (B). If there
is continuity, replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length
Standard (New): 1 5 . 8 1 6 . 2 mm (0.62
Service Limit:
11.0 mm (0.43 in.)
0.64 in.)
13. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring
the brush into contact w i t h the commutator, then
attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure
the spring tension at the m o m e n t the spring lifts off
the brush.
Spring Tension:
1 5 . 7 - 1 7 . 7 N ( 1 . 6 - 1 . 8 kgf, 3 . 5 3 3 . 9 7 ibf)
4-12
14. Pry back each brush spring w i t h a screwdriver, then

position the brush about halfway out of its holder,
and release the spring to hold it there.
Overrunning Clutch Inspection

17. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft.
Replace it if it does not slide smoothly.
18. Rotate the overrunning clutch (A) both ways. If it
does not lock in either direction or it locks in both
directions, replace it.
A
15. Install the armature in the housing. Next, pry back

each brush spring again, and push the brush d o w n
until it seats against the commutator, then release
the spring against the end of the brush.
NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of # 500 or
# 600 sandpaper, w i t h the grit side up, between the
commutator and each brush, and smoothly rotate
the armature. The contact surface of the brushes
w i l l be sanded to the same contour as the
commutator.
19. If the starter drive gear (B) is w o r n or damaged,

replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear
is not available separately.
Check the condition of the torque converter ring
gear if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged.
16. Install the starter end cover (A) to retain the brush
holder (B).
20. Reassemble the starter in reverse order of

disassembly.
4-13
Ignition System
'98-99 models:
IGNITION W I R E S
I n s p e c t i o n a n d T e s t p a g e 4-22
DISTRIBUTOR
O v e r h a u l , p a g e 4-20
Ignition C o n t r o l M o d u l e ( I C M ) Input T e s t , p a g e 4-21
Ignition T i m i n g I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 4-18
4-14
"00-01 models:
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram
'98-99 models:
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
No. 41 (100 A)
IGNITION S W I T C H
No. 42 (50 A)
"
BLK/YEL
) No. 6
(15 A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION C O I L
BLU
Is
DISTRIBUTOR
BLK/YEL
YEL/GRN
I,
IGNITION C O N T R O L
M O D U L E (ICM)
[Has built-in
\
I noise condenser J
IGNITION W I R E S
4-16
I,
ENGINE
'00-01 models:
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No.41 (100A)
No.42(50A)
BAT
K>
0 -
Of
IG1
BLK/YEL
DRIVER'S
No. 11
(15A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BLK/YEL
BRN/WHT
BLK/RED
BRN
WHT/BLU
BLU/RED
I.
I.
I.
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
II
YEL/GRN
ICM
ICM
ICM
IGNITION
COILS
! 2
No.6
BLK
SPARK
PLUGS
SL
G101
ICM : Ignition Control Module
4-17
Ignition System
Ignition Tinning Inspection
1. Check the idle speed, and adjust it if necessary (see
page 11-86).
2. Connect the Honda PGM tester to the Data Link
Connector (DLC), and f o l l o w the tester's prompts in
the " S C S " menu (see the Honda PGM Tester
Operator's Manual).
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 r p m w i t h
no load, shift lever in M or GB, until the radiator fan
comes on, then let it idle.
5. Point the light toward the pointer (A) on the t i m i n g

belt cover. Check the ignition t i m i n g under a no
load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear
w i n d o w defogger, and air conditioner are not
operating. If the ignition t i m i n g differs f r o m the
specification below, replace the PCM; refer to
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3).
Ignition Timing:
1 0 2 BTDC (RED mark (B)) during idling in K or
4. Connect the t i m i n g light to the No. 1 ignition w i r e

(ignition coil w i r e for '00-01 models).
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM tester.
4-18
Distributor Replacement - '98-99 models

Removal
5. Connect the ignition wires to the distributor cap as

shown.
1. Disconnect the connector(A) f r o m the distributor.
No.
No. 1
6. Connect the 3P connector to the distributor.
B
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
2. Disconnect the ignition wires f r o m the distributor

cap.
3. Remove the distributor mounting bolts (B) then
remove the distributor (C) f r o m the cylinder head.
Installation
1. Bring the No. 1 piston to compression stroke TDC.
2. Coat a new O-ring (D) w i t h engine oil, then install it.
3. Slip the distributor into position.
NOTE: The lug on the end of the distributor and its
mating grooves in the camshaft end (E) are both
offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the
distributor 180 out of time.
4. Tighten the mounting bolts (B).
4-19
ignition System
Distributor Disassembly/Reassembly - '98-99 modeis
4-20
ICM (Ignition Control Module) Input
; - 98-99 models
NOTE:
If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on,
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index; refer to
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual.
Perform an input test for the ignition control module
(ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the
ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage

between the No. 2 terminal and body ground.
There should be battery voltage.
1. Disconnect the 3P connector f r o m the distributor.
If there is no battery voltage, check:

- ignition coil.
- BLK/YEL wire between the ICM and ignition
coil.
If there is battery voltage, go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage
between the No. 3 terminal and body ground.
If
If
there is no battery voltage, check:

ignition coil.
BLU wire between the ICM and ignition coil.
there is battery voltage, go to step 4.
4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P) and check for

continuity on the No. 1 terminal between the ICM
connector terminal No. 1 (YEL/GRN) and PCM
connector terminal B13. There should be continuity.
5. Check for continuity on the No. 1 terminal to body
ground. There should be no continuity. If there is
continuity (short to ground), the ICM is probably
damaged.
W i r e side of
female terminals
6. Reconnect PCM connector B (25P) and the

distributor 3P connector.
7. If all the tests are normal, replace the ICM.
4-21
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Test - '98-99 models
Ignition Wire Inspection and

Test - '98-99 models
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2. Disconnect the 3P connector and the ignition coil
wire.
1. Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on

the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might
break them inside.
2. Check the condition of the ignition wire terminals. If
any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken
or distorted, replace the ignition wire.
3. Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance between

the terminals. Replace the coil if the resistance is
not within specifications.
NOTE: Resistance will vary with the coil
temperature; specifications are at 68F (20C).
Primary Winding Resistance
(Between the terminals 1 and 3): 0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 2 Q
corroded, or bent
terminals.
3. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance.

Ignition Wire Resistance:
25 kQ max. at 68F (20C)
Secondary Winding Resistance

(Between terminal 2 and
secondary winding terminal): 17.120.3 kQ
2
I
4-22
4. If resistance exceeds 25 kQ, replace the ignition

wire.
Ignition Coil Troubleshooting - '00-01 models

NOTE: Perform an ignition coil test after finishing the
fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel
and emissions system.
1. Remove the ignition coil cover.
6. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P).

7. Check for continuity between the body g r o u n d and
PCM connector terminals C3, C4, C12, C13, C14,
and/or C23 individually.
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (31P)
2. Disconnect the 6 ignition coil 3P connectors.
IGP L S 3 ( W H T / B L U )
3. Measure the voltage at the No. 3 terminal of each

ignition coil 3P connector with the ignition switch
ON (II).
IGP L S I ( Y E L / G R N )
IGP L S 5
(BLK/RED)
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
23
Is there battery
IGP L S 6
(BRN/
WHT)
1G
(BLK/YEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
voltage?
30
2627
IGP L S 4
(BRN)
Is there
IGP LS2
(BLU/
RED)
continuity?
Y E S Repair short in the wire between ignition coil

and PCM.B
NO - G o t o step 8.
N O - R e p a i r open in the wire between ignition coil
and No. 1 1 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay b o x . B
8. Connect PCM connector C (31P).

9. Measure the voltage at the No. 1 terminal of each
ignition coil 3P connector w i t h the ignition switch to
start (III).
5. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of

each ignition coil 3P connector and body ground.
IGNITION C O I L 3P C O N N E C T O R
IGP
IGP
IGP
IGP
, IGP
IGP
GND
(BLK)
LSI
LS2
LS3
LS4
LS5
LS6
(YEL/GRN)
(BLU/RED)
(WHT/BLU)
(BRN)
(BLK/RED)
(BRN/WHT)
W i r e side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
Is there approx. 0.5 V?

Is there
continuity?
YES
Replace the ignition coil.
Y E S - Go to step 6.
NO - Repair open in the wire between ignition coil
and body ground (G10D.B
NO Repair open in the wire between ignition coil

and PCM.B
4-23
Ignition System
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator.
Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by:
Advanced ignition t i m i n g
Loose spark plug
Plug heat range too hot
Insufficient cooling
2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A);

replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
specification.
Electrode Gap:
Standard (New): 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039
Service Limit:
1.3 mm (0.05 in.)
0.043 in.)
Fouled plug may be caused by:

Retarded ignition t i m i n g
Oil in combustion chamber
Incorrect spark plug gap
Plug heat range too cold
Excessive idling/low speed running
Clogged air cleaner element
Deteriorated ignition coil
W o r n or deformed
electrodes
Damaged
gasket
Cracked
insulator
Improper gap
Oil-fouling
> Carbon deposits
Cracked center
electrode insulator
3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the

center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark
plugs listed below.
Spark Plugs:
NGK:
PZFR5F-11
DENSO: PKJ16CR-L11
4. A p p l y a small quantity of anti-seize compound to

the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head finger-tight. Torque them to 18 N m
(1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibfft).
4-24
Charging System
CHARGING S Y S T E M INDICATOR
(In t h e g a u g e a s s e m b l y )
T e s t , page 22-29
[ H a s built-in E L E C T R I C A L L O A D
[ D E T E C T O R (ELD) UNIT
4-25
Charging System
Circuit Diagram
U N D E R - H O O D FUSE/RELAY B O X
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
PCM
WHT/RED
'00-01 models
4-26
ENGINE
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting

If the charging system indicator does not come on or
does not go off, or the battery is dead or low, test the
f o l l o w i n g items in the order listed below:
Battery (see page 22-30)
Charging system indicator
Alternator/regulator circuit
Alternator control system
9. Ground the No. 3 terminal of the 4P connector.

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
ALTERNATOR
4P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of
female terminals
Charging System Indicator Test

1. Check the B terminal, that the 4P connector and
under-hood fuse/relay box terminals are securely
tightened.
Are they securely
L (WHT/BLU)
tightened?
Does the charging
system
indicator
come on?
NOTighten or reconnect.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the charging
system
indicator
come on?
10. Measure the voltage at the No. 1 terminal of the

alternator 4P connector with the ignition switch ON
(ID.
3. Start the engine.
Does the charging
NO Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check for a

b l o w n No. 6 (15 A) fuse and a blown charging
system light bulb. If the fuse and bulb are OK,
repair the open in the WHT/BLU wire.
system
indicator
go
off?
ALTERNATOR
Y E S Charging system indicator circuit is OKM

NO
Go to step 4.
IG
(BLK/YEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
5. Disconnect the 4P connector f r o m the alternator.

Does the charging
system
indicator
come on?
Y E S T u r n the ignition switch OFF, and repair the

short in the WHT/BLU w i r e .
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S Replace the alternator
NO -Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the

alternator and the under-dash driver's fuse relay
box.
8. Disconnect the 4P connector f r o m the alternator.
(cont'd)
4-27
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test'98-99
models
1. Be sure the battery is sufficiently charged (see page
22-30).
9. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 r p m , and hold it

there.
Is there voltage less than 12.0 V?
Y E S Replace the alternator.
2 . Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and t u r n

the selector switch to position 1 (starting).
LOAD ADJUSTER
( C A R B O N PILE)
FULL FIELD T E S T E R
LEAD (BLU)
^
. V O L T M E T E R
NEGATIVE
L E A D (BLK)
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE
L E A D (RED)
FIELD
SELECTOR
NEGATIVE TESTER
C A B L E (BLK)
POSITIVE TESTER
C A B L E (RED)
INDUCTIVE
PICK-UP (GRN)
INDUCTIVE PICK-UP
B TERMINAL WIRE
3. Shift to park or neutral, and start the engine. Hold

the engine at 3,000 r p m , w i t h no load until the
radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
there.
Is there voltage over
NO
16.0 V?
Replace the alternator.

G o t o step 5.
5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine

idle.
6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the
selector switch to position 2 (charging).
7. Remove the inductive pick-up, and zero the
ammeter.
8. Place the inductive pick-up over the B terminal w i r e
of the alternator so that the arrow points away f r o m
the alternator.
4-28
10. A p p l y a load w i t h the VAT-40 until the battery

voltage drops to between 12-13.5 V.
Is the amperage
75 A or
more?
Y E S T h e charging system is O K . B
N O - Replace the alternator
VOLT
SELECTOR
YES
NO - G o to step 10.
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test '00-01

models
1. Be sure the battery is sufficiently charged (see page
22-30).
2. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn
the selector switch to position 1 (starting).

there.
Is there voltage less than 13.5 V?
Y E S Repair the alternator components (see page
4-35).
N O G o to step 10.
LOAD ADJUSTER
( C A R B O N PILE)
F U L L FIELD TESTER
LEAD (BLU)
t
^-VOLTMETER
NEGATIVE
L E A D (BLK)
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE
L E A D (RED)
VOLT
SELECTOR
Is the amperage
TEST SELECTOR
SWITCH
NEGATIVE TESTER
CABLE (BLK)
POSITIVE TESTER
C A B L E (RED)
INDUCTIVE
PICK-UP (GRN)
INDUCTIVE PICK-UP
75 A or
more?
Y E S The charging system is OK

NO
FIELD
SELECTOR
B TERMINAL
WIRE
10. Apply a load w i t h the VAT-40 until the battery

voltage drops to between 12-13.5 V.
Go to step 11.
11. With the engine speed still at 2,000 r p m , full-field

the alternator Attach the probe to the VAT-40 fullfield test lead, and insert the probe into the full field
sccess hold at the back of the alternator. Switch the
field selector to the " A (Ground)" position
momentarily, and check the amperage reading.
Because voltage w i l l rise will rise quickly w h e n the
alternator is full-fielded, do not allow the voltage to
exceed 18 V: it may damage the electrical system.
3. Shift to park or neutral, and start the engine. Hold

the engine at 3,000 r p m , w i t h no load until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
REGULATOR
(Located inside
the end cover)

there.
Is there voltage over 15.1 V?
Y E S - Repair the voltage regulator
5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine
idle.
END
COVER
Is the alternator
F U L L FIELD
ACCESS HOLE
out put 75 A or more ?
6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the

selector switch to position 2 (charging).
Y E S Replace the voltage regulator.
7. Remove the inductive pick-up, and zero the

ammeter.
NO Repair the alternator components (see page

4-35).
8. Place the inductive pick-up over the B terminal wire

of the alternator so that the arrow points away f r o m
the alternator.
(cont'd)
4-29
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Alternator Control System Test
7. Check for continuity between the PCM connector

terminal C2 and body ground.
1. Check for proper operation of the ELD by

confirming with the MIL.
ALTC (WHT/GRN)
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the alternator.

3. Start the engine and turn the headlights (high
beam) ON.
12 13 14
4. Measure voltage between the 4P connector

terminal No. 2 and the positive terminal of the
battery.
23
25
26 27 28
10
16 17 18 19 20 21
29 30
/
/
Wire s i d e of female terminals
BATTERY
Is there
continuity?
YESRepair short in the wire between the

alternator and PCM.
C (WHT/GRN)
W i r e side of
female terminals
ALTERNATOR
NO Substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck;

refer to the '98-'01 Accord Service Manual. If
prescribed voltage is now available, replace the
original PCM.
8. Turn the headlight and ignition switch OFF.
Is there 1 V or
less?
9. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P).

terminal C2 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No. 2.
5. Turn the headlight and ignition switch OFF.
ALTC (WHT/GRN)
C (WHT/GRN)
6. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P).
12 13 14
23
25
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
29 30
10
/
/
rf
3
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
YESTest the alternator/regulator.

NORepair open in the wire between the
alternator and PCM.
4-30
4J
ALTERNATOR
Alternator-compressor Belt
Inspection and Replacement
1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damaged. If the belt
is cracked or damaged, replace it.
2. Check that the pointer (A) on the auto-tensioner
housing is not beyond the edge of the indicator rib
(B) on the tensioner base.
ENGINE
Alternator Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then
disconnect the positive cable.
3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tension f r o m
the alternator belt (B), and remove the alternator
belt.
3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tensioner

f r o m the alternator belt (B), and remove the
alternator belt.
4. Install the new belt in reverse order of removal.
(cont'd)
4-31
Charging System
Alternator Replacement (cont'd)
4. Disconnect the condenser fan motor connector (A)
f r o m the condenser fan shroud.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)
7. Remove the mount bolt (A) and alternator bracket

m o u n t i n g bolt (B), then remove the harness clamp
(C) f r o m the alternator bracket.
6 x 1.0 m m
7.2 I b f f t )
5. Remove the condenser fan/shroud assembly (B).

6. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and BLK wire (B)
f r o m the alternator.
10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

'98-99 m o d e l s
6 x 1.0 m m
7.8 N m (0.8 k g f - m , 5.8 I b f f t )
'00-01 m o d e l s
8 x 1.25 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
4-32
ENGINE
Auto-tensioner Inspection/Replacement
1. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's
pointer (A), start the engine, then check the position
of the pointer again. If the position changes, go to
step 5.
Check if the auto-tensioner (A) moves smoothly

and check for abnormal noise w h e n the pulley is
turned counterclockwise w i t h the designated tool. If
the auto-tensioner does not move smoothly or if
the there is abnormal noise. Replace the autotensioner. Do not move the auto-tensioner beyond
its limit.
2. Check for abnormal noise f r o m the tensioner pulley.

If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner
pulley.
3. Stop the engine, then remove the alternator belt
(see page 4-31).
5. Remove the auto-tensioner.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f . m , 8.7 Ibf ft)
(conf d)
4-33
Charging System
Auto-tensioner Inspection/Replacement (cont'd)
6. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using 2 bolts (6
m m diameter) (B) and vise (C) in a vise as s h o w n .
Do not clamp the auto-tensioner itself.
8. If necessary, remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand

threads), and replace the tensioner pully (B).
A
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
7. Attach a torque wrench (A) to the pulley bolt.

Measure the torque w h e n the tensioner is turned
counterclockwise. If the torque is less than
specified value, replace the auto tensioner.
23 N m (2.3 kgf-m, 17 Ibfft)
4-34
Alternator Overhaul - '00-01 models

Exploded View
SPACER RING
END COVER
DUST SEAL
(cont'd)
4-35
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul - "00-01 models (cont'd)
Special Tools Required
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400
5. Remove the washer nut (A) and insulator (B) f r o m

the " B " terminal, then remove the end cover (C)
and dust seal (D).
NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed d u r i n g

this procedure.
1. Test the alternator and regulator before y o u
remove t h e m (see step 1 on page 4-27).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-31).
3. If the f r o n t bearing needs replacing, remove the
pulley locknut w i t h a 10 m m wrench (A) and a 22
m m wrench (B). If necessary, use an impact w r e n c h .
6. Remove the brush holder.
4. Remove the 3 flange nuts (A) and the screw (B)

f r o m the alternator, then remove the plate terminal
(C).
4-36
(cont'd)
4-37
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul - "00-01 models (cont'd)
11. (If you are not replacing the f r o n t bearing and/or
rear bearing, go to step 18). Remove the rotor f r o m
the stator drive end housing.
14. W i t h a hammer and commercially available tools

s h o w n , install a new rear bearing in the rotor shaft.
12. Inspect the rotor shaft for galling, and inspect the
bearing journal surface in the stator housing for
seizure marks.
15. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
If either the rotor or stator housing is damaged,

replace the alternator.
If both the rotor and the stator housing are OK,
go to step 13.
13. Remove the rear bearing using a puller as s h o w n .
4-38
16. Support the stator housing in a vise, and drive out

the front bearing with a brass drift (A) and hammer.
Rectifier Test
18. Check for continuity in each direction, between the
B terminal (A) and P terminals (B), and between the
E terminal (C) and P terminals (B) of each diode pair.
All diodes should have continuity in only one
direction. Because the rectifier diodes are designed
to allow current to pass in one direction, and the
rectifier is made up of 8 diodes (4 pairs), you must
test each diode in both directions for continuity
w i t h an ohmmeter that has diode checking
capability: a total of 16 checks.
If any diode failed, replace the rectifier assembly.
(Diodes are not available separately.)
If all the diodes are OK, go to step 19.
17. With a hammer and the special tools, install a new

front bearing in the stator housing.
07749-0010000
B'i
07746-0010400
Ak
Ak
Ak
Bi
J
J
k
Ai
Ak
(cont'd)
4-39
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul - '00-01 models (cont'd)
Alternator Brush Inspection
Stator Test
19. Measure the length of both brushes (A) w i t h a

vernier caliper (B).
22. Check that there is continuity between each pair of

leads (A).
If either brush is shorter than the service limit,

replace the brush assembly.
* If brush length is OK, go to step 20.
If there is continuity, go to step 23.

If there is no continuity, replace the alternator.
Alternator Brush Length:

Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.)
Service Limit: ' 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
23. Check for no continuity between each lead and the

coil core (B).
If there is no continuity, g o t o step 24.
If there is continuity, replace the alternator.
Rotor Slip Ring test
20. Check that there is continuity between the slip rings
(A).
* If there is continuity, go to step 2 1 .
* If there is no continuity, replace the alternator.
C
2 1 . Then check that there is no continuity between

each slip ring (A) and the rotor (B) and the rotor
shaft (C).
* If there is no continuity, go to step 22.
* If there is continuity, replace the alternator.
4-40
24. Reassemble the alternator in reverse order of

disassembly, and note these items:
Be careful not to get any grease or oil on the slip
rings.
If you removed the pulley, tighten its locknut to
111 N-m (11.3 kgf-m, 81.7 Ibf-ft) w h e n you
reinstall it.
Cruise Control
ACTUATOR
T e s t , p a g e 4-51
S o l e n o i d T e s t , p a g e 4-50
ACTUATOR CABLE
A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 4-54
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
T e s t , p a g e 14-140
4-41
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram
IGNITION SWITCH
: 01 model
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
BATTERY
No.41 (100A)
No.42 (50A)
G202
4-42
G101
G501
Symptom Troubleshooting Index

NOTE:
The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence.
Before troubleshooting,
- check that the speedometer works properly.
- check for proper engine vacuum at the actuator.
- check the No. 9 (7.5A) and No. 6 (15A) fuses in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
- check that the horn sounds.
- check the tachometer to see if it works properly.
Symptom
Cruise control cannot be set.
4.
5.
1.
2.
Diagnostic procedure
Check main switch (see page 4-48)
Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49)
Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see
page 4-50)
Check transmission range switch (see page 14-140)
Check control unit (see page 4-46)
Check d i m m i n g circuit in gauge (see page 22-33)
Cruise speed is noticeably

higher or lower than what
was set.
Excessive overshooting or
undershooting w h e n trying to
set speed.
Speed fluctuates on a flat
road w i t h cruise control set.
Vehicle does not decelerate
or accelerate accordingly
w h e n SET/RESUME/CANCEL
button is pushed.
1.
2.
Check actuator and cable deflection (see page 4-51)

1.
2.
Check actuator and cable deflection (see page 4-51)

1.
2.
1.
2.
Check
Check
Check
Check
Set speed not cancelled

(engine rpm stays high) w h e n
shift lever is moved to M
position.
Set speed is not cancelled
w h e n brake pedal is pushed.
1.
2.
Check transmission range switch (see page 14-140)

1.
Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see

page 4-50)
Cruise control can be set, but

indicator light does not go on.
1.
2.
3.
2.
actuator and cable deflection (see page 4-51)

control unit (see page 4-46)
SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49)
control unit (see page 4-46)
Also check for

Poor ground: G101
Open circuit, loose
or disconnected
terminals: L T G R N ,
LT GRN/RED, GRY,
LT BLU, BLU/WHT
Poor ground: G501
Open circuit, loose
or disconnected
terminals: YEL,
BLU/BLK
Open circuit, loose or

disconnected
terminals:
LT GRN/RED, LT
GRN/BLK
disconnected
terminals, short to
ground: LT BLU
disconnected
terminals: WHT/BLK
(cont'd)
4-43
Cruise Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Set speed does not cancelled
w h e n main switch is pushed
OFF
Set speed does not cancelled
w h e n CANCEL button is
pushed
Set speed will not resume
w h e n RESUME button is
pushed (with main switch o n ,
set speed is temporarily
cancelled).
The transmission shifts d o w n
slower than normal w h e n
going up a hill w i t h the cruise
control on.
4-44
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
Check main switch (see page 4-48)
Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 449)

Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 449)
Troubleshoot the cruise control communication

circuit (see page 4-45)
Also check for

disconnected
terminals, short to
power: LTGRN
disconnected
terminals: L T G R N /
RED, LT GRN/BLK
disconnected
terminals: L T G R N /
BLK
ENGINE
Cruise Control Communication Circuit Troubleshooting

8. Measure the voltage between the No. 8 terminal of
the cruise control unit connector and g r o u n d .

2 . Turn on the cruise control main switch, then drive
the vehicle to speeds over 2 5 m p h (40 km/h) with
the cruise control.
Does the cruise
control
C R U I S E C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R
operate?
10
/
11
12
13
14
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
BLU/GRN
IMO-Check the cruise control unit or cruise control

actuator.
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
4. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) and cruise

control unit 14P connector.
Is there approx.
terminal A5 and body g r o u n d .
BLU/GRN
/
12
13
14
15
25
26
/
27
17
18
19
20
28
29
30
NO Replace the cruise control u n i t . B
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
"
1 V?
21
10
23
9. Measure the voltage between the A5 terminal of

the PCM connector and g r o u n d .
24
32
BLU/GRN
/
12
W i r e side of female terminals
Is there
13
14
15
25
26
21
17
18
19
20
28
29
30
21
10
23
/
24
32
continuity?
Y E S - Repair short in the wire between the PCM

connector terminal A5 and the cruise control unit
14P connector terminal No. 8.
Is there approx.
NO
1 V?
Go to step 8.
6. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P) and cruise

control unit 14P connector.
Y E S -Check for loose connectors. If necessary

replace the PCM and recheck, refer to '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 11 - 3 ) .
NO Repair or open in the BLU/GRN wire between
the A5 terminal and the cruise control u n i t . B
4-45
Cruise Control
Control Unit Input Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS c o m p o n e n t locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-25).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover.
2. Disconnect the 14P connector f r o m the control unit.
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
4. With the 14P connector disconnected, make these input tests.
4-46
Test condition
Under all
conditions
Cavity
9
Wire
BRN/WHT
BRN
Under all
conditions
11
BRN/BLK
Under all
conditions
Test: Desired result

Check for resistance to
ground:
There should be 8 0 - 1 2 0 Q.
ground:
There should be 4 0 - 6 0 Q.
ground:
There should be 7 0 - 1 1 0 Q.
Possible cause if result is not obtained

Faulty actuator solenoid
Poor ground(G202)
An open in the wire
Cavity
2
Wire
GRY
Test condition
Ignition switch ON
(II), main switch ON
and brake pedal
depressed, then
released
BLK
Under all conditions
WHT/BLK
LT GRN/
RED
LTGRN/
BLK
Set button pushed
10
BLU/BLK
Ignition switch ON
(II)
Attach to ground:
Cruise indicator light in the
gauge assembly should
comes on.
12
BLU/WHT
13
LTGRN
Ignition switch ON
(II) and main switch
ON; raise the front of
the vehicle, and
rotate 1 wheel slowly
while holding the
other wheel
Ignition switch ON
(II) and main switch
ON
14
LT BLU
Shift lever in [2], S3 or

B
BLU/GRN
Reconnect the cruise

control unit 14P
connector, start the
engine, main switch
ON and drive the
vehicle to speeds
over 25 mph (40 km/
h) with the cruise
control set.
Check for voltage between

the BLU/WHT ( + ) and BLK
( ) terminals:
There should be 0 5 V or
more
- 0 - 5 V or more
repeatedly.
Check for voltage to
ground:
There should be battery
voltage.
Check for continuity to
ground:
ground: There should be
approx. 1V
Brake pedal
depressed, then
released
Resume button
pushed
Test: Desired result

ground:
There should be 0 V w i t h
the pedal depressed and
battery voltage w i t h the
pedal released.
Check for continuity to
ground:
ground:
voltage w i t h the pedal
depressed, and 0 V w i t h the
pedal released.
ground:
voltage.
Possible cause if result is not obtained

Faulty brake pedal position switch
An open in the w i r e
Poor ground (G501)

Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box
Faulty brake pedal position switch
An open in the wire

Faulty horn relay
Faulty set/resume/cancel switch
Faulty cable reel
Blown bulb
Blown No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the
under-dash driver's fuse/relay box
Faulty d i m m i n g circuit in the
gauge assembly
An open in the wire
Faulty vehicle speed sensor

Faulty main switch
An open in the wire
Faulty transmission range switch
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
Faulty cruise control unit
Short to ground
5. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK,
the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
4-47
Cruise Control
Main Switch Test/Replacement
'01 model:
'98-00 models:
1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument
panel.
1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument

panel.
T e r m i n a l side of
male terminals
Terminal side of male

terminals
2. Disconnect the 8P connector (B) f r o m the switch.

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table. If there is no
continuity, replace the switch.
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) f r o m the switch.
Terminal
4

switch position according to the table. If there is no
continuity, replace the switch.
\^
Terminal
1
OFF
o -
ON
o--- o
Position
4-48
o--@a
--
Position
\
OFF
ON
o-
o
o
o -
o
o
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement

1. Carefully remove the set/resume/cancel switch
cover (A) by prying between the cover and the
switch (B) in the sequence shown.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in

switch position according to the table.
If there is continuity and it matches the table, but
switch failure is occurred on the cruise control
unit input test, check and repair the wire harness
on the switch circuit.
If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the switch.
Terminal
Position
S E T (ON)
R E S U M E (ON)
o
o
C A N C E L (ON)
o
o
-o
o
2. Remove the 2 screws (A), then remove the switch

(B).
4-49
Cruise Control
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector f r o m the switch (A).
Actuator Solenoid Test

1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) f r o m the actuator.
male terminals
:
/
male terminals
2. Check for resistance between the terminals

according to the table.
2. Remove the brake pedal position switch,

3. Check for continuity between the terminals
according to the table.
\
NOTE: Resistance will vary slightly with

temperature; specified resistance is at 70F (20C).
Terminal
\
1
Brake Switch
DEPRESSED
RELEASED
Terminal
4
Resistance ( Q )
\
O
I
J
i
VENT SOLENOID
4060 Q
r>
KJ
r~)
4. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust the pedal

height, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see
page 19-5).
VACUUM SOLENOID
3050 Q
SAFETY SOLENOID
40-60 Q
KJ
4-50
Actuator Test
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 - 3 0 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX
5. W i t h voltage and vacuum still applied, try to pull

the actuator rod out by hand. You should not be
able to pull it out. If you can, it is defective.
1. Disconnect the actuator cable f r o m the actuator rod

and disconnect the 4P connector (A).
Terminal side of
male terminals
6. Disconnect ground f r o m the No. 3 terminal. The

actuator rod should return. If it does not return, but
the vent hose and filter are not plugged, the
solenoid valve assembly is defective.
A973X-041-XXXXX
2. Connect battery power to the No. 4 terminal and

ground the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 terminals.
3. Connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum hose, then
apply vacuum to the actuator.
4. The actuator rod (A) should pull in completely. If
the rod pulls in only part-way or not at all, check for
a leaking vacuum line or defective solenoid.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 5, and disconnect ground

f r o m the No. 1 terminal. The actuator rod should
return. If it does not return, but the vent hose and
filter are not plugged, the solenoid valve assembly
is defective.
8. If you replace the solenoid valve assembly, be sure
to use new O-rings on each solenoid.
9. Disconnect power and ground f r o m the 4P
connector. Disconnect the vent hose f r o m the
actuator. Connect a vacuum p u m p to the actuator
vent hose port, and apply vacuum. The actuator rod
should pull in completely. If not, the vacuum valve
is stuck open. Replace the actuator.
4-51
Cruise Control
Actuator/Solenoid/Cable Replacement
Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) f r o m the actuator.
2. Loosen the mounting bolt (B), and remove the

mounting bolt (C), then remove the actuator w i t h
the bracket.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose (D).
4. Remove the 3 nuts (A).
5. Disconnect the actuator cable (B) f r o m the actuator

rod (C) by releasing the clip (D) f r o m the rod w i t h a
screwdriver.
4-52
6. Loosen the locknut (A), then disconnect the

actuator cable (B) f r o m the throttle linkage (C).
B
SOLENOID VALVES
4-53
Cruise Control
Actuator Cable Adjustment
1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves s m o o t h l y
w i t h no binding or sticking.
5. Turn the adjusting nut (A) until it is 3.75 + 0.5 m m

(0.150.02 in.) away f r o m the bracket (B).
3 . 7 5 0 . 5 m m ( 0 . 1 5 0 . 0 2 in.)
Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 r p m w i t h

no load (El or OS position) until the radiator fan
comes on, then let it idle.
Measure the amount of m o v e m e n t of the output
linkage (B) until the engine speed starts to increase.
A t first, the output linkage should be located at the
fully closed position (C). The free play (D) should be
3.75 + 0.5 m m (0.15 + 0.02 in.).
If the free play is not w i t h i n specs, move the cable
to the point where the engine speed starts to
increase, and tighten the locknut (A) and adjusting
nut (B).
B
4-54
6. Pull the cable so that the adjusting nut (A) touches

the bracket, and tighten the locknut (B).


Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
No.41 (100 A)
No.42 (50A)
or>oo
WHT
UNDER-DASH
DRIVER'S
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BLK/YEL
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
GRN/WHT
BLK
G101
4-56
Troubleshooting
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX
NOTE: Check the v a c u u m hoses and lines for damage
and proper connections before troubleshooting.
Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively
w h e n idling.
4. Shift to M or E position.
5. Disconnect the 2P connector f r o m the engine
m o u n t control solenoid valve.
6. Measure voltage between the No. 2 terminal and
body g r o u n d .
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating

temperature (the cooling fan comes on 2 times).
Is the idle speed
W i r e side of
female terminals
less than 800 rpm?
NOAdjust the idle speed (see page 11-86).
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. W i t h the transmission in gear, have an assistant
disconnect and reconnect the 2P connector f r o m
the engine mount control solenoid valve.
Is there a noticeable change in idle
smoothness
when the 2P connector is
disconnected?
Y E S Reconnect the 2P connector to the solenoid
valve. The engine m o u n t control system is OK.
NO-
Go to step 4.
Is there battery
voltage?
NO Repair open in BLK/YEL wire between the 2P
connector and No. 6 (15A) fuse in the under-dash
driver's fuse/relay box.
7. Measure voltage between the No. 1 and No. 2
terminals.
ire s i d e o f
nale terminals
BLK/YEL
Is there battery
voltage?
N O - R e p a i r open in GRN/WHT wire between PCM
(A2) and the 2P connector. If the wire is OK,
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck, refer
to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3).
(cont'd)
4-57

Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 r p m .
9. Measure voltage between the No. 1 and No. 2
terminals.
11. Release the v a c u u m , then apply vacuum again.

Is there a noticeable change in idle
with and without vacuum
applied?
smoothness
N O - Isolate and replace the leaking engine
mount.
Wire side of
female terminals
12. Disconnect the lower vacuum hose (A) f r o m the

engine mount control solenoid valve (B) and
connect a v a c u u m pump/gauge to the hose.
BLK/YEL
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body g r o u n d in GRN/WHT

w i r e between PCM (A2) and the 2P connector. If the
w i r e is OK, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see
page 1 1 - 3 ) .
N O - Go to step 10.
Is there manifold
10. Disconnect the upper v a c u u m hose (A) f r o m the
engine m o u n t control solenoid valve (B), and
connect a v a c u u m pump/gauge to the hose. A p p l y
v a c u u m for 20 seconds.
vacuum?
YES - Replace the engine mount control solenoid

valve.
NO Repeir as needed.
Does the engine mount hold
vacuum?
Y E S - G o to step 1 1 .
NO - Either the v a c u u m hose or one of the engine
mounts has a v a c u u m leak. Repair as needed.
4-58
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
Engine Installation
5-2
5-11
Cylinder Head
6-1
Engine Block
7-1
Engine Lubrication
8-1
Intake Manifold/Exhaust System
9-1
Engine Cooling
10-1
NOTE: Referto the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for items not shown in this section.
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
Special Tool Required
Belt Tension Release A r m , YA 9317, commercially
available
5. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

hose (A) f r o m the throttle body.
NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damage, unplug the w i r i n g connectors
carefully while holding the connector portion.
Mark all w i r i n g and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other w i r i n g or
hoses, or interfere w i t h other parts.
1. Remove the support struts f r o m the hood, then fix
the hood in a vertical position.
preset buttons.
C
3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal first, then

the positive t e r m i n a l . Remove the battery.
4. Remove the throttle body cover (A) and intake
manifold cover (B).
B
6. Remove the vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C),

then remove the intake air duct (D).
7. Remove the ground cable (A) and harness clamp
8. Remove 6 mounting bolts (C), and loosen the

mounting bolt (D), then remove the battery base (E)
and battery base bracket (F).
Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control

cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the
cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care
not to bend the cables w h e n removing them.
Always replace any kinked cable w i t h a new one.
11. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-88).

12. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
(B).
'98-99 models:
'00-01 models:
10. Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors on

the left side of the engine compartment.
13. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and

the cruise control vacuum hose (B).
(cont'd)
5-3
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
14. Remove the engine wire harness clamps.
18. Remove the starter cable clamps.
15. Remove the battery cables (A), and disconnect the

connector (B) f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box
(C).
19. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the PCM.
16. Remove the flange bolt (D), then remove the underhood fuse/relay box.
17. Remove the harness clamps (E).
5-4
20. Remove the g r o m m e t (A), then pull out the PCM

connectors.
21. Move the auto-tensioner (A) w i t h the belt tension

release arm (B) to remove tension f r o m the
alternator belt (C), then remove the alternator belt.
22. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), and remove the

locknut (B) and m o u n t i n g bolt (C), then remove the
power steering (P/S) p u m p belt (D) and p u m p
w i t h o u t disconnecting the P/S hoses.
23. Remove the P/S hose clamp (E).

24. Remove the radiator cap.
25. Make sure the hoist brackets are positioned
properly. Raise the hoist to full height.
26. Remove the front tires/wheels.
27. Remove the splash shield.
A
(cont'd)
5-5
Engine Assembly
28. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-10).
29. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer (see
page 14-112).
35. Remove the bolts (A) securing the shift cable holder
(B), then remove the shift cable cover (C). To
prevent damage to the control lever joint, be sure
to remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder
before removing the bolts securing the shift cable
cover.
30. Drain the engine oil. Reinstall the drain bolt using a
new washer (see page 8-5).
3 1 . Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (H02S)
connector (A), then remove exhaust pipe A (B).
36. Remove the lock bolt (D) securing the control lever
(E), then remove the shift cable (F) w i t h the control
lever. Take care not to bend the shift cable while
removing it.
37. Unplug the P/S hose clamps (A), and disconnect the
engine mount control vacuum hose (B).
32. Remove the damper fork, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 18-17).
33. Disconnect the suspension lower arm ball joints;
18-17).
34. Remove the driveshafts; refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 16-3). Coat ail precisionfinished surfaces w i t h clean engine oil. Tie plastic
bags over the driveshaft ends.
5-6
(cont'd)
5-7
Engine Assembly
5-8
4 4 . Remove the front mount bracket support nut.
4 7 . Make a mark (A) on the front beam (B) and rear

beam (C), then remove the front beam.
(cont'd)
Engine Assembly
49. Remove the rear mount.
5 1 . Check that the engine/transmission is completely

free of v a c u u m hoses, fuel and coolant hoses and
electrical w i r i n g .
52. Slowly lower the engine approximately 150 m m (6
in.). Check once again that all hoses and wires are
disconnected f r o m the engine/transmission.
53. Lower the engine all the way, and disconnect the
chain hoist f r o m the engine.
54. Remove the engine f r o m under the vehicle.
50. Remove the transmission lower rear mount.
5-10
Engine Installation
1. Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts and nuts to the specified torques.
P/S PUMP
8x
1.25
22
N-m
mm
(2.2 kgf-m, 16
Ibfft)
16 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
5-11
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
2. Position the engine under the vehicle. Attach t h e
chain hoist to the engine, then lift the engine into
position in the vehicle.
5. Install the A/C compressor.
mJOTICE
Reinstall the m o u n t i n g bolts/nuts in the
sequence given. Failure to f o l l o w this
sequence may cause excessive noise and
vibration, and reduce bushing life.
3. Install the transmission lower rear mount.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
6. Install the front beam. Align mark (A) on the rear

beam (B) and front beam (C), then tighten the bolts
(D).
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
4. Install the rear mount bracket.

10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 kgf-ri
28 Ibfft)
1 2 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m ,
40 Ibfft)
u
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m {3.9 k g f - m ,
28 Ibfft)
1 4 x 1.5 m m
103 N m (10.5 k g f - m ,
76 Ibfft)
Replace.
7. Tighten the transmission lower rear mount

mounting nuts (E) and transmission lower front
mount mounting nuts (F).
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
5-12
8 . Tighten the flange bolts on the radius rods.

14x1.5 m m
162 N m (16.5 k g f m , 119 I b f f t )
9. Lower the hoist.
11. Tighten the rear mount bracket support nut and

mounting bolt.
12 x 1.25 m m
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f - m ,
40 Ibfft)
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
10. Tighten the front mount bracket support nut.

12 x 1.25 m m
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
12. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten

the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence
shown.
10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m ,
40 Ibfft)
13. Remove the chain hoist f r o m the engine.
(cont'd)
5-13
Engine Assembly
14. Raise the hoist to full height.
15. Install a new spring clip on the end of each
driveshaft, then install the driveshafts. Make sure
each clip " c l i c k s " into place in the differential and
intermediate shaft.
19. Install the control lever (A) w i t h the shift cable on

the control shaft. Do not bend the shift cable any
more than is necessary to install the control lever.
16. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints. Use

new cotter pins; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 18-17).
17. Install the damper fork; refer t o the '98-01 Accord
18. Install exhaust pipe A (A); use a new gaskets (B)
and new self locking nuts (C).
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m , 10 I b f f t )
20. Install the lock bolt (B) w i t h a new lock washer (C),
then bend the lock tab of the lock washer.
2 1 . Install the shift cable cover (D), then install the shift
cable holder (E) on the shift cable cover.
22. Install the P/S hose into the clamps (A), and
connect the engine mount control vacuum hose (B).
C
10 x 1.25 m m
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
Replace.
5-14
(cont'd)
5-15
Engine Assembly
27. Install the front tires/wheels.
34. Install the starter cable clamps.
28. Lower the hoist.

29. Install the alternator belt.
30. Loosely install the P/S p u m p belt and p u m p .
3 1 . Adjust the P/S p u m p belt (see page 17-13).
32. Push in the PCM connectors, through the bulkhead
then install the g r o m m e t (A).
35. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box (A) and

harness clamps (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m
8.7 I b f f t )
33. Connect the PCM connectors.

6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m ,
8.7 I b f f t )
36. Install the battery cables (C), and connect the

connector (D) f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box
(A).
5-16
37. Install the engine wire harness clamps.
39. Install the fuel hose (A) and fuel return hose (B)
using new washers (C).
'98-99 models;
38. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and the
cruise control vacuum hose (B).
22 N m (2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibfft)
'00-01 models:
22 N m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
40. Connect the engine wire harness connectors on the

left side of the engine compartment
(cont'd)
5-17
Engine Assembly
41. Install the cruise control cable, then adjust the
cable (see page 4-54).
45. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the
vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C).
42. Install the throttle cable, then adjust the cable (see
page 11-98).
43. Install the battery base bracket (A), battery base (B),
then install the ground cable (C) and harness clamp
(D).
8x1.25
mm
46. Install the EVAP canister hose (D) to the throttle

body.
47. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble
them and apply grease to prevent corrosion.
48. Refill the engine with engine oil (see page 8-5).
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
44. Install the throttle body cover (A) and intake

manifold cover (B).
B
49. Refill the transmission with automatic transmission

fluid (ATF) (see page 14-113).
50. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed
air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see page 10-10).
51. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the A/T gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
52. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn on (II) the ignition switch
(do not operate the starter) so that the fuel pump
runs for approximately 2 seconds and pressurizes
the fuel line. Repeat this operation 2 or 3 times,
then check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel
line.
5-18
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special T o o l s
D T C Troubleshooting
V T E C S o l e n o i d Valve T e s t
V T E C Rocker A r m s T e s t
Valve C l e a r a n c e Adjustment
Crankshaft Pulley R e m o v a l and
Installation
T i m i n g Belt Inspection
T i m i n g Belt R e m o v a l
T i m i n g Belt Installation
Cylinder Head R e m o v a l
Cylinder Head Inspection for
Warpage
Rocker A r m A s s e m b l y Removal
Rocker A r m s and Shafts D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y
Rocker A r m s and Shafts Inspection
V T E C Lost Motion A s s e m b l i e s
Inspection
C a m s h a f t Inspection
V a l v e s , S p r i n g s , and Valve S e a l s
Removal
V a l v e Inspection
Valve Stem-to-Guide C l e a r a n c e
Inspection
V a l v e Guide R e p l a c e m e n t
V a l v e Seat Reconditioning
V a l v e s , S p r i n g s , and Valve S e a l s
Installation
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft
S e a l , and Pulley Installation
Cylinder Head Installation
T D C S e n s o r Replacement
CKP Sensor Replacement
6-2
6-3
- 6-6
6-9
6-10
6-13
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-22
6-31
6-36
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
6-40
6-43
6-44
- 6-44
6-45
6-47
6-49
6-50
6-51
6-55
6-56
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref. No.
-i
-2
-3
Description
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm
Socket, 19 mm
Holder Handle
Pulley Holder Attachment, 50 mm Offset
Pressure Gauge Adapter
VTEC Air Adapter
V T E C Air Stopper
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm
A/T Pressure Hose Adapter
Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment
Tool Number
07HAH-PJ7010B
07JAA-001020A
07JAB-001020A
07MAB-PY30100
07NAJ-P07010A
07VAJ-P8A010A
07VAJ-P8A020A
07406-0070300
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120
07742-0010100
07757-PJ1010A
6-2
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1,-2,-3
IDLER P U L L E Y
(cont'd)
6-3
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
HEAD C O V E R G A S K E T
OIL C O N T R O L ORIFICE
6-4
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLIES

R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-36
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 6-37
CAMSHAFT THRUST COVER
CAMSHAFT
VALVE KEEPERS
VALVE KEEPERS
SPRING RETAINER
SPRING RETAINER
EXHAUST VALVE SPRING
INTAKE V A L V E SPRING
EXHAUST VALVE SEAL

I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-49
VALVE SPRING SEAT
INTAKE V A L V E S E A L
Installation, p a g e 6-49
EXHAUST VALVE GUIDE

INTAKE V A L V E
GUIDE
Inspection,
page 6-44
Replacement,
p a g e 6-45
CYLINDER HEAD
R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-31
W a r p a g e , p a g e 6-36
Valve seat r e c o n d i t i o n i n g ,
p a g e 6-47
INJECTOR BASE
OIL S E A L
EXHAUST VALVE
INTAKE V A L V E
R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-43
6-5
Cylinder Head
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P1259: A problem in the V T E C Oil
P r e s s u r e S w i t c h circuit or V T E C S o l e n o i d
V a l v e circuit
7. Check for continuity on the VTEC oil pressure

switch between the pressure switch connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
V T E C OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH
CONNECTOR

Pressure Gauge Adaptor 07NAJ-P07010A
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070300
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
A/T Pressure Adaptor 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) reset
procedure; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
T e r m i n a l side of male
terminals

temperature (cooling fan comes on).
Is there
4. Road test the vehicle:
Accelerate in \2\ position to an engine speed over
4,000 r p m . Hold that engine speed for at least 2
seconds. If DTC P1259 is not repeated during the
1st road test, repeat this test 2 more times.
continuity?
NO Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch.
Is DTC P1259
indicated?
NO Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
VTEC solenoid valve and PCM.H
9. Measure the voltage between the VTEC oil

pressure switch harness connector No. 1 terminal
and body ground.
V T E C OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH H A R N E S S
CONNECTOR

6. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch connector.
Is there approx.
12 V?
NO Inspect for an open or short to ground in the
wire between the VTEC oil pressure switch and the
PCM (C10). If the wire is OK, substitute a knowngood PCM and recheck.B
6-6
10. Measure voltage across the VTEC oil pressure

switch harness 2P connector.
14. Remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (A) and

install the special tools as s h o w n , then reinstall the
VTEC oil pressure switch.
V T E C OIL P R E S S U R E S W I T C H H A R N E S S
07NAJ-P07010A
07406-0070300
Wire side of female

terminals
07MAJ-PY40120
Is there battery
voltage?
15. Reconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector

and VTEC oil pressure switch 2P connector.
NO Repair open in the wire between the VTEC oil

pressure switch and G101. If the w i r e is OK,
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.B
12. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector.
13. Check for continuity on the VTEC solenoid valve
between the solenoid valve 1P connector terminal
and body ground.
VTEC SOLENOID
VALVE
16. Connect a tachometer.

temperature (cooling fan comes on).
18. Check oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000, 2,000
and 3,000 r p m . Keep measuring t i m e as short as
possible because the engine is running w i t h no
load (less than 1 minute).
Is pressure
below 49 kPa (0.5 kgf/crrf,
7 psi)?
NO Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 69).B
20. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector.
Terminal side of
male terminal
Is there 14-30
Q?
2 1 . Attach the battery positive terminal to the VTEC

solenoid valve terminal.
22. Start the engine and check oil pressure at an engine
speed of 3,000 r p m .
Is pressure
NO Replace the VTEC solenoid valve.
above 390 kPa (4.0 kgf/crrf,
57
psi)?
NO Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 69).B

(cont'd)
6-7
Cylinder Head
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
23. W i t h the battery positive terminal still connected to
the VTEC solenoid valve, measure voltage between
C 1 0 and body g r o u n d .
27. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid

valve 1P connector terminal and body ground.
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE HARNESS
IP CONNECTOR
VTM (BLU/BLK)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9 10
' 1 6 17 18 19 20 21
12
25
26 27 28
29 30
/
/
Wire side of female
terminal
Is there
Is there battery
voltage above 4,000
Y E S - R e p a i r short in the wire between the PCM

(B12) and VTEC solenoid valve connector.
N O - R e p l a c e the VTEC oil pressure s w i t c h .
25. Disconnect the battery positive terminal f r o m the
VTEC solenoid valve terminal.
26. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid
valve harness 1P connector terminal and the PCM
connector terminal B 1 2 .
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE HARNESS
VTS (GRN/YEL)
1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
/ 20
21 22
23 24 25
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
Is there
continuity?
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM
(B12) and VTEC solenoid valve connector
6-8
continuity?
rpm?
N O - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good PCM and recheck.

If symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM.H
VTEC Solenoid Valve Test

1. Disconnect the 1 P connector from the VTEC
solenoid valve.
2 . Measure resistance between the terminal and body
ground.
Resistance: 14
4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid

valve with your finger and check its movement. If
the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the
engine oil pressure.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft)
30 Q
3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the

VTEC solenoid valve/oil filter assembly (A) from the
oil pump, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter
(B) for clogging. If there is clogging, clean the filter
and replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
CySinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
VTEC Air Adapter 07VAJ-P8A010A
VTEC Air Stopper 07VAJ-P8A020A
2. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

hose (A) f r o m the throttle body.
1. '98-99 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),

ignition w i r e cover (B) and intake manifold covers
(C).
' 0 0 - 0 1 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),
intake manifold covers (B) and intake manifold
cover stay (C).
'98-99 models:

4. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control
not to bend the cables w h e n removing t h e m .
6-10
5. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A),

vacuum hoses (B) and positive crankcase
ventilation (PCV) hose (C).
7. Remove the intake manifold.
8. Remove the cylinder head covers.

9. Remove the front upper cover (see step 2 on page
6-18).
6. Remove the vacuum hose (A) ('98-99 models),

breather hose (B) and water bypass hoses (C).
A
10. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC (see step 10 on page 614).
11. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No. 1
cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move
independently of the primary rocker arm (B) and
secondary rocker arm (C).
If the intake mid rocker arm does not move,
remove the m i d , primary, and secondary intake
rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the
pistons in the m i d and primary rocker arms move
smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing,
replace the primary, mid and secondary rocker
arms as an assembly, and retest.
If the mid rocker arm moves freely, go to step 12.
B
(cont'd)
6-11
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker A r m Test (cont'd)
12. Repeat step 11 on the remaining intake mid rocker
arms w i t h each piston atTDC. W h e n all the m i d
rocker arms pass the test, go to step 13.
13. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa (7.0
kgf/cm , 100 psi).
2
18. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A)
and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are
mechanically connected by the piston and that the
m i d rocker arm (C) does not move w h e n pushed
manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves
independently of the primary and secondary rocker
arms, replace the rocker arms as a set.
A
14. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-13).

15. Cover the t i m i n g belt with a shop towel to protect
the belt.
16. Remove the 2 intake rocker shaft mounting bolts,
then connect the special tools and Valve Inspection
an air pressure regulator w i t h a 0 - 1 0 0 psi gauge
(A) as s h o w n below.
A
19. Remove the tools.

20. Check for smooth operation of each lost motion
assembly (see page 6-37). Replace the lost motion
assembly if it does not move smoothly.
2 1 . After inspection, check that the MIL does not come
on.
07VAJ-P8A020A
07VAJ-P8A010A
17. Loosen the valve on the regulator and apply the

specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:
390 kPa (4.0 kgf/cm , 57 psi)
2
NOTE: If the synchronizing pistons A and B do not

move after applying air pressure; move the primary
or secondary rocker arm up and d o w n manually by
rotating the crankshaft clockwise.
6-12
Valve Clearance Adjustment

NOTE: Adjust the valves only w h e n the cylinder head
temperature is less than 100F (38C).
2. Remove the EVAP canister hose (A) f r o m the

throttle body.

ignition w i r e cover (B) and intake manifold covers
(C).
'00-01 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),
cover stay (C).
'98-99 models:

(cont'd)
6-13
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
vacuum hoses (B) and positive crankcase
ventilation (PCV) hose (C).
A
6. Remove the vacuum hose (A) ('98-99 models),
8. Remove the cylinder head covers.

9. Remove the front upper cover (see step 2 on page
6-18).
10. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. Align the pointer (A) on
the back cover with the No. 1 piston TDC mark (B)
on the front camshaft pulley.
6-14
11. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the

valves you're going to check.
Intake:
Exhaust:
0.20 0.24 mm (0.008

0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 mm (0.011
0.009 in.)
0.013 in.)
13. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the
locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until
the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
A
7 x 0.75 m m
20 N m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibfft)
Adjusting screw locations:

EXHAUST
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
REAR:
14. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance.

Repeat the adjustment if necessary.
INTAKE
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
15. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer

(A) on the back cover w i t h the No. 4 piston TDC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
FRONT:
EXHAUST
12. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting

screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it
back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of
drag.
16. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No. 4 cylinder.
(cont'd)
6-15
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
B

A

on No. 2 cylinder.

on No. 3 cylinder.



on No. 5 cylinder.
6-16

on No. 6 cylinder.
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation

Holder Handle 07JAB-001020A
Holder Attachment, 50 m m , Offset 07MAB-PY3010A
Socket, 19 m m 07JAA-001020A
or a commercially available 19 m m socket
Removal
1. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder
attachment (B).
07JAB-001020A
2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt to

245 N-m (25.0 kgf-m, 181 Ibfft). Do not use an
impact wrench.
- 1 Hold the pulley w i t h holder handle (A) and
holder attachment (B).
- 2 Tighten the bolt w i t h a torque wrench and 19
m m socket (C).
07JAB-001020A
B
07MAB-PY3010A
B
07MAB-PY30T0A
07JAA-001020A
(or C o m m e r c i a l l y available)
07JAA-001020A
2. Remove the bolt w i t h a heavy duty 19 m m socket

(C) and breaker bar.
Installation
1. Remove any oil f r o m the pulleys (A), crankshaft (B),
bolt (C) and washer (D). Clean and lubricate the
points shown below.
O : Clean
X : R e m o v e a n y oil
# . Lubricate
6-17
Cylinder Head
Timing Beit Inspection
ignition w i r e cover (B) and intake manifold cover
(C).
'00-01 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A)
and intake manifold cover (B).
'98-99 models:
6-18
2. Remove the front upper cover.
Timing Belt Removal

Holder Handle 07JAB-001020A
Holder Attachment, 50 m m , Offset 07MAB-PY3010A
Socket, 19 m m 07JAA-001020A
or a commercially available 19 m m socket
Belt Tension Release A r m , YA9317,
commercially available
3. Remove the front tires/wheels.

4. Remove the splash shield.
1. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up

w i t h the pointer (B).
5. Move the auto-tensioner (A) w i t h the belt tension

release arm (B) to remove tension f r o m the
alternator belt (C), then remove the alternator belt.
2. Check that the rear camshaft pulley mark (A) and
rear upper cover mark (B) are aligned.
A
(cont'd)
6-19
Cyfinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
6. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), locknut (B) and
mounting bolt (C), then remove the power steering
(P/S) pump belt (D).
9. Remove the dipstick and tube (A); discard the Oring (B).
A
10. Hold the pulley w i t h holder handle (A) and holder

attachment (B).
7. Support the engine w i t h a jack and w o o d block
under the oil pan.
B
07MAB-PY3010A
8. Remove the side engine m o u n t bracket.
11. Remove the bolt w i t h a heavy duty 19 m m socket

(C) and breaker bar.
6-20
12. Remove the front upper cover (A), rear upper cover
(B) and lower cover (C).
B
14. To hold the timing belt adjuster its current position,

screw the battery clamp bolt in as shown.
Tighten it by hand, do not use a wrench.
15. Remove the engine mount bracket.
13. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from the

battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown.
(cont'd)
6-21
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
Timing Belt Installation
16. Loosen the idler pulley bolt (A) about 5 or 6 turns,

then remove the timing belt.
NOTE; The following procedure is for installing a new

t i m i n g belt. If you are installing a used t i m i n g belt, refer
to the next procedure.
New Belt
1. Clean the t i m i n g belt pulleys, and upper and lower
covers.
2. Set the t i m i n g belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning
the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the t i m i n g belt
drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil pump.
B
6-22
3. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft

pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on
the camshaft pulleys w i t h the pointers (B) on the
back covers.
FRONT;
6. Hold the auto-tensioner (A) w i t h the maintenance

bolt pointing up. Loosen and remove the
maintenance bolt (B).
NOTE: Handle the auto-tensioner carefully so the
oil inside does not spill or leak. If any of the oil has
spilled or leaked out of the auto-tensioner, refill it
w i t h 5 W-30 motor oil. The total capacity is 6.5 mfi
(0.22 fl oz).
7. Clamp the boss of the auto-tensioner in a softjawed vise. Do not grip the housing of the autotensioner.
8. Insert a flat blade screwdriver (C) into the
maintenance hole. Place the holder (D) (P/N 14540P8A-A01) on the auto-tensioner while turning the
screwdriver clockwise to compress the bottom.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the threads or the
gasket contact surface with the screwdriver.
9. Reinstall the maintenance bolt (A). Always use a
new gasket (B).
A
8 N m (0.8 k g f m , 6 Ibfft)
B
4. Remove the battery clamp bolt f r o m the back cover.

5. Remove the auto-tensioner.
(cont'd)
6-23
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
10. Make sure no oil is leaking around the maintenance
bolt, then install the auto-tensioner (A).
12. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
NOTE: Make sure the holder (B) stays in place.
10x1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 I b f f t )
13. Remove the holder.

6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m ( 1 . 2 k g f m /
8.7 Ibfft)
11. Install the t i m i n g belt in a counter clockwise

sequence starting w i t h the drive pulley.
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
6-24
Drive pulley (A).

Idler pulley (B).
Front camshaft pulley (C).
Water p u m p pulley (D).
Rear camshaft pulley (E).
Adjusting pulley (F).
D
14. Install the engine mount bracket.
16. Clean the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.

17. Clean all oil off the inside face (A) of the crankshaft
pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley bolt (B) and
washer (C).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 kgf
8.7 I b f f t )
MO x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 kgf-m, 3 3 Ibfft)
15. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B)
and rear upper cover (C).
C

245 N-m (25.0 kgf-m, 181 Ibf-ft). Do not use an
impact wrench.
m m socket (C).
07JAB-001020A
B
07MAB-PY3010A
07JAA-001020A
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
19. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about 5 or 6 turns

clockwise so the timing belt positions on the
pulleys.
(cont'd)
6-25
Cylinder Head
20. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its w h i t e mark (A)
lines up w i t h the pointer (B).
22. Install the dipstick and tube (A) w i t h a new O-ring

(B).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N - m ( 1 . 2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
2 1 . Check the camshaft pulley marks.

If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to
step 22.
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC,
remove the t i m i n g belt and repeat steps 2
through 20.
FRONT CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
23. Install and adjust the P/S pump belt (see page 1710).
shown.
0 10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
6-26
Used Belt
Follow this procedure when installing a used t i m i n g
belt.
1. Clean the t i m i n g belt pulleys, and upper and lower
covers.

the camshaft pulleys w i t h the pointers (B) on the
back covers.
FRONT:

drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil pump.
REAR:
(cont'd)
6-27
Cylinder Head
4. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the t i m i n g
belt cannot be installed, remove and compress the
auto-tensioner (refer to steps 6-23 of the N e w Belt
Installation Procedure).
7. Remove the battery clamp bolt f r o m the back cover.
5. Install the t i m i n g belt in a counter clockwise

sequence starting w i t h the drive pulley. Take care
not to damage the t i m i n g belt w h e n installing it.
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Drive pulley (A).

Idler pulley (B).
Front camshaft pulley (C).
Water p u m p pulley (D).
Rear camshaft pulley (E).
Adjusting pulley (F).
D
8. Install the engine mount bracket.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
6. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
6-28
1 0 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N - m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
9. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B)

and rear upper cover (C).
C

245 N-m (25.0 kgf-m, 181 lbf-ft). Do not use an
impact wrench.
m m socket (C).
07JAB-001020A
6x1.0 mm
1 2 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
10. Clean the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.

11. Clean any oil off the inside face (A) of the
crankshaft pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley
bolt (B) and washer (C).
B
07MAB-PY3010A
07JAA-001020A
13. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about 5 or 6 turns

clockwise so the t i m i n g belt positions on the
pulleys.
14. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)
lines up w i t h the pointer (B).
(cont'd)
6-29
Cylinder Head
15. Check the camshaft pulley marks (A).
16. Install the dipstick and tube (A) w i t h a new O-ring

(B).
If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to

step 16.
If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC,
remove the t i m i n g belt and repeat steps 2
through 14.
FRONT CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
17. Install and adjust the P/S p u m p belt (see page 1710).
REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY:

shown.
10x1.25 mm
44 N m ( 4 . 5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
6-30
Cylinder Head Removal

Belt Tension Release Arm,YA9317, commercially
available
'00-01 models:
Engine removal is not required this procedure.

NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damage, unplug the w i r i n g connectors
carefully while holding the connector portion.
To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
engine coolant temperature drops below 100F (38C)
before loosening the retaining bolts.
Mark all w i r i n g and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
5. Remove the EVAP canister hose (A) f r o m the

throttle body.
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft code for the radio,

preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-10).
4. '98-99 models: Remove the throttle body cover ( A ) ,
ignition wire cover (B) and intake manifold covers
(C).
'00-01 models: Remove the throttle body cover ( A ) ,
cover stay (C).
'98-99 models:
C

(cont'd)
6-31
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
cable ends out of the accelerator linkage.Take care

v a c u u m hoses (B) and PCV hose (C).
11. Remove the vacuum hose (A), ('98-99 models)

9. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
(B).
'98-99 models:
6-32
12. Remove the ground cable (A).
16. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), then remove the

locknut (B) and mounting bolt (C). Remove the
power steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and p u m p
w i t h o u t disconnecting the P/S hoses.
D
13. Move the auto-tensioner (B) w i t h the belt tension
release arm (C) to remove tension f r o m the
alternator belt (D), then remove the alternator belt.
C
14. Support the engine w i t h a jack and w o o d block
under the oil pan.
17. Remove the P/S hose clamp (E).

15. Remove the side engine mount bracket.

19. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and
wire harness clamps f r o m the cylinder heads and
the intake manifold.
Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector

Idle air control (IAC) valve connector
Throttle position sensor connector
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
connector
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
connector
Radiator fan switch A connector
Radiator fan switch B connector
Coolant temperature gauge sending unit
connector ('98-99 models)
CKP sensor connector
TDC sensor connector
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
Distributor connector ('98-99 models)
VTEC solenoid valve connector
VTEC oil pressure switch connector
Oil pressure switch connector
20. Remove the spark plug caps and distributor f r o m

the cylinder heads.
(cont'd)
6-33
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
24. Remove the vacuum hoses (A) from the intake air
bypass control thermal valve (B).
A
22. Disconnect the 6 injector connectors.

23. Remove the fuel rails.
'98-99 models:
25. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-19).

26. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower
radiator hose (B).
A
'00-01 models:
6-34
27. Remove the heater hoses.
30. Remove the camshaft pulleys (A) and back covers

(B).
B
28. Remove the front and rear exhaust manifolds (see

page 9-3).
3 1 . Remove the cylinder head covers.
29. Remove the water passage.
32. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent
warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at
a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
CYLINDER HEAD BOLT LOOSENING SEQUENCE:
CD
CD
CD
CD
CD
33. Remove the cylinder heads.
6-35
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Inspection for
Warpage
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal

1. Loosen the adjusting screws (A).
N O T E : If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances (see page 640) are not w i t h i n specifications, the cylinder head
cannot be resurfaced.
If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances are w i t h i n

specifications, check the cylinder head for warpage.
Measure along the edges, and three w a y s across the
center.
If warpage is less than 0.05 m m (0.002 in.), cylinder
head resurfacing is not required.
If warpage is between 0.05 m m (0.002 in.) and 0.2
m m (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
M a x i m u m resurface limit is 0.2 m m (0.008 in.) based
on a height of 121 m m (4.76 in.).
2. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly.

Cylinder Head Height:
Standard (New): 120.95-121.05 mm
(4.762-4.766 in.)
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
- 1 Unscrew the rocker shaft mounting bolts 2

turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to
prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm
assembly.
- 2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do
not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts.
The bolts will keep the springs and the rocker
arms on the shafts.
CAMSHAFT HOLDER BOLT LOOSENING
SEQUENCE:
4
6-36
'
'
'
Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly/Reassembly

NOTE:
Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-38).
Rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused.
When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will
keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft.
Bundle the rocker arms w i t h rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
Prior to reassembling, clean ail the parts in solvent, dry t h e m and apply lubricant to any contact points.
9
INTAKE R O C K E R S H A F T
Ql
INTAKE ROCKER
ARM ASSEMBLY
TOO
lOOOl
SPRING
EXHAUST ROCKER
ARM A
EXHAUST ROCKER
ARM B
EXHAUST ROCKER SHAFT
L e t t e r B is s t a m p e d
on rocker a r m .
L e t t e r A is s t a m p e d
on rocker a r m .
6-37
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arms arid Shafts Inspection
Measure the intake rocker shaft and exhaust rocker
shaft.
1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker
location.
3. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and

check it for an out-of-round condition.
Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:
Standard (New):
Intake:
0.0260.067 mm
(0.0010-0.0026 In.)
Service Limit: 0.067 mm (0.0026 in.)
Exhaust:
0.026-0.077 mm
(0.0010 0.0030 in.)
Service Limit: 0.077 mm (0.0030 in.)
2. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
Inspect rocker a r m
face for w e a r .
4. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the

clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all overtolerance rocker arms. If any intake
rocker arm needs replacement, replace all 3 rocker
arms in that set (primary, mid, and secondary).
6-38
VTEC Lost Motion Assemblies

Inspection
VTEC Rocker A r m s
5. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push them
manually. If they do not move smoothly, replace
the rocker arm assembly.
Push on the lost motion assembly (A) w i t h y o u r finger.

If it does not move smoothly, replace it.
A
NOTE:
Apply oil to the pistons w h e n reassembling.
When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B),
carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of
the rocker arm.
6-39
Cylinder Head
Camshaft inspection
3. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of
the cylinder head.
1. Remove the rocker arms.

2. Put the rocker shafts on the cylinder head, then
tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
Specified torque:
8 X 1 . 2 5 mm
24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 17 Ibfft)
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange
6-40
4. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the

camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and
read the end play.
Camshaft End Play:
Standard (New):
0.05 0.20 mm
(0.002 0.008 in.)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
6. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift

ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted,
scored or excessively worn.
7. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
9. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder

head. Measure the inside diameter of each
camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-ofround condition.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within
limits, goto step 11.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 10.
8
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance:

Standard (New): 0.050 0.089 mm
(0.0020-0.0035 In.)
Service Limit:
0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
8. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.
(cont'd)
6-41
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
10. Check total runout w i t h the camshaft supported on
V-blocks.
11. Measure cam lobe height.

C a m Lobe Height Standard (New):
If the total runout of the camshaft is w i t h i n the

service limit, replace the cylinder head.
If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
replace the camshaft and recheck the oil
clearance. If the clearance is still out of tolerance,
replace the cylinder head.
Camshaft Total Runout:
Standard (New):
0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit:
0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
INTAKE
PRI
34.615 m m
(1.3628 in.)
MID
36.210 m m
(1.4256 in.)
SEC
31.188 m m
(1.2279 in.)
EXHAUST
36.076 m m
(1.4203 in.)
SEC
MID
PRI
FRONT BANK
Rotate camshaft
while measuring.
EX
IN
EX
T/B
PRI
MID
SEC
REAR BANK
EX
IN
EX
- T / B
Inspect this area f o r w e a r .
6-42
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal

07757-PJ1010A
Commercially available Valve Spring Compressor
KD383 with No.32 jaws
Commercially available Valve Guide Seal Remover
KD3350
3. Install the valve guide seal remover (A).

A
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic
mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve keepers.
4. Remove the valve seal.
2. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the

spring and remove the valve keepers.
07757-PJ1010A
6-43
Cylinder Head
Valve Inspection
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

Inspection
Measure the valve in these areas.

Intake Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New); 3 3 . 9 0 - 3 4 . 1 0 mm
(1.335-1.343 in.)
114.85-115.15 mm
B Standard (New):
(4.522-4.533 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm
(0.2159-0.2163 In.)
5.455 mm (0.2148 in.
C Service Limit:
D Standard (New): 0.851.15 mm
(0.033-0.045 in.)
0.65 mm (0.026 in.)
D Service Limit:
Exhaust Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 2 8 . 9 0 - 2 9 . 1 0 mm
(1.138-1.146 in.)
B Standard (New): 112.85-113.15 mm
(4.443-4.455 In.)
C Standard (New): 5.450 5.460 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 in.)
5.420 mm (0.2134 In)
C Service Limit;
D Standard (New); 1.05-1.35 mm
(0.041 0.053 in.)
0.95 mm (0.037 in.)
D Service Limit:
1. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 m m , then

measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial
indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of
normal thrust (wobble method).
If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
recheck it using a new valve.
If the measurement is now within the service
limit, reassemble using a new valve.
If the measurement with a new valve still
exceeds the service limit, go to step 2.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:
Standard (New):
0.04 0.09 mm
(0.002 0.004 in.)
Service Limit:
0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:
Standard (New):
0.11 0.16 mm
(0.004 0.006 in.)
Service Limit:
0.24 mm (0.009 in.)
2. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured w i t h

a micrometer, f r o m the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured w i t h an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance:
Standard (New):
0.020 0.045 mm
(0.0008 0.0018 in.)
Service Limit:
0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem -to-Guide Clearance:
(0.0022 0.0031 in.)
Service Limit:
0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
6-44
Valve Guide Replacement

Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 m m 07742-0010100
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 m m 07HAH-PJ7010B
1. As illustrated below, use a commercially available
air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the
same procedure can be done using the special tool
and a conventional hammer.
/
_ 87 m m
(3.43 in.]
4. Working f r o m the camshaft side, use the driver and

an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 m m (0.1
in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line w i t h the
valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear
safety goggles or a face shield.
5. Turn the head over and drive the guide out toward
the camshaft side of head.
5.3 m m
(0.21 in.)
57 m m
(2.24 in.)
10.8 m m
(0.42 in.)
2. Select the proper replacement guides and chill

t h e m in the freezer section of a refrigerator for
about an hour.
3. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder
head to 300F (150C). Monitor the temperature
w i t h a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300F (150C); Excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
6. If a valve guide w o n ' t move, drill it out w i t h a 8 m m

(5/16 in.) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in
extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder
head if the guide breaks.
7. Remove the new guide(s) f r o m the freezer, one at a
time, as you need them.
(cont'd)
6-45
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
8. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside
of the new valve guide. Install the guide f r o m the
camshaft side of the head; use the special t o o l t o
drive the guide in to the specified installed height
(A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides to d o ,
you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height:
Intake:
2 1 . 2 0 - 2 2 . 2 0 mm (0.835
Exhaust: 2 0 . 6 3 - 2 1 . 6 3 mm (0.812
9. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide w i t h

cutting oil.
10. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
valve guide bore.
11. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while
removing it f r o m the bore.
0.874 in.)
0.852 in.)
12. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water

to remove any cutting residue.
13. Check the clearance w i t h a valve (see page 6-44).
Verify that the valve slides in the intake and
exhaust valve guides w i t h o u t exerting pressure.
07742-0010100
6-46
Valve Seat Reconditioning

If the valve guides are w o r n (see page 6-44), replace
t h e m (see page 6-45)before cutting the valve seats.
1. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a
valve seat cutter.
After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve

seating: Apply Prussian Blue c o m p o u n d (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
- 1 Carefully cut a 45 seat, removing only enough

material to ensure a smooth and concentric
seat.
- 2 Bevel the upper edge of the seat w i t h the 30
cutter and the lower edge of the seat with the
60 cutter. Check the w i d t h of the seat and
adjust accordingly.
- 3 Make one more very light pass w i t h the 45
cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by
the other cutters.
Valve Seat Width:
(0.049 0.061 in.)
Service Limit:
2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
3. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by

the blue c o m p o u n d , should be centered on the seat.
If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you
must make a second cut w i t h the 60 cutter to
move it d o w n , then one more cut w i t h the 45
cutter to restore seat width.
If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut w i t h the 30 cutter to move it
up, then one more cut w i t h the 45 cutter to
restore seat w i d t h .
NOTE: The final cut should always be made w i t h
the 45 cutter.
(confd)
6-47
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)
4. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and
measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height:
(1.841 1.872 in.)
Service Limit:
47.80 mm (1.882 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height:
(1.838-1.869 in.)
Service Limit:
47.73 mm (1.879 in.)
5. If the valve stem installed height is over the service

limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the
valve seat in the head is too deep.
6-48
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Installation

07757-PJ1010A
Commercially available Valve Spring Compressor
KD383 w i t h No.32 jaws, commercially available
Commercially available Valve Guide Seal Remover
KD3372, commercially available
9
5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the

end of the valve spring w i t h closely w o u n d coils
t o w a r d the cylinder head.
6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the

spring and install the valve keepers.
07757-PJ1010A
1. Coat the valve stems w i t h engine oil. install the

valves in the valve guides.
2. Check that the valves move up and d o w n smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide
seal installer (B).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring
(D) and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring
(F); they are not interchangeable.
F
D
7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem 2 or 3 times
w i t h a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of
the valve and valve keepers. Tap the valve stem
only along its axis so you do not bend the stem.
A
6-49
Cylinder Head
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
1. A p p l y a light coat of oil around the camshaft oil
seal.
2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the
cylinder head.
- 1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely.
- 2 Tap the oil seal into the cylinder head about 0.5
- 1 . 5 m m ( 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 6 in.) f r o m the surface of
the cylinder head.
3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then
install the camshaft thrust cover (C). A l w a y s use a
new O-ring (D).
4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
5. Loosen the valve adjusting screws.

6. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely
install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
properly positioned on the valve stems.
7. Tighten each bolt 2 turns at a t i m e in the sequence
s h o w n below to ensure that the rockers do not bind
on the valves.
Specified torque:
8x1.25 mm
24 N m (2.4 kgf-m, 17 Ibfft)
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange
(D
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
8. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new

gasket (B).
A
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
6-50
Cylinder Head Installation

9. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft
pulley (B).
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N - m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
Install the cylinder heads in the reverse order of

removal:
1. Clean the cylinder heads and block surface.
2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A) w i t h
new O-rings (B).
3. Install the dowel pins (C) and new cylinder head
gaskets (D).
D
12 x 1.25 m m
9 0 N - m (9.2 k g f - m , 6 7 I b f f t )
A p p l y engine oil to the bolt threads.
(cont'd)
6-51
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
4. Clean the t i m i n g belt drive pulley.
drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil p u m p .
B
6-52

the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the
back covers.
FRONT:
7. A p p l y clean engine oil to the threads and flange of

the cylinder head bolts.
8. Tighten the cylinder head bolts sequentially in 3
steps. Perform each step twice.
1st step torque; 39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibfft)
2nd step torque: 69 N-m (7.0 kgf-m, 51 Ibfft)
3rd step torque: 98.1 N-m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.3 Ibfft)
Use a beam-type torque wrench. When using a
preset-type torque w r e n c h , be sure to tighten
slowly and not to overtighten.
If a bolt makes any noise while y o u are torquing it,
loosen the bolt, and retighten it f r o m the 1st step.
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS TORQUE S E Q U E N C E :
(D
(D
9. Install the exhaust manifold and tighten the nuts in

a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, beginning w i t h
the inner nut (see page 9-3). Always use a new
exhaust manifold gasket.
10. Install exhaust pipe A and bracket, then install the
cover (see page 9-4).
11. Install the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-22).
12. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-13).
13. Install the cylinder head covers.
NOTE:
Before installing the cylinder head cover, clean
the cylinder head contacting surfaces w i t h a shop
towel.
Take care not to damage the spark plug seals
when installing the cylinder head cover.
Visually check the spark plug seals for damage.
Replace any washer that is damaged or
deteriorated.
(cont'd)
6-53
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
14. Tighten the nuts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step,
tighten all nuts, in sequence, t o 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 Ibfft).
16. Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and

nuts sequentially in 2 or 3 steps. A l w a y s use a new
intake manifold gasket.
Specified torque:
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
15. Install the water passage (A). Always use a n e w CDring (B) and new gaskets (C).
17. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and
connectors are installed correctly.
8 x 1.25 mm
2 2 N-m(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
6-54
TDC Sensor Replacement

1. Set the No.1 piston at TDC (see page 6-22).
2. Remove the upper covers.
7. Remove the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor f r o m the back

cover.
5 x 0.8 m m
3. To hold the t i m i n g belt adjuster in its current

position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight
(see step 14 on page 6-21).
4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about 5 or 6 turns, then
remove the t i m i n g belt f r o m the front camshaft
pulley (see step 16 on page 6-22).
5. Remove the front camshaft pulley.
8. Install the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor in reverse order of

removal. Reinstall the timing belt and other
removed components (see page 6-22).
9 0 N m (9.2 k g f m , 6 7 I b f f t )
A p p l y engine oil t o
the bolt threads.
6. Disconnect the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor connector, then

remove the back cover.
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
6-55
Cylinder Head
CKP Sensor Replacement
1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from
the alternator belt, then remove the alternator belt
2. Loosen the adjusting bolt, locknut and mounting
bolt, then remove the power steering (P/S) pump
belt (see step 6 on page 6-20).
3 . Remove the dipstick and tube (see step 9 on page
6-20).
4. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see step 10 on page
6-20).
5. Remove the upper and lower covers (see step 12
on page 6-21).
6. Remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump.
7 . Install the CKP sensor in the reverse order of

removal.
8-5S
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special T o o l s
7-2
7-3
Drive Plate R e m o v a l and Installation

Connecting Rod and Crankshaft E n d Play
Inspection
Crankshaft Main Bearing R e p l a c e m e n t ......................
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Crankshaft and Pistons R e m o v a l
Crankshaft Inspection
Block and Piston Inspection
Cylinder Honing
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod R e p l a c e m e n t
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection
Piston Rings Replacement
Crankshaft and Piston Installation
Pulley E n d Crankshaft S e a l Installation-ln-car
T r a n s m i s s i o n E n d Crankshaft S e a l Installation-ln-car
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-10
7-12
7-14
7-15
7-17
7-18
7-21
7-22
7-24
7-29
.7-29
Engine Block
Special Tools
Ref. No.
(D
Tool Number
07LAD-PT3010A
07VAD-P8A010A
07749-0010000
Description
Oil Seal Driver
Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 m m I.D.
Driver
Qty
1
1
1
VTEC SOLENOID
V A L V E / O I L FILTER A S S E M B L Y
Engine Block
Component Location index (cont'd)
MAIN BEARING CAPS
7-4
PISTON RINGS
SNAP RING
PISTON PIN
R e m o v a l , p a g e 7-18
PISTON
R e m o v a l , p a g e 7-12
M e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-15
CONNECTING ROD
E n d p l a y , p a g e 7-7
S m a l l e n d m e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-18
ENGINE BLOCK
C y l i n d e r b o r e i n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-15
W a r p a g e i n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-15
C y l i n d e r b o r e h o n i n g , p a g e 7-17
R i d g e r e m o v a l , p a g e 7-12
CONNECTING ROD BEARING

C l e a r a n c e , p a g e 7-10
S e l e c t i o n , p a g e 7-10
D O W E L PIN
CONNECTING ROD BEARING CAP

CONNECTING ROD BOLT

T i g h t e n i n g , p a g e 7-24
7-5
Engine Block
Drive Plate Removal and Installation
Remove the 8 drive plate bolts, then separate the drive
plate from the crankshaft flange. After installation,
tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
7-6
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection

1, Measure the connecting rod end play w i t h a feeler
gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and
crankshaft (C).
Connecting Rod End Play;
Standard (New): 0 . 1 5 - 0 , 3 5 mm (0.006
Service Limit:
0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
3. Push the crankshaft firmly away f r o m the dial

indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
t o w a r d the indicator; dial reading should not
exceed the service l i m i t
0.014 in.)
Crankshaft End Play:
Standard (New): 0 . 1 0 0 . 3 5 mm (0.004
Service Limit:
0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
0.014 in.)
2. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance,

install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it still
out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft (see page
7-12).
4. If end play is excessive, inspect the thrust washers

and the thrust surface on the crankshaft. Replace
parts as necessary. Thrust washer thickness is
fixed and must not be changed either by grinding
or s h i m m i n g .
7-
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
Main Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance,
remove the main caps and bearing halves.
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half w i t h a
clean shop t o w e l .
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main
journal.
NOTE: If the engine is still in the car w h e n y o u bolt
the main cap d o w n to check the clearance, the
weight of the crankshaft and drive plate will flatten
the plastigage further than just the torque on the
cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an
accurate reading, support the crank w i t h a jack
under the counterweights, and check only 1
bearing at a time.
4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the
bolts (see page 7-24). Do not rotate the crankshaft.
5. Remove the caps and bearing halves, and measure
the widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:
(0.0008 0.0017 in.)
Service Limit:
0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
7 8
6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,

(remove the engine if it's still in the car), remove
the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the
bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the
same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not
file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to
adjust clearance.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained
by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings,
replace the crankshaft and start over.
3. Use the crankshaft bore codes and journal codes to

select the appropriate main bearings f r o m the table.
Main Bearing Selection

Crankshaft Bore Code Location
Larger crank bore
1. Letters or Bars have been stamped on the end of

the block as a code for the size of each of the 4
main journal bores.
Aorl
B o r II
If you cannot read the codes because of an

accumulation of dirt and dust do not scrub them
with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with
solvent or detergent.
No. 4 B O R E
(DRIVE PLATE END)
No. 1 B O R E
(PULLEY END)
D o r llll
S m a l l e r bearing (Thicker)
1 or I
Red/
Pink
Pink
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
2 o r II
Pink
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
3 or III
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
Green
4 o r llll
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
Green
Green/
Brown
5 o r Hill
Yellow/
Green
Green
Green/
Brown
Brown
6 o r llllll
Green
Green/
Brown
Brown
Brown/
Black
Smaller
main
Journal
Main Journal Code Locations
C o r III
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
NOTE:
W h e n using bearing
h a l v e s of d i f f e r e n t c o l o r s ,
it d o e s n o t m a t t e r w h i c h c o l o r
is u s e d in t h e t o p o r b o t t o m .
C o l o r c o d e i s o n t h e d e g e of
the bearing.
2. Number or bars have been stamped on the

crankshaft No. 1 web as a code for the main journal
sizes.
3 33\
No. 1 J O U R N A L
(PULLEY END)
No. 4 J O U R N A L
(DRIVE PLATE END)
7-9
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection
6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,

remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new,
complete bearing w i t h the same color code, and
recheck the clearance. Do not file, s h i m , or scrape
the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half.

2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half
w i t h a clean shop t o w e l .
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still

incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.
3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod j o u r n a l .

4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the
bolts (see page 7-24). Do not rotate the crankshaft.
5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure
the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:
(0.0008 0.0017 in.)
Service Limit:
0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
7-10
'
Rod Bearing Selection

1. Inspect the connecting rods for cracks and heat
damage.
4. Use the connecting rod bore codes and journal

codes to select the appropriate rod bearing f r o m
the table.
L a r g e r big e n d b o r e
Bearing Identification
Connecting Rod Bore/Journal Code Locations

2. Each rod has a tolerance range (from 0 to 0.024 m m
(0.0009 in.), in 0.006 m m (0.0002 in.) increments)
depending on the size of its big end bore.
It's then stamped w i t h a code (1,2,3, or 4/I, II, III,or
llll) indicating the range.
You may find any combination of 1,2,3, or 4/I, II, III,
or llll in any engine.
Half of the code is stamped on the bearing cap and
the other half is stamped on the rod. If the codes
are indecipherable because of an accumulation of
dirt and dust, do not scrub t h e m with a wire brush
or scraper. Clean t h e m only w i t h solvent or
detergent.
Color c o d e is on the
e d g e of t h e b e a r i n g
2 or
orl
II
3 or
III
4 o r llll
S m a l l e r bearing (Thicker)
A or I
Pink
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
B o r II
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
Green
C or III
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
Green
Green/
Brown
D or llll
Yellow/
Green
Green
Green/
Brown
Brown
E or Hill
Green
Green/
Brown
Brown
Brown/
Black
F or llllll
Green/
Brown
Brown/
Black
Black
Normal Bore Size: 56.0 mm (2.20 in.)
f
Half of n u m b e r o r b a r
is s t a m p e d o n b e a r i n g c a p
a n d t h e other half is
s t a m p e d on rod.
Smaller
rod
Journal
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
Brown
N O T E : W h e n using bearing halves

of d i f f e r e n t c o l o r s , it d o e s n o t
m a t t e r w h i c h c o l o r i s u s e d in
t h e top or b o t t o m .
7-11
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
1. Remove the CKP sensor (A) f r o m the oil p u m p , then
remove the t i m i n g belt drive pulley (B).
4. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B) and oil
p u m p (C).
a
B
2. Remove the oil pan.
5. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon

around the top of any cylinder, remove it w i t h a
ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's
instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may
damage the piston as it is pushed out.
3. Remove the engine block end cover.
7-12
Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the

crank pin at BDC for each cylinder. Remove the
piston assembly by pushing on the connecting rod.
Take care not to damage the crank journal or
cylinder with the connecting rod.
CORRECT
7. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/

bearings in order.
8. Remove the upper bearing halves from the
connecting rods and set them aside with their
respective caps.
9. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly,
reinstall the cap on the rod.
10. To avoid mixup during reassembly, mark each
piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder
number.
11. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap
side bolts (B), then remove the bearing cap (C).
A
INCORRECT
(cont'd)
7-13
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
(cont'd)
Crankshaft Inspection
Straightness
12. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the cylinder block,

being careful not to damage the journals.
A
1. Clean the crankshaft oil passages w i t h pipe

cleaners or a suitable brush.
2. Check the keyway and threads.
3. Support the crankshaft w i t h a lathe-type tool or Vblocks.
4. Measure runout on all main journals to make sure
the crank is not bent. Rotate the crankshaft 2
complete revolutions. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more
that the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Runout:
Service Limit:
0.030 mm (0.0012 in.)
13. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the

cylinder block in the proper order.
7-14
Block and Piston Inspection

Out-of-Round a n d Taper
1. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.
1. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod

and main journal in 2 places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not
be more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round:
Service Limit:
0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
2. Measure the piston diameter at a point 16.0 mm

(0.63 in.) from the bottom of the skirt.
Piston Diameter:
Standard (New): 85.975 - 85.985 mm
(3.3848-3.3852 in.)
Service Limit:
85.965 mm (3.3844 in.)
16.0 m m
(0.63 in.)
SKIRT DIAMETER
TT
2. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main
journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper:
Service Limit:
0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
(cont'd)
7-15
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd)
3. Measure wear and taper in directions X and Y at 3
levels in each cylinder as s h o w n .
If the measurements in any cylinder are beyond
the oversize bore service limit, replace the
cylinder block.
If the block is to be rebored, refer to Piston
Clearance Inspection after reboring (refer to step
5).
Oversize
0.25: 86.250 86.265 mm (3.3957
0.50: 86.500-86.515 mm (3.4055
3.3963 in.)
3.4061 in.)
Bore Taper
Limit:
(Difference between first and third
measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
4. Check the top of the cylinder block for warpage.
Measure along the edges and across the center as
shown.
Cylinder Block Warpage:
Service Limit:
0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Cylinder Bore Size:

(3.3858 3.3864 in.)
Service Limit:
86.065 mm (3.3884 in.)
Reboring Limit: 0.50 mm (0.02 in.)
7-16
Cylinder Honing
5. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore
diameter and piston diameter.
Piston-to-Block Clearance:
(0.0006-0.0016 in.)
Service Limit:
0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
S E R V I C E LIMIT
0.08 m m (0.003 i n )
1. Measure the cylinder bores (see page 7-15). If the

cylinder block is to be reused, hone the cylinders
and remeasure the bores. Only scored or scratched
cylinder bores must be honed.
2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine
(400 grit) stone in a 60 degree Crosshatch pattern.
NOTE:
* Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer stone,
such as Sunnen, A m m c o , or equivalent.
Do not use stones that are worn or broken.
9
Oversize Piston Diameter

0.25: 86.225-86.235 mm (3.3947-3.3951 in.)
0.50: 86.475-86.485 mm (3.4045-3.4049 in,)
3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the
cylinder block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinder bores with hot soapy water, then dry and
oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use
solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the
cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the
cylinder bores after honing to the service limit,
rebore the cylinder block. Some light vertical
scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is not deep
enough to catch your fingernail and does not run
the full length of the bore.
7-1
Engine Block
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement
Disassembly
1. Apply engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A)
and turn t h e m in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up w i t h the cutouts in the piston pin
bores (B).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
Remove both snap rings (A). Start at the cutout in

the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings
carefully so they do not go flying or get lost. Wear
eye protection.
A
7-18
3. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to

approximately 158F (70C), then remove the
piston pin.
Inspection
NOTE; Inspect the piston, piston pin and connecting rod
when they are at room temperature.
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin.
3. Check the difference between the piston pin

diameter and piston pin hole diameter in the piston.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance:
Standard (New):
0.0050 to +0.0010 mm
( 0.00020 to +0.00004 in.)
Service Limit:
0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter:

(0.8646-0.8648 in.)
Service Limit:
21.954 mm (0.8643 in.)
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance:

(0.0002 0.0006 in.)
Service Limit:
0.019 mm (0.0007 in.)
(cont'd)
7-19
Engine Block
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
Reassembly
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A).
4. Install the piston pin (A). Assemble the piston (B)

and connecting rod (C) w i t h the embossed marks
(D) on the same side.
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in

the connecting rod, and the piston pin w i t h engine
oil.
3. Heat the piston to approximately 158F (70C).
5. Install the remaining snap ring.
7-20
Connecting Bod Bolt Inspection

1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt
at point A and point B.
35 m m
(1.38 in.)
20 m m
(0.79 in.)
2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point

A and point B.
Point APoint B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter:
Specification: 0 0.1 mm ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 4 in.)
3. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance,
replace the connecting rod bolt.
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
cylinder bore 1 5 - 2 0 m m ( 0 . 6 - 0 . 8 in.) f r o m the
bottom.
2. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) w i t h a feeler

gauge:
If the gap is too small, check to see if you have
the proper rings for your engine.
If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
diameter against the wear limits (see page 7-15).
If the bore is over the service limit, the cylinder
block must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap:
Top Ring
(0.008 0.014 in.)
Service Limit:
0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
2nd Ring
(0.016 0.022 in.)
Service Limit:
0.70 mm (0.028 in.)
Oil Ring
(0.008 0.028 in.)
Service Limit:
0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
7-22
3. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston

rings (B).
B
A
4. Clean all the ring grooves throughly w i t h a

squared-off broken ring or ring groove cleaner w i t h
a blade to fit the piston grooves. File down the
blade if necessary. Top ring groove and 2nd ring
grooves are 1.2 m m (0.05 in.) wide, and the oil ring
groove is 2.8 m m (0.11 in.) wide. Do not use a wire
brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring
grooves deeper w i t h the cleaning tool.
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated f r o m the
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.
Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a 1B

and the 2nd ring (B) is marked 2B. The
manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward.
6. After installing a new set of rings, measure the

ring-to-groove clearance:
Top Ring Clearance
Standard (New): 0.0350.060 mm
(0.0014 0.0024 in.)
Service Limit:
0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
2nd Ring Clearance
(0.0012 0.0022 in.)
Service Limit:
0.13 mm (0.005in.)
Piston Ring Dimensions:

Top Ring (Standard)
A : 3.1 m m (0.12 in)
B: 1.2 m m ( 0 . 0 5 in)
2nd Ring (Standard)
A : 3.4 m m (0.13 in)
B: 1.2 m m ( 0 . 0 5 in)
(cont'd)
7-23
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd)
7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they
do not bind.
8. Position the ring end gaps as s h o w n :
2ND RING G A P
D O N O T position a n y ring gap

at piston thrust surfaces.
Crankshaft and Piston Installation

Driver 07749-0010000
07VAD-P8A010A
1. Apply engine oil to the main bearings and rod
bearings.
2. Install the bearing halves in the cylinder block and
connecting rods.
3. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the block.
A p p r o x . 90'
15
TOP RING G A P
DO N O T position any ring gap
in l i n e w i t h p i s t o n p i n h o l e .
OIL RING
GAP
SPACER GAP
OIL RING G A P
4. Oil the thrust washer surfaces. Install the thrust

washers (A) in the No. 3 journal.
7-24
5. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (B) with

the arrow (C) facing the timing belt end of the
engine.
o
C\J
o
CO
8. Set the crankshaft to BDC for the cylinder you are

working on.
9. Remove the connecting rod caps. Install the ring
compressor, and check that the bearing is securely
in place.
10. Install the piston with the arrow (A) facing the
timing belt side of the engine.
A
o
o
<?
10 x 80 m m
10 x 60 m m
10 x 109 m m
10x80 mm
11, Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in

using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Maintain downward force on the ring compressor
(B) to prevent the rings from expanding before
entering the cylinder bore.
10x60 mm
6. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange,

then install the bearing cap bolts (D) and bearing
cap side bolts (E).
7. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage
(see page 7-8).
12. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and
check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
(cont'd)
7-25
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
13. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance w i t h
plastigage (see page 7-10).
14. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap,
then install the cap.
15. Apply engine oil t o the bolt threads. Torque the
bolts (B) to 20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 I b f f t ) .
18. Torque the bearing cap bolts (A), then torque the
bearing cap side bolts (B). Follow the numbered
sequence shown.
NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, it is necessary after
reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it
reaches normal operating temperature, then
continue to run it for approximately 15 minutes.
11 x 1.5 m m
7 6 N - m (7.8 k g f - m ,
56 Ibfft)
16. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (B) as
shown.
17. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head
lines up w i t h the mark on the connecting rod (turn
the bolt 90).
7-26
B
10 x
1.25 m m
4 9 N m (5.0 k g f - m ,
36 Ibfft)
19. The seal mating surface on the engine block end

cover should be dry.
20. Drive the crankshaft oil seal sequarely into the left
side cover.
22. Clean and dry the left side cover mating surfaces.
Apply a light coat of grease the crankshaft and to
the lip of the seal.
23. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of
the left side cover and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes. Install the dowel pins (A), new O-ring (B)
and the engine block end cover (C) on the cylinder
block.
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more
have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket.
Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the
old residue.
A
2 1 . Confirm that the clearance is equal all the way

around with a feeler gauge.
Clearance: 0 . 5 0 . 8 mm (0.02
0.50.8 m m
( 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 3 in.)
IP
0.03 in.)
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
24. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before

filling the engine w i t h oil.
(cont'd)
7-27
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston installation (cont'd)
25. Clean and dry the oil p u m p mating surfaces.
28. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
26. Install the oil pump (A).
29. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or

08718-0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of
the block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
- 1 Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil p u m p

- 2 Apply liquid gasket part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface
of the oil p u m p and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes.
- 3 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to
the new O-ring (B).
- 4 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor w i t h the crankshaft and install the oil
pump.
- 5 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft and
check the seal for distortion.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
30. Install the oil pan w i t h a new gasket.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
A p p l y liquid g a s k e t
a l o n g t h e b r o k e n line.
3 1 . Tighten the bolts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step,

tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 Ibfft).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
27. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen
(E).
7-28
Pulley End Crankshaft Seal

Installation - In-car
Transmission End Crankshaft Seal

installation In-car

Oil Sea! Driver 07LAD-PT301 OA

Driver 07749-0010000
07VAD-P8A010A
1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.

2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to
3. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal
until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When
the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the
crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not
distorted.
1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.

2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to
3. Using the special tools, drive the crankshaft oil seal
into the engine block end cover until the driver
attachment bottoms against the crankshaft. Align
the hole in the driver attachment w i t h the pin on the
crankshaft.
07749-0010000
07VAD-P8A010A
4. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and

check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
7-29
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Oil Pressure Switch Test

Oil Pressure Test
Engine Oil Replacement
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Oil Pump Overhaul
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-7
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref. No.
(D
8-2
Tool Number
07GAD-PH70201
07912-6110001
Description
Oil Seal Driver
Oil Filter Wrench
Qty
1
...
8-3
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Switch Test
1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) f r o m the engine oil
pressure switch (B).
B
Oil Pressure Test

If the oil pressure w a r n i n g light stays on w i t h the
engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil
level is correct:
2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch and install
an oil pressure gauge (A).
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal

(C) and the engine (ground). There should be
continuity w i t h the engine stopped. There should
be no continuity w i t h the engine running.
3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil
level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine
oil pressure.
3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the

gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
before continuing.
4. A l l o w the engine to reach operating temperature
(fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should
be:
Engine Oil Temperature: 176F (80C)
Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle:
70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm ,10 psi)
minimum
At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm ,71 psi)
minimum
2
5. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect

the oil p u m p (see page 8-7).
8-4
Engine Oil Replacement
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be

replaced at every other oil change. Under severe
conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil
change.

Oil Filter Wrench 07912-6110001
Change interval:
Every 7,500 miles {12,000 km) or 12 months
(Normal conditions)
Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
(Severe conditions).
1. Remove the oil filter w i t h the special oil filter

wrench.
2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block,
then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal.
Use only filters w i t h a built-in bypass system.
1. W a r m up the engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
B
39 N m (4.0 kgf-m, 2 9 Ibfft)

Do not overtighten.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).

4. Refill with the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
Capacity
4.0 G (4.2 U S qt, 3.5 Imp qt) at oil change.
4.4 fi (4.6 U S qt, 3.9 Imp qt) at oil change
including filter.
5.0 ft (5.3 U S qt, 4.4 Imp qt) after engine overhaul.
5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check
for oil leakage.
(cont'd)
8-5
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement (cont'd)
3. Install the oil filter by hand.
4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter
clockwise w i t h the special tool.
Tighten:
7/8 t u r n clockwise.
Tightening t o r q u e : 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
5. If 8 numbers (1 to 8) are printed around the outside

of the filter, use the following procedure to tighten
the filter.
Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against
the block, and note which number is at the
bottom.
Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise 7
numbers f r o m the one you noted. For example, if
number 2 is at the bottom w h e n the seal is lightly
seated, tighten the filter until the number 1
comes around to the bottom.
Number w h e n rubber
s e a l is s e a t e d .
N u m b e r after tightening,
Number when
rubber seal is
seated
Number after
tightening
6. After installation, fill the engine w i t h oil up to the

specified level, run the engine for more than 3
minutes, then check for oil leakage.
8-6
Oil Pump Overhaul

Exploded View
' ENGINE OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH

18 N m (1.8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
1/8 i n . B S P T ( B r i t i s h s t a n d a r d p i p e t a p e r )
28 t h r e a d s / i n c h . U s e the
p r o p e r liquid s e a l a n t .
6 x 1.0 m m
6 N - m (0.6 k g f - m , 4
Ibfft)
PUMP COVER
OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR
OIL S E A L
Replace.
PUMP HOUSING
A p p l y liquid gasket
to the mating surface of
the cylinder block
w h e n installing.
RELIEF VALVE
Valve m u s t slide freely
in t h e h o u s i n g b o r e .
R e p l a c e if it is s c o r e d .
SPRING
6 x 1.0 m m
1 2 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
SEALING BOLT
3 9 N m (4.0 k g f m , 2 9 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
8-7
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Inspection
Oil Seal Driver 07GAD-PH70201
10. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance

between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (B). If
the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the
service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
Removal
1. Drain the engine oil.
2. Turn the crankshaft so that the No. 1 piston is at
TDC (see page 6-22).
3. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-19).
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance

(0.002 0.006 in.)
Service Limit:
0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
4. Remove the idler pulley.

5. Remove the CKP sensor, then remove the t i m i n g
belt drive pulley (see page 6-56).
6. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve and oil filter
assembly (see page 6-9).
7. Remove the oil pan and the oil screen (A).
11. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between

the rotors (A) and p u m p housing (B). If the housingto-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit,
replace the oil pump assembly.
A
8. Remove the m o u n t i n g bolts and the oil p u m p
assembly (B).
9. Remove the screws f r o m the p u m p housing, then
separate the housing and cover.
8-8
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance

(0.001 0.003 in.)
Service Limit:
0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
12. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance

between the outer rotor (A) and p u m p housing (B).
If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance
exceeds the service limit, replace the oil p u m p
assembly.
Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
Standard (New); 0 . 1 4 - 0 . 1 9 m m
(0.006-0.007 In.)
Service Limit:
0.20 m m (0.008 in.)
Installation
17. Reassemble the oil pump.
18. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
19. Clean and dry the oil p u m p mating surfaces.
20. Install the oil pump (A).
- 1 Apply liquid gasket part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003 evenly to the block mating surface
of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes.
- 2 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to
the new O-rings (B).
- 3 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor w i t h the crankshaft and install the oil
pump.
- 4 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check the seal for distortion.
13. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for

scoring or other damage. Replace parts if
necessary.
14. Remove the old oil seal f r o m the oil pump.
15. Gently tap in the new oil seal until the special tool
bottoms on the pump.
2 1 . Install the oil screen (D).
16. Apply liquid thread lock to the p u m p housing

screws.
(cont'd)
8-9
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
22. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
23. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 087180003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the
block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
24. Install the oil pan w i t h a new gastet.
A p p l y liquid g a s k e t
a l o n g t h e b r o k e n line.
25. Tighten the bolts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step,

tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 I b f f t ) .
<D
8-10
CD
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold R e m o v a l and Installation
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation

Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Use new O-rings and gaskets when reassembling.
Check for folds or scratches on the surfaces of the gaskets.
Replace w i t h a new gasket if damaged.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
CHAMBER
R e p l a c e if i t is c r a c k e d o r
if t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e s
are d a m a g e d .
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
(IAT) S E N S O R
18 N - m
(1.8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
12 x 1.5 m m
26 N m
(2.7 k g f - m , 2 0 I b f f t )
('98-99 m o d e l s )
INTAKE MANIFOLD
R e p l a c e if it is c r a c k e d o r
if t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e s a r e
damaged.
THROTTLE
BODY
9-2
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f - m ,
16 I b f f t )
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation

NOTE:
Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
Check for folds or scratches on the surfaces of the gaskets.
Replace with a new gasket if damaged.
FRONT:
22
Nm
(2.2
kgfm,
16
Ibfft)
Replace.

Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts w h e n reassembling.
MUFFLERS
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
1 0 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
Replace.
Ibfft)
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
4 4 N-m
(4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 m m
33 N-m
Replace.
GASKET
Replace.
THREE W A Y CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
E X H A U S T PIPE A
GASKET
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
Replace.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC

CONVERTER TIGHTENING
SEQUENCE
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 m m
33 N-m
10 x 1 2 5 m m
1
Rejlale" ' ^
9-4
' " ' ^
<
l b f f t
>
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
Engine Cooling
Cooling System

Coolant Temperature Gauge Testing
Sending Unit Testing
Radiator Cap Test
Radiator Test
Fan Motor Test

Thermostat Test
Water Pump Inspection
Water Pump Replacement
Coolant Replacement
Thermostat Replacement
Radiator and Fans Replacement
Fan Controls

Circuit Diagram
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting
Fan control Module Input Test
Radiator Fan Switch (A or B) Test
10-2
10-5
10-7
10-7
10-8
10-8
10-9
10-9
10-10
10-10
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-19
10-20
10-21
Cooling System
UPPER RADIATOR HOSE
RADIATOR FAN SHROUD

R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 10-13
10-2
(cont'd)
10-3
Cooling System
O-RING
10-4
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test

'00-01 models:
'98-99 models:
1. Check the No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box before testing.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then
disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) f r o m the coolant
temperature gauge sending unit (B), and ground it
w i t h a jumper wire.
Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Does Not Move at

All
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect PCM
connector terminal A1 to body ground w i t h a
jumper wire.
YEL/GRN
1
12
13 | 14
15
25
26
A
27
17
18
19
20
28
29
30
21
10
23
24
32

After 30 seconds or more, does the
temperature
gauge needle move to the Hot side ?
Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check that the
pointer of the coolant temperature gauge starts
moving toward the " H " mark. Turn the ignition
switch OFF before the pointer reaches " H " on the
gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the gauge.
YES Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck,

refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 115). If the symptom/indication goes away, replace
the original PCM.
NO
If the pointer of the gauge does not move at all,

check for an open in the YEL/GRN wire. If the
wires are OK, replace the coolant temperature
gauge.
If the coolant temperature gauge works, test the
coolant temperature gauge sending unit.
G o t o step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect PCM

connector A (32P).
(cont'd)
10-5
Cooling System
#
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test (cont d)

4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
voltage between PCM connector terminal A1 and
body g r o u n d .
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect PCM

connector A (32P).
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).and watch the

coolant temperature gauge.
YEL/GRN
1
12
13
14
15
25
26
17
18
27
19
20
28 29
30
10
23
21
24
32
Is there approx. 5V ?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the fuel and temperature gauge
assembly.
NO
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure

voltage between PCM connector terminal A1 and
body g r o u n d .
YEL/GRN
G A U G E CONNECTOR C (16P)
YEL/GRN
2
9
3
10
11
Does the temperature gauge needle move at all ?

(you may have to watch it for about 30
seconds.)
NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck, refer
to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-5). If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original
PCM.B
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again, and watch the coolant temperature gauge.
Does the temperature gauge needle
go past the Hot mark ?
Go to step 5.
Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Goes Past the Hot

Mark
X X
12
14
15
16
Y E S Replace the fuel and temperature gauge

assembly.
NOThe temperature gauge needle w e n t past the
Hot mark after about 30 seconds or more.Go to
step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
gauge assembly connector C (16P).
5. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal aaA1 and gauge assembly connector
terminal C2.
12 13 14 15
Is there continuity
N O - R e p a i r open in the w i r e between PCM

connector terminal A1 and gauge connector
terminal C2.B
25 26 27
Y E S - Replace the fuel and temperature gauge

assembly.
immediately
10
17 18 19 20 21
23
28 29 30
32
24
G A U G E CONNECTOR C (16P)
YEL/GRN
1
10
2xT
11
X X
12
14
15
16
Is there continuity
Y E S Replace short in the wire between PCM

connector terminal A1 and gauge connector
terminal C2.B
NO Replace the fuel and temperature gauge
assembly.
10-6
Radiator Cap Test
Sending Unit Test

'98-99 models:
1. Disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) f r o m the coolant
temperature gauge sending unit (B).
1. Remove the radiator cap (A), w e t its seal w i t h

engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester
(B) (commercially available).
2. Apply a pressure of 9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5

kgf/cm , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).
2
2. Using an ohmmeter, measure the change in

resistance between the positive terminal (C) and
the engine (ground) w i t h the engine cold and with
the engine at operating temperature.
Temperature
Resistance ( 0 . )
133F (56C)
137
3. Check for a drop in pressure.

4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
185F ( 8 5 Q 212F(100C)
46-30
3. If the obtained readings are substantially different

f r o m the specifications above, replace the sending
unit.
10-7
Cooling System
Radiator Test
Fan Motor Test
1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully r e m o v e

the radiator cap and fill the radiator w i t h engine
coolant to the top of the filler neck.
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors f r o m the radiator fan

motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B).
T e r m i n a l side of male terminals
2. Attach the pressure tester (A) (commercially

available) to the radiator and apply a pressure of
9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 kgf/cm , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).
LOCK
A^
2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the

B terminal, and ground to the A terminal.
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in
pressure.
4. Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap.
5. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in
the engine oil.
10-8
3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly,

replace it.
Thermostat Test
Replace the thermostat if it is open at room
temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
Water Pump Inspection

2. Turn the water p u m p pulley counterclockwise.
Check that it turns freely.
3. Check for signs of seal leakage. A small amount of
" w e e p i n g " f r o m the bleed holes (A) is normal.
A
2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a

thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat w h e n it is
fully open.
STANDARD THERMOSTAT
Lift height:
above 10.0 mm (0.39 in.)
Starts opening:
'98-00 models: 169~176F (76 - 8 0 C )
'01 model:
1 6 3 - 171F ( 7 3 - 7 7 C )
Fully open:
'98-00 models: 194F (90C)
'01 model:
190F(88C)
10-9
Cooling System
Water Pump Replacement
Coolant Replacement
2. Remove the t i m i n g belt tensioner.
1. Set the heater temperature control dial to

m a x i m u m heat. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool to the touch.
3. Remove the water p u m p (A) by removing 5 bolts.
2. Remove the radiator cap.

3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m 8.7 Ibfft)

r
4. Inspect, repair and clean the O-ring groove and

mating surface on the cylinder block.
5. Install the water p u m p w i t h a new O-ring (B) in the
reverse order of removal.
6. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
4. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B)

located at the rear of the cylinder block, then loosen
the drain bolt.
5. W h e n the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain

bolt.
6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
10-10
7. Remove drain and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the

tank to the M A X mark w i t h Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
9. Install the radiator cap loosely.

10. Start the engine and let it run until it w a r m s up (the
radiator fan comes on at least twice).
11. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
and add Honda All Season.
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 if needed.
12. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine
again and check for leaks.
8. Pour Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
NOTE:
Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail.
Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Premixing is not required.
Engine Coolant Refill Capacity
[including the reservoir capacity of
(0.6 6 (0.6 U S qt, 0.5 Imp qt))] :
5.6 (5.9 U S qt, 4.9 Imp qt)
10-11
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
PIN
THERMOSTAT COVER
10-12
Radiator and Fans Replacement

1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses, and ATF cooler hoses.
UPPER RADIATOR HOSE
RADIATOR CAP
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N m (1.0 k g f - m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
UPPER BRACKET
AND CUSHION
RADIATOR
O-RING
6x
1.0 m m
7 N m (0.7 k g f - m
5 Ibfft)
DRAIN P L U G
1.0 m m
N - m (1.0 k g f - m ,
Ibfft)
FAN MOTOR
4.4 N - m ( 0 . 4 5 k g f - m ,
3.3 I b f f t )
A/C CONDENSER
FAN ASSEMBLY
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
FAN CONNECTORS
3. Disconnect the fan motor connectors.

4. Remove the radiator upper brackets, then pull up the radiator.
5. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts f r o m radiator.
6. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal.
7. Set the upper and lower cushions securely.
8. Fill the radiator w i t h engine coolant and bleed the air.
Fan Controls
10-14

Before performing any troubleshooting procedures check:
Fuses
Grounds
Cleanliness and tightness of all connectors
SYMPTOM
PROCEDURE
Radiator fan does not run at all.
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 10-17)
Both fans (radiator and condenser) do not run for

engine cooling, but they do run w i t h the A/C on.
Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting (see

page 10-19)
Both fans do not run with A/C on.
Radiator and Condenser Fans C o m m o n Circuit

Troubleshooting, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual,
(see page 21-14)
10-15
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram
IGNITION
SWITCH
BATTERY
No.41 (100A)
No.42 (50A)
- WHT-
No.57 (20A)
No.58 (20A)
YEL
BLK/YEL
No.3
(7.5A)
RADIATOR
FAN .
RELAY
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
No.6
(15A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BLK/YEL
BLU/YEL
BLU/BLK
GRN
YEL/WHT
YEL
WHT BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL MODULE
-GRN
WHT/GRN
BLK
GRN
CONDENSER
FAN MOTOR
RADIATOR
FAN MOTOR
BLK
BLK
BLK
RADIATOR
FAN SWITCH A
f Closed: Above
L 199F (93C)
BLK
RADIATOR
FAN SWITCH B
f Closed ; Above 1
L225 F(107C) J
AIR
CONDITIONING
SYSTEM
BLK
BLK
A.
G201
10-16
G101
G401
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 57 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box.
Is the fuse
4. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the

radiator fan relay 4P socket w i t h a jumper w i r e .
OK?
RADIATOR FAN R E L A Y
4P S O C K E T
1
NO - Replace the fuse and recheck.B
2. Remove the radiator fan relay f r o m the under-hood

fuse/relay box, and test it. Refer to the '98-01
3
Is the relay OK ?
female terminals
NO Replace the radiator fan relay.
Does the radiator

the radiator fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
RADIATOR F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
fan run?
N O - G o t o step 5.
5. Disconnect the jumper wire.
1
6. Disconnect the radiator fan connector.
2
3

the radiator fan relay 4P socket and the No. 2
terminal of the radiator fan connector.
Terminal side of
female terminals
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
4P S O C K E T
Is there battery
voltage?
Terminal side of
female terminals
2
3
BLU/BLK
N O - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box 1

Wire side of
female terminals
RADIATOR FAN
CONNECTOR
Is there
continuity?
NO - Repair open in the BLU/BLK wire between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan.
(cont'd)
10-17
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (conf*
the radiator fan connector and body g r o u n d .
RADIATOR FAN CONNECTOR

the radiator fan control module and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL
M O D U L E 8P C O N N E C T O R
2
1
W i r e side of
female terminals
Is there
continuity?
Is there battery
Y E S - Replace the radiator fan motor.

NO Check for an open in the BLK w i r e between
the radiator fan connector and body g r o u n d . If the
w i r e is OK, check for a poor ground at G 2 0 1 .
9. Disconnect the j u m p e r w i r e , and t u r n the ignition
switch on (II).
10. Measure the voltage between No. 3 terminal of the
radiator fan relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d .
RADIATOR F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
_1_
2
Terminal side of
female terminals
Is there battery
YES
NO
10-18
voltage?
Replace the under-hood fuse/relay b o x . B

G o t o step 11.
voltage?
Y E S - R e p a i r open in the YEL wire between the

under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan
control m o d u l e . *
NO - Perform the radiator fan control module input
tests (see page 10-20).B
Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch A connector.
5. Check the cooling system.
Is the cooling system
OK?
3. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal on

the radiator fan switch connector and body ground.
Y E S Replace the radiator fan switch A.

NO Repair the cooling system
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CONNECTOR
Is there battery
voltage?
IMO Repair open in the GRN w i r e between the
radiator fan switch A and under-hood fuse/relay
box.B
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for
continuity between the No. 1 terminal on the
radiator fan switch A connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CONNECTOR
Is there
continuity?
NO Check for an open in the BLK w i r e between
the radiator fan switch A connector and body
ground. If the w i r e is OK, check for poor ground at
G101.B
10-19
Fan Controls
Fan Control Module Input Test
Perform the f o l l o w i n g tests w i t h the radiator fan control m o d u l e 8P connector connected, the ignition switch ON (II)
and the A/C switch OFF.
If you find the cause of a p r o b l e m , correct it before y o u continue.
BLK/YEL
YEL/WHT
male terminals
Wire color
BLK
WHT
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
YEL/WHT
YEL
GRN
WHT/GRN
10-20
Test condition
Check for voltage to body
ground.
Check for battery voltage to
body ground.
Check battery voltage to
body ground: Ignition
switch-ON (II)
switch-ON (II)
switch-ON (II)
switch-ON (III)
Connect body ground:
Ignition switch-ON (II)
Check for voltage: Engine
coolant temperature below
225F(107C)
Desired result
There should be less than 1V.
voltage.
Radiator fan and condenser

fan should come on.
There should be approx. 11 V.
Possible cause if desired result is not obtained

Poor ground(G401)
An open in the wire
Blown No. 58 (20 A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
Blown No. 6 (15 A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
Blown No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the
An open in the wire
Faulty radiator fan control module
An open in the wire
Faulty radiator
condenser fan
An open in the
Faulty radiator
Faulty radiator
fan relay or
relay
wire
fan switch B
fan control module
Radiator Fan Switch (A or B) Test

NOTE; Bleed air f r o m the cooling system after installing
the radiator fan switch (see page 10-10).
1 . Remove radiator fan switch A f r o m the water
passage and radiator fan switch B f r o m the cylinder
head (see page 10-2).
2. Suspend each radiator fan switch (A) in a container
of coolant as s h o w n .
3. Heat the coolant and check the temperature with a

thermometer (B). Do not let the thermometer touch
the bottom of the hot container.
4. Measure the continuity between the A terminal (C)
and B terminal (D) according to the table.
\
Terminal
A
Operation
ON
196-203F
(91-95C)
OFF
5 - 1 5 F ( 3 - 8 C ) lower
than the temperature
w h e n it g o e s o n
ON
217-232F
(103-111C)
OFF
5 - 2 3 ( 3 - 1 3 ) lower
than the temperature
w h e n it g o e s o n
SWITCH
A
SWITCH
B
Temperature
!
I
Fuel and Emissions

Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools
DTC Troubleshooting Index

System Descriptions ........................................................
PGM-FI System

DTC Troubleshooting
Injector Replacement
Primary H02S Replacement
Secondary H02S Replacement
11-2
11-3
11-6
11-7
11-50
11-52
11-80
11-84
11-84
Idle Control System

Idle Speed Adjustment
11-85
11-86
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pressure Relieving
Fuel Pressure Test
Fuel Lines Inspection
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement
Fuel Gauge Test
Intake Air System

Throttle Body Test
Air Cleaner Element Replacement
Throttle Cable Adjustment
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
Throttle Body Assembly/Reassembly
Intake Air Bypass Control Valve Test
11-87
11-88
11-89
11-91
11-92
11-94
11-95
- 11-96
11-97
11-98
11-99
............................ 11-100
11-101
-
PCV System
PCV Valve Inspection and Test
- 11-102
EVAP System
11-103
Refer to the 1998-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for the items not shown in this section.
Outline of Accord V6 Model Change
J30A1 engine has been added.

Special Tools
Ref. No.
11-2
Tool Number
A973X-041-XXXXX
07VAJ-0040100
07406-004000A
Description
V a c u u m Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg
Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Qty
1
1
1

DTC
(MIL indication*)
P0107 (3)
Temporary DTC
Detection Item
P0171 (45)
P0170
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Circuit

Low Voltage
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Circuit
High Voltage
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Circuit Low
Voltage
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Circuit High
Voltage
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Range/Performance Problem
Circuit Low Voltage
Circuit High Voltage
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Low
Voltage
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit High
Voltage
Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary
H02S) (Sensor 1) Circuit Low Voltage
H02S) (Sensor 1) Circuit High Voltage
H02S) (Sensor 1) Slow Response
H02S) (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit
Malfunction
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary
H02S) (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor
(Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) High Voltage
H02S) (Sensor 2) Slow Response
H02S) (Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction
Fuel System Too Lean
P0172 (45)
P0170
Fuel System Too Rich
P0108 (3)
P0112 (10)
P0113 (10)
P0116 (86)
P0116
P0117 (6)
P0118 (6)
P0122 (7)
P0123 (7)
P0131 (1)
P0132 (1)
P0133(61)
P0133
P0135 (41)
P0137 (63)
P0136
P0138 (63)
P0136
P0139(63)
P0136
P0141 (65)
Note
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-47)
(see page 11-55)
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
(see page 11-56)

(see page 11-57)
(see page 11-61)
(see page 11-58)

(see page 11-59)
(see page 11-60)
(see page 11-61)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
(see page 11-63)
P1399
P0300 and
Random Misfire
some of
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0305 (75)
P0306 (76)
*: These DTCs w i l l be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w h e n the SCS service signal
line is jumped w i t h the Honda PGM Tester.
* * : The D 4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
(cont'd)
11-3

DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC
(MIL indication*)
P0301 (71)
Temporary DTC
Detection Item
P1339
No. 1 Cylinder Misfire
P0302 (72)
P1339
P0303 (73)
P1339
P0304 (74)
P1339
P0305 (75)
P1339
P0306 (76)
P1339
P0335 (4)
P0336 (4)
P0401 (80)
P0401
P0420 (67)
P0420
P0451 (91)*
P0451
P0452 (91)
P0450
P0453 (91)
P0450
P0505 (14)
P0505
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Back

up Circuit Low Voltage
Automatic Transaxle System
Malfunction
P0560 (34)
P0700** (70)
P0715** (70)
P0720** (70)
P0730** (70)
P0740** (70)
P0753** (70)
P0758** (70)
P0763** (70)
P0780** (70)
P1106(13)
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No

Signal
! Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Intermittent Interruption
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
Insufficient Flow
Catalyst System Efficiency Below
Threshold
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/
Performance Problem
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit
Low Voltage
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit
High Voltage
Idle Control System Malfunction
Note
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
(see page 11-73)
(see page 11-73)
Refer to the Automatic
Transmission DTC Troubleshooting
Index
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor

Range/Performance Problem
! Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
P1107 (13)
Circuit Low Input
__
P1108 (13)
I Circuit High Input
P1121
' Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Lower
(see page 11-75)
P1121 (7)
|
I Than Expected
*: These DTCs will be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w h e n the SCS service signal
line is j u m p e d w i t h the Honda PGM Tester.
* * : The D4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
* 1 : '98-99 models
* 2 : '00-01 models
11-4
P1106
DTC
(MIL indication*)
P1122 (7)
P1128
Temporary DTC
P1122
(5)
P1128
P1129 (5)
P1129
P1259 (22)
P1297 (20)
P1298 (20)
P1361 (8)
P1362 (8)
P1366 (58)
P1367 (58)
P1456 (90)
P1456 (90)
P1457 (90)
P1457 (90)
P1491 (12)
P1491 (12)
P1498 (12)
P1519 (14)
P1607 ( - )
Detection Item
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Higher
Than Expected
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Sensor Lower Than Expected
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Sensor Higher Than Expected
VTEC System Malfunction
Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit
Low Voltage
Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit
High Voltage
Top Dead Center (TDC) 1 Sensor
Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 1 No
Signal
Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 2
Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 2 No
Signal
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control
System Leakage (Fuel Tank System)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control
System Leakage (EVAP Canister
System)
Exhaust Gas Recircuration (EGR) Valve
Insufficient Lift
Exhaust Gas Recircuration (EGR) Valve
Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Circuit
Malfunction
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Internal Circuit Malfunction
FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction
FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction
Automatic Transaxle System
Malfunction
Page
(see page 11-75)
(see page 6-6)
(see page 11-76)
Service
Service
Service
Service
(see page 11-76)

(see page 11-76)
(see page 11-76)
(see page 11-78)
(see page 11-78)
Refer to the Automatic
Transmission DTC Troubleshooting
Index
P1676(35)*3
P1678(35)*3
P1705** (70)
P1706
P1706** (70)
P1738** (70)
P1739** (70)
P1750** (70)
P 1 7 5 1 * * (70)
P1753** (70)
P 1 7 6 8 * (70)
P1773** (70)
*: These DTCs will be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w h e n the SCS service signal
line is j u m p e d with the Honda PGM Tester.
* * : The D4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
* 3 : '01 model
#
11-5

T h e s e s y m p t o m s D O N O T t r i g g e r D i a g n o s t i c T r o u b l e C o d e s (DTCs) a n d c a u s e t h e M a l f u n c t i o n I n d i c a t o r L a m p (MIL) t o c o m e o n . If t h e M I L is
r e p o r t e d o n , c h e c k f o r DTCs. If t h e v e h i c l e has o n e o f t h e s e s y m p t o m s , d o t h e d i a g n o s t i c p r o c e d u r e f o r it, in t h e s e q u e n c e l i s t e d , u n t i l y o u f i n d
the cause.
T e s t t h e b a t t e r y (see p a g e 2 2 - 3 0 ) .
T e s t t h e s t a r t e r (see p a g e 4-7).
T e s t t h e f u e l p u m p , r e f e r t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 11-115).
4. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n w i r e s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22).
5. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n c o i l f o r ' 9 8 - 9 9 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22), o r f o r '00-01
m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-23).
6. C h e c k t h e i g n i t i o n c o n t r o l m o d u l e (ICM) i n p u t s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s
(see p a g e 4-21).
7. T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e P G M - F l m a i n r e l a y c i r c u i t , refer t o t h e '98-01
A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 11-110).
T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e M I L c i r c u i t , r e f e r t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
(see p a g e 11-91).
Symptom
Engine will not start
( M I L w o r k s O K , n o D T C s set)
Engine will not start (MIL c o m e s o n

a n d s t a y s o n , o r n e v e r c o m e s o n at a l l ,
n o DTCs set)
Engine will not start (immobilizer
indicator liqht comes on)
Hard starting
Cold
(MIL
Cold
(MIL
fast idle t o o l o w
w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set)
fast idle t o o high
w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set)
Idle s p e e d f l u c t u a t e s
( M I L w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set)
Low power
E n g i n e stalls
Difficult t o refuel
Fuel o v e r f l o w s d u r i n g r e f u e l i n g
( N o DTCs set)
11-6
1.
2.
3.
! T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e i m m o b i l i z e r s y s t e m , refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
) S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 2 2 - 2 0 4 ) .
1. T e s t t h e b a t t e r y (see p a g e 2 2 - 3 0 ) .
2. C h e c k t h e f u e l p r e s s u r e (see p a g e 11-89).
i 3. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n w i r e s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22).
i 4. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n c o i l f o r ' 9 8 - 9 9 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22), o r f o r '00-01
I
m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-23).
i 5. C h e c k t h e i g n i t i o n c o n t r o l m o d u l e (ICM) i n p u t f o r '98-99 m o d e l s
(see p a g e 4-21).
C h e c k / a d j u s t t h e i d l e s p e e d (see p a g e 11-86).
! 1.
j 2.
! 3.
1.
2.
| 3.
i 1.
2.
! 3.
1.
' 2.
3.
i 4.
I 1.
;
C h e c k / a d j u s t t h e idle s p e e d (see p a g e 11-86).

I n s p e c t / a d j u s t t h e t h r o t t l e c a b l e (see p a g e 11-98).
I n s p e c t a n d t e s t t h e t h r o t t l e b o d y (see p a g e 11-96).
C h e c k t h e f u e l p r e s s u r e (see p a g e 11-89).
C h e c k t h e f u e l p r e s s u r e (see p a g e 11-89).
T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n w i r e s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22).
T r o u b l e s h o o t the brake switch signal circuit.
T e s t t h e f u e l t a n k v a p o r c o n t r o l v a l v e , refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 11-159).
2. I n s p e c t t h e f u e l t a n k s i g n a l t u b e b e t w e e n t h e f u e l p i p e a n d t h e f u e l
tank vapor control valve.
3. I n s p e c t t h e f u e l t a n k v a p o r v e n t t u b e b e t w e e n t h e EVAP c o n t r o l
canister and the fuel tank vapor control valve.
4. C h e c k t h e E V A P c a n i s t e r , refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
(see p a g e 11-136).
R e p l a c e t h e f u e l t a n k v a p o r c o n t r o l v a l v e , refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
A l s o c h e c k for
Low compression
Intake air leaks
Locked up engine
Slipped/
b r o k e n t i m i n g belt
Contaminated fuel
Low compression
Intake air leaks
Contaminated fuel
Intake air leaks
Low compression
Intake air leaks

Faulty harness and
sensor connectors
System Descriptions
Electronic Control System
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in a signal f r o m a sensor, the PCM ignores that signal and assumes a pre-programmed
value for that sensor that allows the engine to continue to run.
Back-up Function
When an abnormality occurs in the PCM, the injectors are controlled by a back-up circuit independent of the system in
order to permit minimal driving.
Self-diagnosis
When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor, the PCM supplies ground for the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) and stores the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in erasable m e m o r y . W h e n the ignition is first turned on, the PCM
supplies ground for the MIL for 2 seconds to check the MIL bulb condition.
Two Driving Cycle Detection Method
To prevent false indications, the " t w o driving cycle detection m e t h o d " is used for some self-diagnostic functions.
When an abnormality occurs, the PCM stores it in its memory. W h e n the same abnormality recurs after the ignition
switch is turned OFF and ON (II) again, the PCM informs the driver by turning on the MIL.
(cont'd)
11-7

System Descriptions (cont'd)
PCM Data
You can retrieve data f r o m the PCM by connecting the OBD II scan tool or the Honda PGM Tester to the Data Link
Connector (DLC). The items listed in the table below c o n f o r m to SAE recommended practice. The Honda PGM Tester
also reads data beyond that recommended by SAE. Understanding this data may help you find the causes of
intermittent problems.
NOTE:
The " o p e r a t i n g v a l u e s " listed are approximate and may vary depending on the environment and the individual
vehicle.
Unless noted otherwise, " a t idle s p e e d " means idling w i t h the engine completely w a r m e d up, transmission in Park
or neutral and the A/C and all accessories turned off.
Data
Diagnostic
Trouble Code
(DTC)
Engine Speed
Vehicle Speed
Manifold
Absolute
Pressure (MAP)
Engine Coolant
Temperature
(ECT)
Primary Heated
Oxygen Sensor
(Primary H02S)
(Sensor 1),
Secondary
Heated Oxygen
Sensor
(Secondary H 0 2
S) (Sensor 2)
11-8
Description
If the PCM detects a p r o b l e m , it w i l l store it as a
code consisting of one letter and four numbers.
Depending on the problem, an SAE-defined code
(POxxx) or a Honda-defined code (P1xxx) w i l l be
output to the tester.
The PCM computes engine speed f r o m the signals
sent f r o m the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
This data is used for determining the t i m e and
amount of fuel injection.
The PCM converts pulse signals f r o m the
countershaft speed sensor into speed data.
The absolute pressure caused in the intake
manifold by engine load and speed.
The ECT sensor converts coolant temperature into

voltage and signals the PCM. The sensor is a
thermistor whose internal resistance changes w i t h
coolant temperature. The PCM uses the voltage
signals f r o m the ECT sensor to determine the
amount of injected fuel.
The H02S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas and sends voltage signals to the PCM.
Based on these signals, the PCM controls the air/
fuel ratio. When the oxygen content is high (that is,
w h e n the ratio is leaner than the stoichiometric
ratio), the voltage signal is lower. When the oxygen
content is low (that is, w h e n the ratio is richer than
the stoichiometric ratio), the voltage signal is
higher.
Operating Value
If no problem is detected,
there is no output.
Freeze Data
YES
Nearly the same as

tachometer indication
At idle speed: 680 + 50
rpm
Nearly the same as
speedometer indication
With engine stopped:
Nearly the same as
atmospheric pressure
At idle speed: 2 0 - 3 4 kPa
(150 260 m m H g , 6 - 1 0
in.Hg)
With cold engine: Same
as ambient temperature
and I AT
With engine w a r m e d up:
approx. 1 7 6 - 2 1 2 F ( 8 0 100C)
0.0-1.25 V
At idle speed:
about 0 . 1 - 0 . 9 V
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
Data
Fuel System
Short Term
Fuel Trim
Long Term
Fuel Trim
Intake Air
Temperature
(IAT)
Throttle
Position
Ignition
Timing
Calculated
Load Value
(CLV)
Description
Fuel system status is indicated as " o p e n " or
" c l o s e d " . Closed: Based on the H02S output, the
PCM determines the air/fuel ratio and controls the
Open: ignoring H02S output, the PCM refers to
signals f r o m the Throttle Position (TP), Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP), Intake Air Temperature
(IAT), Barometic Pressure (BAR0) and Engine
Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensors to control the
The air/fuel ratio correction coefficient for
correcting the amount of injected fuel w h e n Fuel
System Status is " c l o s e d " . When the ratio is leaner
than the stoichiometric ratio, the PCM increases
short tern fuel t r i m gradually, and the amount of
injected fuel increases. The air/fuel ratio gradually
gets richer, causing a lower oxygen content in the
exhaust gas. Consequently, the short term fuel t r i m
is lowered, and the PCM reduces the amount of
injected fuel. This cycle keeps the air/fuel ratio
close to the stoichiometric ratio w h e n in closed
loop status.
Long term fuel t r i m is computed f r o m short t e r m
fuel trim and indicates changes occuring in the fuel
supply system over a long period. If long term fuel
trim is higher than 1.00, the amount of injected fuel
must be increased. If it is lower than 1.00, the
amount of injected fuel must be reduced.
The IAT sensor converts intake air temperature into
voltage and signals the PCM. When intake air
temperature is low, the internal resistance of the
sensor increases, and the voltage signal is higher.
Based on the accelerator pedal position, the
opening angle of the throttle valve is indicated.
Ignition t i m i n g is the ignition advance angle set by
the PCM. The PCM matches ignition t i m i n g to the
driving conditions.
CLV is the engine load calculated f r o m the MAP
data.
Operating Valve
At idle speed: closed
Freeze Data
YES
0.731.47
YES
0.811.19
YES
With cold engine: Same

as ambient temperature
and ECT
YES
At idle speed:
approx. 10%
At idle speed: 1 0 2
BTDC w i t h the SCS
service signal j u m p e d .
At idle speed:
16 33%
At 2,500 rpm with no
load:
17-25%
YES
NO
YES
(cont'd)
11-9

PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
P G M - F I MAIN R E L A Y
rti
FUSES:
(D B A C K UP, A C C ( 4 0 A ) *
S T O P (20A)*
(DACGS (15A)*
(D BATTERY (100A) *
(DIG MAIN ( S O A ) *
N o . 1 F U E L PUMP ( 1 5 A ) *
<2) No.9 BACK UP LIGHT
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5A)*
(D No.6 ECU (PCM)
CRUISE CONTROL ( 1 5 A ) *
(DNo.11 IG COIL (15A)*
No.13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A)*
<0) No.13 C L O C K BACKUP (7.5A)*
* i n the under-hood fuse/relay box
* : in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
* : in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
A
To E C T G A U G E
11-10
* 1 : '9899 models
* 2 : '00 model
* 3 : "01 model
> C28 V C C 2
* ICMB13 <
"1
> C27 T P S
To G A U G E
ASSEMBLY,
ABS/TCS
*
C O N T R O L UNIT
> C18 S G 2
> C6 EGRL
NEPA19
<
> B7 E-EGR
CRSA5 <
> A2S P T A N K
P C S A6 <
C19 V C C t
MCSA2 <
> C17 MAP
VBSOLD5 <
TEST TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
w To C R U I S E
C O N T R O L UNIT
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
o_^5$\_o-
ENGINE MOUNT C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E
o-r^lpu-o
C 7 SG1
EVAP B Y P A S S SOLENOID VALVE
2WBSA3
<
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
C26ECT
VSVA4 <
o-^Wô
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE
VTSB12 <
o-^W^-o
"1
C 2 5 IA T
1> A 2 6
PSPSW
Dp
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
(BPP) SWITCH
A32 B K S W
* 2 , *3 |
2
* *
VTEC PRESSURE
SWITCH
I G P L S 2 C14 <
*2, *3 | p L S 3 C 3 <
G
^4
**SPARK
PLUG
icm
No. 1 IGNITION C O I L
> C10 VTM

*2.*3 I Q P L S 4 C 1 3 <
To
"SPARK
PLUG
I Q P L S 5 C12 <
PRIMARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1)
* *
IGPLS6 C23 <

C1P02SHTC
To
**SPARK
PLUG
> C16 P H 0 2 S
SECONDARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
To
o->> *** * S P A R K
6
BARO
SENSOR
(Built Into
the PCM)
11
i c m
p^n^r; P L U G
14
"ft- H-ts_a-H>
St P A R K
PLUG
,-4
ICM
ICM
p-^T;
F ^'
5
SPARK
PLUG
(cont'd)
11-11

PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
2ND C L U T C H P R E S S U R E S W I T C H
To IMMOBILIZER
UNIT
**
To IMMOBILIZER
UNIT
"
> A 2 5 JMOCD
I
J
To M U L T I P L E X
C O N T R O L UNIT "
(DRIVER'S)
*1.*2
| o P 2 S W B14,'
olf
"1
*3
3RD CLUTCH P R E S S U R E SWITCH
AA13,
2 8 I LA161
U
MO E N |
OP3SW B24 <
"1
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
SOLENOID VALVE A S S E M B L Y
LCD1 <
o-^Wv-o
SHAD7 <
ons$^-o
SHBD2
oqfû_o
SHIFT SOLENOID (SS) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y A
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
SHIFT SOLENOID (SS) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y B

i A14 D4IND
SHIFT SOLENOID (SS) V A L V E A S S E M B L Y C
SHCD3 <
_o_qfPo
. *2,*3
*1
' B14, D13 A T P N P
i 06 ATPR
m
m
5
LSA+B17
<
LSA-B8
<
> D14ATP2
LSB+B25
<
i D15ATP1
LSB-B18 <
i D8ATPD4
A U T O M A T I C T R A N S A X L E (A/T) C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY A
D8ATPD3
n
11
11
A U T O M A T I C T R A N S A X L E (A/T) C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A S S E M B L Y B
El
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
NM 011 <
\ MAINSHAFT
7 SPEED SENSOR
NMSGD12 <
NCD10
NCSGD16
<
* A T S F T P A11
3
* V R E F A7
\ COUNTERSHAFT
) SPEED SENSOR
i
i
ABS/TCS
CONTROL
UNIT*
* T H L O U T A31 <
* P F I N H A13 <
3
* F P T D R A22 <
PCM A (32P)
5 6 7
8 9
1 2 3 4
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 29 30 31
25 26 27
PC m
1 2
/ '12
22
13 14
/ *2l
PCM B (25P)
10
10
23
32
24
1
9
c ( 3 i P)
8 9 1C
'16 17 18 IS 20 21 /
2 30 /
26 27 2 8
?
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
11-12
3 4 5
6 7 8
11 12 13 14 15
17 18
21 22
23 24 25
P C M D (16P)
5 6
2
10
20
1
2 3
6 7 8 9 10 11
13 14 15
16
5
12
PCM inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P)

1
2
MTRTW MCS
12
13
IMO
IMO
LMP EHfflNH
3
2WBS
14
D5
IND
25
IMO
CD
4
VSV
15
FLR
16
IMO
EN
26
27
ACS
PSPSW
5
CRS
6
PCS
7
VREF
8
S02S
HTC
17
ACC
18
MIL
19
NEP
21
20
22
FANC K-LINE FPTDR
28
ILU
29
30
31
PTANK ELD THIDUT
9
VSS
OUT
10
SCS
11
ATSFTP
23
SHQ2S
24
STS
32
BKSW
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 12 V.
W i r e color
Terminal
Terminal n a m e
number
YEL/GRN
MTRTW
2
GRN/WHT
BLU
4
5
LT GRN/
WHT
BLU/GRN
RED/YEL
ORN/GRN
LT G R N
ATSFTP (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
Sends transmission gear

switch signal.
PNK
IMOLMP (IMMOBLIZER
I N D I C A T O R LIGHT)
IMOEN (IMMOBILZER
ENABLE SIGNAL)
D 4 I N D (D4 I N D I C A T O R )
Drives immobilizer
indicator light.
Sends immobilizer enable
signal.
Drives D4 indicator light.
FLR ( I M M O B I L I Z E R F U E L
P U M P RELAY)
IMOEN (IMMOBILIZER
ENABLE SIGNAL)
A C C (A/C C L U T C H RELAY)
D r i v e s f u e l p u m p relay.
BLU/WHT
10
BRN
12
13*
14
17
BLU
GRN/BLK
15
16*
GRN/YEL
3
Drives EVAP canister purge

valve.
Provides reference voltage

to ABS/TCS control unit.
Drives secondary heated
o x y g e n sensor heater.
BLK/WHT
Sends engine coolant

temperature signal.
Drives engine m o u n t
control solenoid valve.
Drives EVAP bypass
solenoid valve.
Drives EVAP canister vent
shut valve.
Detects c r u i s e c o n t r o l s i g n a l .
VREF (REFERRENCE
VOLTAGE)
S02SHTC (SECONDARY
HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR
HEATER C O N T R O L )
V S S O U T (VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL)
S C S (SERVICE CHECK
SIGNAL)
11*
MCS (ENGINE MOUNT

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE)
2 W B S (EVAP B Y P A S S
SOLENOID VALVE)
VSV (EVAP CANISTER VENT
SHUT VALVE)
CRS (CRUISE C O N T R O L
SIGNAL)
PCS (EVAP C A N I S T E R
PURGE V A L V E )
Description
BLU
RED
Sends vehicle speed sensor

signal.
Detects s e r v i c e c h e c k
c o n n e c t o r s i g n a l (the s i g n a l
c a u s i n g a DTC i n d i c a t i o n )
Sends immobilizer enable

signal
D r i v e s A / C c l u t c h relay.
Signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
At idle: 0 V
A b o v e idle: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g , e n g i n e c o o l a n t , b e l o w 147F (64
C): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g , e n g i n e c o o l a n t , a b o v e 147F (64
C): d u t y c o n t r o l l e d
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
With fully w a r m e d up engine running: duty controlled
Depending o n vehicle speed: pulses
W i t h the service check signal shorted w i t h t h e Honda
P G M Tester: 0 V
W i t h t h e s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l o p e n e d : a b o u t 5 V or
battery voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in p a r k p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 4 V
W i t h t h e s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l o p e n e d : a b o u t 5 V or
battery voltage
W i t h immobilizer indicator light turned O N : 0 V
With immobilizer indicator light turned OFF: battery voltage
W i t h D4 i n d i c a t o r l i g h t t u r n e d O N : 0 V
W i t h D 4 i n d i c a t o r l i g h t t u r n e d OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
0 V f o r t w o s e c o n d s after t u r n i n g i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N
(II), t h e n b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
With compressor ON: 0 V

W i t h c o m p r e s s o r OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
(cont'd)
11-1

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P)
2
1
MTRTW MCS
12
IMO
LMP
13
IMO
ENfRNH
3
2WBS
14
D5
IND
25
IMO
CD
4
VSV
15
FLR
16
IMO
EN
27
26
PSPSW ACS
5
CRS
6
PCS
7
VREF
17
18
MIL
19
NEP
ACC
28
29
ILU
PTANK
8
S02S
HTC
20
FANC
9
VSS
OUT
22
21
K-LINE FPTDR
30
31
ELD THLOUT
10
scs
ATSFTP
23
SHQ2S
24
STS
11
32
BKSW
N O T E : S t a n d a r d battery voltage is 12 V .
Terminal
number
18
W i r e color
GRN/ORN
19
20
BLU
GRN
21
GRY
22*
GRN/RED
Terminal name
MIL (MALFUNCTION
I N D I C A T O R LIGHT)
NEP {ENGINE SPEED PULSE)
FANC (RADIATOR FAN
CONTROL)
K-LINE
FPTDR ( F R A M E T O
POWERTRAIN TORQUE
D O W N REQUEST)
S H 0 2 S (SECONDARY
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR,
S E N S O R 2)
STS (STARTER SWITCH
SIGNAL)
IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER CODE)
P S P S W (P/S PRESSURE
SWITCH SIGNAL)
23
WHT/RED
24
BLU/ORN
25
26
RED
GRN
27
BLU/RED
A C S (A/C S W I T C H S I G N A L )
28
WHT/RED
29
LTGRN
30
GRN/RED
ILU ( I N T E R L O C K C O N T R O L
UNIT)
P T A N K (FUEL T A N K
PRESSURE SENSOR)
ELD (ELECTRICAL L O A D
DETECTOR)
31 *
32
YEL/GRN
WHT/BLK
* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
11-14
T H L O U T (THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR O U T P U T
SIGNAL)
B K S W (BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH)
Description
Drives MIL.
Outputs engine speed pulse.
Drives radiator fan relay.
Sends and receives scan
tool signal.
Detects engine retard
request signal.
Signal
With
With
With
With
With
With
MIL turned O N ; 0 V
M I L t u r n e d OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
engine running: pulses
radiator fan running: 0 V
radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
W i t h TCS operating: about 5 V

W i t h T C S n o t o p e r a t i n g : a b o u t 2.5 V
Detects secondary heated

W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y o p e n e d f r o m idle w i t h f u l l y
o x y g e n s e n s o r ( s e n s o r 2)
w a r m e d u p e n g i n e : a b o v e 0.6 V
signal.
W i t h t h r o t t l e q u i c k l y c l o s e d : b e l o w 0.4 V
D e t e c t s s t a r t e r s w i t c h s i g n a l . W i t h s t a r t e r s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h s t a r t e r s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
Detects i m m o b i l i z e r signal.
D e t e c t s PSP s w i t c h s i g n a l .
At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead position: 0 V
A t i d l e w i t h s t e e r i n g w h e e l at f u l l lock: b a t t e r y
voltage
Detects A/C switch signal.
W i t h A/C switch O N : 0 V
W i t h A / C s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 5V
Sends Interlock control
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d b r a k e p e d a l
signal
depressed: about 0 V
D e t e c t s FTP s e n s o r s i g n a l .
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d f u e l f i l l c a p :
o p e n e d : a b o u t 2.5 V
D e t e c t s ELD s i g n a l .
W i t h p a r k i n g l i g h t s t u r n e d o n at i d l e : a b o u t 2.5
3.5 V
With low beam headlights turned on at idle: about 1.52.5 V
Sends TP sensor signal.
W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y o p e n : a b o u t 4.8 V
W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y c l o s e d : a b o u t 0.5 V
Detects b r a k e p e d a l
position switch signal.
W i t h brake p e d a l r e l e a s e d : 0 V
W i t h brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (25P)
1
IGP1
9
IGP2
PG1
10
PG2
20
LG1
11
INJ1
3
INJ5
4
INJ4
12
VTS
14
13
ICM OR2SW*!
ATPNK
21
VBU
7
8
6
INJ6 E-EGR USA-
5
INJ2
22
LG2
18
17
LSA+ LSB-
15
INJ3
24
23
IACV
25
OP
3SW
LSB+
Terminal
number
1
W i r e color
Terminal name
YEL/BLK
IGP1 (POWER S O U R C E )
2
3
4
5
6
7
BLK
BLK/RED
YEL
RED
WHT/BLU
PNK
PG1 (POWER G R O U N D )
INJ5 ( N o . 5 INJECTOR)
INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR)
INJ2 ( N o . 2 I N J E C T O R )
I N J 6 ( N o . 6 INJECTOR)
E-EGR
WHT
YEL/BLK
LSA - (A/T CLUTCH

PRESSURE C O N T R O L
S O L E N O I D V A L V E A - SIDE)
IGP2 (POWER S O U R C E )
10
11
12
BLK
BRN
GRN/YEL
13*
YEL/GRN
14*
BLU/BLK
14*
PG2 (POWER G R O U N D )
I N J 1 ( N o . 1 INJECTOR)
V T S (VTEC S O L E N O I D
VALVE)
ICM (IGNITION CONTROL
MODULE)
I O P 2 S W ( 2 N D OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH)
ATPNP (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
INJ3 ( N o . 3 INJECTOR)
LSA + (A/T CLUTCH
S O L E N O I D V A L V E A + SIDE)
LSB - (A/T C L U T C H
S O L E N O I D V A L V E B - SIDE)
LG1 (LOGIC G R O U N D )
V B U ( V O L T A G E B A C K UP)
BLU/WHT
15
17
BLU
RED
18
GRN
20
21
BRN/BLK
VVHT/YEL
22
23
BLK*
BRN/BLK*
BLK/BLU
24
BLU/WHT
25
ORN
LG2 (LOGIC G R O U N D )
Signal
Description
Power source for the PCM
circuit.
G r o u n d f o r the PCM circuit.
Drives N o . 5 injector.
Drives No. 4 injector.
D r i v e s EGR v a l v e .
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A p o w e r
supply negative terminal
circuit.
D r i v e s VTEC s o l e n o i d v a l v e .
Sends ignition pulse.
Detects 2 n d oil p r e s s u r e
switch.
Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e
switch signal.
solenoid valve A power
supply positive terminal
solenoid valve B power
supply negative terminal
G r o u n d for the PCM circuit.
circuit.
P o w e r s o u r c e f o r t h e DTC
memory.
With
With
Less
With
t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 0 V
t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
engine r u n n i n g : pulses
W i t h EGR o p e r a t i n g : d u t y c o n t r o l l e d
W i t h EGR n o t o p e r a t i n g : a b o u t 0 V
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
W i t h e n g i n e at l o w r p m : 0 V
W i t h e n g i n e at h i g h r p m : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : a b o u t 10 V ( d e p e n d i n g o n
engine speed)
In Park o r N e u t r a l : 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e

B a t t e r y v o l t a g e at all t i m e s
IACV (IDLE AIR C O N T R O L

VALVE)
O P 3 S W (3RD OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH)
LSB + (A/T C L U T C H
SOLENOID VALVE B
SIDE)
D r i v e s IAC v a l v e .
Detects 3 r d oil p r e s s u r e
switch.
solenoid valve B p o w e r
supply positive terminal
'98-93 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
(cont'd)
11-1

PCM Inputs and Outputs at connector C {31P)
1
4
2
3
P02S
IGPLS1
HTC ALTC IGPLS3
14
12
13
IGPLS5 IGPLS4 IGPLS2
23
IGPLS6
25
IAT
5
ALTF
6
EGRL
16
17
PH02S MAP
26
ECT
27
TPS
7
SG1
18
SG2
8
9
10
CKPP CKPM VTM
19
20
21
VCC1 TDC1P TDC1M
28
VCC2
29
30
TDC2P TDC2M
Terminal
number
1
W i r e color
Terminal name
BLK/WHT
WHT/GRN
P02SHTC (PRIMARY HEATED

O X Y G E N S E N S O R HEATER
CONTROL)
ALTC (ALTERNATOR
CONTROL)
I G P L S 3 (No. 3 IGNITION COIL
PULSE)
IGPLS 1 ( N o . 1 I G N I T I O N COIL
PULSE)
A L T F ( A L T E R N A T O R FR
SIGNAL)
E G R L (EGR V A L V E LIFT
SENSOR)
SG1 (SENSOR G R O U N D )
CKPP (CKP S E N S O R P SIDE)
C K P M (CKP S E N S O R M SIDE)
V T M (VTEC P R E S S U R E
SWITCH SIGNAL)
PULSE)
PULSE)
PULSE)
P H 0 2 S (PRIMARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR, SENSOR
3*2, *3
WHT/BLU
4*2, *3
YEL/GRN
WHT/RED
WHT/BLK
7
8
9
10
GRN/WHT
BLU
WHT
BLU/BLK
12* ' *
13* ' *
U
* 2 . *3
BLK/RED
BRN
BLU/RED
16
WHT
17
RED/GRN
18
19
GRN/BLK
YEL/RED
20
GRN
21
RED
23*2. * 3
BRN/WHT
25
RED/YEL
26
RED/WHT
27
RED/BLK
28
YEL/BLU
29
YEL
30
BLK
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
11-16
1)
MAP (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE S E N S O R )
SG2 (SENSOR G R O U N D )
VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE)
T D C 1 P C T D C S E N S O R 1P
SIDE)
T D C 1 M (TDC S E N S O R 1 M
SIDE)
PULSE)
IAT ( I N T A K E AIR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
ECT ( E N G I N E C O O L A N T
TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
TPS (THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR)
VCC2 ( S E N S O R V O L T A G E )
T D C 2 P (TDC2 S E N S O R P
SIDE)
T D C 2 M (TDC2 S E N S O R M
SIDE)
Description
Drives primary heated
o x y g e n sensor heater.
Sends alternator control
signal.
Drives No. 3 ignition coil.
Signal
With fully w a r m e d up engine running: duty
controlled
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : a b o u t 0 V 5 V ( d e p e n d i n g
o n electrical load)
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): 0 V
W i t h engine running: pulses

D e t e c t s a l t e r n a t o r FR s i g n a l .
D e t e c t s EGR v a l v e lift
sensor signal.
G r o u n d for M A P sensor.
D e t e c t s CKP s e n s o r .
G r o u n d f o r CKP s e n s o r .
Detects VTEC pressure
switch signal.
With engine running: about 0 V5 V (depending

o n electrical load)
A t i d l e : a b o u t 1.2 V
With
With
With
With
e n g i n e at l o w r p m : 0 V
e n g i n e at h i g h r p m : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): 0 V
engine r u n n i n g : pulses

Detects p r i m a r y heated
o x y g e n s e n s o r ( s e n s o r 1)
sigal.
Detects M A P sensor signal.
Sensor ground.
Power source to MAP
sensor.
Detect TDC sensor 1.
W i t h throttle fully o p e n e d f r o m idle w i t h fully,

w a r m e d u p e n g i n e : a b o v e 0.6 V
W i t h t h r o t t l e q u i c k l y c l o s e d : b e l o w 0.4 V
A t i d l e : a b o u t 1.0 V ( d e p e n d i n g o n e n g i n e s p e e d )
Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s .
G r o u n d f o r T D C s e n s o r 1.
Detects I A T s e n s o r s i g n a l .
D e t e c t s ECT s e n s o r s i g n a l .
Detects T P s e n s o r s i g n a l .
Provides sensor voltage.
Detects T D C s e n s o r 2.
G r o u n d f o r T D C s e n s o r 2.
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): 0V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.1 - 4 . 8 V
( d e p e n d i n g o n i n t a k e air t e m p e r a t u r e )
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 . 1 - 4 . 8 V
(depending on engine coolant temperature)
W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y o p e n : a b o u t 4.8 V
W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y c l o s e d : a b o u t 0.5 V
PCM inputs and Outputs at Connector D (16P)
1
LC
2
SHB
6
ATPR
7
SHA
13
ATPNP*
OP2SW*
14
ATPD2
8
9
ATPD3 ATPD4
15
ATP1
5
VBSOL
3
SHC
10
NC
11
NM
12
NMSG
16
NCSG
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 1 2 V .
Terminal
number
1
W i r e color
YEL
Description
Signal
LC ( T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE)
S H B (SHIFT S O L E N O I D
V A L V E B)
Drives torque converter clutch

solenoid valve.
D r i v e s s h i f t s o l e n o i d v a l v e B.
W i t h lock-up O N : battery voltage

W i t h l o c k - u p OFF: 0 V
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 1st, 2 n d g e a r s : b a t t e r y
voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 3 r d , 4th g e a r s : a b o u t 0 V
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 1st a n d 3 r d g e a r s : b a t t e r y
voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 2 n d a n d 4th g e a r s : 0 V
Terminal name
GRNAA/HT
GRN
SHC (SHIFT C O N T R O L
S O L E N O I D V A L V E C)
Drives shift control solenoid

v a l v e C.
BLK/YEL
WHT
BLU/YEL
VBSO L (BATTERY V O L T A G E
FOR S O L E N O I D V A L V E )
ATPR ( T R A N S M I S S I O N
RANGE SWITCH)
S H A (SHIFT S O L E N O I D
VALVE A)
Power source for solenoid

valve.
switch signal.
Drives shift solenoid valve A.
PNK
YEL
10
BLU
11
RED
12
WHT
ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
ATPD4 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
NC ( C O U N T E R S H A F T SPEED
SENSOR)
N M ( M A I N S H A F T SPEED
SENSOR)
N M S G ( M A I N S H A F T SPEED
SENSOR GROUND)
ATPNP (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
O P 2 S W ( 2 N D OIL P R E S S U R E
SWITCH)
ATP2 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
ATP1 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
NCSG (COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED S E N S O R G R O U N D )
switch signal.
Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range
switch signal.
Detects countershaft speed
sensor signals.
Detects m a i n s h a f t speed
sensor signals.
G r o u n d for mainshaft speed
sensor.
switch signal.
D e t e c t s 2 n d oil p r e s s u r e
switch.
switch signal.
switch signal.
Ground for countershaft
speed sensor.
13* *
13*Y*
BLU/WHT
BLU/BLK
14
BLU
15
BRN
16
GRN
In R p o s i t i o n : 0 V
W i t h engine r u n n i n g in 2 n d , 3rd gears: battery
voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 1st, 4 t h g e a r s : a b o u t 0 V
In D3 p o s i t i o n : 0 V
In D 4 p o s i t i o n : 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 5 V o r b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II), a n d f r o n t w h e e l s
rotating: battery voltage
In Park o r N e u t r a l : 0 V
In
In
In
In
2nd position: 0 V
any other position: battery voltage
1st p o s i t i o n : 0 V
any other position: battery voltage
* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
(cont'd)
11-17

Vacuum Hose Routing '98-99 models:
CRUISE CONTROL DIAPHRAGM
F U E L I N J E C T I O N A I R (FIA) C O N T R O L V A L V E
11-18
'00-01 models:
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
INTAKE AIR B Y P A S S C O N T R O L V A L V E
(cont'd)
11-19
PRIMARY HEATED O X Y G E N S E N S O R {PRIMARY

H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 1)
(2) S E C O N D A R Y H E A T E D O X Y G E N S E N S O R
( S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 2)
M A N I F O L D A B S O L U T E P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R
E N G I N E C O O L A N T T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) S E N S O R
I N T A K E A I R T E M P E R A T U R E (IAT) S E N S O R
(D F U E L I N J E C T I O N A I R (FIA) C O N T R O L V A L V E
I D L E A I R C O N T R O L (IAC) V A L V E
T H R O T T L E B O D Y (TB)
FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL PULSATION DAMPER
@ FUEL FILTER .
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
F U E L P U M P (FP)
F U E L TANK
AIR C L E A N E R
(RESONATOR
(if) E X H A U S T G A S R E C I R C U L A T I O N ( E G R ) V A L V E a n d
LIFT S E N S O R
11-20
P O S I T I V E C R A N K C A S E V E N T I L A T I O N (PCV) V A L V E
@ THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) C O N T R O L
CANISTER
@ E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) C O N T R O L
CANISTER FILTER
@ E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) P U R G E C O N T R O L
SOLENOID VALVE
@ E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) C O N T R O L
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) T W O W A Y V A L V E
E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) B Y P A S S
SOLENOID VALVE
F U E L TANK PRESSURE SENSOR'
> O N B O A R D R E F U E L I N G V A P O R R E C O V E R Y ( O R V R )
VENT SHUT VALVE
@ O N B O A R D R E F U E L I N G V A P O R R E C O V E R Y (ORVR)
VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
() E N G I N E M O U N T C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E
PRIMARY HEATED O X Y G E N S E N S O R (PRIMARY

H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 1)
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
( S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ) ( S E N S O R 2)
M A N I F O L D A B S O L U T E P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R
E N G I N E C O O L A N T T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) S E N S O R
I N T A K E A I R T E M P E R A T U R E (IAT) S E N S O R
INTAKE AIR B Y P A S S C O N T R O L V A L V E
I D L E A I R C O N T R O L (IAC) V A L V E
THROTTLE BODY
INJECTOR
@ FUEL PULSATION DAMPER
FUEL FILTER
F U E L P U M P (FP)
F U E L TANK
AIR C L E A N E R
RESONATOR
E X H A U S T G A S RECIRCULATION (EGR) V A L V E and
POSITION S E N S O R
P O S I T I V E C R A N K C A S E V E N T I L A T I O N (PCV) V A L V E
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R FILTER
PURGE VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R V E N T
SHUT VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) T W O W A Y V A L V E
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) B Y P A S S
SOLENOID VALVE
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
FUEL TANK VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(cont'd)
11-21

PGM-FI S y s t e m
The Programmed Fuel Injection (PGM-FI) system is a
sequential multiport fuel injection system.

The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
(thermistor). The resistor of the thermistor decreases as
the Engine Coolant temperature increases.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay

W h e n the PCM receives a demand for cooling f r o m the
A/C system, it delays the compressor f r o m being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure s m o o t h
transition to the A/C mode.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Switch
The A/C switch signals the PCM whenever there is a
d e m a n d for cooling.
Alternator Control
The alternator signals the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) during charging. The PCM then controls the
voltage generated at the alternator assording to the
electrical load determined by the Electrical Load
Detector (ELD) and driving mode. This reduces engine
load to improve fuel economy.
The Baro sensor is inside the PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that
modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection
discharge.
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor determines t i m i n g for fuel injection of
each cylinder and also detects engine speed.
The PCM detects misfiring by using the CKP sensor to
monitor fluctuations in crankshaft speed. It will then set
DTCs depending on how much misfiring occurs.
11-22
THERMISTOR
Ignition Timing Control

The PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic ignition t i m i n g
at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
pressure. It also adjusts the t i m i n g according to engine
coolant temperature.
Injector Timing and Duration
The PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out f r o m the m e m o r y , is further modified by
signals sent f r o m various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration.
By monitoring long term fuel t r i m , the PCM detects long
term malfunctions in the fuel system, and will set a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor

The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
(thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases
as the intake air temperature increases.
THERMISTOR
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation

to Readiness Codes)('01 model)
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, these codes are erased. In some states, part of
the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are
s e t If all of them are not set, the test cannot be
completed.
To check if the readiness codes are set, turn the ignition
switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will
come on for 15 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, the
readiness codes are not set completely. To reset each
code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in
the procedures to set them. Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
into electrical signals to the PCM.
Primary Heated Oxygen sensor (Primary H02S)

The primary H 0 2 S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas and sends signals to the PCM which varies
the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To stabilize its
output, the sensor has an internal heater. The primary
H02S is installed in the exhaust manifold.
By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary H02S and
secondary H 0 2 S , the deterioration of the primary H02S
can be evaluated by its feedback period. When the
feedback period exceeds a certain value during stable
driving conditions, the sensor is considered
deteriorated and the PCM sets a DTC.
ZIRCONIA
ELEMENT
SENSOR
TERMINALS
HEATER
HEATER
TERMINALS
Secondary Heated Oxygen sensor (Secondary H02S)

The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the Three Way Catalytic
Converter (TWO and sends signals to the PCM which
varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly. To
stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater.
The secondary H02S is installed in the TWC.
ZIRCONIA
ELEMENT
SENSOR
TERMINALS
HEATER
HEATER
TERMINALS
SENSOR UNIT
3br
Starting Control
When the engine is started, the PCM provides a rich
mixture by increasing injector duration.
(cont'd)
11-23

Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the
throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the
sensor varies the signal voltage to the PCM. The TP
sensor is not replaceable apart f r o m the throttle body.
BRUSH HOLDER
Idle Control System

W h e n the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is depressed,
the P/S load is high, or the alternator is charging, the
PCM controls current to the I AC valve to maintain the
correct idle speed. Refer to the System Diagram to see
the functional layout of the system.
BRUSH
RESISTOR
TERMINAL
Brake Pedal Position Switch

The brake pedal position switch signals the PCM w h e n
the brake pedal is pressed.
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve
To maintain the proper idle speed, the IAC valve
changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body
in response to an electrical signal f r o m the PCM.
F r o m AIR
CLEANER
To INTAKE
MANIFOLD
Top Dead Center (TDC) Sensor

The TDC1/TDC2 sensor determines ignition t i m i n g at
start up (cranking) and w h e n crank angle is abnormal.
TDC2 S E N S O R
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch

The PSP switch signals the PCM w h e n the power
steering load is high.
Starter (Ignition) Switch
The starter switch signals the PCM w h e n the engine is
cranking.
11-24
Fuel Supply System
Intake Air System
Fuel Cut-off Control
Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional

layout of the system.
During deceleration w i t h the throttle valve closed,

current to the fuel injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at speeds over 1,100 r p m .
Fuel cut-off action also occurs w h e n engine speed
exceeds 6,600 r p m , regardless of the position of the
throttle valve, to protect the engine f r o m over-revving.
When the vehicle is stopping, then PCM cuts the fuel at
engine speed over 5,000 rpm.
Intake Air Bypass Control System (Fuel Air (FIA)

Control System)
W h e n the engine is running, the Intake Air Bypass
control valve sends air to the fuel injectors.
'98-99 models.
Fuel Pump Control

When the ignition is turned on, the PCM grounds the
PGM-FI main relay which feeds current to the fuel pump
for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With the
engine running, the PCM grounds the PGM-FI main
relay and feeds current to the fuel pump. When the
engine is not running and the ignition is on, the PCM
cuts ground to the PGM-FI main relay which cuts
current to the fuel pump.
PGM-FI Main Relay
The PGM-FI relay contains 2 separate relays. One is
energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies
battery voltage to the PCM, power to the fuel injectors,
and power for the second relay. The second relay is
energized to supply power to the fuel p u m p for 2
seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when
the engine is running.
(cont'd)
11-25

Throttle Body
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine
coolant from the cylinder head. The idle adjusting
screw, which increases/decreases bypass air, is located
on the top of the throttle body.
IDLE A D J U S T I N G
SCREW
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping
into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
manifold.
THROTTLE
P O S I T I O N (TP)
SENSOR
<-
: BLOW-BY VAPOR
: F R E S H AIR
PCV
VALVE
Evaporative Emission Control System

Catalytic Converter System
Refer to System Diagram to see the functional layout of

the system.
Three-Way Catalytic Converter { T W O

The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon
monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C02), dinitrogen (N2),
and water vapor.
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine
and burned (Refer to System Diagram to see the
functional layout of the system).
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
When the engine coolant temperature is above 167F
(75C), the PCM controls the EVAP canister purge valve
which provides vacuum to the EVAP canister.
HOUSING
THREE-WAY
CATALYSTS
Exhaust Gas Recirculation System

Refer to System Diagram to see the functional layout of
the system.
EGR Valve
The EGR valve is designed to lower peak combustion
temperatures and reduce oxides of nitrogen emissions
(NOx) by recirculating exhaust gas through the intake
manifold and into the combustion chambers.
11-26
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor

The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the PCM.
S E N S O R CHIP
Idle Control System Diagram

The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the IAC (Idle Air Control) valve:
After the engine starts, the IAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is increased to raise the
idle speed by about 150^-300 rpm.
When the engine coolant temperature is low, the IAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The
amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature.
SENSORS
BLK
Intake Air System Diagram

This system supplies air to the engine. A resonator in the intake air pipe provides additional silencing as air is drawn
into the system.
'98-99 models:
INTAKE MANIFOLD
THROTTLE BODY
ACL
AIR
INTAKE
DUCT
RESONATOR
From
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
VARIOUS
SENSORS
(cont'd)
11-27
FueS and Emissions Systems

'00-01 models:
"1
BLK
I
*1:
*2:
' 0 0 model
'01 model
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram

The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The PCM m e m o r y includes the ideal EGR valve position for
varying operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the a m o u n t of EGR valve position and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then
compares it w i t h the ideal lift in its m e m o r y (based on signals sent f r o m other sensors). If there is any difference
between the t w o , the PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
YEL/
VARIOUS
SENSORS
11-28
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram

The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor f r o m the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged f r o m the canister into the engine and burned.
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold. The purging
vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which is open whenever engine coolant temperature is
above 147F (64C).
When vapor pressure in the fuel tank is higher than the set value of the EVAP t w o w a y valve, the valve opens and
regulates the f l o w of fuel vapor to the EVAP control canister.
During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens w i t h the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds the fuel vapor
to the EVAP canister.
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
FUEL TANK VAPOR
RECIRCULATION VALVE
FUEL TANK
SIGNAL
TUBE
/ EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
BLK/
YEL
YEL/
BLU
Q R N /
BLK
From
No. 6
ECU(PCM)
CRUISE
CONTROL
(15 A)
(in the
driver's
underdash
fuse/relay
box)
I VARIOUS
|SENSORS
11-29

Circuit Diagram
PCM Circuit Diagram - '98-99 models.
* 5
To CLIMATE
C O N T R O L UNIT
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
EGR VALVE
LIFT S E N S O R
YEL/
BLU
- YEL/8LU -WHT/BLKo"
- GRN/BLK 2
a
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
JT
a
( T o p a g e 11-31
11-30
(cont'd)
11-31

Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd) - '98-99 models:
ALT
A ^ CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOIDO VALVE B
11-32
No. 1 F U E L I N J E C T O R
'K
'K
r -V I N J 2
B5J
R E D No. 2 F U E L I N J E C T O R
<B15)
BLU No. 3 F U E L I N J E C T O R
>IT
-YEL/BLK
it
IACV
'B23)
BLK/BLU
- YEL/BLK
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
IGP2
-\B9)
,
YEL/BLK
(cont'd)
11-33

A/T G E A R POSITION SWITCH
11-34
- BLK/WHT -
/Nil
a"
- GRN/BLK - BLK/YEL
- BLK/WHT-
1
ba
C302
-GRN/WHT -
!T~
-
RED YEL
- BLK/YEL
-GRN/WHT'
no:
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
RED/YEL
1
SECONDARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
BLK/YEL
'HE
EVAP PURGE
CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
CRUISE
C O N T R O L UNIT
a"'
IMMOBILIZER
INDICATOR
LIGHT
To
TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
MULTIPLEX
C O N T R O L UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
C204
- GRN - BLK -
AF
From
RADIATOR FAN R E L A Y ,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
(cont'd)
11-35

LT GRM/WHT -
- BLK/YEL
EVAP CONTROL
CANISTER VENT
SHUT V A L V E
- YEL/BLU
- LT GRN
F U E L TANK
PRESSURE SENSOR
3
EVAP BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
00000
JST
jKT
jST
GRN
BLK
.J
jKT
YEL
2
BLU
L.
D R I V E R S UNDER-DASH
CONNECTOR F
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BLK/YEL
2
GRN/BLK
YEL/BLU
CONNECTOR D
YEL/BLU
GRN/BLK -
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
WHT/YEL
CONNECTOR
2
GRN/BLK -
YEL
BLK/YEL
A
B
-
CONNECTOR K
STARTER
CUT
RELAY
CONNECTOR A
IGNITION
SWITCH
FUSES
A : No. 9 B A C K U P L I G H T
I N S T R U M E N T L I G H T (7.5A)
B I No. 6 E C U (PCM)
C R U I S E C O N T R O L (15A)
C : No. 13 S T A R T E R S I G N A L
(7.5A)
D : No. 1 F U E L P U M P (15A)
11-36
( T o page 11-37 )
( F r o m p a g e 11-36 )
CONNECTOR I
1
BRN
BLU/ORN
M^Z
CONNECTOR
-
RED/WHT
B L K / Y E L
WHT/BLK'
WHT/YEL
C O N N E C T O R N
W H T
C O N N E C T O R E
-[
a
-
DRIVER S
BOX
DATA
LINK
BRN
B R N / B L K
- WHT/GRN
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
CONNECTOR
-
WHT/BLK
- W H T / Y E L
B R A K E
m an
C103
C104
B L K / Y E L
BLK
C201
- WHT/GRN
YEL/BLK
BLK
- B R N / B L K ' -
YEL/BLK
BLK*
'
WHT/GRN
=0
BRN/BLK -
C301
- B L U / O R N
SWITCH
- G R N / Y E L
B L K / Y E L
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
(cont'd)
11-37

CONNECTOR B
- BLK/YEL
- BLK/YEL
- YEL
^
BRN/BLK
-4
To A/C
PRESSURE
BLU RED
SWITCH
CONNECTORG
BLU RED
-BRN/BLK
- WHT/YEL
CONNECTORH
- BLK/YEL
CONNECTOR I
- WHT/YEL
-BRN/BLK
P A S S E N G E R ' S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
5
CONNECTOR C
-WHT
CONNECTOR A
- WHT/GRN
CONNECTORB
- WHT/YEL
- YEL
- BLK/YEL
A30)
GRN/RED -
-GRN/RED
- BLK
CONNECTORD
. T o A/C
CLUTCH RELAY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSES
E : No. 13 C L O C K B A C K U P (7.5A)
F I I G MAIN (50A)
G : A C G S (15A)
H : S T O P (20A)
I: B A C K U P A C C (40A)
J : B A T T E R Y (100A)
11-38
'00-01 models:
)*
3=
toj)
MAP SENSOR
-
GRN/WHT JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
1
ECTSENSOR
To CLIMATE
C O N T R O L UNIT
-frte 1
3
f
(C27>-
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
EGR VALVE
POSITION
YEL/
BLU
SENSOR
- YEL/BLU
- WHT/BLIC- GRN/BLK
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
a
( T o p a g e 11-40
(cont'd)
11-39

( F r o m p a g e 11-39 )
,
I
.PH02S
(as)"
.
WHT*
-GRN/BLK - BLK/YEL3
BLK/WHT
PRIMARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1)
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
BLK/YEL
C104
1RP 1
~vric
X
(eM2}-
SOLENOID
VALVE
VTEC PRESSURE
SWITCH
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
I0*
C107
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
3
3
W H T
11-40
TDC
SENSOR 1
TDC
SENSOR 2
CKP
SENSOR
T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C L U T C H (TCC)
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY
SHIFT SOLENOID
(SS)
VALVE ASSEMBLY A
- GRN/WHT -
SHIFT SOLENOID (SS)

VALVE ASSEMBLY B
G R N
SHIFT SOLENOID
(SS)
VALVE ASSEMBLY C
3
MAINSHAFT S P E E D S E N S O R
3
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
AUTOMATIC T R A N S A X L E
CLUTCH PRESSURE
(A/T)
CONTROL
SOLENOIDO VALVE ASSEMBLY A
AUTOMATIC T R A N S A X L E
(A/T)
CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL

SOLENOIDO VALVE ASSEMBLY B
(cont'd)
11-41
FueS and Emissions Systems

3
No. 1 I N J E C T O R
'
>
- YEL/BLK
lNJ3
,
BLU
- YEL/BLK
'K
-YEL/BLK -
'I?
13
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
11-42
2ND
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
3RD
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
To
IMMOBILIZER
UNIT
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
* 1 : '00 model
* 2 : '01 model
(cont'd)
11-43

- BLK/WHT
.
- GRN/BLK BLK/YEL - BLK/WHT -
SECONDARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
i
- BLK/YEL
C302
-GRN/WHT E N G I N E MOUNT
CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
BLK/YEL
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE ALVE
[I
(A5>
CRUISE
C O N T R O L UNIT
IMMOBILIZER
INDICATOR
LIGHT
To
- >
TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
- BLU
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
- BLU -
hL
MULTIPLEX
C O N T R O L UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
- GRN - BLK -
* 2 : '01 model
11-44
From
RADIATOR FAN R E L A Y ,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
- LT GRN/WHT - BLK/YEL *
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
- YEL/'BLU
-LTGRN
-GRN/BLK
*5
FTP SENSOR
3
EVAP BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
0 0 E 0
CONNECTOR F
GRN/YEL/
BLK
BLU
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BLK/YEL
GRN/BLK'
YEL/BLU
CONNECTOR
YEL/BLU
GRN/BLK'
D
-
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
- WHT/YEL -
CONNECTOR J
- G R N / B L K '
YEL
BLK/YEL
-o<\>o
CONNECTORK
STARTER
CUT
RELAY
CONNECTOR A
IGNITION
SWITCH
ST O -
\ + B
FUSES
A : No. 11 IG C O I L (15 A)
B : No. 9 B A C K U P L I G H T
I N S T R U M E N T U G H T (7.5A)
C : No. 6 E C U ( P C M )
C R U I S E C O N T R O L (15A)
D ! No. 13 S T A R T E R S I G N A L
(7.5A)
E : No. 1 F U E L P U M P (15A)
( T o p a g e 11-46 )
(conf
11-

( F r o m page 11-45 )
CONNECTOR I
1
- BRN
- BLU/ORN
CONNECTORM
-
RED/WHT
BLK/YEL
WHT/BLK'
-WHT/YEL
CONNECTORN
-
WHT
CONNECTORE
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
"1
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
BRN/BLK WHT/GRN BLK
- WHT/BLK
- WHT/YEL
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
(BPP) SWITCH
np a n
BLK/YEL BLK
C201
r- WHT/GRN A
WHT/GRN
YEL BLK
-BLK'
-BRN/BLK
~1
^{ATj}-^?
BLK
BRNBLK
C301
-BLU/ORN - GRN/YEL -
GRN/YEL
- BLK/YEL -
11-46
PGM-FI
MAIN R E L A Y
0
CONNECTOR B
BLK/YEL
- BLK/YEL
- YEL
B R N / B L K '1
To A / C
BLU/RED P R E S S U R E SWITCH
99t
CONNECTOR H
BLU/RED
BRN/BLK
WHT/YEL -
CONNECTOR I
- BLK/YEL
CONNECTOR J
- WHT/YEL
P A S S E N G E R ' S UNDER-DASH
CONNECTORC
WHT
CONNECTOR A
- WHT/GRN
OwO
CONNECTORB
-0-
- WHT/YEL
J
o--o
- YEL
ELD
>
BLK/YEL GRN/RED rBLK

CONNECTORD
w To A / C
" " ^ C L U T C H RELAY
t
_LL_
G202
FUSES
F : No. 13 C L O C K B A C K UP (7.5A)
G : i G MAIN (50A)
H I A C G S (15A)
I: S T O P (20A)
J : B A C K U P A C C (40A)
K : B A T T E R Y (100A)
UNDER-HOOD
(cont'd)
11-47

GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
11-48
- LT G R N -
"L.
3L
J
r
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT
PGM-FI System
NOTE: The illustration shows '00 model.
/ELECTRICAL LOAD
' D E T E C T O R (ELD)
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-84
in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
INTAKE AIR T E M P E R A T U R E
(IAT) S E N S O R
Troubleshooting,
p a g e 11-50
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
Service Manual
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R
Troubleshooting,
p a g e 11-47
"n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d
Service Manual
TOP D E A D C E N T E R 1 (TDC1)/
T O P D E A D C E N T E R 2 (TDC2)
SENSOR
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , page 11-76
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) S E N S O R
11-50
THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) S E N S O R
a n d p a g e 11-56
n the '98-01 A c c o r d
Service Manual
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) S E N S O R
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
NOTE: The illustration shows '00 model.
D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (DLC)
General Troubleshooting Information,
p a g e 11-3
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
P O W E R T R A I N C O N T R O L M O D U L E (PCM)
General Troubleshooting Information,
p a g e 11-3
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P0122: TP S e n s o r Circuit L o w Voltage
?

no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan
comes o n , then t u r n the ignition switch OFF.
9. A t the sensor side, measure resistance between the

TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2
w i t h the throttle fully closed.
TP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
2. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).

3. Check the throttle position w i t h the scan tool.
Is there approx. 10% or 0.5 V when the throttle is
fully closed and approx. 90% or 0.5 V when the
throttle is fully
opened?
Y E S Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the TP
sensor and the PCM.
NO
Terminal side of male terminals

Is there approx. 0.5~ 0.9 kQ?
Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the TP sensor connector.
NO

7. Measure voltage between the TP sensor 3P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
Replace the throttle b o d y . B
10. Measure resistance between the TP sensor 3P

connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3 w i t h the
throttle fully closed.
VCC2
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)

Is there approx.
4.5kQ?
Is there approx. 5 V?
YES
Go to step 11.
N O - R e p l a c e the throttle body.
NO
Go to step 19.
11. Disconnec the PCM connector C (31P) connector.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11-52
12. At the wire harness side, check for continuity

between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and body ground.
15. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector.

16. Check for continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminal A 3 1 .
1 2 3 4
8 9 10
5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
32
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
THL
OUT
(YEL/GRN)
TPS (RED/BLK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
Is there
Y E S - Repair short in the w i r e between the PCM (C

27) and the TP sensor.
NO Go to step 13 {'01 model). Go to step 17 {'9800 models).
13. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P).
PCM connector terminal A 3 1 .
continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r short in the wire between the ABS/

TCS control unit and PCM (A31).
IMO-Substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control
unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original ABS/TCS control unit. I
17. Connect PCM connector terminal C27 and body
ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
1 2 3 4
8 9 10
5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
32
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
THL
OUT
(YEL/GRN)
Is there
11
24
P C M C O N N E C T O R C {3 IP)-
11
24
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23
25
8 9 10
5 6 7
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
29 30
/
/
TPS (RED/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
continuity?
(cont'd)
11-53
PGM-FI System
18. At the wire harness side, check for continuity
between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and body ground.
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
Y E S Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.

Refer to the '98-'01 Accord Service Manual (see
page 11-5). If prescribed voltage is now available,
replace the original PCM.
NORepair open in the wire between the PCM (C
19. Measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals C18 and C28.
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23
25
8 9 10
5 6 r
16 17 18 19 20 21 /
29 30
26 27 28
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
Is there approx.
5 V?
YES Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C

NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.
Refer to the '98-'01 Accord Service Manual (see
page 11-5). If voltage is normal, replace the original
PCM.B
11-54
DTC P0131: Primary H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 1) Circuit

L o w Voltage
11. Check for continuity between the primary H 0 2 S

(Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
1. Do the PCM Reset Procedure.

P R I M A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1)
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with

comes on.
P H 0 2 S (WHT)
3. Check the primary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage

w i t h the scan tool during acceleration using wide
open throttle.
Does the voltage stay at 0.5 V or
YES-
less?
Go to step 4.
N O - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the PCM.H
4. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-89).
Is It
continuity?

(C16) and the primary H02S (Sensor 1).B
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM.
normal?
NO
Is there
Repair the fuel supply system.

6. Disconnect the primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P
connector.
7. Start the engine and let it idle.
w i t h the scan tool.
Does it stay at 0.5 V or
YES
less?
Go to step 9.
NO -Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1).B

11-55
PGM-FI System
DTC P0132: Primary H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 1) Circuit
High Voltage

10. Connect PCM connector terminals C16 and C18

no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator f a n
comes o n .
3. Check the primary H 0 2 S (Sensor 1) output voltage

w i t h the scan t o o l .
more?
IMO Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .

primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the P C M . B
P H 0 2 S (WHT)
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
6. Connect the primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P connector

terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
P R I M A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1)
Is there 0.9 V or more?

Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good PCM and recheck.
away, replace the original PCM.B
NO Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(C16 or C18) and the primary H02S (Sensor 1). B
JUMPER WIRE
P H 0 2 S (WHT)

5. Disconnect the primary H 0 2 S (Sensor 1) 4P

connector.
SG2 (GRN/BLK)

more?
N O - R e p l a c e the primary H 0 2 S (Sensor 1 ) . B
11-56
5 6 7
8 9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 2S
29 30
J U M P E R WIRE
Is there 0.9 V or
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23
25
DTC P0133: Primary H02S {Sensor 1) Circuit

Slow Response
NOTE: If DTC P0131, P0132 and/or P0135 are stored at
the same time as DTC P0133, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for DTC P0133.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm w i t h
comes on.
3. Test-drive under following conditions.
55 m p h (89 km/h) steady speed
Transmission in D4 position
Until readiness code or Temporary DTC P0133
comes on
4. Check for a Temporary DTC w i t h the scan tool.
Is Temporary
DTC P0133
indicated?
YES - Replace the primary H02S (Sensor
\)M
NO Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

Check for poor connections or loose wires at C104
(located at the right side of the engine
compartment), the primary H02S (Sensor 1) and
the PCM.B
PGM-FI System
D T C P0137: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Circuit L o w Voltage
10. Check for continuity between the secondary H02S

(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.

SECONDARY H02S
( S E N S O R 2) 4P C O N N E C T O R

no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator f a n
comes on.
S H 0 2 S (WHT/RED)
3. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output

voltage at 3,000 rpm w i t h the scan t o o l .
less?
NOIntermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
(located under the right side of the dash), C104
compartment), the secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) and
the P C M . B
5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
voltage w i t h the scan tool.
less?
N O - R e p l a c e the secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ) . f l
11-58
Is there
continuity?

(A23) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2).
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see
page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original PCM.
DTC P0138: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Circuit High Voltage

10. Connect PCM connector terminals A23 and C18
w i t h a j u m p e r wire.

comes on.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
1
12 13 14 15

voltage at 3,000 rpm with the scan tool.
25 26 27
10
17 18 19 20 21
28 29 30
32
SH02S
J U M P E R WIRE
(WHT/RED)
more?
SG2
(GRN/BLK)
C(31P)
1

compartment), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the PCM.B
24
23
12 13 14
23
25
9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
29 30
/
/

voltage w i t h the scan tool.

Is there 0.8 V or
5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
6. Connect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a jumper
wire.
SECONDARY H02S
( S E N S O R 2) 4 P C O N N E C T O R
more?

NO- Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(A23 or C18) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2). I
JUMPER WIRE
S G 2 (GRN/BLK)
S H 0 2 S (WHT/RED)

voltage with the scan tool.
Is there 0.8 V or
more?
N O - R e p l a c e the secondary H02S (Sensor 2). I
11-59
PGM-FI System
D T C P0139: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Circuit S l o w R e s p o n s e
comes o n .
3. Check the secondary H 02 S (Sensor 2) output
voltage at 3,000 r pm w i t h the scan tool.
Does the voltage stay within 0.3 0.8 V for
minutes?
two
Y E S - R e p l a c e the secondary H02S (Sensor 2).

NO Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
compartment), the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the PCM.B
11-60
DTC P013: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Heater

circuit Malfunction
DTC P0141: Secondary H02S(Sensor 2)
Heater circuit Malfunction
6. Check continuity between body ground and the

H02S 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4
individually.
H 0 2 S 4P C O N N E C T O R
NOTE; Information marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) applies

to DTC P0141.
Is DTC P0135 or P0141
indicated?
male terminals
NOIntermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
compartment), the primary H 0 2 S (Sensor 1), the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the P C M . B
Is there
W i r e side of
female terminals
continuity?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the H02S (primary or secondary * )

(Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ) . B

4. Disconnect the H02S (primary or secondary * )
(Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector.
5. At the H02S side, measure resistance between the
H02S 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
8. Measure voltage between the H 0 2 S 4P connector

terminal No. 4 and body ground.
P R I M A R Y / S E C O N D A R Y * H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1/
S E N S O R 2*) 4P C O N N E C T O R
H 0 2 S 4P C O N N E C T O R
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
1 2
- 3 4 -
3 4
W i r e side of
female terminals
male terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
male terminals
Is there battery
Is there 5~ 15 Q (10-40
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
&)*
N O - R e p l a c e the primary H02S (Sensor 1) or
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) * . B
voltage?
NO Repair open in the wire between the No. 6
ECU (PCM) CRUISE CONTROL (15A) fuse and the
H02S.B
(cont'd)
11-61
PGM-FI System
13. Reconnect the H02S (primary or secondary * )
(Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector.

10. Check for continuity between the H 0 2 S 4P
connector terminal No. 3 and body g r o u n d .
S E N S O R 2*) 4P C O N N E C T O R
S02SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
P02SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
- 3
14. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P) (PCM

connector A, 32P) * .
16. Measure voltage between the PCM connector
terminal C1 (A8) * and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
P02SHTC
1
/
W i r e side of
female terminals
12 13 14
23
male terminals
25
9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
28 27 28
29 30
S 0 2 S H T C (BLK/WHT)
Is there
continuity?
12 13 14 15
NO
25 26 27
1 1 . Disconnect PCM connector C (31P) (PCM connector

A, 32P) * .
12. Check for continuity between the H 0 2 S 4P
connector terminal No. 3 and body g r o u n d .
S E N S O R 2 * ) 4P C O N N E C T O R
S02SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
Wire side of
female terminals
Is there
- 3
Terminal side of
male terminals
continuity?
Y E S Repair short in the wire between the PCM (C1,

A8 * ) and H02S (primary or secondary * ) (Sensor
1, Sensor 2 * ) . B
(see page 11-5). If the s y m p t o m / i n d i c a t i o n goes
away, replace the original P C M . B
11-62
10
17 18 19 20 21
28 29 30
23
|
24
32
G o t o step 13.
P02SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.

away, replace the original P C M . B
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM
(C1, A8 * ) and the H02S (primary or secondary * )
(Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) . B
D T C P0300: R a n d o m misfire
and a n y combination of the following:
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder misfire
NOTE:
If the misfiring is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased emissions during t w o consecutive driving cycles,
the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be stored.
If the misfiring is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfiring occurs, and DTC
P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be stored. When the misfiring stops, the MIL will remain
on.
1. Troubleshoot the f o l l o w i n g DTCs first if any of them were stored along w i t h the random misfire DTC(s):
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP Sensor
P0131, P0132: Primary H02S
P0171, P0172: Fuel metering
P 0 4 0 1 , P1491, P1498: EGR System
P0505: Idle control system
P1259: VTEC System
P1361, P1362, P1366, P1367: TDC 1/TDC 2 Sensor
P1519: IAC Valve
2. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the s y m p t o m .
3. Find the s y m p t o m in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the sequence listed, until you find the
cause.
Symptom
Random misfire only
at low RPM and
under load
Random misfire only
during acceleration
Random misfire at
high RPM and under
load, or under
random conditions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Procedure(s)
Check fuel pressure (see page 11-89).
Inspect the distributor ignition housing.*
Also check for:

Low compression.
Low quality fuel.
Inspect and test ignition wires (see page 4-22).*

Test the ignition coil for '98-99 models (see page 4-22), or
for '00-01 models (see page 4-23).
Test the ignition control module (see page 4-19).*
Inspect and test ignition wires (see page 4-22).*
Test the ignition coil for '98-99 models (see page 4-22), or
for '00-01 models (see page 4-23).
Test the ignition control module (see page 4-21).*
Malfunction in the
VTEC system (see
page 6-9).
Correct valve
clearance (see page
6-13).
*: '98-99 models
11-63
PGM-FI System
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99
models)
7. Exchange the spark plug f r o m the problem cylinder

w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.
8. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of

the freeze data or under various conditions if there
w a s no freeze data.
models)

models)
DTC P0304; No. 4 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99

models)
DTC P0305; No. 5 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99
9. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC w i t h the

scan tool.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or
P0306, or Temporary DTC P1399
indicated?
models)

models)
NO Intermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling,

etc. (no misfire at this time).
1. Remove the intake manifold cover (see step 4 o n

page 6-31).
2. After checking and recording the freeze data, reset
the PCM. If there is no freeze data of misfiring, just
clear the DTC.
3. Start the engine, listen for a clicking sound at the
injector in the problem cylinder.
10. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.

Does the misfire
spark plug was
occur in the other cylinder

exchanged?
whose
Y E S Replace the faulty spark p l u g . a

Does it
click?
12. Exchange the injector f r o m the problem cylinder

w i t h one f r o m the another cylinder.
13. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.

5. Inspect the ignition w i r e on the p r o b l e m cylinder
(see page 4-22).

scan tool.
Is it OK?
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or

indicated?
N O - R e p l a c e the faulty ignition wire

was no freeze data.
6. Check the distributor cap for cracks, wear, damage,

and fauling.
Is it OK?
NO Clean or replace the distributor cap.
11-64
NO Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the

injector connector (no misfire at this time)

Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder
injector was
exchanged?
Is there battery
whose
YES
voltage?
Go to step 23.
N O - G o to step 3 1 .
Y E S Replace the faulty injector
(see page 11-80).

24. Disconnect the injector 2 P connector on the
problem cylinder.
25. Measure resistance between the injector 2P

18. Check the engine compression.

Is the engine compression
OK ?
I N J E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R

1
INJ
2
IGP
N O - Repair the engine.

20. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P).

Is there 10 Q - 13 Q ?
22. Measure voltage between body ground and the

PCM connector terminal (see table).
YES
Go to step 26.
N O - Replace the injector (see page 11 -80).

INJ4 (YEL)
INJ2 (RED)
9
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
2
10
20
3 4 5
6 7 8
17 18
11 12 13 14 15
21 22
23 24 25
INJ1
(BRN)
X X
INJ3
(BLU)

was no freeze data.
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
Cv) Cv)


scan tool.
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or

indicated?
NO Intermittent misfire due to injector fouling,
etc.B
(cont'd)
11-65
PGM-FI System
30. Determine w h i c h cylinder had the misfire.
injector was
exchanged?
36. Check for continuity between body ground and the

whose
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)

INJ4 (YEL)
INJ2 (RED)
Y E S Replace the faulty injector.

NO Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
3 1 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10
20
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
21 22
INJ1
(BRN)
X X
11 12 13 14 15
17 18
2 3 24 25
INJ3
(BLU)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
32. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the

problem cylinder.
34. Measure voltage between the injector 2P connector
terminals No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
I N J E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
Is there
2
IGP
(YEL/BLK)
DTC
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
continuity?
Y E S - Repair short in the wire between the PCM

and the injector.
37. Connect the injector 2P connector terminal No. 1 to

body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire (see table).
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
Is there battery
voltage?
INJ
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the injector

and the PGM-FI main relay.
JUMPER WIRE

Wire side o f female terminals
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
11-66
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU

PCM connector terminals (see table).
I N J 2 (RED)
INJ4 (YEL)
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
10
12 13 14 15
20
21 2 2
1NJ1
(BRN)
7
17
23 2 4 25
INJ3
(BLU)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
Is there
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
continuity?
YES Replace the injector (see page 11-80). then

recheck.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM and
the injector.
11-
PGM-FI System
models)
models)

ignition coil was
exchanged?
whose
Y E S - Replace the faulty ignition coil.

models)
models)
models)
models)
NO
Go to step 9.

10. Exchange the spark plug f r o m the problem cylinder
w a s no freeze data.
1. Remove the intake manifold cover and the ignition

coil cover (see step 4 on page 6-31).

scan tool.
2. After checking and recording the freeze data, reset

the PCM. If there is no freeze data of misfiring, just
clear the DTC.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or

P0306, or Temporary DTC PI399
indicated?
3. Start the engine, listen for a clicking sound at the

injector in the problem cylinder.
Does it
NO - Intermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling,

click?
YES - G o t o step 4.
N O - Go to step 3 1 .
Does the misfire

spark plug was
occur in the other cylinder

exchanged?
Y E S - Replace the faulty spark plug.
5. Exchange the ignition coil f r o m the problem

cylinder w i t h one f r o m another cylinder.
NO
whose
Go to step 14.

was no freeze data.
scan tool.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or
indicated?
NO Intermittent misfire due to ignition coil fouling,
11-68

w i t h one f r o m the another cylinder.
was no freeze data.
18. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC with the
scan tool.
25. Check for continuity between the ignition coil 3P

connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or

P0306, or Temporary DTC PI399
indicated?
GND
(BLK)
NO Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the
injector connector (no misfire at this t i m e ) . B
injector was
exchanged?
whose
Js there
Y E S Replace the faulty injector

(see page 11-82)
continuity?
NO Repair open in the wire between the ignition
coil and G101 (or G102).B

2 1 . Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector f r o m the
problem cylinder.
23. Measure voltage between the ignition coil 3P
I G N I T I O N C O I L 3P C O N N E C T O R

PCM CONNECTOR C (31P)
IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU)
IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)
IGPLS5
(BLK/
1 2 3 4
RED)
12 13 14
23 / / 2 5
9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
29 30
26 27 28
/
/
I1,
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
Is there battery
voltage?
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
C4
C14
C3
C13
C12
C23
WIRE
COLOR
YEL/GRN
BLU/RED
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT
Is there
NO Repair open or short in the wire between the
No. 11 COIL (15 A) fuse and the ignition c o i l . S
continuity?
Y E S Repair short in the wire between the PCM

and the ignition coil.H

(cont'd)
11-69
PGM-FI System
28. Connect the ignition coil 3P connector terminal
No. 1 and body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire (see
table).
30. Check the engine compression.

7s the engine compression
OK?
Y E S - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.

JUMPER WIRE
NO
Repair the engine.
3 1 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.

W i r e s i d e o f female t e r m i n a l s

PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
DTC
i
|
I
|
:
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
WIRE
COLOR
YEL/GRN
BLU/RED
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT
34. Measure voltage between body ground and the

INJ4 (YEL)
IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU)
IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)
11 12 13 14
21 22
10
20

INJ2 (RED)
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
INJ1
(BRN)
23
17
24 25
INJ3
(BLU)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
(V) (V)
(V) (Y)
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
DTC
3
4
5
6
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
Is there
continuity?
No.
No.
No.
No.
YES
PCM
TERMINAL
C4
C14~
1
C3
C13
C12
C23
WIRE
COLOR
YEL/GRN
BLU/RED^
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT
G o t o step 30.
NO Repair open in the wire between the PCM and

the ignition c o i l . a
11-70
PROBLEM
CYLINDER i
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
I
No. 6
!
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
Is there battery
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
voltage?
36. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the
problem cylinder.
37.
46.
Measure resistance between the injector 2P

Measure voltage between the injector 2P connector

terminals No. 1 and body ground.
IGP
(YEL/BLK)
Is there 10 Q - 13 Q?
Is there battery
YES
G o t o step 38.
NO- Replace the injector (see page 11-82).

with one f r o m another cylinder.
39.
voltage?
NO Repair open in the wire between the injector

and the PGM-FI main relay. B
Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.

was no freeze data.

INJ4 (YEL)
INJ2 (RED)

scan tool.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305 or
indicated?
10
20
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
YES
G o t o step 42.
NO- Intermittent misfire due to injector fouling,
etc.B
11 12 13 14 15
|
INJ1
(BRN)
21 22
17 18
2 3 24 25
INJ3
(BLU)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)

injector was exchanged ?
whose
Y E S - Replace the faulty injector.

PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
Is there
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
continuity?

44.
Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the

problem cylinder.
YES
Repair short in the wire between the PCM
and the injector. B
NO
G o t o step 49.

(cont'd)
11 71
PGM-FI System
49. Connect the injector 2P connector terminal No. 1 to
body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e (see table).
INJ
JUMPER WIRE
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306

PCM connector terminals (see table).
INJ4 (YEL)
INJ2 (RED)
10
20
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
/ 17
2 3 24 25
11 12 13 14 15
INJ1
(BRN)
21 22
INJ3
(BLU)
18
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
(o) (a)
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No 4
No. 5
No. 6
Is there
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
continuity?
YES - Replace the injector (see page 11-82). then

recheck.
NO- Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM and
the i n j e c t o r .
11-72
D T C P0335; C K P Sensor No Signal

D T C P0336: CKP Sensor intermittent
6. Check for continuity between body ground and CKP

sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2
individually.
interruption
C K P S E N S O R 2P C O N K l E C T O R

CKPM
CKPP
Is DTC P0335 and/or P0336
indicated?
N O - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
CKP sensor and the PCM.
T e r m i n a l side of male terminals

is there
continuity?
4. Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.

Y E S - R e p l a c e the CKP sensor (see page 6-56).
5. Measure resistance between the CKP sensor 2P
C K P S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
7. Reconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.
9. Measure resistance between PCM connector
terminals C8 and C9.
CKPP
CKPM
PCM
CONNECTOR C
(31P)
CKPP
T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there 1,850-2,450
Q?
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23
25
CKPM
8 9 10
5 6 7
16 17 18 19 20 21
29 30
26 27 28
NO - Replace the CKP sensor (see page 6-56).

Is there 1,850-2,450
Q?
N O - R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM (C8,
C9) and the CKP sensor.
(cont'd)
11-73
PGM-FI System
PCM connector terminal C8.
CKPP (BLU)
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23 25
8 9 10
5 6 7
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28 29 30
Is there
continuity?
YES Repair short in the w i r e between the PCM (C

8) and the C K P s e n s o r . B
11-74
DTC P1121: TP Sensor Lower T h a n Expected
DTC P1122: T P S e n s o r Higher T h a n E x p e c t e d
2. Check the throttle position with the scan tool.
2. Check the throttle position w i t h the scan t o o l .
Is 13.7 % or higher indicated

fully
opened?
when the throttle
is
Is 16.9 % or less indicated

fully
closed?
when the throttle
is
YES Intermittent failure, system is OK at this

time.H
Y E S - I n t e r m i t t e n t failure, system is OK at this

time.H
NO Replace the TP sensor.
NO Replace the TP sensor
11-75
PGM-FI System
DTC P1361: TDC1 Sensor Intermittent
Interruption
6. Check for continuity to body ground on both

terminals of the indicated sensor individually.
DTC P1362: TDC1 Sensor No Signal
T D C 1 / T D C 2 S E N S O R 4P C O N N E C T O R
DTC PI366: TDC2 Sensor Intermittent

Interruption
TDC1P
TDC1M
DTC P1367: TDC2 Sensor No Signal

Is
DTC
P1361,
P1362,
P1366
or P1367
indicated?
Y E S - G o to step3.
Is there
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor and the PCM.
continuity?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor (see page 655).


4. Disconnect the TDC 1/TDC2 sensor 4P connector.
7. Reconnect the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor 4P connector.
5. Measure resistance between the terminals of the

indicated sensor (see table).

9. Measure resistance between the terminals of the
indicated sensor on the PCM connector (see table).
T D C 1 / T D C 2 S E N S O R 4P C O N N E C T O R
TDC1P
TDC1M
TDC2P
TDC2M
T e r m i n a l side of male t e r m i n a l s
SENSOR
DTC
TDC1
P1361
P1362
P1366
P1367
TDC2
Is there 1,850-2,450
SENSOR
TERMINAL
1
2
3
4
PCM
TERMINAL
C20
C21
C29
C30
WIRE
COLOR
GRN
RED
YEL
BLK
Q?
N O - R e p l a c e the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor (see page 655).
11-76
Is there 1,850-2,450
Q?
Y E S - Goto step 10.

NO Repair open in the indicated sensor wires (see
table).

PCM connector terminals C20 and/or C29
individually.
T D C 1 P (GRN)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
I 5 9 10
12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 /
23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /
Is there
continuity?
YES Repair short in the indicated sensor wires

(see t a b l e ) .
11-77
PGM-FI System
D T C P1676: F P T D R S i g n a l Line Malfunction
6. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control

unit 16P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM
connector terminal A22.
2. Start the engine and wait 10 seconds.

1 2
Is DTC P1676
indicated?
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
22 23
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
32
24
FPTDR (GRN/RED)
0 )
NO Intermittent failure system is OK at this t i m e .

ABS/TCS control unit and at the PCM.B
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT 16P

CONNECTOR
1 2
4
9 10 11
13 14 15 16

4. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) and the
ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector.
Is there
continuity?
5. Check for continuity between body gound and PCM
connector terminal A22.
NO Repair open in the wire between the ABS/TCS

control unit and the PCM (A22).
7. Reconnect PCM connector E (32).

1
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2
25 26 2 7
28 29 30 31
10
11
23
24
32
8. Connect PCM connector terminals A22 and C28

FPTDR
(GRN/RED)
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
5 6 7
8 9
10
12(13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1
3 4
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
C(31P)
continuity?
YES Repair short in the wire between the ABS/

TCS control unit and the PCM (A22).
JUMPER
WIRE
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23
25
32
FPTDR
(GRN/RED)
Is there
11
24
5 6 7
8 9 10
17 18 19 20 21
16
26 27 28
29 30
/
/
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)

Is DTC P1678
indicated?
Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good ABS/TCS control

away, replace the original ABS/TCS control u n i t
11-78
D T C P1678: FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction

Is DTC P1678
indicated?
YES Substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control

away, replace the original ABS/TCS control unit.
ABS/TCS control unit and at the PCM.
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement
'98-99 models:
2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake manifold.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose from the fuel pressure regulator (B). Place a rag or shop towel
over the hoses before disconnecting them.
5. Disconnect the fuel hose (C) from the fuel rail (D).
6. Remove the retainer bolts (E) from the fuel rails and harness holders (F), then replace the O-rings (G).
7. Disconnect the fuel rails.
8. Remove the injectors from the fuel rails.
11-80
9. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (B).
10. Coat new O-rings (C) with clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
11. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D) first.
12. Coat new seal rings (E) with clean engine oil, and press them into the intake manifold.
13. To prevent damage to the O-rings, install the injectors in the fuel rails first, then install them in the intake manifold.
14. Install and tighten the retainer bolts.
15. Connect the fuel hose to the fuel rail with new washers.
16. Connect the v a c u u m hose and fuel return hose to the fuel pressure regulator.
17. Install the connectors on the injectors and harness holders.
18. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold cover.
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel p u m p runs for approximately 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
11-81
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement (cont'd)
'00-01 models:
2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake m a n i f o l d .
3. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the injectors (A).
4. Remove the retainer bolts (D) f r o m the fuel rails (C) and harness holders (E), then replace the O-rings (F).
5. Disconnect the fuel rails.
6. Remove the injectors f r o m the fuel rails.
11-82
7. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (B).

D
8. Coat new O-rings (C) w i t h clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
9. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D) first.
10. Coat new seal rings (E) w i t h clean engine oil, and press t h e m into the intake manifold.
11. To prevent damage to the O-rings, install the fuel injectors in the fuel rails first, then install them in the intake
manifold.
12. Install bolts.
13. Install the connectors on the injectors.
14. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold cover.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel p u m p runs for approximately 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
11-83
PGM-FI Sy stem
Primary H02S Replacement
Secondary H02S Replacement

Commercially available 0 2 sensor w r e n c h ,
Snap-on YA8875 or SP Tools 93750 or equivalent

Commercially available 0 2 sensor wrench,
Snap-on YA8875 or SP Tools 93750 or equivalent
1. Disconnect the primary H02S 4P connector (A),

then remove the primary H02S (B).
1. Disconnect the secondary H02S 4P connector (A),

then remove the secondary H02S (B).
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
2. Install the primary H02S in reverse order of

removal.
Ibfft)
2. Install the secondary H02S in the reverse order of
removal.
11-84
Idle Control System

NOTE: The illustration shows '00-01 models.
11-85
Idle Control System

Idle Speed Adjustment
Adjust the idle speed using the Honda PGM Tester
procedure if possible. If not, use the f o l l o w i n g
procedure:
6. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn,

check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn
the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn again.
NOTE:
Leave the IAC valve connected.
Before setting the idle speed, check these items:
- The MIL has not been reported on.
- Ignition t i m i n g
- Spark plugs
- Air cleaner
- PCV system
7. Idle the engine for one minute w i t h heater fan

switch at HI and air conditioner o n , then check the
idle speed.
1. Disconnect the EVAP purge control solenoid valve

2P connector.
Idle speed should be:

680 + 50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
NOTE:
Do not turn the idle adjusting screw w h e n the air
conditioner is on.
If the idle speed is not within specification, see
the S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index.
no load (transmission in Park or neutral position)
until the radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
4. Check the idle speed w i t h no-load conditions:
headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan,
and air conditioner are not operating.
Idle speed should be:
680 + 50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
5. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the
idle adjusting screw (A) 1/4-turn clockwise or
counterclockwise.
NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more
than 1/4-turn w i t h o u t checking the idle speed.
11-86
8. Reconnect the EVAP purge control solenoid valve

2P connector.
Fuel Supply System

F U E L F E E D PIPE
F U E L FILL C A P
F U E L V A P O R PIPE
F U E L RAIL
FUEL PUMP
Test, p a g e 11-115
n the '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
FUEL FILTER
FUEL G A U G E SENDING UNIT
Test, p a g e 11-94
FUEL TANK
in the '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
FUEL TUBE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS

Precautions, page 11-118
R e m o v a l , p a g e 11-118
n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
Installation, p a g e 11-119
F U E L R E T U R N PIPE
R e p l a c e m e n t f o r ' 9 8 - 9 9 m o d e l s , p a g e 11-92
R e p l a c e m e n t f o r '00-01 m o d e l s , p a g e 11-93
11-87
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release
pressure from the system by loosening the fuel
pulsation damper on top of the fuel rail.
then write down the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the
battery negative terminal.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Use a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A) at
the fuel rail.
A
22 N m
(2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
B
5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation
damper.
6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper (A) one
complete turn.
NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the fuel
pulsation damper is loosened or removed.
11-88
Fuel Pressure Test

Fuel pressure gauge 07406-0040001
Fuel pressure gauge attachment 07VAJ-0040100
8. Attach the fuel pressure gauge.

'98-99 models:
07406-0040001
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable f r o m the
battery negative terminal.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Use a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A) at
the fuel rail.
B
5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation
damper.
6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper 1
complete turn.
7. Remove the fuel pulsation damper f r o m its fitting,
and attach the fuel pressure gauge attachment.
9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) of the fuel

pressure regulator and pinch it closed w i t h a clamp
<B).
If the engine starts, go to step 12.
If the engine does not start, go to step 11.
11. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: remove
the fuel fill cap and listen to the fuel fill port while
an assistant turns the ignition switch ON (ll)-you
should hear the pump run for about 2 seconds
w h e n the ignition turned ON (II).
If the pump runs, go to step 12.
If the p u m p does not run, test it, refer to
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11115).B
(cont'd)
11-89
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pressure Test (cont'd)
12. Read the pressure gauge (with the fuel pressure
regulator v a c u u m hose disconnected and clamped).
The pressure should be:
'98-00 models: 2 8 0 - 3 3 0 kPa ( 2 . 9 - 3 . 4 kgf/cm , 41 48 psi).
'01 model: 3 2 0 - 3 7 0 kPa ( 3 . 3 - 3 . 8 kgf/cm , 4 8 - 5 4
psi).
2
If the pressure is OK and engine is running, go to

step 13. If not running, repair the cause, then
continue this test.
If the pressure is out of spec, go to step 14.
13. With the engine running, reconnect the v a c u u m
hose and read the gauge again.
The pressure should be:
'98-00 models: 2 2 0 - 2 7 0 kPa (2.25-2.75 kgf/cm ,
3 2 - 4 0 psi).
'01 model: 2 6 0 - 3 1 0 kPa ( 2 . 7 - 3 . 2 kgf/cm , 3 8 - 4 6
psi).
2
If the fuel pressure is OK, the test is complete. Go

to step 15.
If the pressure is out of spec, go to step 14.
14. Disconnect the v a c u u m hose f r o m the pressure
regulator again w h i l e you watch the pressure
gauge. The pressure should rise w h e n you
disconnect the hose.
If the pressure did not rise, replace the fuel
pressure regulator for '98-99 models (see page
11-92) or for'00-01 models (see page 11-93), and
recheck the fuel pressure.
If the pressure rose, and all your readings were
w i t h i n spec, go to step 15.
If the pressure rose, but your readings were out
of spec, check for these problems:
- If the pressure is too low, check for a clogged
fuel filter and for leaks in the fuel l i n e s .
- If the pressure is too high, check for a pinched
or clogged fuel return hose or line.
15. Reconnect the vacuum hose, remove the pressure
gauge, and reinstall the fuel pulsation damper and
a new washer.Tighten the fuel pulsation damper to
22 N-m (2.2kgf-m, 16 I b f f t ) .
NOTE: Disassemble and clean the fuel pressure
gauge attachment thoroughly after use.
11-90
Fuel Lines Inspection

Check the fuel system lines, hoses, and fuel filter for damage, leaks, and deterioration, and replace if necessa
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement
'98-99 models:
7. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A)

counterclockwise to set the angle as shown.
1. Remove the intake manifold cover and intake

manifold.
2. Place a shop t o w e l under the fuel pressure

regulator, then relieve fuel pressure (see page 1 1 88).
3. Disconnect the v a c u u m hose (A) and fuel return
hose (B).
E
8. Tighten the locking nut to 29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22

Ibfft).
4. Loosen the locking nut (C), and remove the fuel

pressure regulator (D).
5. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring (E), and
carefully install it into its proper position.
6. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel rail.
Turn it by hand until stops.
11-92
NOTE:
Replace the O-ring.
W h e n assembling the fuel pressure regulator,
apply clean engine oil to the O-ring and assemble
it into its proper position, taking care not to
damage the O-ring.
'00-01 models:
6. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A)

counterclockwise to set the angle as s h o w n .
1. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure

regulator, then relieve fuel pressure (see page 1188).
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and fuel return
hose (B).
7. Tighten the locking nut to 29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22

Ibf-ft).
NOTE:
Replace the O-ring.
When assembling the fuel pressure regulator,
apply clean engine oil to the O-ring and assemble
it into its proper position, taking care not to
damage the O-ring.
3. Loosen the locking nut (C), and remove the fuel

pressure regulator (D).
4. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring (E), and
carefully install it into its proper position.
5. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel joint.
Turn it by hand until stops.
11-93
Fuel Supply System

Fuel Gauge Test
NOTE; For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram , refer
t o the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-60).
1. Check the No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT INSTRUMENT
LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box before testing.

7. Install a 2 Q, resistor between the fuel p u m p 5P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, then turn the
ignition switch ON (II).
F U E L P U M P 5P C O N N E C T O R
2. Remove the spare tire lid.

3. Remove the access panel f r o m the floor.
VVV
JUMPER
WIRE
2Q
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the

fuel p u m p 5P connector.
(BLK)
5. Measure voltage between the fuel p u m p 5P

connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h the
ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5
and 8 V.
RESISTOR
(YEL/BLU)
2
5
If the voltage is as specified, go to step 6.

If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
- an open in the YEL/BLU or BLK wire.
- poor ground (G552).
F U E L P U M P 5P C O N N E C T O R
8. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts

m o v i n g toward the " F " mark.
If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at
all, replace the gauge.
If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending
unit, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 11-127).
NOTE:
Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer
reaches " F " on the gauge dial. Failure to do so
may damage the fuel gauge.
The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, so
the fuel level is continuously indicated even
w h e n the ignition switch is OFF, and the pointer
moves more slowly than that of a bimetal type.
11-94
4T>
Intake Air System

THROTTLE BODY
Test, p a g e 11-96
R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 11-99
D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y , p a g e 11-100
11-95
Intake Air System

Throttle Body Test
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 . - 3 0 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX
1. Disconnect the v a c u u m hose (A) between the t o p of
the throttle body at the intake air bypass control
valve, and connect it to a vacuum gauge.
A973X-041-XXXXX

comes on, then let it idle. The gauge should not
indicate any v a c u u m .
If the gauge indicates v a c u u m , check and if
necessary adjust the throttle cable (see page 1198), then go to step 3.
If the gauge does not indicate v a c u u m , go to
step 3.
3. Open the throttle slightly f r o m idle and check the
gauge again. The gauge should indicate v a c u u m .
If the gauge indicates v a c u u m , go to step 4.
If the gauge does not indicate v a c u u m , check the
throttle body port. If it's clogged, clean it w i t h
carburetor cleaner, then go to step 4.
4. With the engine OFF, check the throttle cable
operation. The cable should operate w i t h o u t
binding or sticking.
If the cable is OK, go to step 5.
If the cable binds or sticks, check it and its routing.
If it's faulty, reroute it or replace it and adjust it
(see page 11-98), then go to step 5.
11-96
5, Operate the throttle lever by hand to see if the

throttle valve and/or shaft are too loose or too tight.
If there is excessive play in the throttle valve
shaft or the throttle valve binds at the fully
closed position, replace the throttle body.
If the throttle valve and shaft are OK, go to step 6.
6, Check for clearance (A) between the throttle stop
screw (B) and the throttle lever (C) at the fully
closed position. If there is any clearance, replace
the throttle body (see page 11-99). Do not adjust the
throttle stop screw.
Air Cleaner Element Replacement

AIR C L E A N E R H O U S I N G C O V E R
11-97
Intake Air System

Throttle Cable Adjustment
comes o n , then let it idle.
2. Hold the throttle link (A) to the throttle lever (B).
There should be no clearance.
3. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable

deflection (A) should be 10 12 m m ( 3 / 8 - 1 / 2 in.)
A
4. If deflection is not w i t h i n spec (1012 m m , 3/8

1/2 in.) loosen the locknut (B), turn the adjusting nut
(C) until the deflection is as specified, then
retighten the locknut.
5. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle
valve to be sure it opens fully w h e n you push the
accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the
throttle valve to be sure it returns t o the idle
position whenever you release the accelerator
pedal.
11-98
Throttle Body Removal/Installation

NOTE:
Do not adjust the throttle stop screw.
After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable (see page 4-54) and the throttle cable (see page 11 -98).
The TP sensor is not removable.
9
'98-99 models:
11-99
Intake Air System

Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly
'98-99 models:
'00-01 models:
11-100
Intake Air (IA) Bypass Control Valve Test

Special Tools Required;
Vacuum p u m p gauge, 0 30 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX
"98-99 models:
'00-01 models:
1. Start the engine, then let it idle.
NOTE: Engine coolant temperature must be below
104F(40C).

no load (in Park or neutral position) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
2. Remove the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the install pipe,

and connect a vacuum gauge to the hose.
2. Remove the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the install pipe,

and connect a vacuum gauge to the hose.
A
3. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure

the vacuum gauge reading changes as the rpm
changes.
the vacuum gauge reading changes as the r p m
changes.
If the vacuum reading does not change check for
these problems:
* Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air
bypass control system vacuum lines.
A cracked or damaged intake air bypass control
valve.
If the vacuum reading does not change, check for

these problems:
Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air
A cracked or damage intake air bypass control
valve.
4. Hold the engine at 3,000 r p m w i t h no load (in Park
or neutral position) until the radiator fan comes o n ,
then let it idle.
the vacuum gauge reading does not change as the
rpm changes.
If the vacuum reading changes check for these
problems:
Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air
A cracked or damage intake air bypass control
valve.
11-101
PCV System
PCV Valve Inspection and Test
1. Check the PCV valve (A) and hoses (B) and
connections for leaks and restrictions.
'98-99 models:
2. A t idle, make sure there is a clicking sound f r o m the

PCV valve w h e n the hose between the PCV valve
and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) w i t h your
fingers or pliers.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve
g r o m m e t for cracks or damage. If the g r o m m e t is
OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck.
'98-99 models:
'00-01 models:
11-102
Evaporative Emission Control System

E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE

Test, page 11-159
"n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 11-161
E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) B Y P A S S
SOLENOID VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) T W O - W A Y V A L V E
11-103
Automatic Transmission
Transmission End Cover
Special Tools
14-2
General Troubleshooting Information

S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index
System Description
14-3
14-7
14-8
14-18
DTC Troubleshooting
S Indicator Light Circuit
Troubleshooting
Interlock S y s t e m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Shift Lock S y s t e m Circuit
Key Interlock System Circuit
14-64
14-93
14-96
14-99
Road Test
14-101
S t a l l Speed Test
14-103
Pressure Tests
14-104
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid ValveShift S o l e n o i d V a l v e A T e s t

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid ValveS h i f t S o l e n o i d V a l v e A R e p l a c e m e n t ........
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e s B a n d C T e s t
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e s B a n d C
Replacement
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valves A and B Test
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valves A and B Replacement
Speed Sensor Replacement
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch
Replacement
3rd Clutch P r e s s u r e S w i t c h
Replacement
ATF Level Check
A T F Replacement
14-106
14-106
14-107
14-107
14-108
14-109
14-110
14-111
Shift L e v e r R e m o v a l
Shift L e v e r Installation
14-111
14-112
14-113
14-114
14-121
14-127
14-128
14-129
14-130
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
14-132
Shift C a b l e R e p l a c e m e n t
14-133
Shift Cable Adjustment
14-136
Transmission Removal
T r a n s m i s s i o n Installation
ATF Cooler Flushing

ATF Cooler Hoses R e p l a c e m e n t
A / T Gear Position Indicator

Circuit Diagram
Transmission Range Switch Test
Transmission Range Switch

Replacement
Indicator Input T e s t
Indicator Bulb Replacement
14-138
14-139
14-140
14-141
14-143
14-144
Control Unit Input T e s t
14-145
14-146
14-147
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test

Shift Lock Solenoid Test
14-149
14-149
Shift L o c k S o l e n o i d R e p l a c e m e n t
14-150
Park Pin S w i t c h Test
14-150
Circuit Diagram
14-151
14-153
14-195
Transmission Housing
Housing and Shaft A s s e m b l i e s R e m o v a l
Bearing Replacement
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation
14-154
14-156
14-192
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal
Valve Body Repair
V a l v e B o d y V a l v e Installation
M a i n V a l v e Body D i s a s s e m b l y ,
Inspection a n d R e a s s e m b l y
A T F P u m p Inspection
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection a n d R e a s s e m b l y
Servo Body Disassembly,
I n s p e c t i o n and R e a s s e m b l y
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection
and Reassembly
Valve Bodies a n dA T F Strainer
Installation
14-157
14-159
14-160
14-161
14-163
14-164
14-165
14-166
14-190
Torque Converter Housing

Mainshaft Bearing/Oil Seal
Replacement
Countershaft Bearing Replacement
S e c o n d a r y Shaft B e a r i n g R e p a c e m e n t
14-167
14-168
14-168
Shafts and Clutches

Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection,
and Reassembly
3rd/4th Clutch C l e a r a n c e Inspection
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement
Countershaft Disassembly,
Inspection, a n d R e a s s e m b l y
C o u n t e r s h a f t R e v e r s e S e l e c t o r Hub,
3rd G e a r , a n d 1st G e a r R e p l a c e m e n t
Countershaft Bearing Hub/Bearing
Replacement
S e c o n d a r y Shaft Disassembly, Inspection,
and R e a s s e m b l y
S e c o n d a r y Shaft Clearance Inspection
S e c o n d a r y S h a f t Idler G e a r B e a r i n g
Replacement
Clutch Disassembly
Clutch Inspection
Clutch R e a s s e m b l y
.
-
14-169
14-170
14-171
14-172
14-173
14-175
14-176
14-177
14-179
14-180
14-183
14-185
A / T Differential
A / T interlock System
End Cover Removal

Park Lever Stop Inspection and A d j u s t m e n t
E n d C o v e r and Idler G e a r s Instllation
Outline of V6 Model Change

T h e B 7 X A automatic t r a n s m i s s i o n h a sbeen a d d e d .
14-201
Backlash I n s p e c t i o n
14-201
Final Driven G e a r / C a r r i e r R e p l a c e m e n t
Carrier Bearing Replacement
Oil S e a l R e p l a c e m e n t
Carrier Bearing Outer Race R e p l a c e m e n t
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
14-202
14-202
14-203
14-204
14-205
Special Tools
Ref.No.
**
***
14-2
Tool Number
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100
07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG4010G
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
07HAC-PK40102
07HAJ-PK40201
07JAD-PH80101
07JAD-PH80400
07LAD-PW50601
07LAE-PX40100
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120
07NAD-PX40100
07SAZ-001000A
07WAZ-002010A
07406-0020400
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
07746-0010300
07746-0010500
07746-0010600
07746-0030100
07749-0010000
07947-6340500
Description
Mainshaft Holder
Seal Driver Attachment
Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly
Housing Puller
Preload Inspection Tool
Oil Seal Driver Attachment
Pilot 2 8 x 3 0 mm
Attachment, 40 x 50 mm
Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm
A/T Pressure Hose Adapter
BackprobeSet
S C S Service Connector (DLC)
A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set W/Panel
Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2 5 - 4 0 mm
Driver 40 mm I.D.
Driver
Driver Attachment
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
@@
<3
How to Check for DTCs with the PGM Tester/Scan Tool
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the (H indicator light in the gauge assembly will
blink. W h e n the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (located next to the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the OBD II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester as s h o w n , the scan tool or tester will indicate the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
w h e n the ignition switch is turned ON(II).
HONDA P G M T E S T E R or
OBD II S C A N T O O L
If the E indicator light or the MIL has been reported o n , or if a driveability problem is suspected, f o l l o w this procedure:
1. Connect the OBD II Scan Tool (conforming to SAE J1978) or Honda PGM Tester to the 16P DLC. (See the OBD II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific instructions. If you are using the Honda PGM Tester,
make sure it is set to the SAE DTC type.)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and observe the DTC on the screen.
3. Record all fuel and emission DTCs, A/T DTCs, and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for
DTC P0700). DTC P0700 means there is one or more A/T DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit of the PCM.
5. Get the anti-theft code for the radio, then write d o w n the radio station presets.
6. Reset the m e m o r y w i t h the PGM Tester or by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box for more than 10 seconds.
7. Drive the vehicle for several minuites in the freeze data conditions or at speeds over 30mph (50 km/hr), and then
recheck for DTCs. If the A/T DTC returns, go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index on page 14-7. If the DTC does not
return, there was an intermittent problem w i t h i n the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight,
and then go to step 8.
8. Enter the radio code, reset the radio preset stations, and set the clock.
(cont'd)
14-3
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
How to Check for DTCs
W h e n the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the H indicator light in the gauge assembly will
usually blink and/or the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may come on. W h e n the Data Link Connector (DLC) (located
next to the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the Honda PGM Tester, the B indicator light will blink the
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) w h e n the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
W h e n the B indicator light has been reported on, connect the Honda PGM Tester to the DLC. Turn the ignition switch
ON (II), select Honda Systems, and then the SCS m o d e , then observe the H indicator light.
IS I N D I C A T O R L I G H T
Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short blinks. Codes 10 and above are indicated by a series of long and
short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short blinks. A d d the long and short blinks together to determine the code. After
determining the code, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
S h o r t blink (once)
OFF
See DTC 1
OFF
See DTC 2
L o n g blink
OFF
S h o r t b l i n k s (five t i m e s )
S e e D T C 15
If the IS indicator light or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveability problem, follow this procedure:
1. Record all fuel/emissions DTCs, A/T DTCs, and freeze data.
2. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for
DTC P0700), DTC P0700 means there is one or more A/T DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit of the PCM.
3. Get the customer's radio anti-theft code, and write d o w n the numbers of the radio station presets.
4. Reset the m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more than 10
seconds.
5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed over 30 m p h (50 km/h), and then recheck for DTCs.
If the DTC returns, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index. If the DTC does no return, there was an intermittent
problem w i t h i n the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, then go to step 6.
6. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and reset the clock.
14-4
H o w to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM

Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
SRS components are located in this area. Review the S R S components locations, precautions, and procedures in the
S R S section before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
1. Pull back the carpet from the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM.
2. Inspect the circuit on the PCM, according to the DTC troubleshooting, with the special tools and a digital
multimeter.
3. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a multimeter (C).
Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the
connector from the wire side until it comes in contact with the terminal end of the wire.
07SAZ-001000A
A
07SAZ-001000A
(cont'd)
14-5
How to Reset the PCM
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write d o w n the radio station presets.
3. Use one of these methods to reset the PCM m e m o r y :
Use the OBD II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM Tester.
Remove the BACK UP fuse (7.5 A)(A) f r o m the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (B) for 10 seconds.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session

This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.
2. Disconnect the OBD II Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester (C) f r o m the DLC (D).
3. Reset the PCM.
5. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and set the clock.
6. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minuites at speeds over 30 mph (48km/h).
14-6

NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.
DTC*
H Indicator
Light
MIL
r
Detection Item
Page
P0715O5)
Blinks
ON
Mainshaft speed sensor
(see page 14-77)
P0720 (9)
Blinks
ON
Countershaft speed sensor
(see page 14-76)
P0730(41)
OFF
ON
Shift control system
(see page 14-90)
P0740 (40)
OFF
ON
Lock-up control system
(see page 14-89)
P0753 (7)
Blinks
ON
Shift solenoid valve A
(see page 14-72)
P0758 (8)
Blinks
ON
Shift solenoid valve B
(see page 14-74)
P0763 (22)
Blinks
ON
Shift solenoid valve C
(see page 14-81)
P0780 (45)
Blinks
ON
Mechanical problem in hydraulic system
(see page 14-91)
P1705 (5)
Blinks
ON
Transmission range switch (short to ground)
(see page 14-66)
P1706 (6)
OFF
ON
Transmission range switch (open)
(see page 14-69)
P1738 (25)
OFF
OFF
2nd clutch pressure switch
(see page 14-85)
P1739 (26)
OFF
OFF
3rd clutch pressure switch
(see page 14-87)
P1750(46)
Blinks
ON
(see page 14-92)
P1751 (47)
Blinks
ON
(see page 14-92)
P1753 0 )
Blinks
ON
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
(see page 14-64)
P1768(16)
Blinks
ON
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
(see page 14-79)
P1773 (23)
Blinks
ON
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
(see page 14-83)
The DTC in the parentheses is the flash code the H indicator light indicates w h e n the Data Link Connector (DLC) is
connected to the Honda PGM Tester.
NOTE: Codes P0780 (45), P1750 (46), and P1751 (47) are applied to the '00-01 models.
14-7
These s y m p t o m s DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or cause the E indicator light to blink. If the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w a s reported ON or the S indicator light has been blinking, check for DTCs. But if
the vehicle has one of the s y m p t o m s in the f o l l o w i n g chart, check the probable causes(s) for it, in the sequence listed,
until y o u find the problem.
Symptom
Probable cause(s)
Notes
W h e n you turn the

ignition switch ON (II),
the B indicator light
comes on and stays on
or never comes on at
all
A problem in the B indicator

light circuit
Check the B indicator light circuit (see page 14-93).
Shift lever cannot be

moved from B
position while you're
pushing on the brake
pedal
A problem in shift lock

system of interlock system
Check interlock system shift lock system circuit (see

page 14-96).
Ignition key cannot be

m o v e d f r o m ACC (1)
position to LOCK (0)
position w h i l e you're
pushing the ignition
key w i t h the shift lever
in I B position
A problem in key interlock

system of interlock system
Check interlock system key interlock system circuit

(see page 14-99).
14-8
Probable cause(s)
Symptom
Engine runs, but
vehicle does not
move in any gear
10.
Low ATF level

Shift cable broken or out of
adjustment
Joint in shift cable and
transmission or body w o r n
ATF pump w o r n or binding
Regulator valve stuck or
spring w o r n
ATF strainer clogged
Mainshaft w o r n or
damaged
Final gears w o r n or
damaged
Transmission-to-engine
assembly error
Axle disengaged
Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for

leakage and loose connections. If necessary, flush
ATF cooler lines.
Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
transmission control shaft.
Improper alignment of ATF p u m p and torque
converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
s y m p t o m s are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or
a high pitched squeak.
Measure line pressure.
If the strainer is clogged, find the damaged
components that caused debris.
Inspect the differential pinion shaft for wear under the
pinion gears. If the differential pinion shaft is w o r n ,
overhaul the differential assembly, replace the ATF
strainer, thoroughly clean the transmission, and flush
the torque converter, cooler, and lines.
Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing w h e n replacing the main ball bearing. You
may also damage the ATF p u m p w h e n you torque
d o w n the main valve body. This will result in ATF
pump seizure if not detected. Use the proper tools.
Install the main seal flush w i t h the torque converter
housing. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid
return passage and result in damage.
1.
2.
3.
1st accumulator defective

1st gears w o r n or damaged
1st clutch defective
Inspect 1st clutch pressure.

Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch
assembly for wear and damage.
Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are w o r n
or damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If they are OK,
adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Vehicle moves in \2\

and ID, but not in H ,
IE, or HI position
Notes
(cont'd)
14-9
Probable cause(s)
Symptom
Vehicle moves in S3,
H, [EEL but not in
[3 position
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Vehicle moves in H,
HI/but not in
SI position
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
14-10
Notes

defective
Shift valve A defective
2nd accumulator defective
2nd gears w o r n or
damaged
2nd clutch defective
Check the SI indicator light indication, and check for

loose connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the
shift solenoid valve for seizure.
Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch
assembly for wear and damage.
or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
Shift fork shaft stuck

Modulator valve defective
Reverse CPC valve
defective
4th accumulator defective
4th clutch defective
Reverse gears w o r n or
damaged
Measure line pressure and 4th clutch pressure.

Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
shaft.
If the ATF strainer is clogged w i t h particles of steel or
a l u m i n u m , inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF p u m p is
OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
replace the torque converter.
Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and
inspect engagement teeth chamfers of the
countershaft 4th gear and reverse gear. Replace the
reverse gears and the reverse selector if they are
w o r n or damaged. If the transmission makes clicking,
grinding, or whirring noises, also replace the
mainshaft 4th gear, reverse idler gear, and
countershaft 4th gear.
If the 4th clutch feed pipe guide in the end cover is
scored by the mainshaft, inspect the ball bearing for
excessive movement in the transmission housing. If
the ball bearing is OK, replace the end cover as it is
dented. The O-ring under the guide is probably w o r n .
Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 3rd and
4th clutch feed pipes are loose or damaged. If the 4th
clutch feed pipe is damaged or out of round, replace
the end cover.
Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
damage. Inspect the clutch end plate-to-top disc
clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If
the discs and plates are w o r n or damaged, replace
t h e m as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance
w i t h the clutch end plate.
Symptom
Poor acceleration;
flares on starting off
in fi and H
positions:
Stall speed high in E ,
E, HI, and \%1
positions
Poor acceleration;
in B and H
positions:
Stall speed high in S ,
fi, and GO positions
Poor accelerationflares on starting off

in 03 position:
Stall speed high in 1JD
position
Poor acceleration;
in M position:
Stall speed is in
specification in E , S ,
1JD, and US positions,
but high in El
position
Probable cause(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2,
1.
2.
Notes
Low ATF level

adjustment
ATF pump worn or binding
Regulator valve stuck or
spring worn
ATF strainer clogged
Torque converter check
valve defective

ATF cooler lines.
Check line pressure.
Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
symptoms are mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high
pitched squeak.
Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing. You
may also damage the ATF pump when you torque
down the main valve body. This will result in ATF
pump seizure if not detected. Use the proper tools.

adjustment
Check 1st clutch pressure.
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn

adjustment
Check 2nd clutch pressure.
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn
Check 4th clutch pressure.

the discs and plates are worn or damaged, replace
them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-11
Probable cause(s)
Symptom
Poor acceleration;
Stall speed low
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Engine idle vibration
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Vehicle moves in El
position
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
14-12
Notes
Torque converter clutch

solenoid valve defective
Torque converter one-way
clutch defective
Engine output low
Lock-up clutch piston
defective
Lock-up shift valve
defective
Restricted cooler
Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
Low ATF level

Drive plate defective or
transmission misassembed
Engine output low
defective
ATF p u m p w o r n or binding
Lock-up shift valve
defective
Restricted cooler
Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still

no g o o d , adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
engine section of this service manual.
ATF cooler lines.
Excessive ATF
Foreign material in
separator plate orifice
3rd clutch defective
Clutch clearance incorrect
Needle bearing seized up,
w o r n , or damaged
Thrust washer seized up,
w o r n , or damaged
Check ATF level, and drain ATF if necessary.

t h e m as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clutch end
plate clearance.
Check for clutch pressure in neutral.
<2
Symptom
Late shift f r o m M
position to H and E
positions
Probable cause(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Late shift from ED

position to SI
position
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Notes

defective
solenoid valves A and B
defective
adjustment
CPC valve A stuck
Foreign material in
Shift valve C defective
Servo control valve
defective
1st check ball stuck
Check the S indicator light indication, and check for

loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the
Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage.
If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is
stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
OK, and no cause for the contamination is f o u n d ,
Check 1st clutch pressure.
plate clearance.

defective
defective
adjustment
Foreign material in
Reverse CPC valve
defective
Check the S indicator light indication, and check for

Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage.
If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is
stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
a l u m i n u m , inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
Check 4th clutch pressure.
plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-13
Probable cause(s)
Symptom
No shift
Erratic shifting gears;
Fails to shift in I B
position; does not
upshift to 4th
Modulator valve defective

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Erratic shifting gears:
1.
Fails to shift in Band

B positions; does
not upshift to 3rd and
4th
2.
3.
4.
Erratic shifting gears:

Fails to shift in B , B
and [D positions;
starts off in 3rd
1.
Excessive shock, or
flares on all upshifts
and downshifts
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Excessive shock or
flares on 1-2 upshift
or 2-1 downshift
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
14-14
Notes
Measure line pressure.

defective
defective
defective
Shift valve A defective
Shift valve D defective
Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve

for seizure.
Check the B indicator light indication, and check for
loose connectors. Inspect the transmission range
switch. If the transmission range switch is faulty,
replace it. If the transmission range switch is out of
adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.

defective
Shift valve B defective
Servo control valve
defective

Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork
shaft.

defective
Shift valve B defective
Shift valve E defective

loose connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift
solenoid valve for seizure.

defective
CPC valve A defective
CPC valve B defective
Foreign material in

loose connectors. Inspect the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
pipes for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
a l u m i n u m , inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is

defective
2nd clutch pressure switch
defective
Foreign material in
1st check ball stuck
2nd check ball stuck

loose connectors. Check that the outlet is not clogged
inside of the connector.
Check 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
or damaged, replace t h e m as a set. If they are OK,
Symptom
Excessive shock, or
or 3-2 downshift
Probable cause(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Excessive shock, or
or 4-3 downshift
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Noise f r o m
transmission in all
shift lever positions
Vehicle does not

accelerate more than
31 mph (50 km/h)
1.
2.
Notes

defective
3rd clutch pressure switch
defective
Foreign material in
3rd accumulator defective
2nd check ball stuck
Check the H indicator light indication, and check for

Check 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
plate clearance.

defective
Foreign material in
3rd accumulator defective

Check 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
replace the torque converter, and check the stall
speed.
plate clearance.
ATF p u m p w o r n or binding
Torque converter housing
or transmission housing
bearing w o r n or damaged
Improper alignment of ATF p u m p and torque

converter housing may cause ATF p u m p seizure. The
s y m p t o m s are mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high
pitched squeak.
Inspect the contact of the countershaft and secondary
shaft w i t h the bearings. Check the ATF guide plates
for damage and wear. Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe
for damage and out of round. If the 1st clutch feed
pipe is damaged or out of round, replace it. Replace
the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 1st clutch
feed pipe is damaged or out of round.
Torque converter one-way clutch

defective
Replace torque converter.
(cont'd)
14-15
Probable cause(s)
Symptom
Vibration in all shift
lever positions
Shift lever does not

operate smoothly
Drive plate defective or

transmission misassembled
1.
2.
3.
Transmission does
not shift into E
position
1.
2.
3.
Lock-up clutch does

not disengage
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
14-16
Notes
Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
no g o o d , adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
engine section of the service manual.
Check the stall speed.
A/T gear position switch

defective or out of
adjustment
adjustment
Check the S3 indicator light indication, and check for


adjustment
Park mechanism defective
Check the park pawl spring installation and the park
lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect,
install the spring correctly. Make sure that the park
lever stop is not installed upside d o w n . Check the
distance between the park pawl and the park lever
roller pin. If the distance is out of tolerance, adjust the
distance w i t h the park lever stop.

defective
defective
Lock-up shift valve
defective
Lock-up control valve
defective
Lock-up t i m i n g valve
defective
Restricted cooler

Symptom
Lock-up clutch does
not operate smoothly
Probable cause(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lock-up clutch does

not engage
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A/T gear position

indicator does not
indicate shift lever
positions
1.
2.
3.
Speedometer does
not operate
Notes

defective
defective
valve defective
Lock-up shift valve
defective
defective
Lock-up t i m i n g valve
defective

Center all engine mounts.

defective
defective
defective
defective
valve defective
Lock-up shift valve
defective
defective
Check the E indicator light indication, and check for

control solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes
for wear and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
Transmission range switch

defective or out of
adjustment
adjustment
Check the E indicator light indication, and check for


defective

loose connectors.
14-17
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled
automatic transmission w h i c h provides 4 speeds f o r w a r d and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line w i t h the
engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches
The torque converter consists of a p u m p , turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. They are connected to the
engine crankshaft so they turn together as a unit as the engine turns. A r o u n d the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes w i t h the starter pinion w h e n the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has three parallel shafts: the
mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line w i t h the engine crankshaft. The
mainshaft includes the 3rd and 4th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, reverse, and idler (reverse gear is integral w i t h the
4th gear). The countershaft includes the final drive, 1st, 3rd, 4th, reverse, 2nd, park, and idler gears (the final drive gear
is integral w i t h the countershaft). The secondary shaft includes the 1st and 2nd clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd and
idler. The countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its center,
providing 4th gear or reverse, depending w i t h w h i c h w a y the selector m o v e d . The gears on the mainshaft and the
secondary shaft are in constant mesh w i t h those on the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the
transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted f r o m the mainshaft and the secondary shaft to the
countershaft to provide H, 33, HI, LE and El positions.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located
below the dashboard, under the f r o n t lower panel behind the center console.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body, and the accumulator body.
They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve,
the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve E, the servo control valve, the torque converter check valve, the
reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the relief valve, the cooler check valve, and the ATF p u m p gears. The
regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up t i m i n g valve, and the lock-up control valve. The servo
body contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, the CPC valves A and B, and 3rd and 4th
accumulators. The accumulator body contains the 1st and 2nd accumulators and lubrication check valve. Fluid f r o m
the regulator passes through the manual valve to the various control valves. The 1st, 3rd, and 4th clutches receive
fluid f r o m their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd clutch receives fluid f r o m the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism
The PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, and C, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B while
receiving input signal f r o m various sensors located throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the
positions of the shift valves to switch the port leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B control the CPC valves A and B to shift smoothly between lower gear and higher gear. This
pressurizes a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.
Lock-up Mechanism
In H position (3rd and 4th), and S3 position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained f r o m the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together w i t h hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the t i m i n g of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve control the range of
lock-up according to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
mounted on the torque converter housing, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on
the transmission housing. They are all controlled by the PCM.
14-18
Gear Selection
The shift lever has seven positions: B PARK, S REVERSE, M NEUTRAL, B 1st through 4th gear ranges, H 1st through
3rd gear ranges, [2] 2nd gear, and |T) 1st gear.
Description
Position
E PARK
Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All clutches released.
mREVERSE
Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 4th clutch locked.
I I NEUTRAL
All clutches released.
B DRIVE
(1st through 4th)
General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, then 4th, depending on
vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshift through 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to
stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd and 4th gears.
B DRIVE
(1st through 3rd)
Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving; up-hill and down-hill
driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and
throttle position.
Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd
gear.
(U SECOND
Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery surfaces; stays in
2nd gear; does not shift up or d o w n .
DO FIRST
Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear; does not shift up.
Starting is possible only in OB and M positions through the use of a slide-type, neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transaxle (A/T) Gear Position Indicator
The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which gear has been selected without having to look
down at the console.
(cont'd)
14-19
System Description (cont'd)
Clutches
The four-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a
circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 3rd clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
14-20
Transmission Sectional View
PITOT FLANGE
('00-01 m o d e l s
MAINSHAFT
4TH G E A R
4TH CLUTCH
ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
3RD CLUTCH
RING GEAR
LUBRICATION
P I T O T PIPE
('00-01 m o d e l s
TORQUE CONVERTER
LOCK-UP CLUTCH
PISTON
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
P I T O T PIPE
('00-01 m o d e l s )
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE
SELECTOR H U B
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER G E A R
DRIVE PLATE
FINAL DRIVE GEAR

REVERSE
SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER G E A R
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
14-21
Power Flow
POSITION
TORQUE
CONVERTER
OS
m
m
B
1ST
2ND
3RD
4TH
1ST
2ND
3RD
m
m
1ST GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
2ND GEAR
2ND
CLUTCH
PART
3RD GEAR
3RD
CLUTCH
GEAR
4TH
CLUTCH
REVERSE
GEAR
PARK
GEAR
O
O
OiOperates
X-.Doesn't operate
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
The 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 3rd clutch.
The 4th gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
The reverse gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
The idler gear is splined w i t h the mainshaft and rotates w i t h the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft
The final drive gear is integral w i t h the countershaft.
The 1st gear, 3rd gear, 2nd gear, and park gear are splined w i t h the countershaft and rotate w i t h the countershaft.
The 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely f r o m the countershaft. The reverse selector engages the 4th gear or the
reverse gear w i t h the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined w i t h the countershaft so that the 4th
gear or reverse gear engage w i t h the countershaft.
The idler gear rotates freely f r o m the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft
The 1st gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch.
The 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
The idler gear is splined w i t h the secondary shaft and rotates w i t h the secondary shaft.
14-22
OB Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
HI Position
Engine power transmitted f r o m the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the countershaft idler gear, and
the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted t o the
countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear is engaged w i t h the reverse selector hub and the countershaft by the reverse
selector, w h e n the shift lever is shifted in El position f r o m B position. The countershaft reverse gear is engaged when
shifted f r o m E position.
TORQUE CONVERTER
(cont'd)
14-23
Power Flow (cont'd)
In H or H position, the o p t i m u m gear is automatically selected f r o m the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears, according to
conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
S or H Position in 1st gear and 0Q Position
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear w i t h the
secondary shaft.
The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, w h i c h in turn drives the final driven gear.
14-24
El or S Position in 2nd gear and OB Position

Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
TORQUE CONVERTER
(cont'd)
14-25
Power Flow (cont'd)
B or B Position in 3rd gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the mainshaft 3rd gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVEN G E A R
14-26
S Position in 4th gear

Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector w i t h the countershaft 4th gear while
the shift lever is in the forward range (B, B, U] and Q] position).
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear, w h i c h drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
TORQUE CONVERTER
(cont'd)
14-27
Power Flow (cont'd)
SB Position
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector w i t h the countershaft (reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the OH position).
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed via the reverse idler gear.
The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR
HUB
REVERSE SELECTOR
R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R
14-28
Electronic Control System

Functional Diagram
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Model (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located
below the dashboard, under the front lower panel behind the center console.
PCM
Throttle Position S e n s o r
Signal
Data Link C o n n e c t o r
PGM-FI
Control S y s t e m
Engine Coolant Temperature

Sensor Signal
A / T Control S y s t e m
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e A
INTERLOCK
CONTROL UNIT
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e B
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e C
Automatic Transaxle Clutch

Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A
Shift C o n t r o l
D4
Automatic Transaxle Clutch

Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve B
D3
2nd Clutch Pressure
Switch
>4
Lock-up C o n t r o l
3rd C l u t c h P r e s s u r e
Switch
Torque Converter Clutch

Solenoid Valve
H Indicator Light
Mainshaft S p e e d S e n s o r
Signal
Self-Diagnosis Signal
Self-Diagnosis
Function
Countershaft S p e e d
Sensor Signal
(cont'd)
14-29
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
Electronic Controls Location
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
2ND
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID V A L V E C
14-30
Shift Control
Shifting is related to engine torque through the solenoid valves, which are controlled by the PCM. The PCM instantly
determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent f r o m sensors, and actuates the shift solenoid valves
A, B, and C to control shifting. Also, a Grade Logic Control System to controls shifting in E and B positions while the
vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing speed.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, and C is s h o w n in the table below.
Position
B,S
B
m
m
m
Gear position
Shifting f r o m M position
Stays in 1st
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd
Stays in 2nd
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd
Stays in 3rd
Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th
Stays in 4th
2nd
1st
Shifting f r o m E and M position

Stays in reverse
Reverse inhibit
Park
m
Neutral
m
NOTE: For a description of the reverse inhibit mode, refer to page 14-56.
A
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Shift solenoid valves

B
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
C
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Lock-up Control
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls modulator pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up
ON and OFF. The PCM controls the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned O N , the condition of lock-up starts. The A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B regulate A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure, and apply the
pressure to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve. The lock-up control mechanism operates in 3rd, and
4th gear in B and in 3rd gear in B positions.
(cont'd)
14-31
automatic Transmission
Grade Logic Control System
How it works:
The PCM compares actual driving conditions w i t h memorized driving conditions, based on the input f r o m the
countershaft speed sensor, the throttle position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the brake pedal
position switch signal, and the shift level position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or
descending a slope, or reducing speed.
SENSORS/SWITCHES
SIGNALS DETECTED
PCM
Countershaft Speed
Sensor
Throttle Position
Sensor
Driving
Resistance
Calculation
of a c t u a l
acceleration
o
c
">
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor
Transmission Range
Switch
Coolant Temperature
D e t e c t i o n of
standard
acceleration
(in M e m o r y )
Calculation
of d e c e l e r a tion
C a l c u l a t i o n of g r a d i e n t
o r IPJI P o s i t i o n
S e l e c t i o n of S h i f t i n g M o d e
X
N o r m a l M o d e (Flat r o a d m o d e )
Ascending Mode
Fuzzy Logic
Descending Mode
> Gradual Descending Mode
Steep Descending Mode
Deceleration Mode
Automatic 4 Speeds
14-32
Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in B and E positions, the system extends the
engagement area of 2nd gear and 3rd gear to prevent the transmission f r o m frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd
gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power w h e n needed.
NOTE:
Shift schedules stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, enable the PCM's
fuzzy logic to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
Fuzzy logic is a f o r m of artificial intelligence that lets computers respond to changing conditions much like a human
mind w o u l d .
100%
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
FLAT ROAD MODE

GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
STEEP ASCENDING MODE
3RD-4TH SHIFTING CHARACTERISTICS
CONTROL AREA
Vehicle speed
Descending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in B and B positions, the shift-up speed f r o m 3rd to
4th gear and f r o m 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for flat road driving to
widen the 3rd gear and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination w i t h engine braking f r o m the deceleration lock-up,
achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are t w o descending modes w i t h different 3rd gear
driving areas and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. W h e n the
vehicle is in 4th gear, and you are decelerating w h e n you are applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will
downshift to 3rd gear. W h e n you accelerate, the transmission will then return to higher gear.
100%
3RD44TH
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
FLAT ROAD MODE

GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE
STEEP DESCENDING MODE
Vehicle speed
Deceleration Control
When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number of times the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating f r o m
speeds above 27 mph (43 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission f r o m 4th to 2nd earlier than normal to cope w i t h
upcoming acceleration.
(cont'd)
14-33
PCM Electrical Connections
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
IG1
3 -
(+)
PG1
I A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
PG2
TTT
. LS A
IGP1
LSB4, A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

j CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B
1GP2
VBU
LS B
VCC2
TPS
SG2
THROTTLE
POSITION
SENSOR
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
SHA
PGM-FI
CONTROL
SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
LG1
I TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID
' VALVE
LG2
77T
IGNITION SWITCH
IG1 -
VBSOL
VSS OUT
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
(b d) <h <k <& 0
NMSG
NC
COUNTERSHAFT
'SPEED SENSOR*
NCSG
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (DRIVER'S)
ILU
2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
824 C9 -99l
D13 (00-01)
8
3RD CLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
('01 model)
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
(1) 2
(7)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
25 26 27
A (32P)
4-34
28 29 30 (31)
10 (11)
23 24
/
/
/ /A
32
25
3 (25P)
C(31P)
10
/
30
/
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
29
D(16P)
PCM Inputs and Outputs

The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are shown for the connector terminals related to the A/T control
system. The other PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions are described in section 1 1 .
3 4
10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
23
25 26 27
28 29 30
/
24
32
1
9
/
B
(32P)
3 4
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
1 2
16 17 18 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
/ / /
/
C(31P)
(25P)
6 7
9 10
29 30
/
/
7 8
13 14 15
9 10 11 12
16
D (16P)

Terminal
Number
A5
Wire
Signal
Description
BLU/GRN
CRS
A9
BLU/WHT
VSSOUT
A10
BRN
SCS
Downshift signal input f r o m

cruise control unit
Vehicle speed signal detected
f r o m countershaft speed
sensor
Timing and adjustment
service check signal
A14
GRN/BLK
D4IND
A28
WHT/RED
ILU
A32
WHT/BLK
BKSW
D4 indicator light control
Interlock control
Brake pedal position switch

signal output
Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage

When cruise control is used: Pulsing signal
Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
With ignition switch ON (II) and data link

connector open: 5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
connector connected with Honda PGM
tester: 0 V
When ignition switch is first turned ON (II):
Battery voltage for t w o seconds
In 11 position: Battery voltage
When ignition switch ON (II), brake pedal
pressed, and accelerator pedal released:
Battery voltage
Brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
Brake pedal released: 0 V
(cont'd)
14-35
(1) 2 3 4
5 6 (7)
8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27
28 29 30 (31)
32
6 7 8
3 4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
5 6 7
// //
/ A25
C(31P)
B (25P)
A (32P)
1 2
8 9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
29 30
/
/
2 3
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
16
D(16P)

Terminal
Number
B1
Wire
Signal
Description
YEL/BLK
IGP1
B2
B8
BLK
WHT
LS A -
B9
YEL/BLK
IGP2
B10
B14
C98-99)
B14
('00-01)
BLK
BLU/BLK
PG2
OP2SW
BLU/BLK
ATPNP
Power supply circuit f r o m

main relay
Ground
supply negative electrode
Power supply circuit f r o m
main relay
Ground
A/T 2nd clutch pressure
switch signal input
Transmission range switch [P]
and ID positions input
B17
RED
LSA+
B18
GRN
LSB -
B20
B21
B22
LG1
VBU
LG2
B24
BRN/BLK
WHT/YEL
BLK
C98-99)
BRN/BLK
('00-01)
BLU/WHT
OP3SW
B25
ORN
LSB +
14-36
PG1

supply positive electrode
supply negative electrode
Ground
Back-up power supply
Ground
A/T 3rd clutch pressure

switch signal input
supply positive electrode

With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
With ignition switch OFF: 0 V

(No 2nd clutch pressure)
In IE and \M positions: 0 V
In other than 00 and fNj position: Battery
voltage
With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
Always battery voltage

(No 3rd clutch pressure)
With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
<S0
PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)
Terminal
Number
D1
Wire
Signal
Description
YEL
LC
D2
GRN/WHT
SHB

solenoid valve control
Shift solenoid valve B control
D3
GRN
SHC
Shift solenoid valve C control
D4
D5
BLK/YEL
VBSOL
D6
WHT
ATPR
D7
BLU/YEL
SHA
Not used
Power supply for solenoid
valves (Fuse No.6 in driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box)
Transmission range switch H
position input
Shift solenoid valve A control

During lock-up conditions: Battery voltage
During no lock-up condition: 0 V
Battery voltage in following positions:
H , BO positions.
E, and S positions in 1st and 2nd gear
OB, \E\, and M positions
0 V in following positions:
E, and S3 positions in 3rd gear
E position in 4th gear
Battery voltage in f o l l o w i n g positions:
111 position
E, and B positions in 1st and 3rd gear
H] position
E, and H positions in 2nd gear
S position in 4th gear
H, OB, and M positions
In OH position: 0 V
In
other voltage
than El in
position:
voltage
Battery
f o l l o w i nBattery
g positions:
S] position
H, and E positions in 2nd and 3rd gear
H] position
E, and B positions in 1st gear
B position in 4th gear
B, M, and M positions
(cont'd)
14-37
3 4
(1) 2
6 (7)
25 26 27
28 29 30 (31)
10 (11)
24
10 11 12 13 14 15
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22) 23
32
A
B
A (32P)
20
21 2 2
17 18
2 3 24 25
1 2
C(31P)
(25P)
16 17 18 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
6 7
9 10
/
/
29 30
2 3
7 8
13 14 15
9 10 11 12
16
D (16P)
PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)

Terminal
Number
D8
Wire
Signal
Description
PNK
ATPD3
D9
YEL
ATPD4
D10
BLU
NC
D11
RED
NM
Transmission range switch B

position input
Transmission range switch E
position input
input
Mainshaft speed sensor input
D12
WHT
NMSG
D13
C98-99)
BLU/WHT
ATPNP
D13
('00-01)
D14
BLU/BLK
OP2SW
BLU
ATP2
D15
BRN
ATP1
D16
GRN
NCSG
14-38

ground
Transmission range switch OS
and 03] positions input
A/T 2nd clutch pressure
switch signal input
Transmission range switch [2]
position input
Transmission range switch CD
position input
ground

In H position: 0 V
In other than E position: Battery voltage
In B position: 0 V
In other than B position: Battery voltage
When vehicle is stopped: Approx. 0 V
When engine is stopped: Approx. 0 V
In E and H positions: 0 V
In other than [Pj and M position: Battery
voltage
(No 2nd clutch pressure)
In [JO position: 0 V
In other than \2\ position: Battery voltage
In [T| position: 0 V
In other than \T\ position: Battery voltage
Hydraulic Controls
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body and the accumulator body. The
ATF pump is driven by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows
through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve directing
pressure to each of the clutches. The shift solenoid valves B and C are mounted on the outside of the torque converter
housing. The shift solenoid valve A and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve are mounted on the torque
converter housing as an assembly. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the
transmission housing.
(cont'd)
14-39
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
M a i n Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the m o d u l a t o r valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve
E, the servo control valve, the cooler check valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up
shift valve, the relief valve, and the ATF p u m p gears. The primary function of the main valve body are to switch fluid
pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
MODULATOR VALVE
SHIFT V A L V E C
SHIFT V A L V E D
SHIFT V A L V E E
RELIEF VALVE
REVERSE CPC VALVE
MANUALVALVE
LOCK-UP SHIFT V A L V E
MAIN V A L V E BODY
COOLER CHECK VALVE
SERVO CONTROL VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
Regulator Valve Body

The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
lock-up t i m i n g valve and the lock-up control valve.
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
REGULATOR VALVE
LOCK-UP TIMING V A L V E
14-40
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure f r o m the ATF p u m p to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and torque converter. Fluid f r o m the ATF p u m p flows through B and B\
Fluid entering f r o m B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve moves to the
left side. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes, and
the amount of fluid f r o m B' through torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the line
pressure.
NOTE: When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the illustration below.
From A T F PUMP
To T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R
To LUBRICATION
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (Torque Converter Range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its m a x i m u m w h e n the stator torque reaction reaches its m a x i m u m .
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
STATOR
REGULATOR VALVE
REGULATOR
SPRING CAP
TORQUE CONVERTER
STATOR SHAFT ARM
STATOR SHAFT
(cont'd)
14-41
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
Servo Body
The servo body is on the main valve body. It contains the servo valve, shift valve A, shift valve B, CPC valves A and B,
and the 3rd and 4th accumulators.
CPC VALVE A
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the torque converter housing, next to the main valve body. It contains the 1st and 2nd
accumulators and the lubrication check valve.
14-42
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn t h r o u g h the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF f l o w i n g f r o m the ATF p u m p becomes line pressure
that's regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure f r o m the regulator valve enters the torque converter
through the lock-up shift valve and it is discharged f r o m the torque converter. The torque converter check valve
prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid pressure
to the shift valves. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve, and
switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulated the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure and apply
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure to CPC valves A and B.
When shifting between upper gear and lower gear, the clutch is engaged by pressure f r o m the CPC pressure mode.
The PCM controls one of the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This m o v e m e n t switches the
port of the CPC and line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and the CPC pressure is intercepted.
Engaging the clutch w i t h line pressure happens w h e n shifting is completed.
Hydraulic pressure at the parts is as follows:
PORT
NO.
1
3
3'
3"
4
4'
4"
4A
4B
5A
5D
5B
5E
5F
5F'
5C
5G
DESCRIPTION OF
PRESSURE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
CPC A
CPC B
CPC A
CPC B
CPC A or LINE
CPC A or LINE
CPC A or LINE
CPC A or LINE
CPC B or LINE
CPC B or LINE
PORT
NO.
5H
5J
5K
5K'
6
SA
SB
SC
LA
9
10
20
25
30
40
41
56
DESCRIPTION OF
PRESSURE
CPC B or LINE
CPC B or LINE
CPC B or LINE
CPC B or LINE
MODULATE
SHA
SH B
SHC
LC
LINE
1ST CLUTCH
2ND CLUTCH
LINE
3RD CLUTCH
4TH CLUTCH
4TH CLUTCH
LS A
PORT
NO.
57
58
90
90'
91
91'
92
93
94
95
95'
96
97
99
X
HX
AX
DESCRIPTION OF
PRESSURE
LS B
LS A o r LS B
TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
ATF COOLER
TORQUE CONVERTER
LUBRICATION
LUBRICATION
TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
SUCTION
DRAIN
HIGH POSITION DRAIN
AIR DRAIN
NOTE:
CPC: Clutch Pressure Control pressure
SH: Shift Solenoid pressure
LS: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid pressure
LC: Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid pressure
(cont'd)
14-43
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
SO Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valve and positions of the shift valve
are as follows:
The shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A is m o v e d to the left side.
The shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and the shift valve B remains in the right side.
The shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C remains in the left side.
Line pressure (1) passes through the manual valve and stops at shift valve D. Line pressure (1) also flows to the
modulator valve, and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) flows to the shift solenoid valves and
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. Under this condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
14-44
H Position; 1st gear shifting f r o m M position

The PCM turns the shift solenoid valves A and C ON w h e n shifting to S position f r o m SO. Shift solenoid valve B
remains O N . Shift solenoid valve C is turned O N , and SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of the shift valve C is
released, then the shift valve C is moved to the right side. Shift solenoid valve A is turned O N , and SH A pressure (SA)
in the left side of the shift valve A is released, then shift valve A is moved to the right side. The A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A regulates LS A pressure (56) and applies it to CPC valve A. Line pressure (1) becomes line
pressure (4) at the manual valve, and flows to shift valve C and CPC valve A. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A
pressure (4A) and passes through shift valve C, A, and B, then CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at
shift valve B. 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch is engaged w i t h pressure of the
CPC pressure mode. Line pressure (4) passes through shift valve A and B, then stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
(cont'd)
14-45
H Position: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, but shift solenoid valves B and C remain O N . SH A pressure (SA) is applied
to the left side of shift valve A, then shift valve A is m o v e d t o the left side. This movement switches the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure on shift valve A. The 1st clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 1st
clutch is engaged securely. CPC A pressure (5E) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
1ST ACCUMULATOR
4TH ACCUMULATOR
3RD CLUTCH
*TH CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE a
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
14-46
B Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, Shift solenoid
valves B and C remain ON. Then shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA) in the left side of the shift
valve A is released. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The
PCM also controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B apply their pressure to the CPC valves A and B. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at the CPC valve
B, and CPC B pressure passes through shift valves C, B, and A, to become 2nd clutch pressure. The 1st and 2nd
clutches are engaged with the CPC pressure mode.
NOTE:
* When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
* Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
(cont'd)
14-47
B Position: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A
pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B remain O N . Releasing LS A pressure in the CPC valve A releases CPC A
pressure in the 1st clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is t u m d OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the
right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is m o v e d t o the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC
pressure. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure m o d e , and the 2nd clutch is engaged securely. The CPC
B pressure (5D) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
14-48
E Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF. The PCM also
control A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A
remains O N , and C remains OFF. Shift solenoid valve B is turned OFF, and SH B pressure (SB) is applied to the right
side of shift valve B. Then shift valve B is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure.
Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) at the CPC valve A. The CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 3rd clutch
pressure (30) at shift valve B, and flows to the 3rd clutch. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure mode by
switching the position of shift valve B.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-49
S3 Position; Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to release LS B
pressure (57). Shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and B remains OFF. Releasing LS B pressure in the CPC valve B
releases CPC B pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C pressure (SC)
in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged
securely. The CPC A pressure (4A) stops at shift valve E.
NOTE:
When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14 -50
IE Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. The PCM also
controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift solenoid valve B
remains OFF, and C remains ON. Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and SH A pressure (SA) is applied to the left
side of shift valve A. Then shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch line pressure and CPC pressure. Line
pressure (4) becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at CPC valve B. The CPC B pressure (4B) becomes 4th clutch pressure (41)
at shift valve D, and flows to the 4th clutch via the manual valve. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure
mode by switching the position of shift valve A.
NOTE:
When used, ' l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
14-51
E Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A
pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B remain OFF. Releasing LS A pressure (56) releases CPC A pressure in the 3
rd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is t u r n e d OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of
shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure.
The CPC B pressure (5B) changes to line pressure (5B) at shift valve C, and flows to the 4th clutch via shift valve B, shift
valve C, shift valve D, and the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode by switching
the position of shift valve C, and 4th clutch is engaged securely. The CPC B pressure (5D) stops at shift valve A.
14-52
OH Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the
shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as follows:
Shift solenoid valve A is turned O N , and the shift valve A is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and the shift valve B is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C is moved to the left side.
The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Line
pressure (4) f r o m the manual valve becomes line pressure (5C) at shift valve C. Line pressure (5C) flows to shift valve
A via shift valve B, and becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20). The 2nd clutch pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, and
2nd clutch is engaged.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-53
H] Position
The PCM the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift
solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as f o l l o w s :
Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and shift valve A is m o v e d to the left side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and shift valve B is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned O N , and shift valve C is in the right side.
Line pressure (4) becomes line pressure (5B) at shift valve C. Line pressure <5C) flows to shift valve B via shift valve A,
and becomes 1st clutch pressure (10). 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then 1st clutch is engaged.
14-54
El Position: Shifting to E position from E or H position

Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the reverse CPC valve. Line pressure (3)
is regulated by the reverse CPC valve and becomes line pressure (3'). Line pressure (3') pushes the servo valve to the
reverse position, passes through the servo valve, and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') becomes 4th clutch
pressure (40). The 4th clutch pressure (40) is applied to the 4th clutch, and 4th clutch is engaged w i t h the reverse CPC
pressure mode.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-5
El Position: Driving in reverse gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and B remains ON. Shift solenoid valve
C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC
valve moves to the left side, creating full line pressure. Line pressure to the 4th clutch is same as shifting to El position,
and 4th clutch pressure increases. The 4th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode.
14-56
OS Position
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and SH C pressure (SO is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC
valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to the servo
valve. Line pressure (3'} passes through the servo valve and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') is
intercepted at the manual valve, and is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE:
. Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
(cont'd)
14-57
Lock-up System
In H position (3rd and 4th), and S position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained f r o m the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together w i t h hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the t i m i n g of the lock-up mechanism. W h e n the t o r q u e converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up ON and OFF. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve control the range of
lock-up according to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
mounted on the torque converter housing, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on
the transmission housing. They are controlled by the PCM.
General Operation
1. Operation (clutch on)
W i t h the lock-up clutch on, fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the lock-up piston is
drained off, and the converter fluid exerts pressure t h r o u g h the piston against the torque converter cover. As a
result, the converter turbine is locked to the converter cover. The effect is to bypass the converter, placing the
vehicle in direct drive.
MAINSHAFT
2. Operation (clutch off)

W i t h the lock-up clutch off, fluid flows in the reverse of CLUTCH ON. As a result, the lock-up piston moves away
f r o m the converter cover, and torque converter lock-up is released.
MAINSHAFT
14-58
No Lock-up
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM. The lock-up shift valve receives LC pressure (LA)
on the left side, and modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side to uncover the
port leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92)
becomes torque converter pressure (94), and enters into the left side of the torque converter to disengage the lock-up
clutch. The lock-up clutch is OFF.
NOTE:
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
(cont'd)
14-59
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by
the PCM to release LC pressure (LA) in the left side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is moved to the
left side to switch the port leading torque converter pressure to the left side and right side of the torque converter.
Torque converter pressure (92) f l o w s to the right side of the torque converter to engage the lock-up clutch. The PCM
also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B, and LS A or LS B pressure is applied to the lock-up
control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve. The position of the lock-up control valve depends on torque converter
pressure and LS A or LS B pressure. When LS A or LS B pressure (58) is lower, torque converter pressure (91) f r o m the
lock-up t i m i n g valve is lower. The lock-up clutch is engaged partially. LS A or LS B (58) increases, and the lock-up
t i m i n g valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure to high. The lock-up clutch
is then engaged securely. Under this condition, the lock-up clutch is engaged by pressure f r o m the right side of the
torque converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
NOTE:
14-60
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to
increase LS A o r LS B pressure (58). The LS A or LS B pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the
lock-up timing valve, and moves t h e m to the left side. Under this condition, torque converter back pressure is released
fully, causing the lock-up clutch to be fully engaged.
NOTE:
(cont'd)
14-61
Circuit Diagram
QNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
14-62
MAINSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
' KEY
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT
COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
ri
BSU UNIT
KEY
INTERLOCK
SOLENOID
THROTTLE
POSITION
SENSOR
STEERING LOCK
ASSEMBLY
PARK
PIN
SWITCH
H
H
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
.
BLK
A
BRN
WHT/BLK
BLU/GRN
RED
Li I
CPS
STOP SW
BLU
WHT
NM
NMSG
GRN
NC
RED/WHT
NCSG
LT
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
LS1P
WHT
RED
GRN
SHA
LC
D1
B25
ORN
' >D7
YEL
BLU/YEL
BLU/YEL
GRN/WHT
SHB
SHC
D2
D3
BRN/BLK
GRN/WHT
2
Q
\
r\
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B
.
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
SOLENOID
VALVE
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVE A
BLK {'98-99)
BRN/BLK COO 01)
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
3RD CLUTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
Q
\
n \
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEC
G101
BRN/BLK
BRN/BLK
G101
G101
(1)
6 (7)
10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 (22) 23 24
25 26 27
A(32P)
28 29 30 (31)
32
/ / 13
/ /
C(31P)
14 15 16 17 18 13 20 21
25
26 27 28
29 30
10
13 14 15
/
10
16
Fl
"hi
D(16P)
14
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P1753: Problem in T o r q u e Converter
Clutch S o l e n o i d V a l v e Circuit
6. Measure the resistance between the D1 and B20 or

B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
fr^\
2. Disconnect the B (25P) and D (16P) connectors f r o m

the PCM.
4. Measure the voltage between the D1 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
1
6
9 10 11 12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
9 10 11 12
13 14 15
16
Is the resistance
12-250,
7. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22
terminals and body ground.
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
6 7
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
D (16P)
B (25P)
D (16P)
(25P)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
LC (YEL)
LC (YEL)
voltage?
Y E S -Repair short to power in the w i r e between

the D1 terminal and the torque converter clutch
solenoid valve.
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there
continuity?
N O - Repair open in the wires between the B20 and
B22 terminals and ground (G101).B
14-64
8. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid

valve/shift solenoid valve A 3P connector.
9. Check for continuity between the D1 and B20 or
B22 terminals.

B22 terminals.
PCM
PCM
CONNECTORS
/^x
L C (YEL)
D (16P)
B (25P)
D(16P)
B (25P)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
CONNECTORS
21 22
17 18
6 7
9 10 11 12
13 14 15
23 24 25
16
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
10
13 14 15
12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there battery
Is there
voltage?
continuity?
Y E S - Repair short to ground in the wire between

the D1 terminal and the torque converter clutch
solenoid v a l v e .
10. Measure the resistance between the No.3 terminal
of the lock-up control solenoid valve/shift solenoid
valve A connector and body ground.
Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM

connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM and recheck.
NO - Check for blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open in the wire between the D5 terminal
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay b o x .
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE/

S H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E A C O N N E C T O R (3P)
Terminal side of male t e r m i n a l s
Is the resistance
12-250,
Y E S Check for open in the w i r e between the D1

terminal and the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve.
NO Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve/shift solenoid valve A . H
14-65
DTC P1705: Short In Transmission R a n g e
S w i t c h Circuit
8. Shift to all positions other than \E or H.

9. Measure ATP NP voltage between these terminals:

2. Observe the A/T gear position indicator, and shift
each position separately.
'98-99 models: Between terminals D13 and B20

or B22.
'00-01 models: Between terminals B14 and B20
or B22.
'98-99 models
Do any indicators stay on when the shift lever

not in that position?
is
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
NO The system is OK at this time. Check the w i r e
harness for damage.
3. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
D (16P)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
10
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
16
ATPNP
(BLU/WHT)
L G 2 (BLK)
Do all gear position
indicators
go out?
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
Y E S Replace the transmission range switch.

4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect the
transmission range switch connector.
'00-01 models:

6. Shift to all positions other than El.
10 11 12 13 14 15
20

B22 terminals.
21 22
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
6 7 8
/ 17 18
23 24 25
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
PCM CONNECTORS
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
(BRN/BLK)
Is there battery
voltage?
NO Check for short in the w i r e between the D6
terminal and the transmission range switch or A/T
gear position indicator, and check for an open in
the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and
body ground (G101). If wires are OK, check for
loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If
necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck.
14-66
N O C h e c k for short in the wire between the D13

terminal and the transmission range switch, and in
the OB and M position signal wires between the A/T
gear position indicator and the transmission range
switch. If wires are OK, check for loose terminal fit
in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a
known-good PCM and r e c h e c k .
10. Shift to all positions other than H.
Measure the voltage between the D9 and B20 or

B22 terminals.
PCM

B22 terminals.
CONNECTORS
(25P)
12. Shift to all positions other than H .
(16P)
PCM
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
6 7 8
4 5
21 22
10
17 18
23 24 25
CONNECTORS
D (16P)
B (2SP)
12
14 15
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
ATP D4 (YEL)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
6 7 8
23 24 25
21 22
10
17 18
13 14
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12
16
ATP
D3
(PNK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)

Is there battery
voltage?
NOCheck for short in the wire between the D9

terminal and the transmission range switch. If w i r e
is OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck.

gear position indicator. If wires are OK, check for
recheck.
(cont'd)
14-67
14. Shift to all positions other than HI.

B22 terminals.

B22 terminals.
PCM
CONNECTORS
B (25P)
PCM
B (25P)
2
1
9
10
20
6 7
11 12 13 14 15
(16P)
8
10
18
23 24 25
21 22
14 15
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12
16
ATP 2 (BLU)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
6 7
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
10
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12
16
A T P 1 (BRN)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there battery
D (16P)
CONNECTORS
voltage?
Is there battery
voltage?

PCM and recheck.

recheck. H
N O - Check for short in the wire between the D15

recheck.
16. Shift to all positions other than [TQ.
14-68
D T C P1706: O p e n In T r a n s m i s s i o n Range
Switch Circuit (no gear position inputs)
NOTE: Record ail freeze data before y o u troubleshoot.
5. Shift to B position.
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
1. Test the transmission range switch (see page 14-
B (25P)
140).
Is the switch
OK?
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
10
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
(16P)
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12
16
A T P D4 (YEL)
NO Replace the transmission range switch.

LG1
(BRN/BLK)

1
9
3 4
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there
voltage?
Y E S Repair open in the wire between the D9

terminal and the transmission range switch.
7. Shift to OB position.
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
D (16P)
B (25P)
Is there
continuity?
NO -Repair open in the wires between the B20 and
B22 terminals and ground (G101), or repair poor
ground ( G 1 0 D . B
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
23 24 25
21 22
10
17 18
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
14 15
12
16
A T P R (WHT)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
voltage?

9. Shift to B or 1 ] position.
(cont'd)
14-69
10. Measure ATP NP voltage between these t e r m i n a l s :
'98-99 models: Between terminals D13 and B20
or B22.
'00-01 models: Between terminals B14 and B20
or B22.
11. Shift to E position.

B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
'98-99 models:
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
3
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
10
13 14
17 18
11 12
A T P D3 (PNK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
13 14 15
23 24 25
12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
6 7 8
1
9
21 22
3 4
6 7 8
D(16P)
D (16P)
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
L G 2 (BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
voltage?
Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the D8

'00-01 models:
13. Shift to [ 2 position.

3
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
Is there

B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
(16P)
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
voltage?
Y E S Repair open in the w i r e between the D13

C98-99) or B14 ('00-01) terminal and the
B (25P)
10
13 14 15
12
16
ATP 2 (BLU)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
voltage?

14-70
15. Shift to Q] position.

B22 terminals.
PCM
D (16P)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
6 7
1
9
CONNECTORS
(25P)
5
21 22
8
10
17 18
23 24 25
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12
16
ATP
(BRN)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
voltage?
YES Repair open in the w i r e between the D15

IMO - Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck.
14-71
DTC P0753: Problem In Shift Solenoid Valve
A Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before y o u troubleshoot.

B22 terminals.
PCM
SH A (BLU/YEL)
2. Disconnect PCM connectors B (25P) and D (16P).

B22 terminals.
PCM
10
20
D (16P)
B (25P)
4
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
6 7
17 18
10
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
CONNECTORS
SH A (BLU/YEL)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
D(16P)
B (25P)
1
CONNECTORS
^
6 7
11 12 13 14 15
21 22
8
10
17 18
23 24 25
14 15
12
Is the resistance
12-25
Q?
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)

Is there
voltage?
Y E S Repair short to power in the w i r e between

the D7 terminal and the shift solenoid valve A.
10
6 7
11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there
continuity?
NO Repair open in the wires between the B20 and
B22 terminals and ground (G101).B
14-72
<3
valve/shift solenoid valve A 3P connector.
B22 terminals.

B22 terminals.
PCM
PCM
CONNECTORS
SH A (BLU/YEL)
D (16P)
B (25P)
D (16P)
1
10 11 12 13 14 15
3 4
20
6 7
21 22
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
CONNECTORS
8
10
17 18
13 14 15
23 24 25
12
16
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
6 7
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
10
13 14 15
12
16
LG2IBLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there battery
Is there
continuity?
Y E S Repair short to ground in the w i r e between

the D7 terminal and shift solenoid valve A H
10. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal
of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift
solenoid valve A connector and body g r o u n d .
voltage?

PCM and recheck.
N O - C h e c k for b l o w n No. 6 (15A) fuse in the
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay b o x . B
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE/

S H I F T S O L E N O I D V A L V E A C O N N E C T O R (3P)
S H A (WHT)
Is the resistance
12-25
Q?
Y E S Check for open in the wire between the D7

terminal and shift solenoid valve AM
NO Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve/shift solenoid valve A.
14-73
D T C P0758: Problem in Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e
B Circuit

B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT)
10 11 12 13 14 15
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)*

B22 terminals.
D (16P)
B (25P)
20
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
10
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT)
B (25P)
1
9
3
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
D (16P)
21 22
8
10
17 18
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
Is the resistance
12-25
Q?
16
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)

terminals and body ground individually.
Wire side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
voltage?
Y E S - Repair short to power in the w i r e between

the D2 terminal and the shift solenoid valve B.
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there
continuity?
N O - R e p a i r open in the wires between the B20 and
B22 terminals and ground (G10D.H
14-74
0
8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B 2P connector.

B22 terminals.

B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
S H B (GRN/WHT)
B (25P)
1
9
3 4
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
10
13 14 15
12
16
10
20
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there continuity
D (16P)
B (25P)
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
(16P)
3 4
6 7
11 12 13 14 15
21 22
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between

the D2 terminal and the shift solenoid valve B
10
17 18
23 24 25
12
13 14 15
LG2 (BLK;'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there approx. battery
voltage?

PCM and recheck.
NO - Go to step 10.
10. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the
solenoid valve connector.
N O - C h e c k f o r blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the

and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H
SHIFT SOLENOID V A L V E
B CONNECTOR
Is the resistance
12-25
Q?
YES Check for open in the wires between the D2

terminal and the shift solenoid valve B and
between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid
valve B connector and ground (G101).
NO Replace the shift solenoid valve B.
14-75
D T C P0720: Problem in Countershaft S p e e d
S e n s o r Circuit

D10 terminal and D16 terminal individually.
P C M C O N N E C T O R D (16P)
NOTE: Record ail freeze data before y o u troubleshoot.

1. Check the countershaft speed sensor installation.
Is the countershaft
properly?
speed
sensor
N C (BLU)
installed
N C S G (GRN)
NOReinstall and recheck
2. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor 2P

connector.
3. Measure countershaft speed sensor resistance at
the sensor connector.
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
Is there
continuity?
YES Repair short to ground in the wires between

the D10 and D16 terminals and the countershaft
speed sensor.
6. Connect the countershaft speed sensor connector.
7. Measure the resistance between the D10 and D16
terminals.
T e r m i n a l s i d e of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
N C (BLU)
Is the resistance
400-
600 Q ?
11
NO Replace the countershaft speed sensor.
13 14 15
12
16
N C S G (GRN)
4. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P).

Is the resistance
400-
600 Q ?

PCM and recheck.
NO Repair loose terminal or open in the wires
between the D10 and D16 terminals and the
countershaft speed sensor.
14-76
D T C P0715: Problem in Mainshaft S p e e d

S e n s o r Circuit
NOTE;
Record all freeze data before y o u troubleshoot,
* Code P0715 (15) on the PCM doesn't always mean
there's an electrical problem in the mainshaft or
countershaft speed sensor circuit; code P0715 (15)
may also indicate a mechanical problem in the
transmission. A n y problem causing irregular
countershaft to mainshaft speed difference can cause
this code.

D11 terminal and D12 terminal individually.
1
6
9 10 11
13 14 15
12
N M S G (WHT)
16
N M (RED)
1. Check the mainshaft and countershaft speed

sensor installation.
Are the mainshaft and countershaft
installed
properly?
speed
sensor
Is there
NO Reinstall and recheck.
Y E S Repair short to ground in the wires between

the D11 and D12 terminals and the mainshaft speed
sensor.
2. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor 2P

connector.
continuity?
3. Measure mainshaft speed sensor resistance at the
sensor connector.
MAINSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
6. Connect the mainshaft speed sensor connector.

7. Measure the resistance between the D11 and D12
terminals.
1
6
13 14 15
10 11
16
12
N M S G (WHT)
N M (RED)
Is the resistance
400-
600 Q ?
Is the resistance
400-
600 Q ?
NO Replace the mainshaft speed sensor.

Y E S Run the Electrical Troubleshooting Flowchart
for code P0720 (code 9). Check for loose terminal fit
in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a
known-good PCM and recheck.
(cont'd)
14-77
8. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor 2P
connector.
9. Check for continuity between the D11 terminal and
the No. 1 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor
connector.
1
7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15
16
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
NM (RED)
RED
f
Is there
continuity?
YES Go to step 10.

NO Repair open in the w i r e between the D11
terminal and the mainshaft speed sensor.
10. Check for continuity between the D12 terminal and
the No. 2 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor
connector.
1
7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15
N M S G (WHT)
16
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM

PCM and recheck.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the D12
terminal and the mainshaft speed sensor.
14-78
DTC P1768: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure

Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
5. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A connector.
NOTE; Record all freeze data before you t r o u b l e s h o o t
6. Measure the resistance between the B8 and B17

terminals.
1. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A 2P connector.
LS A -
2. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

resistance at the solenoid valve connector.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
(WHT)
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
L S A + (RED)
approx. 5 Q ?
Is the resistance
YEST e r m i n a l side of male terminals
Is the resistance
approx. 5 Q?
G o t o step 7.
NO Repair loose terminal or open in the wires

between the B8 and B17 terminals and A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A
YES Go to s t e p 3 .
NO Replace the A/T clutch pressure control

solenoid valve A

B22 terminals.

B8 terminal and the B17 terminal individually.
LS A -
1
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
PCM
CONNECTORS
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
D (16P)
(25P)
(WHT)
7 8
17 18
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
23 24 2 5
21 22
7 8
10
17 18
23 24 25
12
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
L S A + (RED)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)

Is there
voltage?
continuity?
YES Repair short to ground in the wires between

the B8 and B17 terminals and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A
N O - C h e c k for blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the

repair open in the w i r e between the D5 terminal
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
(cont'd)
14-79
terminals and body g r o u n d .
1
9
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 (BLK: ' 9 8 - 9 9 )
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Wire side of f e m a l e terminals
Is there
continuity?

PCM and recheck.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the B2, B10,
B20 and B22 terminals and g r o u n d (G101). Repair
poor ground ( G 1 0 D . H
14-80
0 0
DTC P0763: Problem In Shift Solenoid Valve
C Circuit
NOTE; Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.

B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
S H C (GRN)
B (25P)
1

B22 terminals.
D (16P)
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
1
10
17 18
14 15
23 24 25
12
16
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
PCM CONNECTORS
S H C (GRN)
1
9
3
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
D(16P)
(25P)
21 22
1
10
17 18
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
12- 25 Q ?
Is the resistance
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)

Is there
voltage?
Y E S - Repair short to power in the w i r e between

the D3 terminal and the shift solenoid valve CM
NO
10 11 12 13 14 15
Go to step 5.
20
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
6 7 8
1
9
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there
continuity?
NO Repair open in the wires between the B20 and
B22 terminals and ground (G10D.B
(cont'd)
14-81
8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B 2P connector.

B22 terminals.

B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
S H C (GRN)
B (25P)
3
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
10
13 14 15
12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
Y E S Repair short to ground in the w i r e between

the D3 terminal and the shift solenoid valve C.
12
16
continuity?
10
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
D (16P)
B (25P)
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
(16P)
voltage?

PCM and r e c h e c k .
10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the
solenoid valve connector.
SHIFT SOLENOID V A L V E
C CONNECTOR
Is the resistance
12-25
Q?
Y E S Check for open in the wires between the D3

terminal and the shift solenoid valve C and
between the No. 1 terminal of the shift solenoid
valve C connector and g r o u n d (G101).H
NO Replace shift solenoid valve C.B
14-82
N O - C h e c k for blown No. 6 (15A) fuse in the

and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H
DTC P1773: Problem in A / T Clutch Pressure

Control S o l e n o i d Valve B Circuit

B18 terminal and the B25 terminal individually.

valve B 2P connector.
2. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

resistance at the solenoid valve connector.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
20
LS B +
(ORN)
2
Is there continuity
T e r m i n a l side of male t e r m i n a l s
Is the resistance
approx. 5
q?
NO - Replace the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B . B
Y E S - Repair short to ground in the wires between

the B18 and B25 terminals and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve B.M
NO
G o t o step 5.
5. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve B 2P connector.
6. Measure the resistance between the B 1 8 and B25
terminals.
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
LS B +
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
L1 S B -
(GRN)
(ORN)
Is the resistance
approx. 5
q?
N O - Repair loose terminal or open in the wires
between the B 1 8 and B25 terminals and A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B . B
(cont'd)
14-83

terminals and body ground individually.

B22 terminals.
PCM
CONNECTORS
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
D (16P)
B (25P)
21 22
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
10
17 18
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
continuity?
voltage?

PCM and recheck.
N O - C h e c k for b l o w n No. 6 (15A) fuse in the
repair open in the w i r e between the D5 terminal
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. a
14-84
NO Repair open in the wire between the B2, B10,

B20 and B22 terminals and ground (G101). Repair
poor ground ( G 1 0 D . B
DTC P1738: Problem In 2nd Clutch Pressure

Switch Circuit
NOTE; Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.

4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P) ('98-99) or D
(16P) COO-01).
5. Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch
connector.

2. Measure OP2SW voltage between these terminals.
6. Check OP2SW for continuity to ground:

'98-99 models; Terminals B14 and B20 or B22.
'00-01 models: Terminals D13 and B20 or B22.
'98-99 models: Between B14 terminal and body

ground.
'00-01 models: Between D13 terminal and body
ground.
'98-99 models:
10 11 12 13
'98-99 models:
20
21 22
6 7 8
17
14 15
23 2 4
18
25
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
3 4 5
10
11 12 13 14 15
6 7 8
20
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
'00-01 models:
PCM
CONNECTORS
B (25P)
3 4 5
2122
20
6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
'00-01 models:
D (16P)
17 18
23 24 25
10
13 14
12
15
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
9 10 11
13 14 15
LG2
(BRN/BLK)
2
8
5
12
16
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
^
Is there battery
voltage?
Is there
continuity?
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between

the B14 C98-99) or D13 ('00-01) terminal and the
2nd clutch pressure s w i t c h .
N O - C h e c k f o r loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck.
(cont'd)
14-85
7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported.

connector.
8. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels

securely.
9. Start the engine, then shift to \H position and drive

for more than five seconds.
10. Measure OP2SW voltage between these terminals:
14. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch

pressure switch connector terminal and body
ground.
2ND C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
SWITCH CONNECTOR
'98-99 models: Terminals B14 and B20 or B22.

'00-01 models: Terminals D13 and B20 or B22.
1
'98-99 models:
BLU/BLK
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
17 18
23 24 25
W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
voltage?
N O - Repair open in the wire between the 2nd
clutch pressure switch and the PCM.
15. Measure the resistance between the 2nd clutch

ground.
'00-01 models:
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
1
9
D (16P)
3 4
10 11 12 13 14 15
21 22
20
6 7
2ND C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
SWITCH CONNECTOR
8
10
17 18
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
16
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
LG2
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
PCM and recheck.
NO - Go to step 11.
14-86
T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is the resistance
10 MQ or more?

PCM and recheck.
NOReplace the 2nd clutch pressure switch.
D T C PI739: Problem in 3rd Clutch Pressure

Switch Circuit


5. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch

connector.
2. Measure the voltage between the B24 and B20 or

B22 terminals.
6. Check for continuity between the B24 terminal and

body ground.
10 11 12 13 14 15
/
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
21 22
20
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
1
9
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK:
'00-01)
Is there battery
voltage?
YES ~ G o to step 7.
Is there
continuity?
YES Repair short to ground in the wire between

the B24 terminal and the 3rd clutch pressure
switch.
N O - Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck.
(cont'd)
14-87
securely supported.
securely.
14. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch

ground.
3RD C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
SWITCH CONNECTOR
9. Start the engine, then shift to E position and drive

in 3rd gear for more than five seconds.
10. Measure the voltage between the B24 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM
1
9
C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l
23 24 25
21 22
20
LG1
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
(BRN/BLK)
BLU/WHT
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK:
'00-01)
&
Is there battery
voltage?
NO Repair open in the wire between the 3rd
clutch pressure switch and the PCM.B
Is there
approx.
V?

PCM and recheck.
15. Measure the resistance between the 3rd clutch

ground.
3RD CLUTCH P R E S S U R E
SWITCH CONNECTOR
connector.
Terminal side of male terminal
Is the resistance
10 MQ or
more?

PCM and recheck.
NO Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch.
14-88
DTC P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control

System
1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates
another code.
Does the OBD II scan tool indicate
another
code?
Y E S Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for

the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P0740 after
troubleshooting.
NOTE: Do not continue with this troubleshooting
until the causes of any other DTCs have been
corrected.
2. Measure the line pressure.
Is the line pressure
within the service
limit?
NORepair the hydraulic system as necessary (see
page 1 4 - 1 0 4 ) .
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve
(lock-up control solenoid valve)/shift solenoid valve
A (see page 14-106).
4. Replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B (see page 14-109).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF and reset the PCM
m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more
than 10 seconds.
6. Using the scan t o o l , check to be sure that the
engine coolant temperature is in 176F (80C) and
above.
7. Drive the vehicle at 55 m p h (88 km/h) constantly for
more than one minute.
8. Recheck for code P0740.
code
P0740?
Y E S Replace the transmission and torque

converter.
N O - T h e system is OK at this t i m e . H
D T C P0730: P r o b l e m in Shift Control S y s t e m
another code.
Does the OBD II scan tool indicate another
code?

troubleshooting
NOTE: Do not continue w i t h this troubleshooting
until the causes of any other DTCs have been
corrected.
2. Measure the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutch pressure
(see page 14-104).
Is each clutch pressure
within the service
limit?
NO Repair the hydraulic system as necessary
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve

(lock-up control solenoid valve)/shift solenoid valve
A (see page 14-106).
4. Replace the shift solenoid valves B and C (see page
14-107).
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF and reset the PCM
m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more
than 10 seconds.
7. Drive the vehicle at a speed over 12 m p h (20 km/h)
in 1st, 2nd, 3 r d , 4th gear in H position f o r more
than 30 seconds.
Does the OBD II scan tool indicate code
YES Replace the transmission.
NO - The system is OK at this t i m e .
14-90
P0730?
D T C P0780: M e c h a n i c a l Problem in Hydraulic

Control S y s t e m for Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e A
a n d A / T Clutch P r e s s u r e Control S o l e n o i d
V a l v e s A a n d B, or Problem in Hydraulic
Control S y s t e m
another code.
another
code?
YES Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for

troubleshooting.
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/
shift solenoid valve A assembly (see page 14-106),
and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
A and B assembly (see page 14-109).
4. Reset the PCM m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse relay box
for more than 10 seconds.
5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2nd,
3rd, and 4th gears in H position.
code
YES Replace the transmission.

NOThe problem has been corrected.
P0780?
D T C P1750: M e c h a n i c a l P r o b l e m In H y d r a u l i c
Control S y s t e m for A / T Clutch P r e s s u r e
Control S o l e n o i d V a l v e s A and B, or P r o b l e m
in Hydraulic Control S y s t e m
DTC P1751: M e c h a n i c a l P r o b l e m in Hydraulic

Control S y s t e m for Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e B
a n d A / T Clutch P r e s s u r e Control S o l e n o i d
V a l v e s A a n d B, or P r o b l e m in Hydraulic
Control S y s t e m

another code.
another

another code.
code?

troubleshooting.H
NO
another
code?
Y E S - Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for

troubleshooting H
G o t o step 2.
N O - Go to step 2.

4. Reset the PCM m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse relay box
for more than 10 seconds.
5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2 n d ,
3rd, and 4th gears in E] position.
code
Y E S - R e p l a c e the transmission.
NO
14-92
4. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2nd,

3rd, and 4th gears in E position.

3. Replace the shift solenoid valve B (see page 14107), and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
The problem has been c o r r e c t e d . *
P1750?
code
Y E S - Replace the transmission. H

NO
The problem has been corrected.
P1751?
D4
Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the H

indicator light.
Does the E indicator
light come on and stay on?
10. Measure the voltage between the D9 terminal and

body g r o u n d .
NO If the light comes on for about t w o seconds

and then goes off, it's OK. If it doesn't come on at
all, go t o step 11.
9 10 11
13 14 15
5
12
16
A T P D4 (YEL)


5. Measure the voltage between the A14 terminal and
body ground.
YES Faulty PCM or the gauge assembly.
28 29 30
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
2 5 26 27
10
23
24
NO Check for short to g r o u n d in the w i r e between

the D9 terminal and the transmission range switch.
If wire is OK, check the transmission range
switch.
32
11. Make sure the Honda PGM Tester is not connected

to the DLC.
D4 IND (GRN/BLK)
12. Shift t o S position.

Does the B indicator
light come on?

Is there
voltage?
YES Repair short to power in the w i r e between

the A14 terminal and the gauge a s s e m b l y .

connectors and recheck the B indicator light
several times. If the problem is intermittent,
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. If the
light then works OK every t i m e , replace the original
PCM.B
7. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P).
9. Shift t o any position other than
&
(cont'd)
14-93
U S Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and B20

and B22 terminals.
19. Reconnect PCM connector B (25P).

20. Connect the digital multimeter between the A14
and B20 or B22 terminals.
17 18
PCM CONNECTORS
23 24 25
21 22
20
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
LG1
A (32P)
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
(BRN/BLK)
B (25P)
(1) 2 3 4
8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
10 11 12 13 1415
5 6 (7)
26 27
28 29 30 (311
D4 IND
(GRN/BLK)
32
3 4
20
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there continuity
terminal?
between
ground
and
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
each
Is there voltage for at least 2
NO Repair open in the wire(s) between the B20 or
B22 terminal and ground (G101) B
17. Measure the voltage between terminals B1 and B22,
and between terminals B9 and B20.
IGP1 ( Y E L / B L K )
IGP2 (YEL/BLK)
1
y
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
17 18
23 24 25
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there battery
voltage?
NO Repair open or short in the w i r e between the
B1 or B9 terminal and the PGM-FI main relay and
f r o m fuse No. 46 in the under-hood fuse/relay box
to the PGM-FI main relay. B
14-94
seconds?
YES Check for open in the wire between the A14

terminal and the gauge assembly. If wire is OK,
check for a faulty B indicator light bulb or a faulty
printed circuit board in the gauge assembly.B
NO
G o t o step 22.

24. Check for continuity between the A14 terminal and
No. 12 terminal of the gauge assembly C (16P)
connector.
(1) 2 3 4
5 6 (7)
8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27
(GRN/BLK)
28 29 30 (313
32
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C (16P)
CONNECTOR
1
10 11
12
14 15 16
D4 IND ( G R N / B L K )
Is there
continuity?

connectors. Check the transmission range switch. If
recheck H
NORepair open in the wire between the A14
terminal and the gauge assembly.
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
5. Measure the voltage between the B12 terminal of
the multiplex control unit, driver's B (22P)
connector and body ground w i t h the throttle
released and the brake pedal pressed.
1. Press the brake pedal.

Are the brake lights
ON?
NO Repair faulty brake light circuit, refer to
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 19-8).B
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and shift to IB
position.
MULTIPLEX C O N T R O L UNIT, DRIVER'S

B (22P) C O N N E C T O R
1
3 4 5
11 12 13 14 15 16
6 7 8 9
17
X XXX
22
ILU (WHT/RED)
3. Press the brake pedal, and release the accelerator

pedal.
4. Measure the voltage between the A28 terminal and
body g r o u n d .
Is there battery
voltage?
5 6 (7)
(1) 2 3 4
8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27
28 29 30 (31]
32
ILU ( W H T / R E D )
NO Repair open in the wire between the A28

terminal of the PCM and B12 terminal of the driver's
multiplex control unit. H
6. Measure the voltage between the B22, terminal of
the multiplex control unit, driver's B (22P)
connector and body ground.

MULTIPLEX C O N T R O L UNIT, DRIVER'S
B (22P) C O N N E C T O R
Is there battery
voltage?
1/ 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
11 12 13 14 15 1 6 X 17
22
XXXX
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

(GRN)
Is there battery
voltage?
NO Repair open in the wire between the B22
terminal of the driver's multiplex control unit and
the driver's under-dash fuse No. 9 (via the shift lock
solenoid).
14-96
Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and move the shift

lever to E position.

9. Disconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and B (25P).
Dose the OB indicator

illuminate?
in the gauge
assembly
YESCheck for loose terminal fit to the driver's

multiplex control unit B12 and B22 terminal wires.
If necessary, substitute a known-good driver's
multiplex control unit.B
NO Repair open in the IB position switch circuit
from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box K10
(BLK/BLU) wire to ground ( G 1 0 D . B
10. Measure the voltage between the A32 and B20 or

B22 terminals while pressing the brake pedal.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
(25P)
3 4
6 7 8
8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
10 11 12 13 14 15
(1) 2 3 4
25 26 27
5 6 (7)
28 29 30 (31
32
BK S W
(WHT/BLK)
20
21 22
A 17 18
23 24 25
LG1
(BRN/
BLK)
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there battery
voltage?
NO Repair open in the wire between the A32
terminal and the brake pedal position switch (brake
switch).
(cont'd)
14-97
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Reconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and B (25P).

the throttle position sensor and the B20 or B22
terminal of the PCM.
13. Measure the voltage between the C27 and B20 or

B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
3 4
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
10 11 12 13 14 15
C (31P)
B (25P)
1
9
7 8
17 18
20
5
1 2
23 24 25
21 22
9 10
21 22
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
/ 16 17 18 19 20 21 /
26 27 28
29 30
25
/
THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR CONNECTOR
TPS
(RED/BLK)
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K ; '00-01)
1
SG1 (GRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - Replace the throttle body.

Is there approx. 0.5 V (throttle
fully
closed)?
NO
Y E S - C h e c k f o r loose terminal fit in the PCM

PCM and recheck.
Go to step 17.
17. Check for continuity between the C18 and B20 or

B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)

15. Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector.
C(31P)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
3 4
6 7 8
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
//
/ //
/
1 2
25
9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 21
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
29 30
SG2
(GRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
continuity?
Y E S Repair open in the wire between the C18

terminal and the throttle position sensor.
NO Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck.
14-98
Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the A/T shift cable adjustment (see page 14136).
6. Measure the voltage between the No. 7 terminal

and body ground.
K E Y S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R (7P)
2. Disconnect the key switch 7P connector f r o m the

steering lock assembly.
3. Connect the No. 7 terminal of the key switch
connector to the battery positive terminal, and
connect the No. 5 terminal to the battery negative
terminal.
WHT/YEL
5 6
Is there battery
e e
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), then push the

ignition key.
5. Check the key interlock solenoid operation. A
clicking sound should be heard while pushing the
ignition key, and no sound should be heard w h e n
releasing the key.
Does the key interlock
solenoid
operate
voltage?
N O - C h e c k f o r blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the unde

r-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open
or short in the wire between the No. 7 terminal of
the key switch connector and under-hood fuse/
relay b o x . H
7. Disconnect the park pin switch 4P connector on the
front side of the shift lever.
8. With the shift lever in Park, check for continuity
between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the park
pin switch 4P connector.
properly?
P A R K PIN S W I T C H
NO -Faulty key interlock solenoid/switch. Replace
the ignition key cylinder/steering lock assembly.H
2
BLK
4
WHT/RED
NOTE: Do not re-key the new ignition switch.

Re-key the other lock cylinder to match the new
switch.
Is there
continuity?
NO Repair open in the wires between the park pin
switch and the 4P connector. If wires are OK,
replace the park pin switch.
(cont'd)
14-99
Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
the park pin switch 4P connector and the No. 5
terminal of the key switch connector.
5 6 7
WHT/RED
WHT/RED
Is there
continuity?
NO Repair open in the w i r e between No. 4
terminal of the park pin switch 4P connector and
the No. 5 terminal of the key switch connector
the 4P connector and body g r o u n d .
4
BLK
i J)
Is there
continuity?
YES Check for loose key switch connector and

park pin switch connector. If necessary, substitute a
known-good steering lock a s s e m b l y .
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the No. 3
terminal of the 4P connector and ground ( G 1 0 D . B
14-100
<3&
Road Test
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block rear wheels. Start the engine, then shift to B position while pressing the brake
pedal. Press the accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should not stall.
3. Repeat the same test in B position.
4. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A), and g o t o the PGM-FI Data List; then g o t o step 1. If you don't have a PGM
Tester, go to step 5.
5. Pull back the carpet f r o m the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM (A).
6. Connect the digital multimeter (B) and the special tools (C) to check voltage between the C27 ( + ) terminal and B20
( - ) or B22 ( - ) terminal of the PCM.
(cont'd)
14-101
Road Test (cont'd)
7. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the E position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage. While driving,
check that the shift points occur at the proper speeds by m o n i t o r i n g the throttle position sensor voltage and
comparing your shift point speeds and voltage to those in the table. (The throttle position sensor voltage
represents the throttle opening.)
Upshift-El position
Throttle Opening
Throttle position
sensor voltage: 0.7 V
Throttle position
Fully-opened throttle.
Throttle position
Unit of Speed
mph
km/h
mph
km/h
mph
km/h
1st 2nd
9-10
14-16
24-27
39-43
35-39
57-63
2nd 3rd
21-23
33-37
45-48
72-78
65-68
104-110
3rd 4th
30-34
48-54
65-68
104-110
98-101
157-163
Lock-up ON
45 48
73 - 7 7
77-81
124-130
99-103
160-166
Unit of Speed
mph
km/h
mph
km/h
mph
km/h
Lock-up O F F
44-47
71-75
68-71
109-115
90-94
145-151
4th 3rd
17-19
27-31
3rd 2nd
2nd 1st
6 - 8 (3rd 1st)
9 - 1 3 (3rd 1st)
89-92
142-148
54-58
87-93
27-31
44-50
Downshift-IB position
Throttle Opening
Throttle position
Throttle position
Fully-opened throttle.
Throttle position
8. Accelerate to about 35 m p h (57 km/h) so the transmission is in 4th, then shift f r o m B position to [2] position.
The vehicle should immediately begin s l o w i n g d o w n f r o m engine braking.
9. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage in the f o l l o w i n g positions.
0D (1st Gear) Position
Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts should
not occur w i t h the shift lever in this position.
SO (2nd Gear) Position
Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts and
downshifts should not occur w i t h the shift lever in this position.
I B (Reverse) Position
Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle, and check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage.
10. Test in E (Park) Position.
Park the vehicle on a slope (approx. 16), apply the parking brake, and shift into B position. Release the brake; the
vehicle should not move.
14-102
Stall Speed Test

1. Set the parking brake, and block the front wheels.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine, and start the engine.
3. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
4. After the engine has w a r m e d up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), shift to \2\ position.
5. Fully press the brake pedal and accelerator for 6 to 8 seconds, and note engine speed. Do not move the shift lever
while raising engine speed.
6. Allow t w o minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in H, CU, and SB positions.
NOTE:
Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a time.

Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic purposes only.
Stall speed should be the same in H, [2], H , and BE positions.
Do not test stall speed w i t h the A/T pressure gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:

Specification:
2,400 rpm
Service Limit:
2,250 2,550 rpm
TROUBLE
PROBABLE C A U S E
Stall rpm high in H, CU, [J, and IE positions
Stall rpm high in CD position
Slippage of 1st clutch
Stall rpm high in [JD position
Slippage of 2nd clutch
Stall rpm high in OH position
Slippage of 4th clutch
Stall rpm low in H, [2], IS, and IE positions
Engine output low

Torque converter one-way clutch slipping
Low fluid level or ATF pump output

Clogged ATF strainer
Pressure regulator valve stuck closed
Slipping clutch
14-103
Pressure Tests
A/T oil pressure gauge set 07406-0020400

A/T pressure hose, 2210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
A/T pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Before testing, be sure the transmission fluid is filled t o the proper level.
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
3. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels securely.
4. A l l o w the front wheels to rotate freely.
5. W a r m up the engine (the radiator fan comes on), then stop it and connect the tachometer.
6. Connect the oil pressure gauges to each inspection hole securely, and do not allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the holes.
TORQUE:
18 N m (1.8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
A / T OIL PRESSURE G A U G E
SET W / P A N E L
07406-0020400
INSPECTION HOLE
14-104
A / T PRESSURE HOSE, 2 2 1 0 m m
07MAJ-PY4011A
(4 Required)
INSPECTION HOLE
A / T PRESSURE HOSE ADAPTER

07MAJ-PY40120
(4 Required)
INSPECTION HOLE
0
7. Start the engine, and run it at 1,500 rpm.
8. Shift to H or E position, and measure line pressure at line pressure inspection hole (A).
NOTE; Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in shift lever positions other than H or [ 0 .
9. Shift to QQ position, and measure 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection hole (B).
10. Shift to [2] position, and measure 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection hole (C).
11. Shift to [B position, then press the brake pedal and hold it.
12. Shift to H position, and release the brake pedal (the transmission is in 1st gear).
13. Accelerate the engine to 2,500 rpm (the transmission will be shifted to 2nd gear).
14. Release the accelerator for more than 5 seconds after the transmission is shifted to 2nd gear, the engine speed
will decrease to about 1,000 r p m .
15. Press the accelerator very slowly (so it takes at least 5 seconds to raise the engine speed to 2,000rpm), then hold
the engine speed at 2,000 r p m .
16. Measure 3rd and 4th clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch pressure inspection hole (D), and the 4th clutch pressure
inspection hole (E), as the transmission will shifted 2nd gear to 3rd gear, then to 4th gear.
PRESSURE
Line
(A)
1st clutch
(B)
2nd clutch
(C)
3rd clutch
(D)
4th clutch
(E)
SHIFT
LEVER
POSITION
05] or E
m
S3
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE C A U S E
FLUID P R E S S U R E
Service Limit
Standard
No (or low)
line pressure
Torque converter,
ATF pump, pressure
regulator valve,
torque converter
check valve
800 860 kPa

( 8 . 2 - 8 . 8 kgf/cm ,
1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi)
760 kPa
(7.7 kgf/cm , 110
psi)
No or low 1st
pressure
1st clutch
790 870 kPa

( 8 . 1 - 8 . 9 kgf/cm ,
120 130 psi)
750 kPa
(7.6 kgf/cm , 110
psi)
No or low 2nd
pressure
2nd clutch
No or low 3rd
pressure
3rd clutch
No or low 4th
pressure
4th clutch
Servo valve or 4th

clutch
17. Install the inspection hole bolts w i t h new sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE:
18 N m (1.8 kgf.m,13 Ibfft)
NOTE: Do not reuse old sealing washers.
14-105
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A Test
valve 3P connector/shift solenoid valve A.
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid

Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A
Replacement
NOTE: Torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift
solenoid valve A assembly must be removed/replaced
as an assembly.
1. Remove the bolts securing the ignition coil bracket
('98-99 models), then remove the harness cover
f r o m the transmission hanger.
2. Remove the mounting bolts and torque converter
clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve A.
2. Measure the resistance of the torque converter

clutch solenoid valve between the No. 3 terminal of
the 3P connector and body ground.
STANDARD:
12-25 Q
3. Measure the resistance of the shift solenoid valve A

between the No. 1 terminal of the 3P connector and
body ground.
STANDARD:
12-25 Q
4. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/

shift solenoid valve A if either resistance is out of
specification.
5. If the resistance is w i t h i n the standard, connect the
No. 1 terminal of the 3P connector to the battery
positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
Connect the No. 3 terminal to the battery positive
terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/
shift solenoid valve A if no sound is heard w h e n
connecting either terminal to the battery positive
terminal.
3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of

the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/shift
solenoid valve A, and install a new torque
converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve
A w i t h a new filter/gasket (B).
4. Install the harness cover on the transmission
hanger, and install the ignition coil bracket bolts
('98-99 models).
5. Install the male terminal connector (C) of the
solenoid connector on the harness cover.
6. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
reconnect the connector securely.
14-106
Shift Solenoid Valves B and C Test
Shift Solenoid Valves B and C

Replacement
1. Remove the starter.

2. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B or C
connector.
NOTE: If the shift solenoid valve B and C are replaced or

removed at the same time, be sure to reinstall t h e m
correctly. The connector color of shift solenoid valve B
is black, and the connector color of shift solenoid valve
C is brown.
1. Remove the starter.
NOTE: If you are only replacing shift solenoid valve
C, starter removal is not needed.
2. Remove the mounting bolt and the shift solenoid
valve B.
3. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and

No. 2 terminals of the shift solenoid valve B or C.
STANDARD:
12-25 Q
4. Replace the shift solenoid valve B or C if the

resistance is out of standard.
5. If the resistance is w i t h i n the standard, connect the
No. 2 terminal of the shift solenoid valve B or C
terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
Replace the shift solenoid valve B or C if no sound
is heard.
6 x 1.0 m m
1 2 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
3. Remove the mounting bolt and the shift solenoid

valve C.
4. Install a new shift control solenoid valve B or C w i t h
new O-rings (A). While installing the valves, do not
allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the
transmission.
5. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then
reconnect the connector securely.
6. Install the starter.
14-107
A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test
valves A and B 2P connectors.
A
Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch

pressure control solenoid valves A and B to the
battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2
terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make
sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
A and B move.
2. Measure the resistance of the A/T clutch pressure

control solenoid valves A and B between the No. 1
and No. 2 terminals of each connector.
STANDARD:
Approx. 5.0 Q
3. If the resistance of either A/T clutch pressure

control solenoid is out of standard, replace the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
4. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A (and B) to the
battery positive t e r m i n a l , and connect the No. 2
terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking
sound should be heard.
5. If not, remove the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B.
6. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve for dust and dirt.
14-108
8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check

valve movement.
NOTE: You can see the valve movement through
the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
body (C).
9. If either valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or if the
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid does not
operate, replace the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B.
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement

1. Remove the ATF cooler hose (outlet line) at the ATF
cooler line. Turn the end of the cooler hose up to
prevent ATF f r o m f l o w i n g o u t then plug the line
and hose.
2. Remove the ATF cooler line (outlet line) f r o m the
3. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and B (A).
6x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 Ibfft)
4. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of

the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B and the transmission housing.
5. Place the new gasket (B) on the transmission
housing, then install the 8 x 1 8 m m ATF feed pipe
(C), 8 x 2 6 m m pipe (D) and 8 x 36 m m pipe (E) w i t h
their filter side into the transmission housing.
6. Install the new O-rings (F) over the feed pipes, and
install the 8 x 40 m m ATF feed pipe (G).
7. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B and harness clamp bracket (H).
8. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect
t h e m securely.
9. Install the ATF cooler line (outlet line), and connect
the ATF cooler hose to the cooler line.
14-109
Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the connectors from the mainshaft and
countershaft speed sensors.
2. Remove the bolt securing the mainshaft speed
sensor/then remove the mainshaft speed sensor
from the end cover.
3. Remove the bolt securing the countershaft speed

sensor, then remove the countershaft speed sensor
from the transmission housing.
6 x 1.0
12 N m
mm
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
4. Replace the O-rings with new ones before installing

the sensors.
5. Install the mainshaft and countershaft speed
sensors, then connect the connectors.
14-110
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch

Replacement
connector.
3rd Clutch Pressure Switch

Replacement
connector.
2 0 N m (2.0 k g f m , 14 I b f f t )
2 0 N m (2.0 k g f m , 1 4 I b f f t )
2. Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch, then install

a new one w i t h a new sealing washer. Tighten the
switch on the metal part, not the plastic part.
3. Reconnect the connector, making sure there is no
water, oil, dust, or other foreign particles inside it.
2. Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch, then install

a new one w i t h a new sealing washer. Tighten the
switch on the metal part, not the plastic part.
3. Reconnect the connector, making sure there is no
water, oil, dust, or other foreign particles inside it.
14-111
ATF Level Check
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Park the vehicle on the level g r o u n d . Turn off the
engine.
6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the

recommended fluid into the filler hole (A) to bring it
to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a nonHonda ATF can affect shift quality.
B
2 4 x 1.5 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) f r o m the

transmission, and wipe it w i t h a clean cloth.
A
7. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) w i t h a new sealing

washer (C).
4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission.
8. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It
should be between the upper mark (B) and lower
mark (C).
14-112
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature
(the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle.
2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the
engine off.
3. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug, and
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
5. Refill the transmission w i t h the recommended fluid

into the filler hole (A) to the upper mark on the
dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF
can affect shift quality.
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
2.9 fl (3.1 U S qt, 2.6 Imp qt) at changing
7.2 fl (7.6 U S qt, 6.3 Imp qt) at overhaul
B
NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to ATF

Cooler Flushing (see page 14-127).
18 x 1.5 m m
4 9 N m (5.0 k g f m , 3 6 I b f f t )
2 4 x 1.5 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
6. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) w i t h a new sealing

washer (C).
4. Reinstall the drain plug w i t h a new sealing washer.
14-113
Transmission Removal
1. Before disconnecting power, make sure you have
the anti-theft code for the radio, then write d o w n
the frequencies for the radio's preset stations.
8. Remove the ATF cooler hose (A) f r o m the clamp (B)

on the starter.
2. Disconnect the battery negative t e r m i n a l , then

remove the positive terminal.
3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then
remove the battery and battery tray.
4. Remove the battery cable clamps f r o m the battery
base.
5. Loosen the m o u n t i n g bolts securing the battery
base bracket, then remove the battery base bracket
and battery base.
6. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing
assembly.
7. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported. Remove the drain plug, and drain the
automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Reinstall the
drain plug w i t h a new sealing washer.
9. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) f r o m the ATF

cooler lines (C). Turn the ends of the ATF cooler
hoses up to prevent ATF f r o m f l o w i n g out, then
plug the ATF cooler hoses and lines.
NOTE: Check for any signs of leakage at the hose
joints.
10. Remove the starter cables (A) f r o m the starter (B)
and clamp bracket (C), then remove the starter.
11. Remove the transmission ground terminal (D).

12. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B connector (E),
and C connector (F), then remove the harness
clamp f r o m the clamp bracket.
14-114
<3
13. Disconnect the connectors from the 3rd clutch
pressure switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (B),
and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B (C), then remove the harness clamps from
the clamp brackets.
17. Disconnect the connectors from the countershaft

speed sensor (A), and 2nd clutch pressure switch
(B).
B
18. Remove the transmission range switch connector
(C) from the connector bracket (D), then disconnect
it.
14. Disconnect the connector from the torque
converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve
A assembly (A), then remove the connector from
harness cover (B).
B
19. Remove the nut from the front mount.
15. Remove the two bolts securing the harness cover

and the ignition coil bracket, and remove the
ignition coil (C). ('98-99 models)
16. Push the harness cover rearward to remove from
the transmission hanger (D).
(cont'd)
14-115
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
20. Lift and support the engine/transmission assembly
w i t h an engine hanger (P/N AAR-T-1256, available
through the American Honda Tool and Equipment
p r o g r a m , or equivalent).
22. Remove the cotter pins <A) and castle nuts (hex
nuts) (B), and remove the damper forks (C), then
separate the ball joints f r o m the lower arms (D),
18-17).
C
2 1 . Remove the splash shield.
23. Remove the bolts securing the radius rods (E), then
separate the radius rods f r o m the lower arms (D).
24. Pry the driveshafts out of the differential and the
intermediate shaft, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see step 10 on page 16-4).
14-116
25. Make reference marks (A) across both the front

beam (B) and the rear beam (C).
28. Remove the transmission lower rear mount (A)

from the transmission.
B
26. Disconnect the vacuum tube (A) on the front beam
(B), and unclamp the power steering fluid pipe (C)
from the clamps on the front beam.
A
29. Pull on the inboard joints to remove the left
driveshaft from the differential and to remove the
right driveshaft from the intermediate shaft.
30. Move the left driveshaft to the front side. Coat all
precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil,
then tie the plastic bags (B) over the driveshaft
ends.
31. Remove the intermediate shaft.
A
27. Remove the nuts securing the transmission lower
mounts, then remove the front beam (B).
32. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean
engine oil, then tie the plastic bags over the both
ends of intermediate shaft.
(cont'd)
14-117
33. Remove the bolts securing shift cable holder (A),
then remove shift cable cover (B).
36. Remove the torque converter cover (A), then

remove the eight drive plate bolts (B) one at a time
while rotating the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint,

remove the bolts securing the holder before
removing the bolts securing the cover.
37. Remove the engine stiffener bolts (C).

38. Remove the front mount bracket.
34. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever
(D), then remove the shift cable (E) w i t h the control
lever. Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
35. Install a 6 x 1.0 x 14 m m bolt (A) and nut (B) on the
shift cable cover (C), then reinstall the shift cable
cover to the torque converter housing.
(The torque converter may stay on the engine, and
the bolt head will support the torque converter,
w h e n the transmission is removed.)
B
14-118
39. Place a transmission jack under the transmission.

40. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts.
42. Pull the transmission away from the engine until it

clears the dowel pins, then lower it on the
transmission jack.
NOTE: If the torque converter is stuck to the drive
plate, reach through the starter opening, and pull it
toward the transmission housing.
43. Remove the shift cable cover, then remove the
torque converter assembly from the torque
converter housing.
41. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts

(A) and connector bracket bolt (B).
B
44. Remove the transmission lower front mount.
(cont'd)
14-119
45. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's
damaged.
46. Remove the 6 x 1.0 x 14 m m bolt (A) and nut (B)

f r o m the shift cable cover (C).
B
14-120
Transmission Installation
1. Flush the ATF cooler (see page 14-127).
2. Install the transmission lower front m o u n t
6. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install

the transmission housing mounting bolts (A) and
connector bracket bolt (B).
B
12 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f m , 4 7 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N - m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
3. Install the torque converter assembly (A) on the

mainshaft (B) with a new O-ring (C).
D
A
1 2 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
7. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts.
E
4. Install the 14 m m dowel pin (D) and 10 m m dowel
pin (E) in the torque converter housing (F).
5. Place the transmission on a transmission jack, and
raise it to engine level.
12 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
14-121
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
13. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable
excessively.
8. Install the front mount bracket.

10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f m , 2 8 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 I b f f t )
9. Install the engine stiffener mounting bolts (A).

C
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
14 N m (1.4 k g f m , 10 I b f f t )
14. Install the lock bolt (D) w i t h a new lock washer (E),
then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt.
15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift
cable holder (G) on the shift cable cover.
be sure to install the shift cable holder after
installing the shift cable cover to the torque
converter housing.
A
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f m , 2 8 I b f f t )
10. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (B)

w i t h eight bolts (C). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
crankshaft rotates freely.
11. Install the torque converter cover (D).
12. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt as necessary (see
page 6-17).
14-122
16. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft

contacts the transmission (differential) w i t h solvent
or carburetor cleaner, and dry w i t h compressed air.
Then install the intermediate shaft in the
differential. While installing the intermediate shaft,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission.
10 x 1.25 m m
3 9 N m (4.0 k g f m , 3 0 I b f f t )
17. Install new set rings on the right and left

driveshafts.
18. Install the right and left driveshaft, refer to
While installing the left driveshaft in the differential,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission.
20. Install the front beam (A) by aligning both reference

marks (B) on both rear beam (C), and tighten the
bolts.
A
NOTE:
Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts
the transmission (differential) w i t h solvent or
carburetor cleaner, and dry w i t h compressed air.
Turn the right and left steering knuckle fully
outward, and slide the left driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its spring clip engage
the side gear. Slide the right driveshaft into the
intermediate shaft until you feel its spring clip
engage the intermediate shaft.
19. Install the transmission lower rear mount on the
transmission.
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N-m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
21. Install the transmission lower mount nuts (D).

22. Connect the vacuum tube (E), and install the power
steering fluid pipe (F) on its clamps.
(cont'd)
14-123
2 3 . Install the damper forks (A), then install the ball
joints on each lower arms (B) with the castle nuts
(hex nuts) (C) and new cotter pins (D).
10 x 1.25 m m
43 N m
2 7 . Install and tighten the nut on the front mount.

1 2 x 1.25 m m
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
(4.4 k g f - m , 3 2 I b f f t )
28. Remove the hoist, then remove the hoist bracket

from the engine.
29. Connect the transmission range switch connector
(A), then install it on its connector bracket (B).
12 x 1.25 m m
49~59 N m (5.0-6.0 kgfm,
3 6 - 4 3 Ibfft)
24. Install the radius rods (E) on each lower arm.

25. Remove the jack from the transmission.
26. Install the splash shield.
C
30. Connect the connectors to the countershaft speed
sensor (C) and 2nd clutch pressure switch (D). Do
not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign
particles to enter the 2nd clutch pressure switch
connector.
14-124
31. Install the harness cover (A) on the transmission

hanger (B), then install the ignition coil (C). ('98-99
models)
34. Connect the connectors to the shift solenoid valve

B (A) and shift solenoid valve C (B), then install the
clamp on the clamp bracket.
10
x 1.25 mm
32. Install the torque converter clutch solenoid valve/

shift solenoid valve A assembly connector (D) on
the harness cover, then connect the connector.
33. Connect the connectors to the 3rd clutch pressure
switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (B), and A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B (C),
then install the clamps on the clamp brackets. Do
not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign
particles to enter the 3rd clutch pressure switch
connector.
35. Install the transmission ground terminal (C).

36. Install the starter (D) on the torque converter
housing. Connect the starter cables (E) to the
starter, and install the harness clamp on the clamp
bracket. Make sure the crimped side of the starter
cable ring terminal is facing out.
37. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
lines (B) (see page 14-128). Clamp the ATF cooler
hose w i t h the clamp (C) on the starter.
I!
(cont'd)
14-125
38. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
39. Install the battery cable clamps on the battery base.
40. Install the battery tray and battery, then secure the
battery with its hold-down bracket.
41. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing
assembly.
42. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-113).
43. Connect the battery positive terminal, then connect
the negative terminal.
44. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all gears three times.
45. Check the shift lever operation, A/T gear position
indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
46. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment, refer
to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 185).
47. Start the engine and let it reach normal operating
temperature (the radiator fan comes on) with the
transmission in OS or OB position, then turn it off
and check the ATF level (see page 14-112).
48. Perform a road test (see page 14-101).
50. Loosen the front mount nut after the road test, then
retighten the nut to the specified torque.
12x1.25 mm
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f m , 4 0 I b f f t )
14-126
ATF Cooler Flushing

Commercially available transmission cooler flusher
Kent-Moore J38405-A or equivalent
7. With the water and air valves (A) off, attach the
water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if
available.)
This procedure should be performed before reinstalling

the transmission.
1. Check the equipment for wear and cracks before
using it. Replace any w o r n or cracked components.
2. Using the measuring cup, fill the flusher (A) with 21
ounces (approximately 2/3 full) of biodegradable
flushing fluid (J35944-20). Do not substitute with
any other fluid. Follow the handling procedure on
the fluid container.
8. Turn on the water valve for 10 seconds. If water

does not f l o w through the cooler, it is completely
plugged, cannot be flushed, and must be replaced.
9. Depress the trigger to mix the flushing fluid into the
water flow. Use the wire clip to hold the trigger
down.
10. While flushing w i t h the water and flushing fluid for
t w o minutes, turn the air valve on for five seconds
every 15 20 seconds to create a surging action.
2
AIR PRESSURE: M A X 845 kPa (8.45 k g f / c m ,

120 psi)
11. Turn the water valve off. Release the trigger, then
reverse the hoses to the cooler so you can flush in
the opposite direction. Repeat steps 8 through 10.
3. Secure the flusher filler cap, and pressurize the
flusher w i t h compressed air to 5 5 0 - 829 kpa (5.6 8.45 kgf/cm , 8 0 - 1 2 0 psi). The air line should be
equipped w i t h a water trap to ensure a dry air
system.
12. Release the trigger, and rinse the cooler w i t h water

for one minute.
4. Hang the flusher under the vehicle.

5. Attach the flusher discharge hose (B) to the return
line of the ATF cooler using a clamp.
6. Connect the drain hose (C) to the inlet line on the
ATF cooler using a clamp. Securely clamp the
opposite end of the drain hose to a bucket (D) or
floor drain.
13. Turn the water valve and the water supply off.
14. Turn the air valve on for t w o minutes, or until no
moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. Residual
moisture in the cooler or lines can damage the
transmission.
15. Remove the flusher f r o m the cooler line. Attach the
drain hose to an ATF container.
16. Install the transmission, and leave the drain hose
attached to the cooler line.
(cont'd)
14-127
ATF Cooler Flushing (cont'd)
17. Make sure the transmission is in OS position.
Fill the transmission w i t h ATF, and run the engine
for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95 fi
(1.0 US qt., 0.8 Imp qt.) is discharged.
ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement

1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the lines (B) and the
ATF cooler, and secure them w i t h the clips (C).
A
18. Remove the drain hose, and reconnect the cooler

return hose to the transmission.
19. Refill the transmission w i t h ATF to the proper level
(see page 14-113).
2. Clamp the ATF cooler hose w i t h the yellow mark

(D) on the clamp (E).
14-128
Shift Lever Removal

1. Shift the transmission into SB position.
5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A)

and park pin switch 4P connector (B).
2. Remove the center console, refer to '98-01 Accord

3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A),
then separate the shift cable end f r o m the shift
lever assembly.
\
6. Remove the four bolts (C) securing the shift lever

bracket base, then remove the shift lever assembly.
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)

counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the
holder to remove the shift cable f r o m the shift lever
bracket base (C).
NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting
the shift cable guide pipe (D).
14-129
Shift Lever Installation
1. Install the shift lever assembly.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the
El position indicator light comes on.
3. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then

release your hand. Pull the shift cable back one
step so that the shift position is in E .
+ +++
14-130
5. Insert a 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the

positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base
through the positioning hole on the shift lever
assembly.
Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)

holder onto the shift lever bracket base (C).
Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting
stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) w i t h the
square shape (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate
the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the
shift cable.
NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the
shift cable guide (H).
7. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly

installed on the mounting stud (B).
Properly Installed:
10. Remove the 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
11. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector and park
pin switch 4P connector.
Not Properly Installed:
13. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
lever releases.
Cable e n d rides o n t h e b o t t o m
of the m o u n t i n g stud.
8. If not properly installed, remove the shift cable

f r o m the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the
shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift
cable bracket base.
9. Install and tighten the nut.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
14-131
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS c o m p o n e n t locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
A p p l y silicone grease to these parts:
Movable parts of the shift lever.
Movable parts of the shift lock mechanism.
Sliding surfaces on the detent spring.
PUSH BUTTON
SPRING
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
PLUNGER
SCREW
3 N m (0.3 k g f - m , 2 I b f f t )
Apply non-hardening thread
lock sealant.
PLUNGER SPRING
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID CLAMP
A / T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
A / T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT HOUSING
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
LEVER COVER
A/T GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR LIGHT
SHIFT LOCK
STOP CUSHION
8 x 1.25mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
DETENT SPRING
SHIFT CABLE
SHIFT LEVER
BRACKET BASE
8 x 1.25mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
14-132
Shift Cable Replacement

securely supported, refer to the '98-01 Accord
7. Remove the floor heat shield.

8. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and
g r o m m e t (B).

securely.
3. Shift the transmission into El position.
4. Remove the center console, refer to the '98-01
lever assembly.
9. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (A),

then remove the shift cable cover (B).
remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder
before removing the bolts securing the shift cable
cover.
A
bracket base (C).
the shift cable guide pipe (D).
C
10. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever
(D), then remove the shift cable (E) w i t h the control
lever.
(cont'd)
14-133
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
11. Insert the new shift cable through the g r o m m e t
hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket.
E position indicator light comes on.
12. Verify that the transmission is in E position on the

control shaft.
18. If necessary, push the shift cable until it stops, then

release your hand. Pull the shift cable back one
step so that the shift position is in E.
13. Install the control lever (A) w i t h the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable
excessively.
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )

assembly.
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m ,
10 I b f f t )
14. Install the lock bolt (D) w i t h a new lock washer (E),
then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt.
15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift
cable holder (G) on the cover.
be sure to install the shift cable holder after
installing the shift cable cover to the torque
converter housing.
16. Install the floor heat shield.
14-134
stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the
shift cable.

from the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the
mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift
cable bracket base.

8x1.25 mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
25. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
27. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation
in all gears.
Properly Installed:
Cable end rides on the bottom

of the mounting stud.
14-135
Shift Cable Adjustment
1. Shift the transmission into E position.
2. Remove the center console, refer to '98-01 Accord
5. Push the shift cable until it stops, then release your

hand. Pull the shift cable back one step so that the
shift position is in EL

lever assembly.
+ ++++
E position indicator light comes on.

bracket base (C).
the shift cable guide (D).
14-136

assembly.
<2
stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) w i t h the
shift cable.

f r o m the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the
m o u n t i n g stud w h i l e the shift cable is on the shift
cable bracket base.

8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
13. Remove the 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin that was installed

15. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
lever releases.
Properly Installed:
Not Properly Installed:
Cable end rides o n the b o t t o m

of the m o u n t i n g stud.
14-137
A/T Gear Position Indicator

Component Location index
A / T GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

Indicator Input T e s t , p a g e 14-143
I n d i c a t o r B u l b R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 14-144

T e s t , p a g e 14-140
14-138
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
No 41 (100A)
CTNjO
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No.42 (50A)
CTNJD
No.9 (15A)
YEL
POWEPTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
[7
1
D4
IND
VSP
OUT
ATP
R
D 1 5 | D13 ('96-99 models)

B14 ('00-01 models)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
<3
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
DIMMING
CIRCUIT
STARTER
CUT RELAY
r BLK/BLU
RED/BLK | RED/BLK
LT BLU
P>
CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT
Wr-
--
- PNK -
- PNK -
- BLU -
- BLU -
- BLU
-BRN-
-BRN-
- BRN
14-139
A/T Gear Position Indicator

Transmission Range Switch Test
1. Remove the transmission range switch connector (A) f r o m the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the
transmission range switch connector.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table below.
NOTE: Terminal N o . 1 : Neutral position switch
Transmission Range Switch Continuity Check

\
Terminal
1
Position
E
10
u
CS.
w
KJ
/~\
~ - KJ
KJ
- KJ
r\
KJ
rs
KJ
KJ
s~\
r>
/-\
KJ
KJ
14-140
c%
KJ
KJ
KJ
KJ
Transmission Range Switch Replacement

securely supported, refer to the '98-01 Accord
7. Set the transmission range switch to [ED position.

NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in OS
position.
2. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels

securely.
3. Shift to ED position.
4. Remove the transmission range switch connector
(A) f r o m the connector bracket (B), then disconnect
the transmission range switch connector.
8. Set the control shaft to HI position.
5. Remove the clamp f r o m the harness clamp bracket

on the transmission housing, and remove the
harness clamp (A) f r o m the end cover (B).
6. Remove the transmission range switch cover (C),

then remove the transmission range switch (D)
f r o m the end cover.
(cont'd)
14-141
A/T Gear Position indicator

Transmission Range Switch Replacement (cont'd)
9. Install the transmission range switch (A) on the
control shaft (B), then secure it w i t h the bolts.
NOTE: Do not move the transmission range switch
w h e n tightening the bolts.
6 x 1.0 m m
12N-m(1.2
8.7 I b f f t )
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
through all gears, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization w i t h the A/T gear
position indicator (A).
kgfm,
13. Move the shift lever through all gears, and verify
the f o l l o w i n g :
The engine will not start in any position other
than M or B .
The back-up lights come on when the shift lever
is in ID position.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m {1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
10. Install the transmission range switch cover (C), and

the harness clamp (D) on the end cover (E).
11. Connect the transmission range switch connector
(A), then install it on the connector bracket (B).
14-142
0
Indicator Input Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
1. Remove the instrument panel, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-84).
2. Remove the gauge assembly f r o m the dashboard, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-68),
then disconnect the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.
3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.
- If a test indicates a problem, find a correct the cause, then recheck the system.
- If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board.
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y CONNECTORS
C(16P)
B(22P)
1 2
11 12
/ 4 5
///
6 7 8 9 10
19 20 21 22
16|XI/
4 5 6 7
1 2 3
14 15 16
8 9 10 11|X112
Cavity
Wire Color
Test Condition
Test: Desired Result
B11
YEL
Ignition switch
ON (II)
Check for voltage to ground:

B16
BLK
C4
WHT
C5
BRN
Check for continuity to ground:

There should be 1 V or less.
There should be battery voltage in
any other shift lever position.
C6
PNK
C7
BLU
C12
GRN/BLK
Under all
conditions
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in E
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in [ J
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in B
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in [2]
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in S3
C15
BLK/BLU
Shift lever in LB
C16
RED/BLK
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in \M

There should be no continuity in any
other shift lever position.
There should be battery voltage in
any other shift lever position.

Possible Cause
(If result is not obtained)
driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
An open in the wire
Poor ground(G501)
An open in the wire
Faulty transmission range
switch
An open in the wire

switch
Faulty PCM
An open in the wire
switch
An open in the wire
14-143
A/T Gear Position indicator

Indicator Bulb Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures
in the SRS section before performing repairs or service,
refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 2328).
1. Remove the instrument panel, refer to the '98-01
2. Remove the gauge assembly, refer to the '98-01
3. Disassemble the gauge assembly, refer to
NOTE: Disassembly is not required on all models.
4. Replace the bulbs (A) at the reverse side of the
gauge assembly (B).
14-144
A/T Interlock System
0 0
14-145

Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
No.47 (20A)
WHT/YEL
IGNITION SWITCH
No.41 (100A)
No.42(50A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
No.9 (7.5A)
BAT
WHT/YEL
CH
IG1
YEL
STEERING LOCK
ASSEMBLY
GRN
IG1
WHT/RED
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S
"o^|\ PARK
PG
LG
ATP P
A15
BLK
BLK
BLK/BLU
ii/
ILU
B12
WHT/RED
BLK
A
G501
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
G401
14-146
/IJJK
SWITCH W
WHT/BLK
PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
Control Unit Input Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
1. Disconnect the 22P connector f r o m the multiplex control unit (driver's), then remove the multiplex control unit
(driver's) f r o m the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
2. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 3.
NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) while depressing the brake pedal
w i t h the shift lever in B position, the shift lock system is OK. If the shift lever cannot be shifted f r o m E position,
test the transmission range switch.
3. With the driver's unit still disconnected f r o m its connector and the fuse/relay box, make these input tests at its
connector or its fuse/relay box socket.
If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 4.
(cont'd)
14-147

Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S CONNECTORS
24P
1
13 14 15 16
5 6 7 8
17 18 19 20
9 10 11 12
21 22 23 24
Terminal side o f male terminals
M u l t i p l e x Control Unit (Driver's) 24P Connector

Test Condition
Cavity Wire Color
3 4
11 12 13 14 15
6
16
Shift lever in B

A12
Under all
conditions

Under all
conditions
Ignition switch
turned ON (II)
A24

Multiplex Control Unit (Driver's) 2 2 P Connector

Test Condition
Cavity Wire Color
B11
BLK
B22
GRN
Under all
conditions
Ignition switch
ON (II)
/
22
A3
A14
N" / / / /

Possible Cause
Faulty transmission range switch
Poor ground (G101)
An open in the wire
passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
Faulty passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
Possible Cause
Poor ground (G503)
A n open in the wire
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
Faulty shift lock solenoid
A n open in the wire
4. Reconnect the connectors to the multiplex control unit (driver's), and make this input test.
B12
WHT/RED
Ignition switch
ON (II) and brake
pedal pushed
Ignition switch
ON (II), brake pedal
and accelerator
pedal pressed at
the same time

voltage.
Faulty brake pedal position

switch
Faulty PCM
Faulty multiplex control unit
(driver's)
An open in the wire
If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
|f all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good multiplex control unit (driver's), and recheck the system.
If the system is OK, the multiplex control unit (driver's) must be faulty; replace it.
14-148
<5
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test
S R S components are located in this area. Review the
S R S component locations, precautions, and procedures
in the S R S section before performing repairs or service,
refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 2328).
Shift Lock Solenoid Test

2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector.
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover, refer

to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 2084).
2. Disconnect the key switch 7P connector from the
steering lock assembly.
3. Check for continuity between the No. 5 and No. 7
terminals when the key is pushed, and check for no
continuity when the key is released.
KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7P)
1 /
3/5 5 6 7
5>.
3. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid

terminal.
4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the E
position. Release the battery terminals from the
shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever
back to the B position, and make sure it locks.
4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power

connected to the No. 7 terminal and ground
connected to the No. 3 terminals.
If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock
solenoid is OK.
If the key can be removed, replace the steering
lock assembly (the key interlock solenoid is not
available separately).
NOTE: Do not connect power to the No. 2 terminal

(reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode
inside the solenoid.
5. Check that the shift lock releases when the release
lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the
release lever is released.
6. If the solenoid does not work, replace it.
14-149

Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
Park Pin Switch Test


2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector.
2. Disconnect the park pin 4P connector.
3. Pry the shift lock solenoid clamp (A) with a

screwdriver, then remove the shift lock solenoid (B).
E
A
4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (C) and
plunger spring (D) in the new shift lock solenoid.
3. Shift the shift lever into the \E position, then check

for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4
terminals. There should be no continuity.
4. Shift the shift lever out of the OB position, and check
for continuity between the terminals in step 3.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of

the shift lock solenoid with the tip of the shift lock
stop (E).
5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace the shift

lever bracket base.
6. Secure the shift lock solenoid with the clamp, then

connect the shift lock solenoid connector.
NOTE: The park pin switch is not available

separately from the shift lever bracket base.
14-150
Transmission End Cower

End Cover Removal
Exploded View
HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET

TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH COVER
END COVER
END COVER GASKET

Replace.
SECONDARY SHAFT
LOCKNUT
Replace.
MAINSHAFT LOCKNUT
Replace.
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
P I T O T PIPE
'00-01 models)
LUBRICATION
P I T O T PIPE
00-01 m o d e l s )
BEARING H U B /
BALL BEARING
ASSEMBLY
CONICAL SPRING WASHER
Replace.
PITOT FLANGE
('00-01 m o d e l s )
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
M A I N S H A F T IDLER G E A R
Replace.
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER G E A R
NEEDLE BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
BREATHER TUBE
A T F C O O L E R LINE
PARK P A W L SHAFT
LINE BOLT
A T F C O O L E R LINE
SEALING WASHERS
Replace.
LINE BOLT
(cont'd)
14-151
Transmission End Cower

End Cover Removal (cont'd)
Mainshaft holder
5. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the

f o l l o w i n g procedure.
1. Remove the transmission range switch cover.
2. Remove the bolts securing the harness clamp (one
bolt) and transmission range switch (two bolts),
then remove the transmission range switch.
3. Remove the bolts securing the end cover (sixteen
bolts), then remove the end cover.
4. For '00-01 models: Remove the pitot pipe (A) and
the lubrication pitot pipe ( B ) f r o m the transmission
housing (C), then remove the pitot flange (D) f r o m
the mainshaft idler gear (E).
0 7 G A B - P F 5 0 1 0 1 or
07GAB-PF50100
6. Engage the park pawl w i t h the park gear.

7. Cut the lock tabs (A) of each shaft locknut (B) using
a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and conical
spring washers f r o m each shaft.
NOTE:
Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
left-hand threads.
Clean the old locknuts; they are used to install the
press fit idler gears on the mainshaft and
secondary shaft, and the park gear and bearing
hub on the countershaft.
Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
8. Remove the special tool (mainshaft holder) f r o m

the mainshaft.
14-152
Park Lever Stop Inspection and

Adjustment
Remove the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the
secondary shaft idler gear (B) with a puller (C).
C
1. Set the park lever (A) in the B position.
6x
1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m , 10 I b f f t )
10. Remove the bearing hub ( D ) with the puller from

the countershaft then remove the countershaft
idler gear (E) and bearings.
11. Remove the park gear (F) with the puller.
12. Remove the park pawl, spring, shaft, and shaft stop.
2. Measure the distance (B) between the park pawl

shaft (C) and the park lever roller pin (D).
STANDARD: 84.6
85.6 m m ( 3 . 3 3 3 . 3 7 in.)
3. If the measurement is out of tolerance, select and

install the appropriate park lever stop (E) from the
table below.
13. Remove the park lever from the control shaft.

14. Remove the line bolts, then remove the ATF cooler
lines.
L2
PARK LEVER STOP

Mark
1
Part Number
24537-PA9-003
24538-PA9-003
24539-PA9-003
L1
11.00 mm
(0.433 in.)
10.80 mm
(0.425 in.)
10.60 mm
(0.417 in.)
L2
11.00 mm
(0.433 in.)
10.65'mm
(0.419 in.)
10.30 mm
(0.406 in.)
4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the

distance is within tolerance.
14-153
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal
Exploded View
R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R
SHAFT HOLDER
R E V E R S E IDLER
GEAR SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
MOUNTING BOLTS
a ^
TT

/
TRANSMISSION HANGER/
TRANSMISSION HANGER
SHIFT FORK
TRANSMISSION HOUSING GASKET

Replace.
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
SECONDARY SHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
14-154

Housing puller 07HAC-PK40102
following procedure.
4. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) w i t h

the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the
control shaft.
A
07HAC-PK40102
1. Remove the t w o bolts securing the reverse idler

gear shaft holder, then remove the reverse idler
gear shaft holder (A), shaft (B), and washer (C).
5. Install the special tool over the mainshaft, then

remove the transmission housing (D).
2. Remove the transmission housing m o u n t i n g bolts,

transmission hangers, and harness clamp bracket.
3. Move the reverse idler gear (A) to disengage it f r o m
the mainshaft and countershaft reverse gears.
NOTE: The transmission housing will not separate
f r o m the torque converter housing if the reverse
idler gear is not moved.
NOTE: If the top arm of your housing puller is too

short, replace it with Housing Puller A r m , 205 m m ,
07SAC-P0Z0101.
6. Remove the reverse idler gear, needle bearings,
and thrust washer f r o m the transmission housing.
7. Remove the countershaft 2nd gear, then remove
the countershaft reverse gear and the needle
bearing.
8. Remove the lock bolt securing the shift fork, then
remove the shift fork w i t h the reverse selector,
reverse selector hub, and countershaft 4th gear.
If the reverse selector hub is press-fitted, leave it
and 4th gear on the countershaft.
9. Remove the secondary shaft sub-assembly. If the
reverse selector hub is press-fitted, remove the
secondary shaft sub-assembly, countershaft
sub-assembly and mainshaft sub-assembly
together.
10. Remove the countershaft sub-assembly.
11. Remove the mainshaft sub-assembly.
12. Remove the differential assembly.
14-155
Bearing Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101
Attachment, 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 m m 07746-0010600
4. Release the pliers, then push the bearing d o w n into

the housing until the snap ring snaps in place
around it.
NOTE: Coat all parts w i t h ATF before assembly.

1. To remove the mainshaft bearing (A), countershaft
bearing (B) and secondary shaft bearing (C) f r o m
the transmission housing, expand each snap ring
w i t h the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing out.
NOTE: Do not remove the snap rings unless it's
necessary to clean the grooves in the housing.
5. After installing the bearings verify the following:

The snap rings (A) are seated in the bearing and
housing grooves.
The ring end gaps (B) are correct.
B:
0 7 mm
( 0 - 0 . 2 8 in.)
2. Install the bearings in the direction s h o w n .

3. Expand each snap ring w i t h the snap ring pliers,
and insert the bearing part-way into the housing.
14-156
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal
Exploded V i e w
A T F FEED PIPE,
8 x 198 m m
A T F FEED PIPES,
8 x 85 m m
3 Pipes
SERVO DETENT
BASE
ATF STRAINER
SJATOR SHAFT
STATOR SHAFT STOP
DOWEL PINS, 2
REGULATOR
SEPARATOR PLATE
6x 1.0 m m , 1 Bolt
M A I N VALVE BODY
COOLER CHECK V A L V E
SPRING
SERVO BODY
COOLER CHECK V A L V E
D O W E L PINS, 2

SHAFT
SERVO SEPARATOR
PLATE
ATF P U M P DRIVE GEAR

ATF P U M P DRIVEN GEAR
M A I N SEPARATOR PLATE
ACCUMULATOR
BODY
DOWEL PINS, 3
TORQUE CONVERTER
HOUSING
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
(cont'd)
14-157
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal (cont'd)
NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
f o l l o w i n g procedure.
1. Remove the ATF feed pipes f r o m the regulator
valve body, servo body, and accumulator body.
16. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B).
thoroughly w i t h compressed air, then check that it
is in good condition, and the inlet opening is not
clogged.
2. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts).

3. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts).
4. Remove the accumulator cover (two bolts).
NOTE: The accumulator cover is spring loaded. To
prevent stripping the threads in the servo body,
press d o w n on the accumulator cover w h i l e
unscrewing the bolts in a crisscross pattern.
5. Remove the bolts securing the servo body (nine
bolts), then remove the servo body, servo
separator plate and dowel pins (two).
6. Remove the accumulator body (six bolts).
7. Remove the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
8. Remove the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
9. Remove the regulator separator plate and dowel
pins (two).
10. Unhook the detent spring f r o m the detent a r m , then
remove the detent arm shaft, detent a r m , and
control shaft.
11. Remove the cooler check valve spring and cooler
check valve (steel ball).
12. Remove the main valve body (four bolts).
13. Remove the torque converter check valve and
spring.
14. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then
remove the ATF p u m p gears.
15. Remove the main separator plate and dowel pins
(three).
14-158
17. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through

the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
damaged.
Valve Body Repair

NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of
the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their
bores. Use this procedure to free the valves.
1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for
about 30 minutes.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve
drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore w i t h the screwdriver.
5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the

entire valve body in solvent, then dry it w i t h
compressed air.
6. Coat the valve w i t h ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
o w n weight. If not, repeat step 4, then retest. If the
valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATFsoaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it w i t h compressed air.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked # 600 paper and
insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve.
Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits
the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the
paper as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is a l u m i n u m and doesn't
require much polishing to remove any burrs.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the
valve body with solvent. Dry all parts w i t h
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
14-159
Valve Body
Valve Body Valve Reassembly
1. Coat all parts w i t h ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence
shown for the main valve body (see page 14-161),
regulator valve body (see page 14-164), and servo
body (see page 14-165). Refer to the f o l l o w i n g
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up w i l l be facing the outside
of the valve body.
3. Install all the springs and seats. Insert the spring (A)
in the valve, then install the valve in the valve body
(B). Push the spring in w i t h a screwdriver, then
install the spring seat (C).
C
14-160
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly

1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry t h e m w i t h compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check valve ball; it may magnetize the ball.
3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).
4. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts w o r n or damaged.
5. Coat all parts w i t h ATF during assembly.
6. Install the filter in the direction shown.
(cont'd)
14-161
Valve Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
Sectional V i e w
MANUAL VALVE
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
No.
CD
14-162
Spring
Modulator valve spring
Shift valve C spring
Shift valve D spring
Shift valve E spring
Relief valve spring
Lock-up shift valve spring
Cooler check valve spring
Torque converter check valve
Servo control valve spring
Reverse CPC valve spring
Wire Dia.
1.6(0.063)
0.8 (0.031)
0.7 (0.028)
0.7 (0.028)
1.1 (0.043)
0.9 (0.035)
0.6 (0.024)
1.2 (0.047)
0.7 (0.028)
0.7 (0.028)
Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)

O.D.
Free Length
10.4 (0.409)
33.5 (1.319)
6.6 (0.260)
49.1 (1.933)
6.6 (0.260)
35.7 (1.406)
6.6 (0.260)
32.2 (1.268)
8.6 (0.339)
30.1 (1.185)
7.6 (0.299)
63.0 (2.480)
5.8(0.228)
14.5(0.571)
8.6 (0.339)
35.1 (1.382)
6.6 (0.260)
35.7 (1.406)
6.1 (0.240)
17.8 (0.701)
No. of Coils
9.8
21.7
17.2
13.4
10.7
22.4
6.8
14.3
17.2
7.9
ATF Pomp inspection

1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B)
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main
valve body (D). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved
and chamfered side facing up.
2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive

gear (A) and driven gear (B).
ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance;
Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear
0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083 0.00104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear
0.035-0.063 mm (0.0014-0.0025 in.)
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure

the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (D).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)
Clearance:
Standard (New): 0.03-0.05 mm (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
Service Limit:
0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
C
14-163
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry t h e m with compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
2. Check all valves for free movement, If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).
3. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are w o r n or damaged.
4. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
5. Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly. Install the filter in the direction shown.
6. Coat all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
7. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap w i t h the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve
body, and tighten the stop bolt.
VALVE SLEEVE
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
No.
14-164
Spring
Stator reaction spring
Regulator valve spring A
Regulator valve spring B
Lock-up control valve spring
Lock-up t i m i n g valve spring
Wire Dia.
5.5(0.217)
1.8 (0.071)
1.7 (0.067)
0.7 (0.028)
0.65 (0.026)

O.D.
Free Length
37.4(1.472)
30.3 (1.193)
14.7 (0.579)
87.5 (3.445)
9.4 (0.370)
44.0(1.732)
6.6 (0.260)
42.9 (1.689)
6.6 (0.260)
34.8 (1.370)
No. of Coils
2.12
16.5
13.4
14.2
15.6
<2
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
2. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).
3. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts worn or damaged.
4. Coat all parts with ATF during reassembly.
Replace.
No.
Spring
Shift valve B spring
Shift valve A spring
CPC valve A spring
CPC valve B spring
4th accumulator spring A
4th accumulator spring B
3rd accumulator spring A
3rd accumulator spring B
Wire Dia.
0.8 (0.031)
0 8 (0.031)
0.7 (0.028)
0 7 (0.028)
2.6 (0.102)
2.4 (0.094)
2.6 (0.102)
2.4 (0.094)

Free Length
O.D.
7.1 (0.280)
40.4(1.591)
7.1 (0.280)
40.4(1.591)
6.1 (0.240)
17.8 (0.701)
6.1 (0.240)
17.8 (0.701)
19.6(0.772)
66.4(2.614)
12.8 (0.504)
51.5 (2.028)
19.6(0.772)
66.4(2.614)
12.8(0.504)
51.5 (2.028)
No. of Coils
16.9
16.9
7.9
7.9
9.7
11.5
9.7
11.5
14-165
Valve Body
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls: it m a y magnetize the balls.
2. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them w i t h compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
3. Coat all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
SNAP RINGS
No.
14-166
Springs
1st accumulator spring B
1st accumulator spring A
2nd accumulator spring B
2nd accumulator spring A
Wire Dia.
2.7 (0.106)
2.5 (0.098)
2.4(0.094)
2.7 (0.106)

O.D.
Free Length
15.0 (0.591)
52.5 (2.067)
21.6 (0.850)
87.5(3.445)
12.6 (0.496)
53.5(2.106)
19.6 (0.772)
66.3 (2.610)
No. of Coils
10.3
11.8
12.9
9.9
<3

Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Adjustable bearing puller, 2540 mm
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing with
the special tools.
07749-0010000
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the

special tool and a commercially available 3/8"-16
slide hammer (A).
07746-0010600
07736-A01000Bor
07736-A01000A
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in

the housing with the special tools.
07749-0010000
14-167

Countershaft Bearing Replacement
Adjustable bearing puller, 25 40 mm
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500
1. Remove the countershaft bearing (A) w i t h the
slide h a m m e r (B).
Secondary Shaft Bearing

Replacement
Adjustable bearing puller, 2 5 - 4 0 m m
07736-A01000B or07736-A01000A
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment 07947-6340500
1. Remove the secondary shaft bearing (A) w i t h the
slide h a m m e r (B).
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A).

2. Install the ATF guide plate <A).
_
07749-0010000
17-6340500
B
00.03 m m
(0-0.001 in.)
3. Install the new bearing (B) into the housing (C) w i t h

the special tools.
/ | ^
I
tA\
.hQ^f)
3. Install the new bearing (B) into the housing (C) w i t h

the special tools.
14-168
Shafts and Clutches

Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Lubricate all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)
Replace.
2 2 6 Nm (23.0 k g f - m , 1 6 6 I b f f t ) 0 167 N - m (17.0 k g f - m , 1 2 3 I b f f t )
THRUST WASHER,
27 x 47 x 5 m m

Replace.
T H R U S T NEEDLE B E A R I N G
4TH GEAR
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
('00-01 m o d e l s )
PITOT F L A N G E
00-01 m o d e l s )
IDLER G E A R
TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
3RD/4TH CLUTCH A S S E M B L Y
O-RINGS
Replace.
T H R U S T S H I M , 41 x 7 3 m m
S e l e c t i v e part
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
SEALING RINGS,
32 m m
3RD G E A R
NEEDLE BEARING
SEALING RINGS
2 9 mm
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
NEEDLE BEARING
S E T RING
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check the clearance of the 3rd/4th clutch assembly (see page 14-170).
Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
Check shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines w i t h tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
Install the conical spring washer and 41 x 73 m m thrust shim in the direction s h o w n .
Inspect condition of the sealing rings. If the sealing rings are w o r n , distorted, or damaged, replace them (see page
14-171).
14-169
Shafts and Clutches

3rd/4th Clutch Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings f r o m the mainshaft.
2. Assemble the 41 x 73 m m thrust shim (A), 3rd/4th
clutch assembly (B), and 4th gear collar (C) on the
mainshaft (D).
3. Hold the 4th gear collar (C) against the clutch

assembly (B), then measure the clearance between
the clutch guide (E) and the 4th gear collar w i t h a
feeler gauge (F) in at least three places. Use the
average as the actual clearance.
STANDARD:
0 . 0 3 0 . 1 1 m m (0.001
0.004 in.)
C
4. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the

thrust shim and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new shim, then recheck.
THRUST SHIM, 41 x 73 m m
No.
1
2
3
4
6
Part Number
90414-P7X-000
90415-P7X-000
90416-P7X-000
90417-P7X-000
90418-P7X-000
90419-P7X-000
7.85
7.90
7.95
8.00
8.05
8.10
Thickness
m m (0.309
m m (0.311
m m (0.313
m m (0.315
m m (0.317
m m (0.319
6. After replacing the thrust shim, make sure the

clearance is w i t h i n standard.
14-170
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement

The sealing rings are synthetic resin w i t h chamfered
ends. Check condition of the sealing rings, and replace
them only if they are w o r n , distorted, or damaged.
1. For a better fit, squeeze the sealing rings (A)
together slightly before installing t h e m .
2. Apply ATF to the new sealing rings then install

t h e m on the mainshaft.
3. After installing the sealing rings, verify the

following:
The rings are fully seated in the groove.
The rings are not twisted.
The chamfered ends of the rings are properly
joined.
Shafts and Clutches

Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and take off components d o w n to the reverse selector hub.
L O C K N U T (FLANGE NUT)
Replace.
Left-hand threads
2 2 6 N - m (23.0 k g f - m , 1 6 6 l b f f t ) - 0
167 N m (17.0 k g f - m , 1 2 3 I b f f t )
2. Remove the reverse selector hub, 3rd gear, and 1st gear (see page 14-173).
3. Check the bearing in the bearing hub for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is w o r n or damaged, replace it
(see page 14-175).
4. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
5. Check the splines for excessive wear and damage.
6. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
7. Lubricate all parts w i t h ATF, and reassemble the shafts and gears.
8. Install the conical spring washer, reverse selector, reverse selector hub, and distance collar in the direction shown.
14-172
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Replacement
Driver 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100
2. Remove the needle bearing, snap ring, distance

collar, and 31 m m cotters f r o m the countershaft.
Removal
3. Remove the 1st gear (A) and 3rd gear (B) together
f r o m the countershaft (C) w i t h a puller (D). Place a
shaft protector (E) between the puller and
countershaft to prevent damaging the countershaft.
1. Remove the reverse selector hub (A) and the 4th

gear (B) w i t h a universal two-jaw (or three-jaw)
puller (C). Place a shaft protector (D) between the
puller and countershaft (E) to prevent damaging the
countershaft.
NOTE: Some of the reverse selector hubs are not
press-fitted, and can be removed w i t h o u t using a
puller.
(cont'd)
14-173
Shafts and Clutches

Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Replacement
(cont'd)
Installation
4. Install the 31 m m cotters, distance collar, snap ring,

needle bearing, and 4th gear (A) on the
countershaft.
1. A p p l y ATF to the parts.

2. Install the 1st gear on the countershaft by hand.
3. Align the shaft splines w i t h those on 3rd gear, then
press the countershaft (A) into the 3rd gear w i t h
press.
Place an attachment (B) between the press and
countershaft to prevent d a m a g i n g the
countershaft.
Stop pressing the countershaft w h e n the 3rd gear
contacts the 1st gear (C).
14-174
5. Slide the reverse selector hub (B) over the

countershaft (C), and then press it into place w i t h
the special tool and a press.
NOTE: Some of the reverse selector hubs are not
press-fitted and can be installed without using the
special tool and a press.
07746-0030100
Countershaft Bearing Huh/Bearing Replacement

Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
Attachment 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough
movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged,
replace it.
2. Remove the bearing (A) from the bearing hub with
the special tools, a bearing separator (B), and a
press.
3. Install the new bearing on the bearing hub with the

special tools and a press.
Shafts and Clutches

Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and disassemble the shaft and gears.
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)
Replace.
Left-hand threads
2 2 6 N m (23.0 k g f - m , 1 6 6 I b f f t ) 0 167 N m (17.0 k g f - m , 1 2 3 I b f f t )

Replace.
BALL BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
IDLER G E A R
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND G E A R
NEEDLE BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
^
(Hj
1
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
T H R U S T S H I M , 37 x 55 m m
Selective part
NEEDLE BEARING
1ST/2ND CLUTCH
ASSEMBLY
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
1ST G E A R
O-RINGS
Replace.
C O T T E R S , 32 m m
SPLINED WASHER,
3 8 x 5 6 . 5 mm
Selective part
COTTER RETAINER
SNAP RING
S E A L I N G R I N G S , 25 m m
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
Check clearance of the secondary shaft assembly (see page 14-177).
Check the splines for excessive wear and damage.
Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
Check the idler gear bearing for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is w o r n or damaged, replace it (see
page 14-179).
7. Before installing the O-rings, w r a p the shaft splines w i t h tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
8. Lubricate all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
9. Install the conical spring washer and 38 x 56.5 m m splined washer in the direction shown.
14-176
<S0
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings f r o m the shaft.
2. Assemble the thrust needle bearing (A), needle
bearing (B), 1st gear (C), thrust needle bearing (D),
38 x 56.5 m m splined washer (E), 32 m m cotters (F),
cotter retainer (G), and snap ring (H) on the
secondary shaft (I).
3. Measure the clearance between the 38 x 56.5 m m

splined washer (E) and cotters (F) w i t h a feeler
gauge (J) in at least three places. Use the average
as the actual clearance.
STANDARD: 0.07
0.15 m m (0.003-0.006 in.)

splined washer, and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new splined washer, then
recheck.
SPLINED WASHER, 38 x 56.5 m m
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
|
j
;
j
I
!
i
Part Number
90502-P0Z-000
90503-P0Z-000
90504-P0Z-000
90505-P0Z-000
90506-P0Z-000
90507-P0Z-000
6.85
6.90
6.95
7.00
7.05
7.10
Thickness
m m (0.270
m m (0.272
m m (0.274
m m (0.276
m m (0.278
m m (0.280
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
(cont'd)
14-177
Shafts and Clutches

Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Remove the 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer f r o m the
mainshaft.
7. Assemble the 1st/2nd clutch assembly (A), 37 x 55
m m thrust s h i m (B), thrust needle bearing (C),
needle bearing (D), 2nd gear (E), thrust needle
bearing (F), and 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer
(removed f r o m m a i n s h a f t ) (G) on the secondary
shaft (H).
9. Hold the 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer (G) against

the clutch assembly (A), and measure the 2nd gear
axial clearance in at least three places while
m o v i n g the 2nd gear (E). Use the average as the
actual clearance.
STANDARD: 0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 2 m m (0.002
0.005 in.)
10. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 37 x

55 m m thrust shim and measure its thickness.
11. Select and install a new thrust shim, then recheck.
THRUST SHIM, 37 x 55 m m
Set the dial indicator (I) on 2nd gear (E).
E
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part Number
90406-P0Z-000
90407-P0Z-000
90408-P0Z-000
90409-P0Z-000
90410-P0Z-000
90411-P0Z-000
90412-P0Z-000
4.90
4.95
5.00
5.05
5.10
5.15
5.20
Thickness
m m (0.193
m m (0.195
m m (0.197
m m (0.199
m m (0.201
m m (0.203
m m (0.205
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
12. Disassemble the shaft and gears.

13. Reinstall the 27 x 47 x 5 m m thrust washer on the
mainshaft.
14-178
Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing Replacement

Driver 07749-0010000
A t t a c h m e n t 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500
4. Install the bearing on the secondary shaft idler gear

with the special tool and a press.
1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough

movement. If the bearing is w o r n or damaged, go
to step 2.
2. Place the secondary shaft idler gear in a vise with
soft jaws.
3. Remove the bearing (A) f r o m the secondary shaft
idler gear (B) w i t h a commercially available 3-jaw
slide hammer (C).
14-179
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Disassembly
Clutch spring compressor attachment
07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50101
Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
3. Install the special tools on the 3rd/4th clutch

assembly.
07LAE-PX40100
1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the clutch

end plate, the clutch discs, and the plates w i t h a
screwdriver (B).
2. Remove the disc spring (A) f r o m the 1st, 3rd and

4th clutches.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.
A
14-180
4. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full

contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and
4th clutches.
5. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of

the 1st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the
special tool works on the clutch return spring (C).
7. Compress the spring until the snap ring can be

removed.
(cont'd)
14-181
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
9. For 3rd and 4th clutch: W r a p a shop rag around the
clutch d r u m (A), and apply air pressure to the fluid
passage to remove the piston (B). Place a finger tip
on the other end w h i l e applying air pressure.
14-182
Clutch Inspection
1ST/2ND CLUTCH
NOTE: There are t w o types of spring retainer, you may find either type in the clutch assembly. Some spring retainers
have seal lips, and do not have O-rings. The seal lip is undetachable f r o m the spring retainer.
- SNAP RING
O-RINGS
Replace.
- CLUTCH END
PLATE
CLUTCH PISTON
DISC SPRING
-CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 i n . )
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n . )
RETURN SPRING
O-RING
Replace,
SPRING RETAINER
S N A P RING
- SNAP RING
-SPRING RETAINER
CLUTCH
DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n . )
CLUTCH
PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 i n .
- O-RING
Replace.
- R E T U R N SPRING
CLUTCH PISTON
'O-RINGS
Replace.
2ND C L U T C H
DRUM
CLUTCH END
PLATE
- S N A P RING
1ST CLUTCH
DRUM
(cont'd)
14-183
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch inspection (cont'd)
3RD/4TH CLUTCH
SNAP RING
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n . )
CLUTCH END PLATE
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 i n . )
O-RINGS
Replace.
CHECK VALVE
CLUTCH
PISTON
SNAP RING
DISC SPRING
RETURN
SPRING
SPRING
SPRING
RETAINER
RETURN
RETAINER
SPRING
SNAP RING
DISC SPRING
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n .
CLUTCH
PISTON
O-RINGS
Replace.
CLUTCH END PLATE
SNAP RING
14-184
4TH
CLUTCH DRUM
3RD
CLUTCH DRUM
Clutch Reassembly
07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50101
Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
2. Install new O-rings (A) on the piston (B) and the

spring retainer (1st and 2nd clutches).
NOTE: Some spring retainers of the 1st and 2nd
clutch have seal lips and do not have O-rings.
Note these items during reassembly:

Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor
cleaner, and dry t h e m w i t h compressed air.
Blow out all passages.
Apply ATF to all parts before assembly.
1. Inspect the check valve (A) on the 3rd and 4th
clutch pistons (B); if it's loose, replace the piston.
A
3. Install the piston (A) in the clutch d r u m (B). Apply

pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating.
Lubricate the piston O-ring w i t h ATF before
installing.
NOTE: Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the
piston with too much force.
A
(cont'd)
14-185
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
4. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B),
and position the snap ring (C) on the retainer.
C
5. Install the special tools on the 3rd/4th clutch

assembly.
07LAE-PX4010Q
0 7 L A E - P X 4 0 1 0 0 or
07HAE-PL50101
0 7 G A E - P G 4 0 2 0 0 or
07GAE-PG4020A
14-186
6. Be sure the special too (A) is adjusted to have full

contact w i t h the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and
4th clutches.
7. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of

the 1st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the
special tool w o r k on the clutch return spring (C).
8. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of

the spring retainer which is unsupported by the
return spring, the retainer may be damaged.
10. Install the snap ring (A).
11. Remove the special tools.

9. Compress the return spring.
12. Install the disc spring in the 1st, 3rd, and 4th
clutches in the direction shown.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.
(cont'd)
14-187
Shafts and Clutches

Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
13. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a
m i n i m u m of 30 minutes. Before installing the
plates and discs, make sure the inside of the clutch
d r u m is free of dirt and other foreign matter.
14. Starting w i t h a clutch plate, alternately install the
clutch plates and discs. Install the clutch end plate
(A) w i t h the flat side t o w a r d the disc (B).
16. Measure the clearance between the clutch end

plate (A) and top disc (B) w i t h a dial indicator (C).
Zero the dial indicator w i t h the clutch end plate
lowered, and lift it up to the snap ring (D). The
distance that the clutch end plate moves is the
clearance between the clutch end plate and top disc.
NOTE: Take measurement in at least 3 places, and
use the average as the actual clearance.
Clutch End Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance:
Clutch
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
15. Install the snap ring (A) w i t h a screwdriver (B).
14-188
Service Limit
1 . 2 - 1 . 4 m m (0.047- 0.055 in.)
0.85 -1.05 m m (0.033-0.041 in.)
0.55 0.75 m m (0.022 0.030 in.)
0.55 0.75 m m (0.022-0.030 in.)
17. If the clearance is not within the service limit, select

a new clutch end plate from the following table.
NOTE: If the thickest clutch end plate is installed,
but the clearance is still over the standard, replace
the clutch discs and clutch plates as a set.
1ST and 2ND CLUTCH END PLATES

Mark
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
Part Number
22551-P7Z-003
22552-P7Z-003
22553-P7Z-003
22554-P7Z-003
22555-P7Z-003
22556-P7Z-003
22557-P7Z-003
22558-P7Z-003
22559-P7Z-003
Thickness
2.6mm (0.102 in.)
2.7 m m (0.106 in.)
2.8 m m (0.110 in.)
2.9 m m (0.114 in.)
3.0 m m (0.118 in.)
3.1 m m (0.122 in.)
3.2 m m (0.126 in.)
3.3 m m (0.130 in.)
3.4 m m (0.134 in.)
3RD and 4TH CLUTCH END PLATES

Mark
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Part Number
22551-PX4-003
22552-PX4-003
22553-PX4-003
22554-PX4-003
22555-PX4-003
22556-PX4-003
22557-PX4-003
22558-PX4-003
22559-PX4-003
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Thickness
m m (0.083 in.)
m m (0.087 in.)
m m (0.091 in.)
m m (0.094 in.)
m m (0.098 in.)
m m (0.102 in.)
m m (0.106 in.)
m m (0.110 in.)
m m (0.114 in.)
14-189
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation
Exploded View
Torque:
6 x 1.0 m m : 1 2 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
8 x 1.25 m m : 1 8 N - m ( 1 . 8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 m m ,
8 Bolts
- A T F F E E D PIPE,
8 x 198 m m
SERVO DETENT
BASE
ATF FEED PIPES,

8 x 8 5 mm
3 Pipes
ATF STRAINER
STAJOR SHAFT
STATOR SHAFT STOP
D O W E L PINS, 2
O-RING
Replace
REGULATOR
SEPARATOR PLATE
6 x 1.0 m m
2 Bolts
6 x 1.0 m m , 1 B o l t
MAIN V A L V E BODY
6 x 1.0 m m
9 Bolts
COOLER CHECK VALVE
SPRING
SERVO BODY
COOLER CHECK VALVE

DOWELPINS, 2
ATF PUMP DRIVEN G E A R
SHAFT
SERVO SEPARATOR
PLATE
ATF PUMP DRIVE G E A R

MAIN S E P A R A T O R PLATE
D O W E L PINS, 3
ACCUMULATOR
BODY
TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING

TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
14-190
NOTE: Refer to the exploded view as needed during the

1. Install the main separator plate (A) and three dowel
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install
the ATF pump drive gear (B), driven gear (C) and
ATF p u m p driven gear shaft (D). Install the ATF
p u m p driven gear w i t h its grooved and chamfered
side facing d o w n .
4. Install the cooler check valve and spring on the

main valve body, then install the t w o dowel pins
and the regulator separator plate.
5. Install the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
6. Install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
7. Install the t w o dowel pins and the servo separator
plate on the main valve body.
8. Install the control shaft (A) in the torque converter
housing along w i t h the manual valve (B).
2. Install the torque converter check valve and spring,

then install the main valve body (one 6 m m bolt
and three 8 m m bolts). Make sure the ATF pump
drive gear (B) rotates smoothly in the normal
operating direction, and the ATF pump driven gear
shaft (D) moves smoothly in the axial and normal
operating direction.
B
9. Install the detent arm (C) and arm shaft (D) in the
main valve body (E), then hook the detent arm
spring (F) to the detent arm.
10. Install the servo body (G) (nine bolts).
11. Install the accumulator cover (two bolts).
12. Install the ATF strainer (two bolts).
13. Install the servo detent base (two bolts).
14. Install the accumulator body (six bolts).
3. If the ATF p u m p drive gear and ATF pump driven
gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven
gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
torque, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF p u m p
driven gear shaft correctly will result in a seized
ATF pump drive gear or ATF p u m p driven gear
shaft.
15. Install the t w o ATF feed pipes in the servo body,

four pipes in the regulator valve body, and one pipe
in the accumulator body.
14-191
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation
Exploded V i e w
8 x 1.25 m m
2 6 N - m (2.7 k g f - m , 2 0 I b f f t )
MOUNTING BOLTS
10 x 1.25 mm
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )

R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R S H A F T
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
TRANSMISSION HANGER/
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N - m (1.4 k g f - m
10 I b f f t )
TRANSMISSION HANGER
GASKET
Replace.
LOCK WASHER
Replace.
SHIFT
FORK
R E V E R S E IDLER
GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR
REVERSE SELECTOR
HUB
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH G E A R
' /
'
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
SECONDARY SHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
TORQUE CONVERTER
14-192
HOUSING

5. Place the thrust washer (A) in the transmission

housing.
1. Install the differential assembly, countershaft subassembly, mainshaft sub-assembly, and secondary
shaft sub-assembly in the torque converter housing.
2. Install the countershaft 4th gear and reverse
selector hub on the countershaft. If the reverse
selector hub is a press-fitted type, refer to the
installation procedure (see page 14-173).
3. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered
hole is facing the fork bolt hole. Then install the
shift fork (B) and reverse selector (C) together on
the shift fork shaft and countershaft (D). Secure the
shift fork to the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt (E)
and a new lock washer (F), then bend the lock
washer against the bolt head.
E
Place the reverse idler gear (A) in the transmission

housing as shown, then slide it in the direction
shown.
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m , 10 I b f f t )
Install the needle bearing, countershaft reverse

gear, and countershaft 2nd gear on the
countershaft.
(cont'd)
14-193
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation (cont'd)
7. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) w i t h
the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the
control shaft.
A
10. Engage the reverse idler gear with the countershaft

reverse gear and the mainshaft reverse gear. Then
install the needle bearings (A), reverse idler gear
shaft (B) and thrust washer (C) in the reverse idler
gear, and install the reverse idler gear shaft holder
(D) on the transmission housing.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 6 N m (2.7 k g f m , 2 0 I b f f t )
8. Install three dowel pins and a new gasket on the

torque converter housing.
9. Place the transmission housing on the torque
converter housing, then install the transmission
housing m o u n t i n g bolts along w i t h the harness
clamp bracket (A), transmission hanger (B) and
transmission hanger/harness clamp bracket (C).
Tighten the bolts in t w o or more steps in the
sequence s h o w n .
TORQUE: 4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 I b f f t )
C
B
14-194

End Cower and Idler Gears Installation
Mainshaft holder
1. Install the park lever (A) and park lever stop (B) on
the control shaft (C), then install the lock bolt (D)
w i t h a new lock washer (E). Do not bend the lock
tab of the lock washer in this step; bend it after
checking park pawl engagement.
3. Install the park gear (A) using the old locknut (B)
and a collar (C). Hold the park pawl (D) to engage
w i t h the park gear, then tighten the old locknut until
the shaft splines come out slightly over the park
gear splines.
NOTE:
Do not use an impact wrench.
Countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
2. Lubricate the following parts w i t h ATF:

Splines of the countershaft, the park gear, and
the old locknut.
Threads of the countershaft and the old locknut.
Old conical spring washer.
4. Remove the locknut and the collar, then install only

the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) and old
conical spring washer (B). Tighten the old locknut
(C) to seat the park gear to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf-m, 166
Ibf ft), then remove the locknut and conical spring
washer.
(cont/d)
14-195

End Cover and Idler Gears Installation (cont'd)
5. Remove the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) with
a puller (B).
6. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing

(B), countershaft idler gear (C), thrust needle
bearing (D), bearing hub/bearing assembly (E), and
the old conical spring washer (F). Then tighten the
old locknut (G) to seat the bearing hub/bearing
assembly to 164 N-m (17.0 kgfm, 123 Ibfft).
7. Set the dial indicator (A) to the countershaft idler

gear (B) as shown.
8. Measure the countershaft idler gear axial clearance

in at least three places, while moving the
countershaft idler gear (A).
Use the average as the actual clearance.
STANDARD: 0.015-0.045 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.)
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench, always use a

torque wrench to tighten the locknut.
14-196

bearing hub/bearing assembly using a puller as
described on the previous page.
10. Select and install the new bearing hub/bearing
assembly, then recheck.
14. Lubricate the following parts w i t h ATF:

Splines of the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
idler gears.
Threads of the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
new locknuts.
Old conical spring washers.
15. Install the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the old
conical spring washer (B) on the mainshaft (C).
Tighten the old locknut (D) to seat the mainshaft
idler gear to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf-m, 166 Ibf-ft).
NOTE: Do not use an impact w r e n c h , always use a
BEARING HUB
Mark
A
B
C
D
Part Number
90520-P6H-000
90521-P6H-000
90522-P6H-000
90523-P6H-000
3.503
3.490
3.477
3.464
Difference
m m (0.1379
m m (0.1374
m m (0.1369
m m (0.1364
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
11. After replacing the bearing hub/bearing assembly

make sure the clearance is within standard.
12. Remove the old locknut and old conical spring
washer f r o m the countershaft.
13. Install the special tool onto the mainshaft.
16. Install the secondary shaft idler gear (E) and the old
conical spring washer (F) on the secondary shaft
(G). Tighten the old locknut (H) to seat the
secondary shaft idler gear to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf-m,
166 I bf-ft)
NOTE:
Do not use an impact wrench, always use a
Secondary shaft locknut has left-hand threads.
17. Remove the old locknuts and old conical spring
washer f r o m the mainshaft and the secondary shaft.
(cont'd)
14-197

18. Lubricate the threads of each shaft and new
locknuts, and new conical spring washers w i t h ATF.
19. Install the new conical spring washers (A) in the
direction s h o w n , and install the new locknuts (B).
20. Tighten the locknuts to 167 N-m (17.0 kgf-m, 123

ibfft).
NOTE:
Do not use an impact w r e n c h , always use a
Coutershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
left-hand threads.
22. For '00-01 models: Install the pitot flange (A) on the
mainshaft idler gear (B), then install the lubrication
pitot pipe (C) and the pitot pipe (D) on the
23. Set the park lever in the E position, then verify that
the park pawl (A) engages the park gear (B).
B
2 1 . Stake each locknut into its shaft using a 3.5 m m

punch.
24. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the
distance between the pawl shaft (C) and the park
lever roller pin (D) (see page 14-153).
25. Tighten the lock bolt (E), and bend the lock tab of
the lock washer (F) against the lock bolt head.
14-198
0
26. Install the end cover (A) along w i t h t w o dowel pins,
new O-rings, new gasket, and harness clamp
bracket (B). Tighten the 16 bolts to 12 N-m, (1.2
kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft).
B
28. Set the control shaft (A) to the H position by

turning it.
NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the
control shaft tips together w h e n turning into
position. If the tips are squeezed together it will
cause a faulty shift signal or position due to the
play between the control shaft and the switch.
27. Set the transmission range switch to \S\ position.

NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in M
position.
(cont'd)
14-199

29. Install the transmission range switch (A) loosely on
the control shaft (B), then secure it w i t h the bolts.
Do not move the transmission range switch w h e n
tightening the bolts.
30. Install the transmission range switch cover (C), and

install the harness clamp (D) on the clamp bracket
(E) on the transmission housing, then install the
harness clamp (F) on the end cover (G).
31. Install the ATF cooler lines and new sealing
washers. Tighten the line fittings to 28 N-m
(2.9 kgf-m, 21 Ibf-ft)
32. Install the breather tube.
33. Install the ATF dipstick.
14-200
A/T Differential
Backlash Inspection
1. Install both axles, and place the differential
assembly on V-blocks (A).
T H R U S T S H I M , 76 m m
THRUST WASHER
BEARING OUTER RACE

CARRIER BEARING
2. Check the backlash of both pinion gears (B) w i t h a

dial indicator (C).
STANDARD: 0.05
0.15 m m (0.002
0.006 in.)
3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the

differential carrier.
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
B a c k l a s h I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 14-201
CARRIER BEARING
BEARING OUTER RACE

^ T H R U S T WASHER
14-201
A/T Differential
Final Driven Gear/Carrier
Replacement
1. Remove the final driven gear f r o m the differential
carrier.
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand
threads.
Carrier Bearing Replacement

Attachment, 40 x 50 m m 07LAD-PW50601
NOTE:
The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a
set.
Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever
bearing is replaced.
Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.
1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) w i t h a commercially
available bearing puller (B), bearing separator (C),
and stepped adapter (D).
2. Install the final driven gear w i t h the chamfered side

on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a
crisscross pattern.
TORQUE: 101 N-m (10.3 k g f m , 74.5 I b f f t )
2. Install the new carrier bearings with the special tool

and a press.
NOTE:
Press the bearings on until they bottom.
Use the small end of the special tool to install the
bearing.
Press the bearings on securely so there is no
clearance between the bearings and the
differential carrier.
14-202
Oil Seal Replacement

4. Install the oil seal (A) in the transmission housing
w i t h the special tools.

Driver 07749-0010000
Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 or
07GAD-PG40100
Pilot 28 x 30 m m 07JAD-PH80400
Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
1. Remove the differential assembly.
2. Remove the oil seal (A) f r o m the transmission
housing (B).
3. Remove the oil seal (A) f r o m the torque converter

housing (B).
07JAD-PH80400
14-203
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NA1D-PX40100
NOTE:
Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is to be replaced.
Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing
side.
Adjust preload after replacing the bearing and outer
race.
Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
4. Install the thrust washer (A) and outer race (B) in

the torque converter housing (C), and be sure to
install the outer race until it bottoms in the housing
with the special tools.
B
1. Remove the bearing outer race from the

transmission housing by heating the housing to
about 212F (100C) with a heat gun. Do not heat
the housing more than 212F (100C).
2. Remove the bearing outer race from the torque
converter housing.
3. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B) and
outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D) with
the special tools.
07NAD-PX40100
14-204

D r i v e r 07749-0010000
A t t a c h m e n t 78 x 80 m m 07NAD-PX40100
Preload inspection tool 07HAJ-PK40201
NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter
housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing,
outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing
preload must be adjusted.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), thrust washer
(B) and thrust shim (C) f r o m the transmission
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212F
(100C) w i t h a heat gun (E). Do not heat the housing
more than 212F (100C).
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload.
E
4. Select the 2.60 m m (0.102 in.) thrust shim f r o m the

middle of the table below.
THRUST SHIM, 7 6 m m
No.
S
T
U
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
Part Number
41438-PX4-700
41439-PX4-700
41440-PX4-700
41441-PK4-000
41442-PK4-000
41443-PK4-000
41444-PK4-000
41445-PK4-000
41446-PK4-000
41447-PK4-000
41448-PK4-000
41449-PK4-000
41450-PK4-000
41451-PK4-000
41452-PK4-000
41453-PK4-000
41454-PK4-000
41455-PK4-000
41456-PK4-000
41457-PK4-000
41458-PK4-000
2.05
2.01
2.15
2.20
2.25
2.30
2.35
2.40
2.45
2.50
2.55
2.60
2.65
2.70
2.75
2.80
2.85
2.90
2.95
3.00
3.05
Thickness
m m (0.081
m m (0.083
m m (0.085
m m (0.087
m m (0.089
m m (0.091
m m (0.093
m m (0.094
m m (0.096
m m (0.098
m m (0.100
m m (0.102
m m (0.104
m m (0.106
m m (0.108
m m (0.110
m m (0.112
m m (0.114
m m (0.116
m m (0.118
m m (0.120
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing w h e n the outer

race is to be replaced.
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing
side.
(cont'd)
14-205
A/T Differentia!
5. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B), and
bearing outer race (C) in the transmission housing
(D).
:'d)
8. Install the differential assembly (A), gasket (B), and
dowel pins (C) on the torque converter housing (D).
Align the spring pin on the control shaft <E) w i t h the
transmission housing groove.
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N - m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
6. Drive the outer race w i t h the special tools, and

install it securely in the transmission housing.
7. Check that there is no clearance between the thrust
washer, outer race, s h i m , and transmission
housing.
9. Install the transmission housing (F) w i t h the

transmission hangers (G) and harness clamp
bracket (H), and tighten the bolts.
14-206
10. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions

to seat the bearings.
11. Measure the starting torque of the differential
assembly w i t h the special tool and a torque wrench
(A). Measure the starting torque at normal room
temperature in both directions.
STANDARD:
New bearing:
Reused bearings:
2.7-3.9 N m
( 2 8 - 4 0 kgf-cm, 2 4 - 3 5 Ibf-in.)
2.5 3.6 N-m
( 2 5 - 3 7 kgf-cm, 2 2 - 3 2 Ibf-in.)
07HAJ-PK40201
12. To increase the starting torque, increase the

thickness of the shim. To decrease the starting
torque, decrease the thickness of the s h i m .
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or
decrease starting torque about
0 . 3 - 0 . 4 N-m (3 4 kgf-cm, 3 - 3 Ibf-in.).
14-207
Transaxle
Driveline/Axle
Special T o o l s
16-2
Driveshafts R e a s s e m b l y
16-3
Intermediate Shaft R e m o v a l
16-14
Intermediate Shaft D i s a s s e m b l y
16-14
Intermediate Shaft R e s a s s e m b l y
16-16
Intermediate Shaft Installation
16-18
NOTE: Refer to the '98
01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for the items not shown
in this section.
Outline of Model Changes

'98 model:
The installation length of the driveshafts is different; installation instructions and specifications are
included.
The installation position of the intermediate shaft is different; related service information is included.
'99 model:
The Thermoplastic Polyester Elastomer (TPE) outboard boot has been added.
The replacement procedure for ear clamp type boot bands has been added.
The outboard joint disassembly/reassembly procedure has been added.
'01 model:
The replacement procedure for low profile type boot bands has been added.
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools
Ref. No.
Tool Number
07LAF-SM40300
07746-0010300
07749-0010000
07947-SD90101
07947-4630100
07947-6340500
07965-SD90100
16-2
Description
Support Base Attachment
Driver
Oil Seal Driver, Attachment
Fork Seal Driver, 39.2x49.5x15 mm
Driver Attachment
Support Base
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Driveshafts Reassembly
Exploded View
'98-00 model
INBOARD JOINT
ROLLER
CIRCLIP
DOUBLE LOOP BAND

Replace.
S E T RING
Replace.
Pack cavity w i t h grease

SPIDER
INBOARD BOOT
ShMmm
Pack cavity with grease.

DRIVESHAFT
STOP RING
Replace.
(Rubber type)
DOUBLE LOOP BAND

Replace.
OUTBOARD BOOT
(Rubber)
DOUBLE LOOP BAND
Replace.
OUTBOARD JOINT
Pack cavity with grease.

EAR CLAMP BAND
Replace.
O U T B O A R D B O O T (TPE)
EAR CLAMP BAND

Replace.
(cont'd)
16-3
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Reassembly (cont'd)
' 0 1 model
Pack c a v i t y w i t h g r e a s e .
16-4

Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent commercially
available
Boot band pincers, KENT-MOORE J-35910 or
equivalent commercially available
Boot band pincers, commercially available
3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning

the marks (B) on the spider and the end of the
driveshaft.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side

1. Wrap the splines w i t h vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damage to the inboard boot.
4. Fit the circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove. Always

rotate the circlip in its groove to be sure it is fully
seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A or B) onto the spider (C) w i t h their
high shoulders facing outward, and note these
items:
2. Install the inboard boot to the driveshaft, then

remove the vinyl tape.Take care not to damage the
inboard boot.
Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on

the spider by aligning the marks (D).
Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
rollers f r o m falling off.
Roller (A) is used on '98-00 A/T models and all '01
models.
Roller (B) is used on '98-00 M/T models.
(cont'd)
16-5
Driveline/Axle
6. Pack the inboard joint w i t h the joint grease
included in the new driveshaft set.
Grease quantity
Inboard joint; 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 g ( 4 . 2 - 4 . 6 oz)
('98-00 models)
1 5 0 - 1 6 0 g (5.3 5.6 oz)
('01 model)
Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure

below, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension. Make sure the
ends of the boots seat in the grooves of the
driveshaft and joint.
Left driveshaft:
Right driveshaft:
554
544
559 mm (21.8
549 mm (21.4
22.0 in.)
21.6 in.)
9. Install the boot bands.

7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note
these items:
Reinstall the inboard joint (A) onto the driveshaft
by aligning the marks (B) on the inboard joint and
the rollers.
Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint points up
to prevent it f r o m falling off.
For M/T models, align the roller holders (C) w i t h
the grooves in the inboard joint ('98-00 models).
16-6
For the double loop type, go to step 13.

For the low profile type, go to step 11.
10.
I n s t a l l t h e n e w l o w p r o f i l e b a n d (A) o n t o t h e b o o t
12.
Fit t h e b o o t e n d s o n t o t h e d r i v e s h a f t a n d t h e
(B) a n d d y n a m i c d a m p e r , t h e n h o o k t h e t a b (C) o f
i n b o a r d j o i n t , t h e n i n s t a l l t h e b a n d (A) o n t o t h e b o o t
the band.
(B).
(cont'd)
16-7
Driveline/Axfe
15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
section of the commercially available boot band
tool KD-3191 or equvialent (A), and into the slot on
the w i n d i n g mandrel (B).
18. U n w i n d the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
free end of the band to leave a 5 - 1 0 m m ( 0 . 2 - 0 . 4
in.) tail protruding f r o m the clip.
19. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it d o w n w i t h a

hammer.
16. Place a wrench on the w i n d i n g mandrel of the boot

band t o o l , and tighten the band until the marked
spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
17. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of
the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center punch the
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
16-8
NOTE:
Make sure the band and clip do not interfere w i t h
anything and the band does not move.
Remove any grease remaining on the
surrounding surfaces
20. Install the new set ring.
Outboard Joint Side:

1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damage to the outboard boot.
Rubber type
2. Install the new boot band (B) (TPE type).

3. Install the outboard boot. Take care not to damage
the outboard boot.
4 . Remove the vinyl tape.
(cont'd)
Driveline/Axle
5. Install the new stop ring (A) into the driveshaft
groove (B).
7. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the

driveshaft and joint, and drop t h e m f r o m about
10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface. Do not use a
hammer as excessive force may damage the
driveshaft.
6. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)

until the stop ring (C) is close on the joint.
10 cm
(4 In.)
8. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) with the

outboard joint end (B).
Push.
16-10
9. Pack the outboard joint with the joint grease

included in the new joint boot set.
12. Set the new double loop band (A) onto the boot.
I T
Grease quantity
Outboard joint (Rubber): 1 3 0 - 1 4 0 g ( 4 . 6 - 4 . 9 oz)
Outboard joint (TPE):
1 4 0 - 1 5 0 g ( 4 . 9 - 5 . 3 oz)
13. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.

14. Mark a position (A) on the band 1 0 - 1 4 mm (0.4
0.6 in.) from the clip (B).
10. Install the outboard boot and boot bands.
8
For TPE type boot, go to step 20.

For rubber type boot, go to step 11.
11. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and
outboard joint (C).
(cont'd)
16-11
Driveline/Axle
15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
section of a commercially available boot band tool
KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the
w i n d i n g mandrel (B).
18. U n w i n d the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
free end of the band to leave a 5 - 1 0 m m ( 0 . 2 - 0 . 4
in.) tail protruding f r o m the clip.
19. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it d o w n w i t h a

hammer.
16. Place a wrench on the w i n d i n g mandrel of the boot

band tool, and tighten the band until the marked
spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
17. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of
the band 90 to the clip. Center punch the clip, then
fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
16-12
NOTE:
Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with
anything, and the band does not move.
Remove any grease remaining on the
surrounding surfaces.
A
20. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and
outboard joint (C).
2 1 . Close the ear portion (A) of the band w i t h a

commercially available boot band pincers (B).
2 2 . Check the clearance between the closed ear portion

of the band. If the clearance is not within the
standard, close the ear portion of the band further.
16-13
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Removal
1. Drain the ATF, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
2. Remove the left driveshaft; refer to the '98-01
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly

Driver 07749-0010000
Driver attachment 07947-6340500
Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
Support base 07965-SD90100
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
3. Remove the flange bolt (A) and 2 dowel bolts (B).

1. Remove the heat shield (A) and intermediate shaft
outer seal (B) from the bearing support (C).
C
4. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the

differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal
until it is clear of the differential to prevent damage
to the differential oil seal (B).
A
16-14
2. Remove the external snap ring (D).

3. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the
intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the special
tools and a press. Be careful not to damage the
metal rings (C) on the intermediate shaft during
disassembly.
Press
4. Remove the internal snap ring.
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
FLANGE BOLTS
mm
(1.0 k g f m ,
6 x 1.0
10 N m
7.2 ibfft)
RING
P a c k t h e i n t e r i o r of t h e o u t e r s e a l .
3 . 0 - 4 . 0 g ( 0 . 1 1 - 0 . 1 4 oz)
16-16

Driver 07749-0010000
Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
Support base 07965-SD90100
Oil seal driver attachment 07947-SD90101
Fork seal driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x15 mm 07947-4630100
4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft

bearing using the special tool and a press.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry
them with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber
parts with solvent.
2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the
bearing support (B) using the special tools and a
press.
07749-0010000
07947-4630100
5. Seat the external snap ring (A) into the groove of

the intermediate shaft (B).
3. Seat the internal snap ring in the groove of the

bearing support.
(cont'd)
16-17
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
(cont'd)
6. Pack the interior of the outer seal (A). Install the
outer seal into the bearing support (B) using the
special tools and a press.
Intermediate Shaft Installation

1. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft (A)
contacts the transmission (differential) thoroughly
with solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with
compressed air. Insert the intermediate shaft
assembly into the differential. Hold the
intermediate shaft horizontal to prevent damage to
the differential oil seal (B).
2. Install the flange bolt (A) and 2 dowel bolts (B).

A
10 x 1.25 m m
3 9 N - m (4.0 k g f - m , 2 9 I b f f t )
7. Install the heat shield onto the bearing support.
3. Refill the transmisson with recommended ATF,

14-113).
16-18
Steering
Power Steering
Special T o o l s
17-2
17-3
17-4
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
17-6
Pump P r e s s u r e Test-with T/N 0 7 4 0 6 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 ..... 17-7
Pump P r e s s u r e Test-with T/N 0 7 4 0 6 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A .... 17-8
Fluid Leakage Inspection
17-9
Pump Belt Inspection and A d j u s t m e n t
17-10
Hoses and Lines Replacement
17-12
Pump R e p l a c e m e n t
17-13
Pump Overhaul
17-14
Rack G u i d e A d j u s t m e n t
17-19
Steering G e a r b o x Overhaul
17-20
NOTE; Refer to the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 for items not shown
in this section.
Outline of V6 Model Changes

The Steering System has been changed to suit the V6 engine.
Power Steering
Special Tools
Tool N u m b e r
Description
Piston Seal Ring Guide
07LAG-SM40100 or 07LAG-SM401 OA
07LAG-SM40200 or 07LAG-SM4020A
Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool
Belt Tension Gauge
07JGG-001010A
Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment
07TAF-SZ50100
P/S Joint Adaptor (Hose)

07RAK-S040122
P/S Joint Adaptor (Pump)

07VAK-P8A011A
P/S Joint Adaptor Plate (Pump)

07VAK-P8A012B
P/S Pressure Gauge

07406-0010001 or 07406-001000A
Attachment, 42 x 47 m m
07746-0010300
Driver
07749-0010000
i n c l u d e d in the Belt Tension Gauge Set, 07TGG 001000A.

Ref.No.
17-2
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Rack G u i d e A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 17-19
S t e e r i n g G e a r b o x O v e r h a u l , p a g e 17-20
17-3
Power Steering
F i n d t h e s y m p t o m in t h e c h a r t b e l o w , a n d d o t h e r e l a t e d p r o c e d u r e s in t h e o r d e r l i s t e d u n t i l y o u f i n d t h e cause.
Symptom
Hard Steering
Procedure(s)
T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e s y s t e m {see p a g e 17-6).
Assist (excessively light

s t e e r i n g at h i g h s p e e d )
Check t h e rack g u i d e a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-19).
Shock or vibration w h e n the

w h e e l is t u r n e d t o f u l l lock
1.
2.
3.
Steering wheel will not

return smoothly
1.
2.
3.
U n e v e n or r o u g h steering
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
S t e e r i n g w h e e l kicks b a c k
during wide turns
1.
2.
Humming
1.
2.
3.
17-4
C h e c k t h e rack g u i d e a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-19).

C h e c k t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p b e l t f o r s l i p p a g e a n d a d j u s t as n e c e s s a r y (see
p a g e 17-10).
R e p l a c e t h e s t e e r i n g g e a r b o x ; r e f e r t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 17-30).
C h e c k c y l i n d e r lines A a n d B f o r d e f o r m a t i o n .
C h e c k w h e e l a l i g n m e n t ; r e f e r t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 0 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e
18-5).
p a g e 17-30).
C h e c k t h e rack g u i d e a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-19).
C h e c k p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p b e l t a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-10).
C h e c k f o r l o w o r e r r a t i c e n g i n e idle s p e e d (see p a g e 11-86).
C h e c k f o r air in t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g s y s t e m d u e t o l o w f l u i d l e v e l .
C h e c k f o r l o w f l u i d level in t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g r e s e r v o i r d u e t o p o s s i b l e leaks
in s y s t e m .
p a g e 17-30).
C h e c k p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p b e l t a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-10).
C h e c k t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p f l u i d p r e s s u r e w i t h T / N 07406-0010001 (see
p a g e 17-7), w i t h T / N 0 7 4 0 6 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A (see p a g e 17-8).
Check w h e n the noise occurs
If t h e n o i s e h a p p e n s 2 3 m i n u t e s after s t a r t i n g t h e e n g i n e in c o l d w e a t h e r ,
t h i s is n o r m a l .
If t h e n o i s e h a p p e n s w h e n t h e w h e e l is t u r n w i t h t h e v e h i c l e s t o p p e d , t h i s is
normal due to the fluid pulsation.
Check f o r the high-pressure hose t o u c h i n g t h e s u b - f r a m e or body.
Check for automatic t r a n s m i s s i o n convertor noise. Remove the p o w e r
s t e e r i n g belt, a n d r e c h e c k .
A l s o c h e c k for:
Modified suspension
T i r e sizes, t i r e
v a r i e t i e s , a n d air
pressure
Power steering p u m p
belt a d j u s t m e n t
Front w h e e l alignment;
refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 18-5).
Rattle o r c h a t t e r i n g
Hissing
P u m p noise
Squeaking
F l u i d Leaks f r o m t h e
steering gearbox
Fluid leaks f r o m line
Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p
1.
Check f o r loose s t e e r i n g c o m p o n e n t s ( t i e - r o d a n d ball j o i n t s ) . T i g h t e n o r

r e p l a c e as n e c e s s a r y .
2.
Check t h e s t e e r i n g c o l u m n s h a f t f o r w o b b l i n g . If t h e s t e e r i n g c o l u m n s
w o b b l e s , replace t h e s t e e r i n g c o l u m n a s s e m b l y , refer t o t h e '98-'01 A c c o r d
3.
Check t h e rack g u i d e a d j u s t m e n t (see p a g e 17-19).
4.
Check t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p p u l l e y .
If t h e p u l l e y is l o o s e , t i g h t e n it (see p a g e 17-14).
If t h e p u m p s h a f t is l o o s e , r e p l a c e t h e p u m p (see p a g e 17-13).
Check t h e f l u i d l e v e l . If l o w , f i l l t h e r e s e r v o i r t o t h e p r o p e r level a n d c h e c k f o r
leaks.
Check t h e r e s e r v o i r f o r leaks.
Check f o r c r u s h e d i n l e t h o s e o r l o o s e h o s e c l a m p a l l o w i n g air i n t o t h e s u c t i o n
side of t h e s y s t e m .
Check t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p s h a f t oil seal f o r leaks.
C o m p a r e t h e p u m p n o i s e at n o r m a l o p e r a t i n g t e m p e r a t u r e t o a n o t h e r v e h i c l e ,
( p u m p n o i s e u p t o 2 - 3 m i n u t e s a f t e r s t a r t i n g t h e e n g i n e in c o l d w e a t h e r is
normal).
R e m o v e a n d i n s p e c t t h e p u m p f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e (see s t e p 1 o n p a g e 17-15).
Check t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g belt t e n s i o n a n d a d j u s t as n e c e s s a r y (see p a g e 1 7 - 1 0 ) .
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e t o p of t h e v a l v e b o d y u n i t :
Replace t h e v a l v e b o d y u n i t .
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e left t i e - r o d b o o t :
Replace t h e v a l v e oil seal o n t h e p i n i o n s h a f t .
Replace t h e c y l i n d e r e n d seal o n t h e g e a r b o x s i d e .
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e r i g h t t i e - r o d b o o t : Replace t h e c y l i n d e r e n d s e a l .
F l u i d leaks f r o m p i n i o n s h a f t near t h e l o w e r s t e e r i n g j o i n t b o l t : Replace t h e v a l v e
b o d y unit.
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e c y l i n d e r l i n e A or B c o n n e c t i o n s (flare n u t s ) :
T i g h t e n t h e c o n n e c t i o n a n d retest. If it still leaks, r e p l a c e t h e f i t t i n g O - r i n g s .
F l u i d leaks f r o m a d a m a g e d c y l i n d e r line A o r B:
Replace t h e c y l i n d e r l i n e .
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e p u m p o u t l e t h o s e o r r e t u r n line f i t t i n g o n t h e v a l v e b o d y
u n i t (flair n u t s ) : T i g h t e n t h e f i t t i n g a n d retest. If it still leaks, replace t h e h o s e , t h e
line, o r v a l v e b o d y u n i t as n e c e s s a r y .
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e f r o n t o i l s e a l : Replace t h e f r o n t oil seal.
F l u i d leaks f r o m t h e p o w e r s t e e r i n g p u m p h o u s i n g :
Replace t h e l e a k i n g O - r i n g s o r seals (see p a g e 17-14), a n d if n e c e s s a r y r e p l a c e
(see
Fluid leaks f r o m r e s e r v o i r
Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p
outlet hose (high-pressure)
Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p i n l e t
hose (low-pressure)
page 1 7 - 1 3 )
Fluid leaks f r o m a r o u n d t h e r e s e r v o i r c a p : F l u i d level is t o o h i g h : d r a i n t h e

r e s e r v o i r t o t h e p r o p e r l e v e l . A e r a t e d f l u i d : c h e c k f o r an air leak o n t h e i n l e t s i d e
of p u m p .
F l u i d leaks f r o m r e s e r v o i r : Check f o r t h e r e s e r v o i r f o r cracks a n d r e p l a c e as
necessary.
Check t h e f i t t i n g f o r l o o s e b o l t s . If t h e b o l t s are t i g h t , replace t h e f i t t i n g O - r i n g .
F l u i d leaks at t h e s w a g g e d j o i n t : Replace t h e o u t l e t h o s e .
Check t h e h o s e f o r d a m a g e , d e t e r i o r a t i o n , o r i m p r o p e r a s s e m b l y . Replace o r
r e p a i r as n e c e s s a r y .
17-5
Power Steering
Symptom Troubleshooting
Hard Steering
6. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-19), and retest.
1. Check the power assist refer to the '98-01 A c c o r d

Is the steering
OK?
Y E S Repair is completed.
Is the power assist more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)?
NO Faulty gearbox.
7. Check for feed and return lines between the p u m p
and the gearbox for clogging and deformation.
N O - Power assist is O K . B
2. Measure steady-state fluid pressure f r o m the p u m p
at idle w i t h T/N 07406-0010001 (see page 17-7) or
w i t h T/N 07406-001000A (see page 17-8).
2
Is the pressure 1,500 kPa (15 kgf/cm ,213
psi) or less?
Go to step 7.
3. Measure the p u m p relief pressure at idle w i t h T/N

07406-0010001 (see page 17-7) or w i t h T/N 07406001000A (see page 17-8).
Is the pressure
7,600- 8,300 kPa (782, 1,100- 1,210 psi) or less?
85
kgf/cm
deformed?
Y E S Repair or replace the lines.

NO Faulty valve body u n i t . B
Is the flow control
valve
OK?
Y E S Faulty p u m p a s s e m b l y .
N O - F a u l t y f l o w control valve.
9. Check the cylinder lines A and B for deformation
(see page 17-12).
NO
or
8. Check the f l o w control valve, refer to the '98-01

Accord Service Manual (see page 17-17) for
s m o o t h m o v e m e n t and leaks.
NO
Are the lines clogged
Are the Aor B lines
Go to step 8.
4. With a spring scale, measure the power assist in

both directions, to the left and to the right.
deformed?
Y E S Replace the l i n e s .
Are the two measurements

1.12 Ibf) of each other?
within 5.0 N (0.51
kgf,
10. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack
guide (to tight).
NO
Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide

too tight?
Go to step 9.
5. Measure the fluid pressure w i t h T/N 07406-0010001

(see page 17-7) or w i t h T/N 07406-001000A (see
page 17-8) w i t h both pressure gauge valves open
(if so equipped), wheel t u r n i n g the steering wheel
fully to the left and fully to the right.
Is the pressure
7,600- 8,300 kPa (78-85
1,100- 1,210 psi) or less?
NO Faulty g e a r b o x .
17-6
kgf/crrf,
adjusted
Y E S - R e p l a c e the rack shaft or readjust the rack

guide.
NO Faulty valve body u n i t . B
Pump Pressure Test w i t h T/N 07406-0010001

P/S joint adapter (pump), 07VAK-P8A011A
P/S joint adapter plate (pump), 07VAK-P8A012B
P/S joint adapter (hose), 07RAK-S040122
P/S pressure gauge, 07406-0010001
5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the p u m p or gearbox.
1. Check the power steering fluid level; refer to
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-14)
and p u m p belt tension (see page 17-10).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) f r o m the
p u m p outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (B) w i t h the P/S joint outlet plate.
07RAK-S040122
6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B).

8. Turn the steering wheel f r o m lock-to-lock several
times to w a r m the fluid to operating temperature.
07406-0010001
07VAK-P8A011A
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the

engine is idling. If the p u m p is in good condition,
the gauge should read less than 1,500 kPa (15
kgf/cm , 213 psi). If it reads high, check the outlet
hose or valve body unit (see Steering System
Troubleshooting).
2
10. Close the pressure control valve, then close the

shut-off valve gradually until the pressure gauge
needle is stable. Read the pressure.
6 x 1.0 m m
11 N m
(1.1 k g f m , 8 Ibfft)
3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S
pressure gauge, then connect the p u m p outlet hose
(A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose).
[NOTICE]
Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the p u m p could be damaged by
over-heating.
11. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully.
If the p u m p is in good condition, the gauge should
read at least 7 , 6 0 0 - 8 , 3 0 0 kPa ( 7 8 - 8 5 kgf/cm ,
1,1101,210 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the p u m p .
2
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint

adapter (pump).
17-7
Power Steering
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A
P/S joint adapter (pump), 07VAK-P8A011A
P/S joint adapter plate (pump), 07VAK-P8A012B
P/S joint adapter (hose), 07RAK-S040122
P/S pressure gauge, 07406-001000A
5. Open the pressure control valve (A) fully.

A
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the p u m p or gearbox.
1. Check the power steering fluid level; refer to
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 17-14)
and p u m p belt tension (see page 17-10).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) f r o m the
p u m p outlet w i t h care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the p u m p
outlet (B) w i t h the P/S joint outlet plate.
7. Turn the steering wheel f r o m lock-to-lock several
times to w a r m the fluid to operating temperature.
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the
engine is idling. If the p u m p is in good condition,
the gauge should read less than 1,500 kPa (15
kgf/cm , 213 psi). If it reads high, check the outlet
hose or valve body unit (see Steering System
Troubleshooting).
2
9. Close the pressure control valve gradually and read

the pressure.
I NOTICE I

3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S
pressure gauge, then connect the p u m p outlet hose
(A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose).
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint
adapter (pump).
17-8
Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more

than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by
over-heating.
10. Immediatery open the pressure control valve fully.
If the p u m p is in good condition, the gauge should
read at least 7,600 -8,300 kPa (78- 85 kgf/cm ,
1,110 1,210 psi). A low reading means p u m p
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
2
Fluid Leakage Inspection

PUMP A S S E M B L Y
C h e c k f o r l e a k s at t h e p u m p
s e a l , inlet a n d outlet fittings.
'
G E A R B O X and V A L V E BODY UNIT

C h e c k f o r leaks at t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e
and flare nut connections.
H O S E S and LINES
Inspect hoses for d a m a g e , leaks, interference a n d t w i s t i n g
Inspect fluid lines for d a m a g e , rusting and leakage.
C h e c k f o r leaks at h o s e a n d line j o i n t s a n d c o n n e c t i o n s .
Power Steering
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment
Belt tension gauge set, 07JGG-001000A or
Belt tension gauge, 07JGG-001010A
Adjustment
3. Loosen the power steering p u m p mounting nut (A)
and bolt (B).
Belt Tension Gauge Method

Inspection
1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt w i t h the
gauge face t o w a r d the engine, and measure the
tension of the belt. Follow the manufacture's
instructions. If the belt is w o r n or damaged, replace
it.
NOTE: Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to
avoid hitting the gauge reset lever.
Tension:
Used Belt:
N e w Belt:
3 9 0 - 5 4 0 N ( 4 0 - 5 5 kgf, 8 8 - 1 2 1 Ibf)
740 880 N (75 90 kgf, 1 6 5 1 9 8 Ibf)
0 7 J G G - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A or
07JGG-001010A
2 4 N m (2.4 k g f m , 17 I b f f t )
4. Turn the adjusting nut (C) to get the proper belt

tension, then retighten the mounting nut and bolt.
5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel f r o m
lock-to-lock several times, then stop the engine and
recheck the tension of the belt.
2. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5

minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specifications.
17-10
Deflection Method
Inspection
Adjustment
3. Loosen the power steering p u m p mounting nut (A)
and bolt (B).
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 Ibf) and measure

the deflection between the power steering pump
pulley (A) and the crankshaft pulley (B).
Deflection:
Used Belt:
New Belt:
13.0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in.)

8.5 11.0 mm (0.33 0.45 in.)
2 4 N m (2.4 k g f - m , 17 I b f f t )
4. Turn the adjusting nut (C) to get the proper belt

tension, then retighten the mounting nut and bolt.
5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel f r o m
lock-to-lock several times, then stop the engine and
recheck the tension of the belt.
2. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5

minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specifications.
17-11
Power Steering
Hoses and Lines Replacement
Note these items during installation:
Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance f r o m the hose end as s h o w n .
Check all clamps for deterioration or d e f o r m a t i o n ; replace w i t h the clamps new ones if necessary.
A d d the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
A D J U S T A B L E HOSE CLAMP (A)
HOSE CLAMP (B)
2 . 5 5 . 5 mm
( 0 . 0 1 - 0 . 2 2 in.)
2 . 5 5 . 5 mm
( 0 . 0 1 - 0 . 2 2 In.)
17-12
2.04.0 mm
( 0 . 0 8 - 0 . 1 6 in.)
1.0
mm
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
7. Loosely install the p u m p in the p u m p bracket w i t h

the mounting bolts and nut.
2. Drain the power steering fluid f r o m the reservoir.

8. Install the p u m p belt (A) on the pulley (B).
3. Remove the intake manifold cover.
4. Cover the crankshaft pulley with several shop
towels to protect if f r o m spilled power steering
fluid. Disconnect the p u m p inlet hose (A) and pump
outlet hose (B) f r o m the p u m p (C), and plug them.
Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts.
Wipe off any spilled fluid at once.
Note these items during belt installation:

Make sure that the power steering belt is
properly positioned on the pulleys.
Do not get the power steering fluid or grease on
the belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or
grease before installation.
A
6 x 1.0 m m B O L T
11 N-m (1.1 kgf-m, 8 Ibfft)
9. Adjust the p u m p belt adjustment (see page 17-10).

10. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line; refer to
5. Remove the belt (D) by loosening the pump

adjusting nut (E), then remove pump mounting
bolts (F), nut (G) and pump. Do not turn the steering
wheel w i t h p u m p removed.
6. Connect the p u m p outlet hose and inlet hose.
Tighten the p u m p fittings securely.
17-13
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
R e p l a c e t h e p u m p a s a n a s s e m b l y If t h e p a r t s "indicated w i t h a s t e r i s k (*) a r e w o r n o r d a m a g e d .
4 . 5 mm
ROLLER
FLANGE BOLTS
2 0 N m (2.0 k g f - m , 1 4 I b f f t )
*PUMP COVER
*SIDE PLATE
5 mm
ROLLER
PUMP COVER SEAL

Replace.
* P U M P C A M RING
15.2x2.4 m m O-RING
Replace.
51 x 2 . 4 m m O - R I N G
Replace.
13 x 1.9 m m O - R I N G
Replace.
INLET JOINT
FLANGE BOLTS
11 N - m (1.1 k g f - m ,
8 Ibfft)
*FLOW CONTROL VALVE
SPRING
15.2x2.4 m m O-RING
Replace.
PULLEY NUT
6 4 N - m (6.5 k g f - m , 47 I b f f t )
17-14
*FLOW CONTROLVALVE CAP

4 9 N - m (5.0 k g f - m , 3 6 I b f f t )

Inspection

Universal holder, 07725-0030000
10. Check the f l o w control valve for wear, burrs, and

other damage to the edges of the grooves in the
valve.
Disassembly
NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
1. Remove the power steering p u m p (see page 17-13).
2. Drain the fluid f r o m the pump.
3. Hold the steering p u m p (A) in a vise w i t h soft jaws,
hold the pulley (B) w i t h the special tool, and
remove the pulley nut (C) and pulley. Be careful not
to damage the pump housing w i t h the jaws of the
vise.
07725-0030000
11. Inspect the bore of the f l o w control valve on the

pump housing for scratches and wear.
B
12. Slip the f l o w control valve back in the p u m p
housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 13; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The f l o w control valve is not
available separately.
4. Loosen the f l o w control valve cap w i t h a hex

wrench, and remove it and the O-ring, f l o w control
valve, and spring.
5. Remove the p u m p cover and p u m p cover seal.
6. Remove the outer side plate, p u m p cam ring, pump
rotor, pump vanes, side plate, and O-rings.
7. Remove the snap ring, then remove the sub-valve
f r o m the pump housing.
8. Remove the circlip, then remove the p u m p drive
shaft by tapping the shaft end w i t h the plastic
hammer.
9. Remove the p u m p seal spacer and p u m p seal.
(cont'd)
17-15
Power Steering
Pomp Overhaul (cont'd)
13. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the f l o w control
valve (B) as s h o w n . Then submerge the f l o w
control valve (B) in a container of power steering
fluid or solvent (C), and b l o w in the hose.
If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm , 14.2 psi), replace the p u m p
as an assembly. The f l o w control valve is not
available separately.
If the f l o w control valve tests OK, set it aside for
reassembly later.
Reassembly
16. Clean the disassembled parts w i t h solvent, and dry
them w i t h compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts
in solvent.
14. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race

slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and
install a new one (B).
17. Align the pin (A) of the sub-valve (B) w i t h the oil
passage (C) in the p u m p housing, and push the
sub-valve into place, then install the snap ring (D).
18. Install the new p u m p seal (A)(with its grooved side

facing in) into the p u m p housing by hand, then
install the p u m p seal spacer (B).
WE
iulJJji
19. Position the pump drive shaft (C) in the p u m p

housing (D), then drive it in using a 29 m m socket
(E).
15. Inspect each part s h o w n w i t h an asterisk in the
Exploded View; if any of t h e m are w o r n or
damaged, replace the p u m p as an assembly.
17-16
20. Install the 40 m m snap ring (F) w i t h its radiused

side facing out.
21. Coat the new p u m p cover seal (A) with power

steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the
pump cover (B).
24. Assemble p u m p rotor (A) to the pump cover (B).
25. Set the 10 vanes (C) in the grooves in the rotor.

Make sure that the round ends (D) of the vanes are
in contact w i t h the sliding surface of the cam ring.
22. Install the outer side plate (C) over the 2 rollers (D).
23. Set the p u m p cam ring (A) over the 2 rollers with its
" " mark (B) facing up.
ID
26. Coat the new O-ring (A) w i t h power steering fluid,

and install it into the groove in the side plate (B).
.A
27. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning
the roller set holes (D) in the side plate w i t h the
rollers (E).
(cont'd)
17-17
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
28. Coat the new O-ring (A) w i t h power steering f l u i d ,
and position it in the bottom of the p u m p housing
(B).
8 x 1.25 m m
20 N m
(2.0 k g f - m , 1 4 I b f f t )
32. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
nut (B). Hold the steering p u m p in a vise w i t h soft
jaws. Be careful not to damage the p u m p housing
w i t h the jaws of the vise.
07725-0030000
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m ,
47 Ibfft)
29. Install the p u m p cover assembly (C) in the p u m p

housing.
30. Coat the f l o w control valve (A) w i t h power steering
fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the p u m p
housing.
A
4 9 N - m (5.0 k g f - m ,
36 Ibfft)
3 1 . Coat the new O-ring (D) w i t h power steering f l u i d ,

and install it on the f l o w control valve cap (E).
Install the cap on the p u m p housing, and tighten it.
17-18
33. Hold the pulley (A) w i t h the special tool, and tighten
the pulley nut (B).
34. Check that the p u m p turns smoothly by turning the
pulley by hand.
Rack Guide Adjustment

1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) w i t h a
commercially available 1 3/4 inch crowfoot wrench
(B), then remove the rack guide screw (C).
7. Check for tight or loose steering through the

complete turning travel.
8. Check the steering wheel rotational play and the
power assist; refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
6 9 N - m (7.0 k g f - m ,
3. Remove the old sealant f r o m rack guide screw

threaded section, and apply new sealant all the w a y
around the first three threads (A). Loosely install
the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.
4. Tighten the rack guide screw to 25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m,

18 I b f f t ) , then loosen it.
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N-m
(0.4 kgf-m, 2.9 Ibfft), then back it off to specified
angle.
Specified Return Angle:
60 + 5
6. Tighten the locknut while holding the rack guide

screw.
17-19
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded View
F L A R E NUTS
13 N-m (1-3 k g f m ,
9.4
Ibfft)
FLANGE BOLTS
1 9 N-m (1.9 k g f m , 1.4 I b f f t )
CYLINDER END SEAL

Replace.
17-20

Cylinder end seal remover attachment,
07TAF-SZ50100
Driver, 07749-0010000
Attachment, 42 X 47 m m , 07746-0010300
Piston seal ring guide,
07LAG-SM4010A or 07LAG-SM40100
Piston seal ring sizing t o o l ,
07LAG-SM4020A or 07LAG-SM40200
Pincer Oetiker 1098, or equivalent, commercially
available
8
3. Unbend the lock washer (A).

A

Removal
1. Remove the steering gearbox; refer to the '98-01
Note these items during removal:
Disconnect the primary H02S sensor connector.
Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 5-2) to allow
clearance for the steering gearbox.
4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the right side

steering rack (B) w i t h a w r e n c h , and unscrew both
rack ends (C) w i t h a wrench. Be careful not to
damage the rack surface w i t h the wrench. Remove
the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E).
B
Disassembly
2. Remove the boot band (A) and tie-rod clips (B). Pull
the boots away f r o m the ends of the gearbox.
(cont'd)
17-21
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
5. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide
screw (B).
9. Remove the end plug (A) f r o m the gearbox housing,

then remove the nut (B) f r o m the pinion shaft end.
C
6. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) f r o m

the gearbox.
7. Remove the cylinder lines f r o m the gearbox.
10. Remove the t w o flange bolts, the valve body unit

(C), and gasket (D) f r o m the gearbox. Check that the
valve turns smoothly by turning the pinion shaft. If
any play or roughness is felt, replace the valve
body unit w i t h a new part if necessary. Do not try to
disassemble the valve body unit.
11. Slide the steering rack all the w a y to the left.
12. Turn the rack stop (A) counterclockwise until the
end of the circlip (B) sticks out f r o m the hole (C) in
the rack stop. Then turn it clockwise to remove the
circlip (D).
8. Drain the fluid f r o m the cylinder fittings by slowly

m o v i n g the steering rack back and f o r t h .
17-22
13. Remove the rack stop (A), rack bushing (B), and
steering rack (C) f r o m the steering gearbox.
16. Install a washer (O.D. 27.5 m m , P/N 94103-10400)

(A) so it will fit through the rack guide hole of the
gearbox housing, then position the washer on the
cylinder end seal (B). Make sure that the washer is
securely positioned on the cylinder end seal edges,
A
14. Remove the O-ring (A) and cylinder end seal (B)
f r o m the rack bushing (C).
17. Install a socket w i t h a 27.5 m m O.D. (A) onto a 24 in.

long, 3/8 in. drive extension (B), and carefully place
it on the washer (C).
15. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B)
off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
inside of seal ring groove and piston edges w h e n
removing the seal ring.
18. Install a bearing separator (D) on the gearbox

housing. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the
gearbox housing points upward, then push out the
cylinder end seal (E) 5 - 6 m m ( 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 in.) by
pressing on the end of the extension.
19. Remove the steering gearbox f r o m the press, and
remove the washer f r o m the gearbox inside.
(cont'd)
17-23
Power Steering
20. Turn the special tool so it will fit through the rack
guide hole of the steering gearbox, then position
the special tool on the cylinder end seal (A). Make
sure that the special tool is securely positioned on
the seal edges.
Reassembly
22. Coat the special tool w i t h power steering fluid, then
slide it onto the rack, big end first.
23. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal
ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them d o w n
t o w a r d the big end of the tool.
Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
the resin seal rings w i t h care so as not to damage
t h e m . After installation, be sure to contract the
seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool).
Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.
21. Insert a 24 in. long, 3/8 in. drive extension (A), on

the special t o o l . Place the steering gearbox in a
press, then remove the cylinder end seal (B) f r o m
of the gearbox by pressing on the end of the
extension.
Note these items w h e n pressing the cylinder end
seal:
Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the
cylinder w a l l . Check the tool angle, and correct it
if necessary, w h e n removing the cylinder end
seal.
Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do
not try to remove the seal by striking the t o o l ;
striking the tool w o u l d break the cylinder end
seal, and the seal w o u l d remain in the gearbox.
24. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
top of the O-ring.
25. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the
special tool w i t h power steering fluid, then
carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the
piston seal ring.
07TAF-SZ50100
0 7 L A G - S M 4 0 1 0 A or
07LAG-SM40100
26. Move the special tool back and forth several times
to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston.
17-24
27. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end
edges, then coat the surface of the tape with power
steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is
wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped
portion.
30. Grease the steering rack teeth, then insert the

steering rack into the gearbox housing. Be careful
not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder wall
w i t h the rack edges.
28. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the
steering rack w i t h its grooved side toward the
piston. W h e n installing the cylinder end seal, be
careful not damage the lip of the seal w i t h the
edges or teeth of the steering rack.
A
I
3 1 . Insert a deep socket (A) onto the steering rack as

shown.
Press
32. Install the cylinder and seal (B) into the bottom of
the cylinder by pressing on the tool w i t h a press.
Do not push on the tool w i t h excessive force as it
may damage the cylinder end seal.
33. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.
29. Remove the vinyl tape f r o m the steering rack, thei

remove any adhesive residue.
(cont'd)
17-25
Power Steering
34. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and
coat the surface of the tape with power steering
fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped
carefully so there is no stepped portion.
35. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) with power steering fluid, then press it into the
rack bushing (B) using the special tools.
SS
07749-0010000
A
07746-0010300
36. Coat the new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid,
and carefully fit it in the groove of the rack bushing.
17-26
37. Install the rack bushing onto the steering rack with
the cylinder end seal grooved side toward the
piston. Push in the rack bushing with your finger.
38. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
remove any adhesive residue.
39. Install the rack stop (A) onto the steering rack so the
hole (B) is aligned with the slot (C) on the steering
rack.
40. Insert the end of the circlip (A) into the hole (B) of
the rack stop (C). Turn the rack stop
counterclockwise until the circlip is fully seated in
the rack stop.
A
45. Before installing the cylinder lines, coat the new Orings with power steering fluid, then install the
lines.
Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines.
The joints must be free of foreign material.
Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
the specified torque.
13 N m (1.3 k g f m , 9 . 4 I b f f t )
41. Apply grease to the needle bearing (A) in the

gearbox housing, and install the valve body unit (B)
and gasket (C) by engaging the gears. Note the
valve body unit installation position (direction of
line connections). Then loosely install the 2 flange
bolts.
42. Install the nut (D) onto the pinion shaft end, and
tighten to specified torque. After tightening, use a
drift to stake the nut shoulder (E) against the pinion
shaft.
46. Apply multipurpose Grease to the sliding surface of

the rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox
housing.
47. Apply new sealant all the way around the first 3
threads of the rack guide screw (B), then install the
spring (C) rack guide screw, and locknut (D).
f
43. Apply sealant all the way around the threads on the
end plug (F), install the end plug onto the gearbox
housing, and tighten it to the specified torque.
48. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-19). After
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding it right and left.
44. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque.
(cont'd)
17-27
Power Steering
49. Install the stop washer (A) w i t h the chamfered side
facing out, and screw each rack end (B) into the
rack while holding the lock washer (C) so its tabs
(D) are in the slots (E) in the end of the rack.
52. Apply multipurpose grease (A) to the

circumference of the rack end joint housing.
A
B
53. Apply a light coat of silicone grease (B) to the boot
grooves (B) on the rack ends.
50. Hold the flat surface sections of the right side
steering rack w i t h a w r e n c h , and tighten both rack
ends. Be careful not to damage the rack surface
w i t h the w r e n c h .
5 1 . Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on
the rack end joint housing.
17-28
54. Center the steering rack w i t h i n its stroke. Install the

boots on the rack ends w i t h the tie-rod clips. After
installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (A) of the rack end.
55. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
with the holes (B) of the band.
56. Close the ear portion (A) of the band w i t h a

commercially available Oetiker 1098 pincer or
equivalent (B).
57. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
Installation
58. Install the steering gearbox; refer to the '98-01
Note these items during installation:
Reinstall exhaust pipe A w i t h new gasket (see
page 5-11).
Reconnect the primary H02S sensor connector.
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components
Front Brake P a d s Inspection
and R e p l a c e m e n t
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) Components
19-2
19-4
19-7
NOTE; Refer to the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 for the items not
s h o w n in this section.

The front brake caliper is different; the brake pad replacement and the brake caliper overhaul procedures
are included.

Front Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement
ACAUTION
3. Remove the pads (A), pad shims (B), and pad

retainers (C).
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust,regardless of

material composition,could be hazardous to your
health.
Avoid breathing dust particles.
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies.Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly. Raise the front
of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported. Remove the front wheels. Remove the
brake hose mounting bolts (A) from the knuckle.
A
9.8 N m
(1.0 k
7.2 Ibfft)
L
4. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of

each brake pad lining. The measurement does not
include the pad backing plate (A) thickness.
Brake Pad Thickness:
Standard:
10.5 - 1 1 . 5 mm (0.41 - 0.45 in)
Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in)
Remove the caliper bolt (B), and pivot the caliper

(C) up out of the way. If the caliper pin head is the
hex. type, the caliper bolt should be removed using
a wrench while holding the caliper pin with another
wrench. Check the hoses and pin boots for damage
and deterioration.
i
5. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service
limit, replace the front pads and shims together as
a set.
6. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and
check for grooves and cracks.
7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
19-2

8. Install the pad retainers (A).
11. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
down.
9. Apply Molykote M77 grease to both sides of the

pad shims (A) and the back of the pads (B). Wipe
excess grease off the shim.
A
12. Pivot the caliper down into position, being careful

not to damage the pin boot Install the caliper bolt
(B), and torque it to proper specification. If the
caliper pin head (C) is the hex. type, the caliper bolt
should be installed by using a wrench while
holding the caliper pin with another wrench. Install
the brake hose onto the knuckle.
13. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure
the brakes work, then road-test.
10. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly.

Install the pad with the wear indicator (C) on the
inside.If you are reusing the pads,always reinstall
the brake pads in their original positions to prevent
loss of braking efficiency.
NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a

greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake
pads have been replaced as a set. Several
applications of the brake pedal will restore the
normal pedal stroke.
14. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
19-3

Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
Avoid breathing dust particles
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; It may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately w i t h water.
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages w i t h compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts w i t h new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake f l u i d .
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
W h e n reusing pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake flued.
Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of
the system.
Coat the piston, piston seal, and caliper bore w i t h clean brake fluid.
Replace all rubber parts w i t h new ones.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
19-4
Sedan:
^3Mm:S\\
licone
grease
{GREASEM : Rubber grease

BANJO BOLT
3 4 N m (3.5 k g f m , 2 5 Ibfft)
BRAKE HOSE
10 m m F L A N G E B O L T S
3 4 N m (3.5 k g f m , 2 5 I b f f t )
/SEALING WASHERS
Replace.
BLEED SCREW
9 N m (0.9 k g f m , 6.5 I b f f t )
CALIPER BODY
CAM BOOT
Replace.
S L E E V E PISTON
BEARING A
ADJUSTING SPRING B
SPRING COVER
CIRCLIP
PISTON A S S E M B L Y
BRAKE PADS
OUTER PAD SHIM
CALIPER BRACKET
10 m m F L A N G E B O L T S
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f m , 2 8 I b f f t )
PIN B O O T
(cont'd)
19-5

Front Brake Caliper Overhaul (cont'd)
Coupe:
: Silicone grease
GREASE!
10 x 1.25 mm
43 N m
(4.4 k g f - m , 3 2
: Rubber grease
BANJO BOLT
3 4 N m (3.5 k g f - m , 2 5 I b f f t )
, SEALING WASHERS
Replace.
Ibfft)
BLEED SCREW
9 N m (0.9 k g f - m , 6.5 I b f f t )
PISTON SEAL
Replace.
CAM BOOT
Replace.
PISTON BOOT
Replace.
PARKING L E V E R /
CAM ASSEMBLY
RETURN
SPRING
PAD SPRING
% GREASES!
CALIPER BOLTS
8 x 1.0 m m
2 5 N m (2.5 k g f - m , 19 I b f f t )
BOOT CLIP
Replace.
PIN A
PIN B O O T S
Replace.
BRAKE PADS
RETAINER
PIN B O O T S
SILICONE
GREASE
CALIPER
BRACKET
FLANGE BOLTS
10 x 1.25 m m
5 5 N - m (5.6 k g f - m , 41 I b f f t )
PIN
19-6
Brakes
ABS Components ('98-00 Models)
19-8
D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index
19-9
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index
19-10
Circuit D i a g r a m
19-12
DTC Troubleshooting
A B S Indicator Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
19-14
...................
Modulator Unit R e m o v a l a n d Installation
..............
ABS Control Unit R e p l a c e m e n t
19-18
19-21
19-22
NOTE: Refer to the 1998 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) for the items not
s h o w n in this section.

* The locations of the modulator unit and ABS control unit were changed;
-
Component location index w a s added.
Modulator unit removal and installation was added.
ABS control unit replacement was added.
Ground numbers of pump motor ground and ABS control unit ground were changed;
-
DTC troubleshooting index w a s added.
S y m p t o m troubleshooting index w a s added.
Circuit diagram was added.
DTC troubleshooting was added.
ABS indicator circuit troubleshooting was added.
ABS Components
/UNDER-HOOD ARSRELAY BOX
(PUMP MOTOR RELAY)
Inspection, page 22-52
/UNDER-HOOD ABS RELAY BOX
(FAIL-SAFE RELAY)
Inspection, page 22-52
/UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
/PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
LEFT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

MODULATOR UNIT
R e m o v a l a n d Installation,/
p a g e 19-21
A B S C O N T R O L UNIT
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL S E N S O R
Inspection, p a g e 19-70
19-8
DATA LINK
C O N N E C T O R (16P)
RIGHT-REAR W H E E L S E N S O R
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

DTC
DTC: 11
Detection item
Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body g r o u n d / s h o r t to power)
DTC: 12
R i g h t - f r o n t w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n )
DTC: 13
Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
DTC: 14
L e f t - f r o n t w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n )
DTC: 15
Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body g r o u n d / s h o r t to p o w e r )
DTC: 16
R i g h t - r e a r w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n )
DTC: 17
Left-rear w h e e l s e n s o r ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d / s h o r t t o p o w e r )
DTC: 18
Left-rear w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n )
DTC: 21
Right-front pulser
DTC: 22
Left-front pulser
DTC: 23
Right-rear pulser
DTC: 24
Left-rear p u l s e r
DTC: 31
R i g h t - f r o n t inlet s o l e n o i d
DTC: 32
Right-front outlet solenoid
DTC: 33
L e f t - f r o n t inlet s o l e n o i d
DTC: 34
Left-front outlet solenoid
DTC: 35
R i g h t - r e a r inlet s o l e n o i d
DTC: 36
Right-rear outlet solenoid
DTC: 37
L e f t - r e a r inlet s o l e n o i d
DTC: 38
Left-rear o u t l e t s o l e n o i d
DTC: 41
Right-front w h e e l lock
DTC: 42
L e f t - f r o n t w h e e l lock
DTC: 43
R i g h t - r e a r w h e e l lock
DTC: 44
L e f t - r e a r w h e e l lock
DTC: 51
M o t o r lock
DTC: 52
DTC: 53
DTC: 54
M o t o r s t u c k OFF
M o t o r stuck O N
Fail-safe relay
DTC: 61
L o w ignition voltage
DTC: 62
High ignition voltage
DTC: 71
Different diameter tire
DTC: 81
C e n t r a l P r o c e s s i n g U n i t (CPU) d i a g n o s i s , a n d R O M / R A M d i a g n o s i s
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-52)
Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1
(see p a g e 19-53)
(see p a g e 19-52)
(see p a g e 19-53)
Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1
(see p a g e 19-52)
Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1
(see p a g e 19-53)
(see p a g e 19-52)
(see p a g e 19-53)
Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1
(see p a g e 19-54)
(see p a g e 19-54)
(see p a g e 19-54)
(see p a g e 19-54)
(see p a g e 19-55)
(see p a g e 19-55)
(see p a g e 19-55)
(see p a g e 19-55)
(see p a g e 19-55)
(see p a g e 19-55)
(see p a g e 19-55)
(see p a g e 19-55)
(see p a g e 19-58)
(see p a g e 19-58)
(see p a g e 19-58)
(see p a g e 19-58)
(see p a g e 19-59)
(see p a g e 19-14)
(see p a g e 19-16)
(see p a g e 19-63)
(see p a g e 19-65)
(see p a g e 19-65)
(see p a g e 19-66)
(see p a g e 19-66)
Note
A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
A c c o r d Service Manual
A c c o r d Service M a n u a l

19-9
ABS Components
Symptom
A B S indicator does not come on
A B S Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 19-18)
A B S indicator does not go off

and no DTC is stored
A B S Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 19-18)
19-10
Also check for
ABS Components
Circuit Diagram
7P CONNECTOR ( number)
18P CONNECTOR CO number)

3
7
A"
1
a^\a/
ir
18P CONNECTOR ( O number)

2
4
3
.,11,
8 | 9 i o [ / 12J13 14|
/ l l 7
18
10
11112
J s
A"
MODULATOR UNIT
CONNECTOR
( O number)
15
BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR

1
r-i
| I
i o ' n :12 13 i 4 , i 5 i i e ; i 7
18 19 20
GAUGE A S S E M B L R Y CONNECTORS
o
.i'i2y/;/i6!>oy
7(8
PUMP MOTOR
CONNECTOR
( number)

7 8
1 2 3 4
5 8
E=L.
9 10 11 12 13114 15 16 17 18
Terminal side of female terminals

9 11C
19! 20 21122
8 j 9 10Jll|XJl2
19-12
14 15 16
TVBSl
ABS C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R S
CONNECTOR a (22P)
FRONT/REAR
CONNECTOR B
JU.
p 5 3 ,
Terminal side o f
male t e r m i n a l s
(12P)
, n,
Wire side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
19-13
ABS Components
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C 52: Motor Stuck O F F
1. Check the ABS MOTOR (30 A) fuse in the underhood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK,
4. Connect the p u m p motor relay connector terminal

No. 3 to No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r wire for a moment,
and check the fuse.
PUMP MOTOR RELAY CONNECTOR
Is the fuse OK ?
'
NO - Replace the fuse, and g o t o step 2.
I
I
+B
(WHT)
2. Connect the p u m p motor relay connector t e r m i n a l

No. 3 to No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e for a m o m e n t ,
and check the fuse.
II
I
J
MOTOR
(WHT/BLU)
J U M P E R WIRE
T e r m i n a l s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is the fuse
4
+B
(WHT)
I
[
[|
3
|
MOTOR
(WHT/BLU)
blown?
Y E S - C h e c k for a short to body ground in the MCK

circuit.
JUMPER WIRE
Is the fuse
blown?
Y E S Check for a short to body g r o u n d in the

motor power source circuit.
5. Check the p u m p motor relay in the under-hood

ABS relay box, refer to the ' 9 8 - 0 1 Accord Service
Is the relay
OK?
NO Replace the p u m p motor relay.
3. Check the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and
reinstall the fuse if it is OK.

No. 3 to No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e for a moment.
Does the pump motor
Is the fuse OK ?
NO
N O - R e p l a c e the fuse, and go to step 4.
operate?
Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the p u m p motor connector.

No. 3 to No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
19-14
9. Measure the voltage between the pump motor

PUMP MOTOR CONNECTOR
11. Disconnect the ABS control unit connector B (12P).

No. 1 to No. 4 with a jumper wire.
I MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
PMR (YEL/RED)
JUMPER
WIRE
(V)
+B
2lxTi
(WHT)
T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
Is there battery
voltage?
13. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit
connector terminal B12 and body ground.
NO Repair open in the wire between the underhood ABS relay box and the p u m p motor.
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (12P)
10. Measure the voltage between the pump motor

connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
I
1
. _r-j
PMR
,
M O T O R G N D (BLK)
(YEL/RED)
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
Is there battery
T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
Is there battery
voltage?
voltage?
NO Repair open in the wire between the underhood ABS relay box and the ABS control unit.
Y E S Replace the modulator unit.

NO - R e p a i r open in the wire between the p u m p
motor and body ground (G203).B
(cont'd)
19-15
ABS Components
14. Remove the j u m p e r w i r e f r o m the p u m p m o t o r
relay connector.
DTC 53: Motor Stuck O N

1. Check that the p u m p motor operates w i t h the
ignition switch OFF.

connector terminal B12 and body g r o u n d .
Does the pump motor
operate?
Y E S Replace the p u m p motor relay. (Pump motor

relay stuck O N . ) B
IMO-Go to step 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
I
I T "
1
y ,
PMR
2. Remove the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
(YEL/RED)
Is the fuse OK ?
Y E S Remove the fuse, and go to step 3.
NO -Replacethe fuse, and recheck.B

Is there battery
voltage?
YES Repair a short to power in the w i r e between

the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS control
unit.B
4. Measure the voltage between the passenger's

under-dash fuse/relay box 16P connector terminal
No. 5 and body ground.
P A S S E N G E R S UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y B O X 16P C O N N E C T O R
NO If the p r o b l e m recurs, replace the ABS control

unit.B
MCK (GRN)
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 1 2 / 14 15 /
(YJ
Is there approx.
10 V?
NO Repair open in the wire between the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
ABS control u n i t . B
5. Reinstall the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the
19-16
6. Disconnect the p u m p motor connector.

7. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and
body ground.
9. Remove the p u m p motor relay.

11. Check for continuity between terminal B12 and
body ground.
A B S CONTROL UNIT C O N N E C T O R B
(12P)
u r n
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
L1 t
u "
PMR
J
(YEL/RED)
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there approx.
10 V?
Is there
Y E S Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the under-hood ABS relay box and the
ABS control u n i t . H
8. Measure the voltage between the p u m p motor

connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2.
continuity?
NO If the problem recurs, replace the ABS control

unit.H
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there approx.
10 V?
NO Repair open in the wire between the p u m p
motor and body ground (G203).B
19-17
ABS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON(II), and watch the ABS
indicator.
Does the ABS indicator
9. Check for continuity between the gauge assembly

16P connector terminal No.10 and body ground.
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y 16P C O N N E C T O R
come on?
1 2 3
8 9 10 11
Y E S If the ABS indicator comes on and goes off,

it's OK. If the ABS indicator stays on, go to step 13.
4 5 6 7
12 / 14 15 16
WALP (BLU/WHT)
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF then ON (II) again.

Does the brake system
YES
indicator
come on?
Go to step 3.
NO Repair open in the brake system indicator

circuit.*
Blown BACK-UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse.
Open in the w i r e between the BACK-UP LIGHT
(7.5 A) fuse and the gauge assembly.
Open circuit inside the fuse box.
Is there
continuity?

between the gauge assembly and the ABS control
unit. B
NO
Go to step 10.

10. Connect the gauge assembly 16P connector.
come on?
Y E S Check for loose ABS control unit connectors.

If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS control
unit and recheck.
NO
G o t o step 6.
6. Check the ABS indicator bulb in the gauge

assembly.
Is the bulb
11. Connect the gauge assembly 22P connector

terminal No. 16 to body ground w i t h a jumper w i r e .
1 2
11 12
6 7 8 9 10
X/4 /5 16
X
XXX19 20 21 22
JUMPER
WIRE
G N D (BLK)
OK?
NO
Replace the ABS indicator bulb B

come on?

8. Disconnect the gauge assembly 16P connector.
Y E S - Repair open in the wire between the gauge

assembly and body ground (G50D.B
N O - R e p l a c e the printed circuit board in the gauge
assembly. B
19-18
13. Check the POWER MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse in the

under-dash driver's fuse/relay box, and reinstall the
fuse if it is OK.

connector terminal A11 and body ground.
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (22P)
Is the fuse OK ?
YES
IG2 (YEL/BLK)
G o t o step 14.
__n
NO
Replace the fuse, and recheck B
12
14. Connect the ABS control unit connector terminal

A1 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
4
14
t1 _
6 7 8 9 10 11
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (22P)
G N D 3 (BLK)
X
JUMPER
WIRE
-TL-
17
4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
I
Is there battery
voltage?
N O - Repair open in the wire between the POWER

MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse and the ABS control unit, fl

go
off?
Y E S - Repair open in the wire between the ABS

control unit and body ground (G204). B
NO - Go to step 16.
17. Connect the ABS control unit connector terminal B1

to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
JUMPER
WIRE
WALP (BLU/WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
go
off?
Y E S - Check for loose ABS control unit connectors.

If necessary, substitute a known-good ABS control
unit, and recheck.
NO- Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
19-19
ABS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18. Connect the gauge assembly 16P connector
terminal No. 10 to body g r o u n d w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
2.
1 2 3 "'>-<.' 4 5 6 7
14 15 16
8 9 10 11
12
X X
JUMPER
WIRE
WALP (BLU/WHT)
go
off?
YES Repair open in the w i r e between the gauge

assembly and the ABS control u n i t . H
NO Replace the printed circuit board in the gauge
assembly.
19-20
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation

NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel.
8
Removal
1. Disconnect the modulator unit connector (B) and the pump motor connector (A).
2. Disconnect the brake lines, then remove the modulator unit (C).
Installation
3. Install the modulator unit, then connect the brake lines. Tighten the flare nuts to 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 lbf-ft).
4. Connect the modulator unit connector and the pump motor connector.
5. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels.
6. Start the engine, and check that the A B S indicator goes off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the A B S indicator does not come on.
19-21
ABS Components
ABS Control Unit Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's side kick panel.
2. Disconnect the ABS control unit connectors.
3. Remove the ABS control unit.

4. Install the ABS control unit in the reverse order of
removal.
19-22
Brakes
#
ABS/TCS Components ( 1 Model)

System Description
Circuit Diagram
DTC Troubleshooting
TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
TCS Switch test
ABS/TCS Control Unit Replacement
Wheel Sensor Inspection
Wheel Sensor Replacement

The A B S has been changed to ABS/TCS; troubleshooting was added.
19-24
19-25
19-30
19-31
19-32
19-46
19-48
19-76
19-78
19-80
19-81
19-82
19-82
19-83
ABS/TCS Components
Component Location index
/UNDER-HOOD A B S RELAY BOX

'PUMP MOTOR RELAY
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 22-52 in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY
T e s t , p a g e 22-52 i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
TCS RELAY
T e s t , p a g e 22-31
RIGHT-REAR W H E E L S E N S O R
LEFT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

TCS SWITCH
T e s t , p a g e 19-81
M O D U L A T O R UNIT
Removal and Installation,
p a g e 19-80
D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (16P)
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

19-24
LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR


A B S / T C S Indicators
If the system is OK, the ABS indicator goes off once
after turning the ignition switch ON(II) w i t h o u t
starting the engine, and then comes on again and
goes off several seconds later after starting the
engine. This occurs because the ABS/TCS control unit
is turned on by the IG2 power source.
The TCS or ABS indicator comes on w h e n the ABS/
TCS control unit detects a problem in the system.
However, even though the system is operating
properly, the TCS or ABS indicator will come o n ,
under the following conditions:
For ABS or TCS Indicator:
- Only drive wheels rotate
- One drive wheel is stuck
- The vehicle goes into a spin.
- The ABS continues to operate for a long time.
- The vehicle is subjected to an electrical signal
disturbance.
For TCS Indicator:
- The TCS operated w h e n the front brake pad
temperature rises excessively.
- The TCS switch is OFF.
- One or more of these components are faulty:
Heated oxygen sensor, Manifold absolute pressure
sensor, Crankshaft position sensor, Engine coolant
temperature sensor, Throttle position sensor, Top
dead center sensor, Top dead center sensor 2,
Intake air temperature sensor, Exhaust gas
recirculation, Barometric pressure sensor, Idle air
control valve, VTEC pressure switch, Knock sensor,
Fuel supply system, Automatic transaxle, Misfire
detection system of the PGM-FI system.
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question
the customer about the problem, taking these
conditions into consideration:
The ABS is not operational w h e n the ABS indicator is

O N ; the TCS is not operational w h e n the TCS
indicator is ON.
When the ABS and TCS indicators are both O N ,
troubleshoot the ABS first.
When the TCS indicator and MIL are both ON,
troubleshoot the PGM-FI system first.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

The m e m o r y can hold any number of DTCs. However,
w h e n the same DTC is detected more than once, the
more recent DTC is written over the earlier one .
Therefore, w h e n the same problem is detected
repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC.
The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order,
not in the order they occur.
The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs
cannot be canceled by disconnecting the battery.
Perform the specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories:
- Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine
starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis/the
ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
Kickback
The pump motor operates w h e n the ABS is functioning,
and the fluid in the reservoir is forced out to the master
cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.
Pump Motor
When a problem is detected and the ABS or TCS
indicator comes on, there are cases w h e n the
indicator stays on until the ignition switch is turned
OFF, and cases w h e n the indicator goes off
automatically w h e n the system returns to normal. For
ABS DTCs 61 and 62, the indicator goes off
automatically when the system returns to normal. For
all other codes, the indicator stays on until the
ignition switch is turned OFF.
For ABS DTCs 12, 14, 16, 18, 2 1 , 22, 23, 24, 5 1 , 52 and
53, the ABS indicator goes off w h e n the vehicle is
driven again and the system is OK after the ignition
switch is turned f r o m OFF to ON (II). However, if the
DTC is cleared, the CPU resets and the indicator goes
off right after the engine is started if the system is OK.
The pump motor operates w h e n the ABS is

functioning.
The ABS/TCS control unit checks the p u m p motor
operation during initial diagnosis w h e n the vehicle is
started. You may hear the motor operate at this time,
but it is normal.
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding

Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures
are identical to the procedures used on vehicles not
equipped with ABS/TCS. To ease bleeding, start w i t h
the front wheels.
(cont'd)
19-25
ABS/TCS Components
How to Troubleshoot A B S and T C S DTCs
The troubleshooting flowchart procedures assume that
the cause of the problem is still present and the ABS
and/or TCS indicator is still on. Following the f l o w c h a r t
w h e n the ABS and/or TCS indicator does not come on
can result in incorrect diagnosis.
The connector illustrations show the female terminal
connectors w i t h a single outline and the male terminal
connectors w i t h a double outline.
1. Question the customer about the conditions w h e n
the problem occured, and try to reproduce the
same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out
w h e n the ABS and/or TCS indicator came on, such
as during ABS control, after ABS control, w h e n
vehicle speed was at a certain speed, etc.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and f o l l o w the

prompts on the Honda PGM Tester to display the
DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual
for specific instructions.
Shorting the Service Check Signal Circuit with the
Honda PGM Tester:
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda
PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector
(DLC) (B) behind the driver's side kick panel.
2. W h e n the ABS or TCS indicator does not come on

during the test drive, but troubleshooting is
performed based on the DTC, check for loose
connectors, poor contact of the terminals, etc.
before you start troubleshooting.
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs, and testdrive the vehicle. Make sure the ABS and TCS
indicators do not come on.
How to Retrieve A B S or T C S DTCs

Using the Honda PGM Tester:
2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the

Honda PGM Tester.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON i ' without pressing the
brake pedal.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is pressed when turning
the ignition switch ON (II), the system shifts to the
DTC clearing mode.
19-26
How to Clear ABS DTCs
4. The blinking frequency indicates the DTC.

NOTE: If the DTC is not memorized, the ABS or TCS
indicator will go off for 3.6 seconds, and then come
back on.
The system w i l l not indicate the DTC unless these
conditions are met:
The TCS switch is not pushed.
The brake pedal is not pressed.
The ignition switch is turned ON (II).
The engine is stopped.
The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before
the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Honda PGM Tester Method:

E x a m p l e of D T C 1 5
Short blinks
(five t i m e s )
L o n g blink
ON
1 n n n n r
OFF
'
U U U U U
E x a m p l e of D T C 2 2
L o n g blinks (two times)
Short blinks
(two t i m e s )
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the DTC

(s) by following the screen prompts on the Honda
PGM Tester.
OFF
*'

6. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester f r o m the DLC.
Service Check Signal Circuit Method:

2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the

Honda PGM Tester.
(cont'd)
19-27
ABS/TCS Components
General Troubleshooting information (cont'd)
3. Press the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) while keeping the
brake pedal pressed.
5. After the ABS indicator goes off, release the brake
pedal.
8. After a few seconds, the ABS indicator blinks twice

and the DTC is cleared. If the indicator does not
blink twice, repeat steps 1 through 7. If the indicator
stays on after the indicator blinks twice, check the
DTC because a problem was detected during initial
diagnosis before shifting to DTC clearing mode.
6. After the ABS indicator comes on, press the brake

pedal again.
7. After the ABS indicator goes off, release the brake
pedal again.
You cannot clear the DTC unless these conditions
are met:
The vehicle speed is 6 m p h (10 km/h) or less.
The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before
the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
The brake pedal is pressed before the ignition
switch is turned ON (II).
ON
ABS
indicator
OFF
d
DepressedBrake
pedal
R e l e a s e d --
I g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II)
a: 2 sec.
b: 4 s e c .
19-28
c : 0.3 s e c .
d: within 3 s e c .
10. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester f r o m the DLC.
I
r
H o w to Clear T C S DTCs
Honda PGM Tester M e t h o d :
(DLC) (B) behind the driver's kick panel.
ABS
Service Check Signal Circuit M e t h o d :

1. Press the parking brake pedal w i t h the SCS circuit
opened. Keep the pedal pressed during the entire
DTC clearing procedure.
2. Press and hold the TCS switch, then turn the
ignition switch ON (II) w i t h o u t starting the engine.
3. Continue to hold the TCS switch for four seconds,
then turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Within six seconds, turn the ignition switch back
ON (II) for at least 4 seconds, then release the TCS
switch, and watch the TCS indicator.
5. After a f e w seconds, the TCS indicator will come on
after blinking to indicate that the DTC is cleared. If
the indicator blinks repeatedly, repeat steps 1
through 4.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the DTC

(s) by f o l l o w i n g the screen prompts on the PGM
Tester.
S t a n d a r d Indication Pattern
ON
Continues O N
r-
T C S Indicator

OFF
I
I g n i t i o n S w i t c h O N (II)
A b n o r m a l Indication Pattern
blinks repeatedly
ON
T C S Indicator
OFF
a : 0.3 s e c .
I g n i t i o n S w i t c h O N (II)
19-29
ABS/TCS Components
ABS DTCs
DTC
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
41
42
43
44
51
52
53
54
61
62
71
81
Detection I t e m
Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
Right-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
Left-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
Right-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
Left-rear wheel sensor (open/short t o body ground/short to power)
Left-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
Right-front pulser
Left-front pulser
Right-rear pulser
Left-rear pulser
Right-front inlet solenoid
Right-front outlet solenoid
Left-front inlet solenoid
Left-front outlet solenoid
Right-rear inlet solenoid
Right-rear outlet solenoid
Left-rear inlet solenoid
Left-rear outlet solenoid
Right-front wheel lock
Left-front wheel lock
Right-rear wheel lock
Left-rear wheel lock
Motor lock
Motor stuck OFF
Motor stuck ON
ABS Fail-safe relay
Low ignition voltage
Central Processing Unit (CPU) diagnosis, and ROM/RAM diagnosis
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
aMote
page 19-48)
page 19-49)
page 19-48)
page 19-49)
page 19-48)
page 19-49)
page 19-48)
page 19-49)
page 19-50)
page 19-50)
page 19-50)
page 19-50)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-54)
page 19-54)
page 19-54)
page 19-54)
page 19-55)
page 19-55)
page 19-57)
page 19-59)
page 19-61)
page 19-61)
page 19-62)
page 19-62)
T C S DTCs
DTC
24
25
26
27
28
31
32
34
36
61
81
Detection Item
RF TCS NO solenoid
RF TCS NC solenoid
LF TCS NO solenoid
LF TCS NC solenoid
TCS relay
Engine retard c o m m a n d (PFINH) signal
Engine speed (NEP) signal
Reference voltage (VREF) signal
Throttle position sensor output (THLOUT) signal
A/T shift position (ATSFTP) signal
Continuous TCS operation
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
Note
page 19-63)
page 19-63)
page 19-63)
page 19-63)
page 19-66)
page 19-69)
page 19-71)
page 19-72)
page 19-73)
page 19-74)
page 19-75)
19-30

Symptom
ABS indicator does not come on
ABS indicator does not go off and no
DTC is stored
ABS indicator came on once, but it is
OK n o w
TCS indicator does not come on
TCS indicator does not go off and no
DTC is stored
TCS indicator came on once, but it is
OK n o w
ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-76)
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-76)
The vehicle is OK at this time (see page 19-25)
Also check for
ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page

19-78)
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-78)
The vehicle is OK at this time (see page 19-25)
19-31
ABS/TCS Components
System Description
A B S / T C S Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (26P)
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
n
2
1
GND1 N C L
n
3
NOL
15
NCR
16
NOR
X
4
ABS
8
FLW
6
SCS
18
TCS1
n
10
11
FRW FRW
(-)
(-)
21
20
RLW
MCK
(+)
22
{+)
24
RRW RRW
(+)
(-)
n
12
13
STOP IG2
25
FSR
26
DLC
Terminal sign
(Terminal name)
Terminal
number
W i r e color
BLK
YEL/GRN
GRY
BLU/WHT
ABS
BRN
SCS (Service check

signal)
BRN
GRN/BLU
10
GRN
11
GRN/BLK
12
WHT/BLK
FLW(-)
(Front-left w h e e l
neqative)
FLW( + )
(Front-left w h e e l
positive)
FRW(
)
(Front-right wheel
neqative)
FRWH-)
(Front-right wheel
positive)
STOP
13
YEL/BLK
GND1
( G r o u n d 1)
NCL
( N o r m a l l y c l o s e d left)
NOL
( N o r m a l l y o p e n left)
IG2
( I g n i t i o n 2)
Description
Terminal
Measurement
Conditions
(Ignition s w i t c h O N (II))
Ground
1-GND
D r i v e s left T C S n o r m a l l y
closed solenoid valve
D r i v e s left T C S n o r m a l l y
open solenoid valve
2-GND
Drives A B S indicator
(Turns the indicator drive
transistor to O N , then
t u r n s off the indicator)
Detects service check
c o n n e c t o r signal (Use f o r
DTC i n d i c a t i o n )
Detects left-front w h e e l
sensor signal
4-GND
ABS
indicator
6-GND
SCS C i r c u i t
Detects right-front w h e e l
sensor signal
B e l o w 0.3 V
TCS
Indicator
3-GND
8-9
Wheel
OFF
Battery
Voltage
B e l o w 0. 3 V
ON
(Disconnect
16P c o n n e c t o r
to turn
indicator on)
ON
OFF
4 - 6 V
B e l o w 1.0 V
Shorted
Opened
B e l o w 0.3 V
Approx. 5 V
T u r n w h e e l at
1 turn/second
10-11
AC:
0. 053 V o r
above
(Reference)
Oscilloscope:
0.15 V p - p o r
above
Stopped
0.25 V 1.15V
Battery
Voltage
B e l o w 0.3 V
Battery
Voltaqe
B e l o w 0.3 V
Detects brake switch

signal
12-GND
Brake p e d a l
Pressed
Power source for

activating the system
13-GND
Ignition switch
Released
O N (II)
S t a r t (III)
19-32
Voltage
Terminal sign
(Terminal name)
Description
LT B L U
NCR
(Normally closed riqht)
NOR
(Normally opened
right)
Drives right TCS n o r m a l l y

closed solenoid valve
Drives right TCS n o r m a l l y
open solenoid valve
18
RED/WHT
TCS1
20
GRN
MCK
( M o t o r check)
Drives TCS indicator

turns off the indicator)
Detects p u m p m o t o r
drive signal
Terminal
number
Wire color
15
RED/GRN
16
21
LT B L U
22
GRY
23
GRN/YEL
24
BLU/YEL
25
YEL/GRN
26
LT B L U
R L W (+)
(Rear-left w h e e l
positive)
RLW(-)
(Rear-left w h e e l
positive)
RRW( + )
(Rear-right w h e e l
positive)
RRW(-)
(Rear-right w h e e l
neqative)
FSR
(Fail-safe relay)
DLC
(Data link c o n n e c t o r )
Terminal
15-GND
16-GND
18-GND
TCS indicator
20-GND
Pump motor
Detects left-rear w h e e l
sensor signal
21-22
Detects r i g h t - r e a r w h e e l
sensor signal
23-24
D r i v e s A B S fail-safe relay
( A B S f a i l - s a f e relay is
t u r n e d OFF t o s h u t off t h e
power source to the
solenoid and p u m p
m o t o r relay w h e n a
p r o b l e m occurs.)
Communicates with the
Honda P G M Tester
Measurement
Conditions
(Ignition s w i t c h O N (II)}
OFF
TCS indicator
25-GND
ON
(Disconnect
to turn
indicator on)
With engine
running, and
i n d i c a t o r OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Remove MCK fuse
T u r n w h e e l at
Wheel
1 turn/second
ABS
(SCS c i r c u i t
m u s t be open)
Voltage
Battery
Voltaqe
B e l o w 0.3 V
Battery
Voltage
Approx. 2 V
Battery
Voltaqe
B e l o w 0.3 V
A p p r o x . 10 V
AC:
0. 053V o r
above
(Reference)
Oscilloscope:
0.15 V p - p o r
above
Stopped
0.25 V 1.15 V
Warning
Normal
B e l o w 0.3 V
A p p r o x . 11V
(cont'd)
19-33
ABS/TCS Components
A B S / T C S Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (16P)
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
1
FP
TDR
2
VREF
OUT
10
PF
INH
TCS
SW
11
NEP
AT
SFTP
14
15
16
13
T C S R P A R K PMR T C S 2
Wire s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Terminal sign
(Terminal name)
Terminal
number
Wire color
PNK
ORN/GRN
ORN/WHT
TCS S W
(TCS s w i t c h )
LTGRN
YEL/GRN
10
BLU
ATSFTP
(AT shift position)
THLOUT
(Throttle out)
PFINH
(Powertrain to frame
inhibition)
FPTDR
( F r a m e to p o w e r t r a i n
torque d o w n request)
VREF
(Voltage reference)
NEP
(Enqine speed pulse)
TCSR
(TCS relay)
Description
Terminal
Outputs e n g i n e retard
request signal
1-GND
Reference voltage f o r the

sensors of the PGM-FI
system
Detects T C S s w i t c h s i g n a l
2-GND
Detects A / T s h i f t p o s i t i o n
signal
Detects t h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n
sensor signal
Detects T C S o p e r a t i o n
permission signal
7-GND
Operating
4-GND
TCS
switch
10-GND
TCS switch
pressed
OFF (TCS i n d i c a t o r
is O N )
Shift the transmission to E ,
t h e n start t h e e n g i n e .
Throttle
Fully closed
valve
Fully o p e n e d
Permission (normal)
Detects e n g i n e s p e e d
signal
D r i v e s T C S r e l a y (TCS
relay is t u r n e d OFF t o
shut off the p o w e r source
to the TCS solenoid and
p u m p m o t o r relay w h e n a
problem occurs)
Detects p a r k i n g b r a k e
switch signal
11-GND
I n h i b i t i o n (the c o o l a n t
t e m p e r a t u r e is 0C or b e l o w )
Failure (TCS a n d / o r P C M has
failed)
Engine idling
9-GND
11
BLU
13
GRN/YEL
14
GRN/RED
PARK
(Parking)
15
YEL/RED
PMR
( P u m p m o t o r relay)
Drives p u m p m o t o r relay
15-GND
16
RED/WHT
TCS2
Drives TCS indicator

t u r n s off the indicator)
16-GND
19-34
Measurement
Conditions
TCS
Not operating
Voltage
A p p r o x . 2.5 V
(5V, d u t y 50)
A p p r o x . 5V
A p p r o x . 5V
Battery
Voltaqe
0 V
Approx. 4 V
A p p r o x . 0.5V
A p p r o x . 4.8V
A p p l o x . 2.5V
(5V, d u t y 50)
Approx. 5 V
Applox. 0 V
Approx. 6 V
13-GND
TCS (SCS
circuit
m u s t be
opened)
Warning
Normal
B e l o w 0.3 V
A p p r o x . 11 V
14-GND
With
engine
running,
parking
brake
ABS
indicator
Pulled
Released
B e l o w 0.3 V
Battery
Voltage
Tcs
OFF]
Pump
motor
ON
OFF
indicator
ON
ON
OFF
B e l o w 1.0 V
Battery
Voltage
B e l o w 0.3 V
Battery
Voltaqe
Approx. 2 V
A B S / T C S Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (12P)

A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (12P)
2
LG
8
7
RRGND3 IN
3
RROUT
9
FLIN
4
FLOUT
10
RLIN
6
5
RL~ FROUT OUT
11
12
FRIN GND2
Terminal
number
W i r e color
BRN/BLK
YEL/WHT
YEL/BLU
YEL/GRN
YEL/BLK
BLK
RED/WHT
RED/BLU
10
RED/GRN
11
RED/BLK
12
BLK
Terminal sign
(Terminal name)
LG
(Loqic q r o u n d )
RR-OUT
(Rear-riqht outlet)
FL-OUT
(Front-left outlet)
RL-OUT
(Rear-left o u t l e t )
FR-OUT
(Front-right outlet)
GND3
( G r o u n d 3)
RR-IN
( R e a r - r i g h t inlet)
FL-IN
( F r o n t - l e f t inlet)
RL-IN
(Rear-left inlet)
FR-IN
( F r o n t - r i g h t inlet)
GND2
( G r o u n d 2)
Description
Terminal
G r o u n d for logic circuit
2-GND
Drives right-rear outlet

solenoid valve
Drives left-front outlet
solenoid valve
D r i v e s left-rear o u t l e t
solenoid valve
Drives right-front outlet
solenoid valve
3-GND
Ground
7-GND
D r i v e s r i g h t - r e a r inlet
solenoid valve
Drives left-front inlet
solenoid valve
D r i v e s left-rear inlet
solenoid valve
Drives right-front inlet
solenoid valve
8-GND
Ground
Measurement
Conditions
Voltage
B e l o w 0.3 V
ABS indicator
OFF
Battery
Voltage
ON
(Disconnect
to turn
indicator on)
B e l o w 0.3 V
4-GND
5-GND
6-GND
B e l o w 0.3 V
ABS indicator
OFF
Battery
Voltage
ON
(Disconnect
to turn
indicator on)
B e l o w 0.3 V
9-GND
10-GND
11-GND
12-GND
B e l o w 0.3 V
(cont'd)
19-35
ABS/TCS Components
Outline
This system consists of the ABS/TCS control unit, the m o d u l a t o r unit, f o u r w h e e l sensors, and the PCM. The system integrates the A B S (Antil o c k Brake S y s t e m ) a n d t h e T C S ( T r a c t i o n C o n t r o l S y s t e m ) a n d c o n t r o l s b o t h s y s t e m s u s i n g t h e b r a k e s .
A B S control
Improves maneuverability a n d stability w h e n braking.
ABS/TCS
I m p r o v e s a c c e l e r a t i n g ability f r o m a standstill on slipperly road surfaces.
T C S control
I m p r o v e s t r a c t i o n w h e n o n e drive w h e e l is o n a slippery road surface.
NO: Normally Open

NC: Normally Closed
19-36
ABS Features
W h e n t h e b r a k e p e d a l is p r e s s e d w h i l e d r i v i n g , t h e w h e e l s can lock b e f o r e t h e v e h i c l e c o m e s t o a s t o p . In s u c h an e v e n t , t h e m a n e u v e r a b i l i t y o f
t h e v e h i c l e is r e d u c e d if t h e f r o n t w h e e l s are l o c k e d , a n d t h e s t a b i l i t y o f t h e v e h i c l e is r e d u c e d if t h e rear w h e e l s a r e l o c k e d , c r e a t i n g a n
e x t r e m e l y u n s t a b l e c o n d i t i o n . T h e A B S p r e c i s e l y c o n t r o l s t h e s l i p rate o f t h e w h e e l s t o e n s u r e m a x i m u m g r i p f o r c e f r o m t h e t i r e s , a n d it t h e r e b y
e n s u r e s m a n e u v e r a b i l i t y a n d s t a b i l i t y of t h e v e h i c l e .
T h e A B S c a l c u l a t e s t h e slip rate o f t h e w h e e l s b a s e d o n t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d a n d t h e w h e e l s p e e d , t h e n it c o n t r o l s t h e b r a k e f l u i d p r e s s u r e t o a t t a i n
t h e t a r g e t s l i p rate.
Grip F o r c e of Tire a n d R o a d S u r f a c e
COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
TARGET SLIP RATE
SLIP RATE
TCS Features
T h e T C S p r o v i d e s l o w s p e e d t r a c t i o n . W h e n a d r i v e w h e e l loses t r a c t i o n o n a s l i p p e r l y r o a d s u r f a c e a n d s t a r t s t o s p i n , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t
s e n d s a b r a k e s i g n a l t o t h e m o d u l a t o r u n i t , w h i c h a p p l i e s brake p r e s s u r e t o s l o w t h e s p i n n i n g w h e e l . A t t h a t t i m e , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t
s e n d s an e n g i n e r e t a r d s i g n a l t o t h e P C M t o p r e v e n t d a m a g e t o t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n .
(cont'd)
19-37
ABS/TCS Components
ABS Main Control
T h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s t h e w h e e l s p e e d b a s e d o n t h e w h e e l s e n s o r s i g n a l it r e c e i v e d , t h e n it c a l c u l a t e s t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d b a s e d o n
t h e d e t e c t e d w h e e l s p e e d . T h e c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d d u r i n g d e c e l e r a t i o n b a s e d o n t h e rate o f d e c e l e r a t i o n .
T h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t c a l c u l a t e s t h e s l i p r a t e o f e a c h w h e e l , a n d it t r a n s m i t s t h e c o n t r o l s i g n a l t o t h e m o d u l a t o r u n i t s o l e n o i d v a l v e w h e n
t h e s l i p r a t e is h i g h .
T h e pressure r e d u c t i o n c o n t r o l has 3 m o d e s : p r e s s u r e i n t e n s i f y i n g , p r e s s u r e r e t a i n i n g , a n d pressure r e d u c i n g .
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT
Detect
Vehicle S p e e d
RIGHT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR
Detect
|
Wheel Speed |
LEFT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR
Detect
Wheel Speed
\ \
J J
\
J
Detect
Slip Rate
3>
ABS
Control
Select L o w
Speed Wheel
RIGHT-FRONT
1
Detect
W H E E L S E N S O R f ~ f ^ Wheel Speed
LEFT-FRONT
WHEEL SENSOR
Reference
Slip Rate
Detect
Wheel Speed
Drive
.
Solenoid [
^
|
RIGHT-REAR
SOLENOID
Drive
Solenoid
LEFT-REAR
SOLENOID
RIGHT-FRONT
SOLENOID
RIGHT-FRONT
Detect
Slip Rate
ABS
Control
Drive
Solenoid
Detect
Slip Rate
ABS
Control
Drive
1
Solenoid
L
:
I LEFT-FRONT
SOLENOID
T C S Main Control
The ABS/TCS control unit controls t h e TCS based o n signal inputs f r o m the throttle position sensor, engine speed sensor, shift position sensor,
a n d t h e w h e e l s e n s o r s . In a d d i t i o n , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t s e n d s a n e n g i n e r e t a r d r e q u e s t s i g n a l t o t h e P C M if n e c e s s a r y . T h e A B S / T C S
c o n t r o l u n i t uses t h e m o d u l a t o r u n i t t o c o n t r o l t h e T C S . T h e pressure i n t e n s i f y i n g control has three m o d e s : pressure i n t e n s i f y i n g , pressure
retaining, and pressure reducing.
THROTTLE
ANGLE SENSOR
Calucufate
traction torque
Calculate control
condition signal
Engine speed signal Shift position signal ->*
slip rate
Calculate amount
of right-front
wheel control
Drive
solenoid
RIGHT-FRONT
SOLENOID
Calculate amount
of left-front
wheel control
Drive
solenoid
LEFT-FRONT
SOLENOID
Calculate control
target value
RIGHT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR
Detect
wheel speed
LEFT-REAR
WHEEL S E N S O R ~ ~ |
Detect
wheel speed
RIGHT-FRONT
WHEEL S E N S O R
Detect
wheel speed
LEFT-FRONT
WHEEL SENSOR
Detect
wheel speed
19-38
Calculate
vehicle speed
Calculate drive
wheel speed
avarage
Calculate
deviation
Calculate drive
wheel speed
difference
Calculate
deviation
ABS Self-Diagnosis
The A B S / T C S control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
9
Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories;

- Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine starts and until the A B S or T C S indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the A B S / T C S control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
ABS Self-diagnosis Table
Diagnostic Trouble
Detection Item
Code (DTC)
11, 13, 15, 17
Wheel sensor (open/short t o body g r o u n d / s h o r t t o power)
12, 14, 16, 18
Wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
21-24
Pulser
31-38
Solenoid (short t o b o d y g r o u n d / s h o r t to wire)
41-44
Wheel lock
51
M o t o r lock
52
Detection Timing
Initial
Regular
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Fail-safe Mode
AO
AO, LO
AO, LO
o
o
AO, LO
M o t o r stuck OFF
AO, LO
53
M o t o r stuck ON
AO, LO
54
Fail-safe relay
61
L o w ignition voltage
62
71
81
Central Processing Unit (CPU), R O M / R A M
S1
AO, LO
S1
BO
BO
S1
S1
ABS Operation Mode Table

A B S Indicator
T C S Indicator
Regular operation
Operation Mode
Operation in n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n
Description
OFF
OFF
Fail-safe mode-S1
The ABS/TCS control unit t u r n s the system off (ABS fail-safe relay off) w h e n the
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
control unit detects a p r o b l e m .

Fail-safe mode-AO
If the ABS/TCS control unit detects a m a l f u n c t i o n w h i l e the ABS or TCS is

operating, it w i l l t u r n off the m a l f u n c t i o n i n g c o m p o n e n t , and continue t o
m o d u l a t e the rest of t h e ABS system until c o m p l e t i n g the ABS or TCS operation.
At that t i m e , t h e entire system w i l l be t u r n e d off until the p r o b l e m goes away.
Fail-safe mode-LO
The ABS/TCS control unit stores a DTC in back-up m e m o r y w h e n it detects a

p r o b l e m . If a p r o b l e m is detected w h e n t h e ignition switch is t u r n e d ON (II), the
ABS/TCS control unit w i l l t u r n the system off. If the p r o b l e m goes away, the
ABS/TCS control unit w i l l t u r n the system o n again.
Fail-safe mode-BO
The ABS/TCS control unit w i l l t u r n the s y s t e m off if ignition voltage drops, and
w i l l t u r n it on again w h e n ignition voltage returns t o n o r m a l .
On-board Diagnosis Function

The A B S can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester.
The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda
PGM Tester. See the Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions.
(cont'd)
19-39
ABS/TCS Components
T C S Self-diagnosis
The ABS/TCS control unit is equipped w i t h a m a i n CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories:
- Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
Detection Item
Diagnostic Trouble
Detection Timing
Code(DTC)
Fail-safe Mode
Initial
Regular
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
TCS solonoid (short t o body ground/short t o wire)
(J)
S1
28
TCS
r>
31
E n g i n e r e t a r d c o m m a n d (PFINH) s i g n a l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y
A2
32
Engine speed(NEP)signal (open/short t o b o d y ground)
A2
34
Reference voltage(VREF) signal(open/short t o b o d y g r o u n d )
^%
A2
36
Throttle position sensor output(THLOUT)signal(open/short
24-27
relay
S1
ground)
to
A2
body ground)
61
A/T s h i f t p o s i t i o n ( A T S F T P ) s i g n a l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d )
81
Continuous TCS operation
A2
A2
TCS Operation Mode Table

Description
A B S Indicator
T C S Indicator
Regular operation
Operation Mode
Operation in normal condition
OFF
OFF
Fail-safe m o d e - S 1
T h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t t u r n s t h e s y s t e m o f f (fail-safe r e l a y o f f ) w h e n t h e
ON
ON
OFF
ON
control unit detects a problem.

Fail-safe m o d e - A 2
If t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s a m a l f u c t i o n w h i l e t h e T C S i s o p e r a t i n g , i t
w i l l t u r n o f f t h e m a l f u n c t i o n i n g c o m p o n e n t , a n d c o n t i n u e t o m o d u l a t e t h e rest o f
t h e T C S s y s t e m u n t i l c o m p l e t i n g t h e T C S o p e r a t i o n . A t that t i m e , t h e T C S
system will beturned off.
TCS
deactivate
mode
If t h e f r o n t b r a k e p a d t e m p e r a t u r e r i s e e x c e s s i v e l y , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t
OFF
s t o p s t h e T C S s y s t e m a n d it t u r n s t h e T C S i n d i c a t o r o n . W h e n t h e b r a k e p a d
temperature lowers, t h eABS/TCS control unit turns offthe T C S indicator a n d
t e m p e r a t u r e rises
restarts t h eT C S system.
TCS OFF m o d e
The ABS/TCS control unit cancels t h e T C S system under these conditions:
excessively.
O N o r OFF
If t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s a p r o b l e m w i t h t h e P G M - F I
(ON: W h e n t h e
c o m m u n i c a t i o n circuit.
A B S s y s t e m is
T h e A B S s y s t e m is faulty.
Comes ON when
the f r o n t b r a k e p a d
ON
faulty)
T h e T C S s y s t e m is OFF.
If t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s r e t u r n t o n o r m a l , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t r e s t a r t s t h e T C S
system.
On-board Diagnosis Function

The TCS can be diagnosed w i t h the Honda PGM Tester.
The ALB Checker cannot be used w i t h this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda
PGM Tester. See the Honda Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions.
19-40
ÂBSl
M o d u l a t o r Unit
T h e m o d u l a t o r unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, TCS n o r m a l l y o p e n (NO) solenoid valve, TCS n o r m a l l y closed
(NC) s o l e n o i d v a l v e , r e s e r v o i r , p u m p , p u m p m o t o r , a n d t h e d a m p i n g c h a m b e r .
T h e m o d u l a t o r c o n t r o l s t h e c a l i p e r f l u i d p r e s s u r e d i r e c t l y . It is a c i r c u l a t i n g - t y p e m o d u l a t o r b e c a u s e t h e brake f l u i d c i r c u l a t e s t h r o u g h t h e
caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder.
T h e h y d r a u l i c c o n t r o l has t h r e e m o d e s : p r e s s u r e i n t e n s i f y i n g , p r e s s u r e r e t a i n i n g , a n d p r e s s u r e r e d u c i n g .
T h e h y d r a u l i c c i r c u i t is an i n d e p e n d e n t f o u r c h a n n e l t y p e , o n e c h a n n e l f o r e a c h w h e e l .
ABS Control
Pressure intensifying mode
T C S N O v a l v e o p e n , T C S NC v a l v e c l o s e d , i n l e t v a l v e o p e n , o u t l e t v a l v e c l o s e d .
M a s t e r c y l i n d e r f l u i d is p u m p e d o u t t o t h e c a l i p e r .
Pump Motor
W h e n s t a r t i n g t h e p r e s s u r e r e d u c i n g m o d e , t h e p u m p m o t o r is O N . W h e n s t o p p i n g A B S o p e r a t i o n , t h e p u m p m o t o r is OFF.
T h e r e s e r v o i r f l u i d is p u m p e d o u t b y t h e p u m p , t h o u g h t h e d a m p i n g c h a m b e r , t o t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r .
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
\N
I"""" IN
W[
j 3
V\{
DAMP
CHAM
1PING
MBER
33
33'
St
IPCV]
Pressure retaining mode

TCS N O valve o p e n , TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed.
C a l i p e r f l u i d is r e t a i n e d b y t h e i n l e t v a l v e a n d o u t l e t v a l v e .
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
~|~
TCS
NO
a g
^ ^Tc's'N'c' *'''*""*""*'
TCSNC^^T^"^^
[jgA/-|EZCI>
w| 111' [a Y vfflTta *
DAMPING
CHAMBER WBB
gj 11 1 ' IvV
PUMP
J B
DAMPING | J
CHAMBER r * H u T ^ ^
I O U T
(~>
1
II ( ^ p u M P ^ y y j " 1 [I [X]
wj'
111 Ixi
(03
(cont'd)
19-41
ABS/TCS Components
Pressure reducing mode
T C S N O v a l v e o p e n , T C S NC v a l v e c l o s e d , i n l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , o u t l e t v a l v e o p e n .
Caliper fluid f l o w s t h r o u g h the outlet valve t o the reservoir.
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
}w
[T]/v
wC
a TTTW
<y
E C
OUT J !
UU I
DAMPING 9 H L
CHAMBER WUK
NO
IN
WHT
j 3
DAMPING
CHAMBER
MOTOR
'^PUMpWJ
1 1
I """""I " "

Tj
V
UU I
n 1
CO)
T C S Control
Pressure intensifying mode
T C S N O v a l v e c l o s e d , T C S NC v a l v e o p e n , i n l e t v a l v e o p e n , o u t l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , p u m p m o t o r O N .
T h e r e s e r v o i r a n d m a s t e r c y l i n d e r f l u i d is p u m p e d o u t b y t h e p u m p , t h r o u g h t h e d a m p i n g c h a m b e r , t o t h e f r o n t c a l i p e r .
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
J 3
I
IN
LZ
UMP
IMBM^M^H
flich
Ill
3a
I BB^ ^PUWIP
RESERVOIRL
CcO
19-42
Pressure retaining mode

T C S N O v a l v e o p e n , T C S NC v a l v e o p e n , i n l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , o u t l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , p u m p m o t o r O N .
F r o n t c a l i p e r f l u i d is r e t a i n e d b y t h e i n l e t v a l v e a n d o u t l e t v a l v e .
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
3
I
IN
y
m
^ J
DAMPINGpump
|HU
x^wQ
<
lAfM|DAMPII' G EC.,--*. ^ w r -
M n T n R
EZ] II |
(
=4= P U M P ^ ^ I ^ ^ ^
izj 111 JTIM
0 T * * T | CHAMBER H T l
WTTHi]
IVIUKJK
HMcHAMBER
)pUMP
1
^^)^^
ft"
'
" 1 [I
r
|X1
v\^TF!^
J RESERVOIR
Pressure reducing mode

T C S N O v a l v e c l o s e d , T C S NC v a l v e o p e n , f r o n t i n l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , f r o n t o u t l e t v a l v e o p e n , p u m p m o t o r O N .
Caliper f l u i d f l o w s t h r o u g h t h e o u t l e t valve t o the reservoir.
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
Ik /vc
}N
v\<| 111" in
MOTOR
EO
-QJ^PUMP^^
J*
(cont'd)
19-43
ABS/TCS Components
Wheel Sensor
T h e w h e e l s e n s o r s are the m a g n e t i c contactless type. A s the g e a r p u l s e r teeth rotate past the w h e e l s e n s o r ' s magnetic coil, A C current is
g e n e r a t e d . T h e A C f r e q u e n c y c h a n g e s in a c c o r d a n c e with the w h e e l s p e e d . T h e A B S / T C S control unit detects the w h e e l s e n s o r signal
f r e q u e n c y a n d thereby detects the w h e e l s p e e d .
GEAR PULSER
at HIGH SPEED
WHEEL SENSOR
at LOW SPEED
Wheel S p e e d and Modulator Control (ABS)

SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED
REFERENCE VEHICLE SPEED
WHEEL SPEED
PRESSURE
OUTLET
VALVE
ON
OFF
INLET
VALVE
ON
OFF
MOTOR
ON
OFF
W h e n the w h e e l speed d r o p s sharply b e l o w the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens m o m e n t a r i l y to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. T h e
p u m p m o t o r s t a r t s at t h i s t i m e . A s t h e w h e e l s p e e d is r e s t o r e d , t h e i n l e t v a l v e o p e n s m o m e n t a r i l y t o i n c r e a s e t h e c a l i p e r f l u i d p r e s s u r e .
19-44
W h e e l S p e e d a n d M o d u l a t o r control ( T C S )
DRIVE W H E E L S P E E D
SPEED
BRAKE
PRESSURE
OUTLET
VALVE
INLET
VALVE
TCS NC VALVE
TCS NO VALVE
MOTOR
W h e n t h e f r o n t w h e e l s p e e d rises s h a r p l y a b o v e t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d , t h e T C S NC v a l v e o p e n s , t h e TCS N O v a l v e c l o s e s , a n d t h e p u m p m o t o r
starts t o i n t e n s i f y t h e f r o n t c a l i p e r f l u i d p r e s s u r e . W h e n t h e w h e e l s p e e d d r o p s , t h e f r o n t inlet v a l v e c l o s e s m o m e n t a r i t y t o r a t a i n t h e f r o n t
caliper fluid pressure. W h e n the w h e e l speed drops further, the f r o n t outlet valve opens m o m e n t a r i t y t o reduce the f r o n t caliper fluid pressure.
19-45
ABS/TCS Components
Circuit Diagram
D E I V E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y BOX C O N N E C T O R S
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX C O N N E C T O R S
3
7
8|
iI
/113
C O N N E C T O R M (20P)
C O N N E C T O R A (18P)
A/
/|17
I2
1 2
C O N N E C T O R I (16P)
8|
I1
9 10 11 / | 1 3 1 4 | /
1 2
16|17 18
1
3 t=!
10 11(12
14 15
1 2
11 12
19 -46
///
>^
9 10
18 19 20 21 2 2
1 2
8
1 2 3 4 F=l
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
4
FAIL S A F E R E L A Y /
T C S R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
9 10 111X112
CRUISE CONTROL/
T C S SWITCH 8P C O N N E C T O R S
C O N N E C T O R C (16P)
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTORS

C O N N E C T O R J (18P)
BRAKE SWITCH
CONNECTOR
P A S S E N G E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y BOX C O N N E C T O R S
10 11 12 13 14|15 16 17 18 19 20
4|5|6|7
F=1._ 2
5(6 7
7
4
.rnzfai,
i II 1
4
MODULATOR UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
,.,171
1 ? |/1/I5|6|7l
14 15 16
A B S P U M P MOTOR
R|_AY 5P C O N N E C T O R
16 1/ M11|12|13|14|/|
/1l9l20|2ll22|/l/
+B
-o
8
04-WHT/GRN
13
O - BBRN/BLK
R N / B L K - i
-GRN/RED
12
(DAYTIME RUNNING
0--BLK |
l l
I /
[LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT| Q R N R E D

'
GRN/WHT
J
I
!
J
[
Canadi.
| USAj
AC\ PARKING
Uh J BRAKE SWITCH
^ j K Closed: Brake lever
pulled
~
BLU/WHT
WHEEL SENSOR
-GRN/BLU
BRN
- L T BLU GRY
-BLK
-BLK
-BLK'
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R S
WHEEL SENSOR CONNECTOR

n
15 16
9 10 11 12 13
10 11 L / | 1 3 14
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
18
PCM C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2
25 26 2 7
28 29 30 31
C O N N E C T O R C(12P)
16
FRONT/REAR
JlF=tfL
9 10 11 12
DATA LINK C O N N E C T O R (16P)

J S L
10
11
23
24
13
32
19-47
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting
A B S D T C 11,13,15.17: Wheel Sensor (Open/
S h o r t to Body G r o u n d / S h o r t to Power)
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate

wheel sensor ( + ) circuit terminal and body ground
(see table).
1. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A

(26P).
3. Measure the voltage between the appropriate
wheel sensor ( + ) circuit terminal and body g r o u n d
(see table).
11
13
15
17
DTC
(Right-front)
(Left-front)
(Right-rear)
(Left-rear)
Appropriate Terminal
A 1 1 : FRW (+)
A9: FLW (+)
A23: RRW (+)
A 2 1 : RLW (+)
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
11
13
15
17
A11 : FRW (+)
A9 : FLW (+)
A23 : RRW (+)
A 2 1 : RLW (+)
DTC
(Right-front)
(Left-front)
(Right-rear)
(Left-rear)
FLW (+)
(GRN/BLU)
n
it
FRW (+)
(GRN/BLK)
RLW (+)
(LT BLU)
RRW (+)
(GRN/YEL)
RLW (+)
(LT BLU)
<g)
6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4
/ 15 16 18 / 20 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4
6
8 9 10 11 12 13
15 16
18
20
2 2 23 24 25 26
FLW (+)
(GRN/BLU)
FRW (+)
(GRN/BLK)
(g>
RRW (+)
(GRN/YEL)
(g
Is there
continuity?
Is there 2 V or
more?
Y E S - R e p a i r short to power in the ( + ) circuit w i r e

between the ABS/TCS control unit and the
appropriate wheel sensor.
5. Disconnect the harness 2P connector f r o m the

appropriate wheel sensor, then check for continuity
between the ( + ) and ( - ) terminals of the harness
and body ground.
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the ( + ) or ( - )

circuit w i r e between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the wheel sensor.
NO Replace the wheel sensor. I
19-48
6. Check the resistance between the appropriate

wheel sensor ( + ) and ( ) circuit terminals (see
table).
DTC
( + )Side
(-)Side
A11 :FRW( + ) A10:FRW(~)
A9:FLW( + )
A8:FLW( - )
A23: RRW
A24; RRW
(+ )
<-)
A21 :RLW( + ) A22:RLW(~)
11 (Right-front)
13 (Left-front)
15 (Right-rear)
17 (Left-rear)
A B S DTC 12,14,16,18: Wheel Sensor

(Electrical Noise/Intermittent Interruption)
NOTE: If the ABS indicator comes on for the reasons
described below,the indicator goes off when you testdrive the vehicle at 19 m p h (30 km/h).
Only the drive wheel rotated
The vehicle spun
Electrical noise
1. Visually check f o r appropriate wheel sensor and
pulser installation (see table).
GRN/BLU
BRN \
-XL-
3 4
15 16
GRN/BLK
10 11 12 13
720 218 229 23
24 25 26
_JT_
-XL-
1 2
GRN
6
18
-~ir-
LT B L U /
GRY
BLU/YEL
GRN/YEL
Is the resistance
between
450-2,000
Q ?
Y E S - Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit

connectors.If necessary, substitute a known-good
ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. B
NO
DTC
12
14
16
18
Are they installed
Appropriate Wheel Sensor

Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
correctly?
NO Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel
sensor or pulser
(26P).
3. Measure the resistance between the appropriate
wheel sensor ( + ) and ( ) circuit terminals (see
table).
Go to step 7.
DTC
7. Disconnect the harness 2P connector f r o m the

appropriate wheel sensor, and check the resistance
between the ( + ) and ( ) terminals of the wheel
sensor.
14 (Left-front)
( ) Side
( + )Side
A10:FRW
A11 : FRW
( + )
(-)
A9 : FLW
A 8 : FLW
16 (Right-rear)
A23 : RRW
18 (Left-rear)
(+ )
A21 : RLW
12 (Right-front)
(+ )
Is the resistance
between
450-2,000
Q ?
Y E S Repair open in the ( + ) or ( ) circuit w i r e , or

short beween the ( + ) circuit wire and the ( )
circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the wheel sensor
NO - Replace the wheel sensor.
( + >
(-)
A 2 4 : RRW
(-)
A22 : RLW
(-)
Is there less than 450 Q ?

Y E S - Repair short to wire between the appropriate
wheel sensor ( + ) and ( ) circuits.
(cont'd)
19-49
ABS/TCS Components
wheel sensor < + ) circuit terminal and other w h e e l
sensor ( + ) circuit terminals (see table).
DTC
12
14
16
18
Is there
Appropriate
Terminal
A11 :
FRW
(+ )
A9 :
FLW( + )
Other Terminal
A9:
FLW( + )
A23:
RRW
(+)
A21 :
RLW( + )
A11 :
FRW
(+ )
A11 :
FRW
(+ )
A11 :
FRW( + )
A23:
RRW
(+ )
A23:
RRW
(+ )
A9 :
FLW( + )
A9: FLW
(+ )
A21 :
RLW
( :)
A21 :
RLW
( ;)
A21 ;
RLW
(+ )
A23:
RRW( + )
continuity?
Y E S - Repair short to w i r e between the appropriate

wheel sensor and the other wheel sensor.
A B S D T C 21,22,23,24:
1. Clear the DTC.
2. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.

21-24
indicated?
come on and are
DTCs
N O - T h e system is OK at this t i m e . B
3. Check the appropriate pulser gear for a chipped
tooth (see table).
DTC
21
22
23
24
Is the pulser
N O - C l e a r the DTC, and test-drive the vehicle. If

the ABS indicator comes on and the same DTC is
indicated, replace the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
Pulser
Appropriate Pulser
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
OK ?
Y E S - Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit

ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. B
NOReplace the driveshaft or the hub unit.
(Chipped pulser gear)B
19-50
ABS DTC 31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38:
5. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
Solenoid
6. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit
terminal and body ground (see table).
1. Verify the DTC.

Is DTC 54
indicated?
YES Perform the appropriate troubleshooting for

DTC 54.
3. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector and
the ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P).
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
^:
38:
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RUN
RL-OUT
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C(12P)
YEL/BLU
/YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
/YEL/BLK
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
RE
ED
D // W
WH
HT
T
R
RED/BLK
/
RED/BLU
continuity?
YES -Replace the modulator u n i t . H

/YEL/BLK
2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
//
/YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
RE
ED
D // W
WH
HT
T
R
'
m
(12P)
YEL/BLU
//
Is there
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R C
*
R
7. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.
RED/BLK
Q
RED/BLU
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the

appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the
ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator unit I
(cont'd)
19-51
ABS/TCS Components
8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P
connector solenoid circuit terminal to body g r o u n d
w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e (see table).
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
A p p r o p r i a t e Terminal
No. 11
No. 19
No. 14
No. 22
No. 13
No. 21
No. 12
No. 20
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
RED/GRN
RED/BLK

ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid
circuit terminal and body ground (see table).
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
YEL/BLU
RED/WHT
/RED/BLU
YEL/WHT
/YEL/GRN
/YEL/BLK
16
1 /
2 3 4 5 6
7 8i 9 10 11 12
ir-j
IXlii|i2li3|uX7l
19120|21|22|/1/
/ f \
Y E L / BB LL K
K
J/
RED/WHT
YEL/BLU
RED/BLK
RED/GRN
RED/BLU
YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
Is there
continuity?
IMO Repair open in the appropriate solenoid
circuit w i r e between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the modulator unit.
10. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the modulator unit
24P connector.
19-52
12. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector

terminal No. 2 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
NOTE: Wire colors of ABS fail-safe relay connector;
WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, BLK, YEL/GRN.
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
JUMPER
WIRE
13. Check the resistance between the appropriate ABS/

TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal and
body ground (see table).
IN: 8 - 1 0 Q (at20C, 68F)
OUT: 3 - 5 Q (at20C, 68F)
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT

ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal
and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit
terminals (see table).
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
T C S Solenoid
ABS/TCS Control Unit

Connector A (26P) Terminal
A16
A15
A3
A2
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (12P)

YEL/BLU
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
/YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
/
71
10 I 11 1 2 ]
i . n
/YEL/BLK
RED/BLK
RED/GRN
RED/BLU
RED/WHT

YEL/BLU
y YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
/1
/YEL/BLK
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)

YEL/GRN
10 11
GRY
5
6
3 4
15 16
18
1 2
RED/WHT
RED/WHT
//
*
R
RED/BLK
G
-fl
20121
10 11 12 13
22 23 _24
25 26
_j
RED/BLU
W i r e s i d e o f female t e r m i n a l s
RED/GRN
LT BLU
Is the resistance
OK ?
Is there
NO - Replace the modulator u n i t . H
Y E S - R e p a i r short in the appropriate wires

modulator u n i t . H
14. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector, and

remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the ABS fail-safe
relay 4P connector.
continuity?
(cont'd)
19-53
ABS/TCS Components
ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) t e r m i n a l
and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit
terminals (see table).
A B S DTC 41, 4 2 , 4 3 , 4 4 : Wheel Lock

1. Check for brake drag.
Do the brakes
drag?
Y E S - Repair the brake d r a g . B

31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT

Connector A (26P) Terminal
A16
A15
A3
A2
T C S Solenoid
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
2. Check the installation of the appropriate wheel
sensor (see table).
DTC
41
42
43
44
Is it
Appropriate Wheel Sensor

Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
correct?
Y E S T h e probable cause was the vehicle spun

during cornering. If the problem recurs, check the
modulator using the Honda PGM T e s t e r .
NO Reinstall the wheel sensor correctly.
YEL/BLU
/YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
/YEL/BLK
77
\ ,7 J jS.ll,,,J J
LR-
2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12
RED/WHT
W.
RED/BLK
RED/GRN
RED/BLU
YEL/GRN
GRY
J -
1 2 3 4 / 6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13
/ 15 16 / 18 / 20 21J22 23 24 25 26
-tr\
/ \
RED/GRN
ir
LT BLU
Is there less than 3 Q?

Y E S Replace the modulator u n i t . H
N O - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit
connectors. If necessary, substitute a k n o w n - g o o d
ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck.
19-54
ABS DTC 51: Motor Lock

1. Clear the DTC.
indicated?
come on and is DTC 51
ABS DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF

1. Check the ABS MOTOR (30 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if
it is OK.
Is the fuse
OK?
YES Replace the modulator u n i t . B
NO Replace the fuse, and go to step 2.
NOThe system is OK at this t i m e . B

2. Remove the p u m p motor relay, and connect the
pump motor relay 5P connector terminal No. 4 to
No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e for a m o m e n t , and check
the fuse.
P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R
MOTOR
(WHT/BLU)
+B
(WHT)
J U M P E R WIRE
Is the fuse
blown?
Y E S Check for a short to body ground in the

motor power source circuit.B
3. Check the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and
reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK ?
NO Replace the fuse, and go to step 4.
(cont'd)
19-55
ABS/TCS Components
4. Connect the p u m p motor relay 5P connector
terminal No. 4 to No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e for a
m o m e n t , and check the fuse.
9. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit

24P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
M O D U L A T O R U N I T 24P C O N N E C T O R
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P
CONNECTOR
111121131141/1
L/|19|20| 21 \22\/\/
16 117 (
IMA
MOTOR
(WHT/BLU)
+ B
(WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
Is there battery
voltage?
Is the fuse
blown?
Y E S -Check f o r a short t o body ground in the GRN

w i r e between the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box and the ABS/TCS control unit.

24P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 16.
MODULATOR UNIT 24P CONNECTOR
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
5. Check the p u m p motor relay in the under-hood
ABS relay box. Refter to the '98 01 Accord Service
Manual (P/N 61S8008) (see page 22-52).
Vlllll2J13lUl/r
7113120[21122|/1/
MOTOR GND (BLK)
Is the relay OK ?
Is there battery
voltage?
N O - R e p l a c e the p u m p motor relay.
terminal No. 4 to No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r wire for a
moment.
Does the pump motor
operate?
Y E S - Replace the modulator unit.H

NO Repair open in the wire between the pump
motor and body ground (G203).
11. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
B (16P).
terminal No. 1 to No. 5 with a j u m p e r wire.
P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R
JUMPER WIRE

terminal No. 4 to No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
+ B (WHT)
W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e terminals
19-56
^BS
13. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control

unit connector B (16P) terminal B15 and body
ground.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)

_Jfl_
-J-2;"S4_,
1 2
4
13 14 15 16
9 10 11
A B S D T C 53: Motor Stuck O N

1. Check that the p u m p motor operates w i t h the
ignition switch OFF.
Does the pump motor
operate?
Y E S Replace the p u m p motor relay. (Pump motor

relay stuck O N . ) B
PMR (YEL/RED)
2. Remove the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the

Is the fuse OK ?
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S Leave the fuse removed, and go to step 3.
YES Go to step 14.
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck. B
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the underhood ABS relay box and the ABS/TCS control unit.
14. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the pump motor

relay 5P connector, and reinstall the p u m p motor
relay.

4. Measure the voltage between the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box connector I (16P)
terminal 15 and body g r o u n d .
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR f (16P)

ground.
MCK (GRN)
1
1 2 3 F=J 4 5 6 7
14 15
8 9 10 11|12
i. i
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
it*.
1 2
4
13 14 15|16
9 10 11
PMR (YEL/RED)
Is there approx.
10 V?
Is there battery

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
voltage?
Y E S Repair short to power in the wire between

the under-hood ABS relay box and the ABS/TCS
control u n i t . B
5. Reinstall the ABS MTR CK (7.5 A) fuse in the

NO If the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS

control u n i t . B
(cont'd)
19-57
ABS/TCS Components
7. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and
body g r o u n d .
9. Remove the p u m p motor relay, then connect relay

terminals No. 4 and No. 5 together w i t h a jumper
wire.
Does the pump motor
5 |6 7
|/|11|12|13|14|/|
16 1 /
19 20 21 22
NO Replace the p u m p motor.
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
1 2
run?
/ /

B (16P).
11. Check for continuity between terminal B15 and
body ground.
__n_
Is there approx.
1 2
9 j 10
i
10 V?
/ /
13 14 15 16i
I
PMR (YEL/RED)
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the underhood ABS relay box and the p u m p motor.
24P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 16.
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
1 ?
16
1 /
/|5|6 7 8
|/|11|12|13|14L/|
19 20 21 22
//
Is there approx.
10 V?
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the p u m p
motor and body g r o u n d (G203).
19-58
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire

between the under-hood ABS relay box and the
ABS/TCS control unit.
N O - I f the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS
control u n i t . H
A B S D T C S4; A B S Fail-safe Relay

terminal No. 1 to No. 2 w i t h a jumper wire.
1. Check the ABS F/S (20 A) fuse in the under-hood

fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
Is the fuse OK ?
+B
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck
JUMPER WIRE
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)

Does the fuse
(WHT/GRN)
blow?

between the ABS fail-safe relay, the TCS relay, the
p u m p motor relay, and modulator u n i t . H
NO
7. Measure the voltage between terminal No.2 and

body g r o u n d .
G o t o step 3.
3. Check the ABS fail-safe relay in the under-hood

ABS relay box. Refer to the ' 9 8 - 0 1 Accord Service
Manual (P/N 61S8008) (see page 22-52). The wire
colors of the ABS fail-safe relay connector are
WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, BLK, and YEL/GRN.
SOLENOID (BRN/BLK)
Y E S Leave the ABS fail-safe relay removed, and

go to step 4.
Replace the ABS fail-safe relay
/VI
51 6 7 | 8 /
|/|11|12|13|14|/|
16 1 / / 1 9 20 21 2 2 / /
1 2
Is the relay OK ?
NO
4. Measure the voltage between the ABS fail-safe

relay 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Is there battery
voltage?
+ B (WHT/GRN)
NO Repair open in the wire between the ABS

fail-safe relay and the modulator unit.H
8. Remove the jumper wire f r o m the ABS fail-safe
relay connector.
Is there battery
voltage?
NO -Repair open in the wire between the underhood fuse/relay box and the ABS fail-safe relay. I
(cont'd)
19-59
ABS/TCS Components
24P connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
unit connector A (26P) terminal A25 and body
ground.
SOLENOID (BRN/BLK)
/|5|6 7|8|/
|/|11|12|13|14|/|
16 1 /
19 20 21 2 2 / /
1 ?
15
16
6
18
20
10
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
25
26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
Is there battery
voltage?
YESRepair short to power in the w i r e between

the ABS fail-safe relay, the TCS relay, the
modulator unit, and the under-hood ABS relay box.
Is there
continuity?

between the ABS/TCS control unit and the ABS
fail-safe r e l a y .
A (26P).
14. Check for continuity between the ABS fail-safe

relay 4 P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.

12. Measure the voltage between terminal A25 and
body ground.
GND
n
15
16
6
18
20
10
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
25
26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
Is there
Is there battery
voltage?

the ABS/TCS control unit and the ABS fail-safe
relay.
19-60
(BLK)
continuity?
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the ABS
fail-safe relay and body ground, or a loose or poor
connection at body ground (G202).H
A B S D T C 61, 62: Ignition Voltage
15. Connect the A B S fail-safe relay 4P connector

terminals No. 3 and No. 4 with a jumper wire.
1. Clearthe DTC.

mi
G N D (BLK)
come on?
FSR (YEL/GRN)
NO
JUMPER WIRE
The system is OK at this time. H
3. Verify the DTC.

Is DTC 61 or 62
indicated?
Y E S Check the charging system. H

16. Check for continuity between the A B S / T C S control
ground.
NO Perform the appropriate troubleshooting for

the c o d e . H
15
16
6
18
20
10
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
25
26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
Is there
continuity?
Y E S If the problem recurs, replace the A B S / T C S

control unit.H
NORepair open in the wire between the A B S / T C S
control unit and the A B S fail-safe relay.
19-61
ABS/TCS Components
A B S DTC 71: Different D i a m e t e r Tire
A B S D T C 81: Central P r o c e s s i n g Unit ( C P U )

Diagnosis, and R O M / R A M Diagnosis
1. Clear the DTC.

1. Clear the DTC.
2. Test-drive the vehicle.
indicated?

indicated?
YES Make sure all f o u r tires are the specified size

and are inflated t o proper specification.
Y E S - R e p l a c e the ABS/TCS control unit.
NO Intermittent failure; the vehicle is OK at this

time.B

time.H
19-62
7VBS
T C S DTC 24,25,26,27: T C S Solenoid

1. Verify the TCS DTC.
Is TCS DTC 28

ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) solenoid
circuit terminal and body g r o u n d (see table).
indicated?
Y E S Perform the appropriate troubleshooting for

DTC 28.
24:
25:
26:
27:

NOL (GRY)
NCL (YEL/GRN)
3. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector and

the ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P).
ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) TCS
solenoid circuit terminal and body ground (see
table).
24:
25:
26;
27:
A16
A15
A3
A2
T C S DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
A16
A15
A3
A2
T C S DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
6
1 2 3 4
8 9 10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
15 16
18
/
NCR
(RED/
GRN)
ID
NOR (LT BLU)
(H;
Is there
continuity?
Y E S Replace the modulator unit. B

N O L (GRY)
NCL (YEL/GRN)
10 11 12 13
21 22 23 24 25 26
16
NCR
(RED/
GRN)
X X
8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P

connector TCS solenoid circuit terminals to body
ground w i t h j u m p e r wires (see table).
N O R (LT BLU)
f l
24:
25:
26:
27:
No 5
No. 6
No. 8
No. 7
T C S DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL

MODULATOR UNIT 24P CONNECTOR
Is there
continuity?
Y E S Repair short to body ground in the

appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the
ABS/TCS control unit and the modulator unit. I
NCR (RED/GRN)
NCL (YEL/GRN)
NOL (GRY)
NOR (LT BLU)
1
1 / 1 / 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 /
16
1 /
M11|12|13114|7T
/1191201211221/17
JUMPER
WIRE

(cont'd)
19-63
ABS/TCS Components
9. Check for continuity between the appropriate A B S /
TCS control unit connector A (26P) solenoid circuit
24:
25:
26:
27:
A p p r o p r i a t e Terminal
A16
A15
A3
A2
TCS DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
12. Remove the TCS relay, and connect the TCS relay
4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
NOTE: Wire colors of TCS relay 4P connector; BLU,
RED/BLU, BRN/BLK, GRN/YEL.
TCS
SOLENOID
(RED/BLU)
NOL (GRY)
JUMPER
WIRE
NCL (YEL/GRN)
10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 2 4 25 26
16
NCR
(RED/
GRN)
(a) (p)
N O R (LT B L U )
(oxo)
Is there
continuity?
NO Repair open in the appropriate TCS solenoid
circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the modulator u n i t . H
10. Remove the j u m p e r wires f r o m the modulator unit
24P connector.
19-64
13. Check the resistance between the appropriate

ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal
and body ground (see table).
NOR, NOL, NCR, NCL: 8 - 1 0 0 (at 20C, 68F)
24:
25:
26:
27:
A16
A15
A3
A2
T C S DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL

ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal
and each of the other terminals listed (see table).
T C S DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
A16
A15
A3
A2
A B S Solenoid

Connector C (12P) Terminal
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
24:
25:
26:
27:
NOL (GRY)
NCL (YEL/GRN)
10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
15 16
NCR
(RED/
GRN)
N O R (LT B L U )
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT

YEL/GRN
GRY
Is there resistance
_n_
OK?
NO Replace the modulator unit.H
14. Disconnect the modulator unit connector, and
remove the jumper w i r e f r o m the TCS relay 4P
connector terminal.
_n_
_n_
_n_
6
8 9 10 11 12 13
3 4
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
15 16
18
RED/GRN
-ur
HUT
LT BLU

YEL/BLU
YEL/WHT
7
7
/YEL/GRN
/YEL/BLK
9 10 11 12
7/W
RED/WHT /
RED/BLU
\ RED/BLK
RED/GRN
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r short in the appropriate wires

modulator unit.H
(cont'd)
19-65
ABS/TCS Components
17. Check for continuity between the appropriate A B S /
T C S control unit connector A (26P) terminal and all
other A B S and T C S solenoid circuit terminals (see
table).
TCS DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
A16
A15
A3
A2
A B S Solenoid

Connector C (12P) Terminal
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
24:
25:
26:
27:
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
YEL/GRN
GRY
_n_
16
15 i
j-j
1. Check the BSC F/S (20 A) fuse in the under-hood

fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK ?
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck.
Does the fuse
blow?
Y E S Repair short to body ground in the w i r e

between the TCS relay and the modulator u n i t s
3. Check the TCS relay in the under-hood ABS relay
box (see page 22-31). The wire colors of the TCS
relay 4P connector are BLU, RED/BLU, BRN/BLK,
and GRN/YEL.
Is the relay OK ?
in
1 2
T C S D T C 28: T C S Relay
9 10 11 12 13
18
20 21 2 2 2 3 24 25 26
Y E S Leave the TCS relay removed, and go to

step 4.
N O - R e p l a c e the TCS relay
RED/GRN
LT B L U
4. Measure the voltage between the TCS relay 4P

T C S R E L A Y 4P
CONNECTOR
YEL/BLU
YEL/WHT
/YEL/GRN
UZ/'
7
/YEL/BLK
B (BLU)
.._n_i
4 5 6
9 10 11 12
RED/WHT
RED/BLU
RED/BLK
RED/GRN
Wire side of female t e r m i n a l s

Is there less than 3Q?

Y E S - Replace the modulator u n i t . B
Is there battery
N O - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit

19-66
voltage?
NO Repair open in the wire between the underhood fuse/relay box and the TCS relay.
5. Connect the TCS relay 4P connector terminal No. 1

to No. 2 with a jumper wire.

24P connector terminal No. 17 and body ground.
MODULATOR UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
/|5|6
|/111|12|13|14|/1
16 1 /
19 20 21 22
1 ?
+ B (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
//
T C S SOLENOID (RED/BLU)
TCS SOLENOID
(RED/BLU)
Is there battery
7. Measure the voltage between terminal No.17 and

body ground.

the TCS relay and the modulator u n i t . H
MXl5l6l7l8lXl
M1111211311417T"
19l20i2li22l/l/
TCS SOLENOID (RED/BLU)
voltage?
10. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector B
(16P).
11. Measure the voltage between terminal B13 and
body ground.
Is there battery
YES
voltage?
4
7
1 2
13 14 15 16
9 10 11
TCSR (GRN/YEL)
G o t o step 8.
NO Repair open in the wire between the TCS

relay and the modulator unit. H
Remove the jumper wire f r o m the TCS relay 4P
connector.
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S Repair short to power in the wire between

the ABS/TCS control unit and the TCS relay. H
(cont'd)
19-67
ABS/TCS Components
ground.
16. Measure the voltage between the TCS relay 4P

- T L .
-JUS
7 7
1 2
4
13 14 15 16
9 10 11
1
!J
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
TCSR (GRN/YEL)
Is there battery
Is there
voltage?
continuity?
YES Repair short to body ground in the w i r e

between the ABS/TCS control unit and the TCS
relay.
NO Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe

relay and the TCS relay.
17. Connect the TCS relay 4P connector No. 3 and
No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.

14. Remove the ABS fail-safe relay. The w i r e colors of
ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector are WHT/GRN,
BRN/BLK, BLK, YEL/GRN.
NOTE: Make sure the ABS/TCS control unit

connector B (16P) is disconnected.

terminal No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
A B S FAIL-SAFE R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
+B
(WHT/GRN)
TCSR
(GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
19-68
ABS

ground.
T C S DTC 31: E n g i n e Retard C o m m a n d

(PFINH) signal
NOTE: If the MIL or ABS indicator is O N , troubleshoot
the PGM-FI or ABS first.
4
1 2
9 10 11
13 14 15 16
TCSR (GRN/YEL)
1. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P) and the

ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P).
2. Check for continuity between the PCM connector A
(32P) terminal A13 and body g r o u n d .
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
10
23
32
11
24
PFINH (BLU)
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - I f the problem recurs, replace the ABS/TCS

control u n i t s
NORepair open in the w i r e between the TCS

relay and the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
Is there
continuity?
YES Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
N O G o to step 3.
3. Connect the PCM connector A (32P).
(cont'd)
19-69
ABS/TCS Components
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A
(32P) terminal A13 and body g r o u n d .
NOTE; Use the 10 V range or similar range in an
analog tester.
6. W i t h an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar

range, measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS
control unit connector B (16P) terminal B10 and
body g r o u n d .
8 9
5 6 7
1 2 3 4
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 29 30 31
25 26 27
PFINH
10
23
32
1 2
4
7 Y
9 10 11
13 14 15 16
11
24
i | r-
PFINH (BLU)
(BLU)

5V
5V
Approx. 2.5VApprox. 2.5VOV
OV
'

NO - Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
19-70
Y E S - C h e c k for loose ABS/TCS control unit

the ABS/TCS control unit.H
T C S D T C 32; E n g i n e s p e e d (NEP) Signal

NOTE; If the MIL or A B S indicator is ON, troubleshoot
the PGM-FI or A B S first.
5. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar

range, measure the voltage between the PCM
connector A (32P) terminal A19 and body ground.
1. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P) and A B S /

TCS control unit connector B (16P).
(32P) terminal A19 and body ground.
1 2 3 4
8 9
5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 2 9 30 31
25 26 27
10
23
32
11
24
NEP(BLU)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
32
25 26 27
28 2 9 30 31
11
24
NEP(BLU)

12V
Is there
continuity?
Approx. 6V

between the PCM and the A B S / T C S control unit.
OV
NO Go to step 3.
4. Start the engine, warm it up to normal operating
temperature, and let it idle.
NO Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,
substitute a known-good PCM, and r e c h e c k .
(cont'd)
19-71
ABS/TCS Components
6. With the engine still idling, measure the voltage
between the ABS/TCS control unit connector
B (16P) terminal B11 and body ground w i t h the
analog voltmeter again.
4
7 7
1 2
13 14 15 16
9 10 11
i . j
T C S D T C 34: Reference Voltage (VREF) Signal

NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is ON,
troubleshoot the PGM-FI or the ABS the first.
A (32P) terminal A7 and body ground.
NEP (BLU)
VREF (ORN/GRN)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
32
11
24
(8)
12V
Approx.
6V-
OV
Is there
continuity?

between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit.H
YES The system is OK at this time. If the problem
recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control u n i t . H
N O - Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM and
the ABS/TCS control u n i t . H
19-72
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector

TCS DTC 36: Throttle Position S e n s o r Output

( T H L O U T ) Signal
NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is O N ,
troubleshoot the PGM-FI or the ABS first.
VREF (ORN/GRN)
5 6 7
1 2 3 4
8 9
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 29 30 31
25 26 27
10
23
32
11
24

ABS/TCS control unit connector B(16P).
(32P) terminal A31 and body g o u n d .
8 9 10
5 6 7
1 2 3 4
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
32
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
11
24
THLOUT (YEL/GRN)
NOCheck for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,

unit connector B(16P) terminal B2 and body ground.
Is there
continuity?
YES Repair short to body ground in the w i r e

between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit.
VREF (ORN/GRN)
4
1 2
9 10 11
13 14 15 16
YES The system is OK at this time. If the problem
recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control unit.
the ABS/TCS control unit H
(cont'd)
19-73
ABS/TCS Components
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A
(32P) terminal A31 and body ground w i t h the
throttle fully opened and fully closed. There should
be a s m o o t h transition f r o m approx. 0.5 V and 4.5 V.
T C S D T C 61: A / T Shift Position ( A T S F T P )

Signal
NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is O N ,
10
23
32
8 9
5 6 7
1 2 3 4
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 29 30 31
25 26 27
11
24

THLOUT (YEL/GRN)
ATSFTP
(LT G R N )
Is the voltage as
YES
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
11
24
specified?
G o t o step 6.
NO - Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,

ground w i t h the throttle fully closed.
4
1 2
7
13 14 i 15
16
9 10 11
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
NO
G o t o step 3.
THLOUT (YEL/GRN)
4. Shift the transmission to SB position.


Y E S The system is OK at this time. If the problem
recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
NO - Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the ABS/TCS control u n i t . B
19-74
10
23
32
6. W i t h an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar

range, measure the voltage between the PCM
connector A (32P) terminal A 1 1 and body ground.
PCM
T C S DTC 81: C o n t i n u o u s T C S Operation

NOTE: If the MIL or the ABS indicator is ON,
1 2 3 4
8 9
5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
10
23
32
1. Clear the DTC.
11
24
ATS FTP (YEL/GRN)
Does the TCS indicator

indicated?
come on, and is DTC 81
5V
Y E S - R e p l a c e the ABS/TCS control u n i t . H
Approx. 4V -

time.H
OV
NO Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. H
7. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar
range, measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS
control unit connector B (16P) terminal B7 and body
ground.
4
1 2
13 14 15 16
9 10 11
ATSFTP
(LT G R N )

5V
Approx. 4V -
OV
Y E S Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
the ABS/TCS control unit.H
19-75
ABS/TCS Components
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS
indicator.
Does the ABS indicator come on?
9. Check for continuity between the gauge assembly

connector C (16P) terminal C10 and body ground.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR C (16P)
YES If the ABS indicator comes on and goes off,

it's OK. If the ABS indicator stays o n , turn the
ignition switch OFF, and go to step 13.
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 111X112
14 15 16
ABS (BLU/WHT)
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF then ON (II) again.
Does the brake system indicator come on?
NO Repair open in the indicator power source
circuit.
Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse.
Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT
Is there
continuity?

between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS
control u n i t . B
N O G o to step 10.

10. Connect the gauge assembly connector C (16P).
4 . Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
A (26P).
11. Connect the gauge assembly connector B (22P)

terminal B16 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.

N O G o to step 6.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (22P)
1 2
11 12
6 7 8 9 10
/ 4 5
/ / / 16|XI/ 18 19 20 21 22
GND (BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
6. Check the ABS indicator bulb in the gauge

assembly.
Is the bulb OK?

NO Replace the ABS indicator b u l b . B

Y E S Repair open in the wire between the gauge
assembly and body ground (G501). fl
8. Disconnect the gauge assembly connector C (16P).

NO Replace the gauge assembly.
19-76
13. Check the R/C MIRROR (7,5 A) fuse in the driver's

under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if
it is OK.
Is the fuse
17. Connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector

A (26P) terminal A 4 to body ground with a j u m p e r
wire.
OK?
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
J U M P E R WIRE
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck.
1
A (26P) terminal A1 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r
wire.
ABS (BLU/WHT)
15 16
6
18
9 10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 24 25 26

JUMPER
WIRE
~] GND1 (BLK)
10
20
16
12 13
22 23 24 25 26
go
off?

NO
Go to step 18.

go
18. Connect the gauge assembly connector C (16P)

terminal C10 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
off?
Y E S Repair open in the w i r e between the ABS/

TCS control unit and body ground (G403)
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C O N N E C T O R C (16P)
1 2 3
8 9 10 11

ground.
12
4 5 6 7
14 15 16
ABS (BLU/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
IG2 (YEL/BLK)
n
1
n
3
15 16
18
n
rt
9 10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
~uL
go
off?
Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the gauge

assembly and the ABS/TCS control unit.
NO Replace the gauge assembly.
Is there battery
voltage?
NO Repair open in the wire between the R/C
MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse and the ABS/TCS control
unit.H
19-77
ABS/TCS Components
TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and watch the TCS indicator.
come on?
Y E S - I f the TCS indicator comes on and goes off, It's

OK. If the TCS indicator stays on, go to step 7.
5. Remove the j u m p e r wire at the gauge assembly,

and connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
B (16P) terminal B16 and body ground w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
1 2 / 4
X
9 10 11
13 14 15 16
2. Turn the engine OFF, then restart it again.
Does the brake system
indicator
ii
TCS2
(RED/WHT)
come on?
JUMPER WIRE
N O - R e p a i r open in the indicator power source
circuit.
Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse.
Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT
come on?
3. Turn the engine OFF, and check the TCS indicator
bulb in the gauge assembly.
Is the bulb
N O - R e p a i r open in the wire between the gauge

assembly and the ABS/TCS control unit.H
OK?
C (12P) terminal C2 and body ground w i t h a jumper
wire.
N O - R e p l a c e the TCS indicator bulb.
4. Connect the gauge assembly connector B (22P)

terminal B18 and body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C O N N E C T O R B (22P)
1 2
11 12 /
4 5
/ /
16 X i X
LG (BRN/BLK)
JUMPER
WIRE
/
7
10 11 12
6 7 8 9 10
18 19 20 21 22
T C S (RED/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE

come on?
N O - R e p l a c e the gauge assembly.
19-78
come on?
Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the ABS/

TCS control unit and body ground (G10D.B
N O - C h e c k f o r loose ABS/TCS control unit
7, Check the R/C MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's

under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if
it is OK.

(26P) and connector B (16P).
Is the fuse OK ?
11. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).
go
off?
N O - R e p l a c e the fuse, and recheck.

ground.

NO Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS
control u n i t . B
IG2 ( Y E L / B L K )
n
"X
15 16
6
18
9 10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Is there battery
voltage?
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and ABS/TCS control
unit.B
19-79
ABS/TCS Components
NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately w i t h water.
Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
To prevent the brake fluid f r o m f l o w i n g , plug and cover the hose ends and joints w i t h a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
1. Push the modulator unit connector lock (C), and t u r n the connector lever (D).
2. Disconnect the modulator unit connector (B).
3. Disconnect the brake pipes, then remove the m o d u l a t o r unit (A).
Installation
1. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal.
2. Bleed the brake system, starting w i t h the front wheels.
3. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator and the TCS indicator go off.
4. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator and the TCS indicator do not come on.
19-80
A B S
TCS Switch Test

1. Remove the cruise control/TCS switch (A) from the
switch panel.
2. Check for continuity between terminal No. 5 and

No. 6. There should be continuity when the T C S
switch is pushed.
CRUISE CONTROL/TCS SWITCHCONNECTOR
1
4
u
IG2
(BLK/YEL)
2
5
TCS SW
(ORN/WHT)
19-81
ABS/TCS Components
ABS/TCS Control Unit Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's side kick panel.
Wheel Sensor Inspection

1. Inspect the front and rear pulsers for chipped or
damaged teeth.
2. Remove the ABS/TCS control unit (A).

2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and
pulser all the w a y around while rotating the pulser.
Remove the rear brake disc to measure the gap on
the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds 1.0 m m
(0.04 in), check for a bent suspension arm.
Standard:
Front: 0 . 4 - 1.05 m m (0.02 - 0.04 in)
Rear:
0.19 1.14 m m (0.01 0.05 in)
Front
3. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connectors <B).

4. install the ABS/TCS control unit in the reverse order
of removal.
Rear
19-82
Wheel Sensor Replacement

Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting wires.
Front
Rear
19-83
S U P P L E M E N T A L R E S T R A I N T S Y S T E M ( S R S ) (If b o d y m a i n t e n a n c e is required)
located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-01 models) located in the front seat-backs,
collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
SRS electrical w i r i n g harnesses are indicated w i t h yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering c o l u m n , front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the
circuits.
Body
Seats
Front Seat Removal and Installation
-4-way Power-Sedan
20-2
Front S e a t D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y
-4-way Power-Sedan
20-3
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly

-4-way Power-Sedan
20-4
Front Seat Wire Harness Installation

-4-way Power-Sedan
20-5
Bumper
Rear Bumper Spoiler Replacement
20-6
Hood
Replacement
20-7
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement-Coupe
20-8
Emblem Replacement-Sedan
20-8
Frame
Sub-frame Replacement
20-9
F r a m e Repair Chart
20-12
NOTE: Refer to the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual

(P/N 61S8008) for the items not shown in this section.

1998 model:
The Accord sedan and coupe V6 model has been added.
-
The V6 emblem has been added.
The hood replacement procedure is different.
The sub-frames are different.
The frame repair chart is different.
2001 model:
The following item has been added on Sedan or Coupe V6 model.
-
The passenger's 4 w a y power seat (sedan)
-~ The rear bumper spoiler (coupe)
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation - 4-1 ay Power - Sedan
'01 model;
SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations and precautions and
procedures in the SRS section before performing
repairs or service. Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Service
Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-28).
4. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect and detach

the seat harness connector (A) and harness clip (B).
A
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery, and
wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
3. Remove the seat track end covers (A), and remove
the bolts securing the front seat (B). W h e n prying
w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver, w r a p it w i t h protective
tape to prevent damage. Take care not to scratch
the body or tear the seat covers.
Fastener Locations
To body. To body.
: Bolt, 4
> : Clip, 1
5. W i t h the help of an assistant, carefully remove the

front seat through the front door opening.
6. Install the front seat in the reverse order of removal,
and note these item:
Replace the damaged track and cover clip.
Make sure the seat harness connector is plugged
in properly.
Enter the anti-there code for the radio, then enter
20-2
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly - 4-Way Power - Sedan

'01 model:
SRS components are located in this area. Review the S R S component locations, and precautions and procedures in
the SRS section before performing repairs or service. Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page
23-28).
Disassembly the front sent as shown.
Reassemble the seat in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Route the seat wire harness correctly (see page 20-5).
Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly.
Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track.
To prevent wrinkles in the seat-back cover, stretch the material evenly over the pad.
If the seat-back pad or the OPDS unit is replaced, reinitialize the OPDS unit. Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Service Manual,
P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-322).
HEADREST
BACK PANEL
SEAT-BACK
HOOKS
PIVOT WASHER
PIVOT N U T
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
W I R E TIE
SEAT CUSHION
FRONTCOVER
CENTER COVER
10 x 1.25 m m
47 N m
(4.8 k g f m , 35 I b f f t )
RECLINE COVER
SEAT LINKAGE
10 x 1.25 m m
47 N m (4.8 k g f m , 35 I b f f t )
CAPS
SWITCH KNOBS
20-3
Seats
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - 4-Way Power - Sedan
'01 m o d e l :
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect y o u r hands.
To remove the slide motor and slide gearbox, slide the f r o n t seat backward fully.
Disassemble the linkage as s h o w n .
Reassemble the linkage in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Before installing the slide motor and slide gearbox, align portion (A) as s h o w n to align both slide gearbox positions.
Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot portions of the linkage.
Check operation of the recline and slide adjusters.
3.7 N - m (0.38 k g f m , 2.7 I b f f t )
20-4
LEFT SLIDE GEARBOX
Front Seat Wire Harness Installation - 4-Way Power - Sedan

'01 model:
When assembling the front seat, make sure the seat
belt switch harness (A), seat harness (B), seat heater
harnesses (C), side airbag harness (D), OPDS unit
harness (E), connectors (F), clips (G) and wire tie (H) are
fastened correctly.
20-5
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Spoiler Replacement - Coupe
'01 m o d e l :
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.
Remove the rear bumper spoiler as shown.
Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
Fastener Locations
20-6
: Bolt, 2
[> : Clip, 2
Hood
Replacement
1. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (A) from
the windshield washer nozzles (B), and release the
windshield washer tube f r o m the clips (C).
C
4. Install the hood in the reverse order of removal,

and note these items:
Before reattaching the support struts, adjust the
hood alignment.
Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
Make sure the windshield washer tubes are
connected properly.
W h e n reattaching the support struts, set the clips
(A) t o the original position, then attach the
support struts (B) on the pivot bolts (C) by
pushing the support strut.
\
2. With a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the clips (A) out of

the support struts (B) on each hood side, then
release both support struts f r o m the pivot bolts (C)
with the help of an assistant. Do not remove the
clips f r o m the support struts. If necessary, release
the support strut f r o m the pivot bolt on the body,
then remove the support strut.
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 4
fntaED
^
6 x 1.0 m m
|
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , |
7.2 I b f f t )
I
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
3. With the help of an assistant, remove the bolts,

then remove the hood (D). Take care not to damage
the hood and body.
20-7
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement - Coupe
Emblem Replacement - Sedan
Apply the e m b l e m where s h o w n .
A p p l y the e m b l e m where s h o w n .
NOTE:
NOTE:
Before applying, clean the rear bumper surface w i t h a

sponge dampened in alcohol.
After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water f r o m
getting on the surface.
Before applying, clean the rear bumper surface w i t h a

sponge dampened in alcohol.
After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water f r o m
getting on the surface.
Attachment Point (Reference):
Attachment Point (Reference):

V6 EMBLEM
V6 EMBLEM
ACCORD EMBLEM
T R U N K LID
Unit: m m
(in.!
ACCORD
EMBLEM
U n i t : m m (in.)
Edge of the
rear b u m p e r .
/ (
o
7
.9
N
t?
10 (0.39)
13(0.51)
V6 EMBLEM
Edge of the
trunk lid.
20-8
Edge of the
rear b u m p e r .
Frame
Sob-frame Replacement
After loosening the sub-frame mounting bolts, be sure to replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
REAR B E A M
(cont'd)
20-9
Frame
Sub-frame Replacement (cont'd)
After loosening the sub-frame mounting bolts, be sure to replace t h e m with new ones.
SUB-FRAME
20-10
20-11
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top V i e w
U n i t ; m m (in.)
0: Inner d i a m e t e r
POINT h
POINT g
POINT e
POINT I
<
UJ
>
20-12
POINT rt
POINT w
2145 (84.45)
2236 (88.03)
2365 (93.11)
2750 (108.3)
2899 (114.1)
297TTlT7)
2998 (118.0)
3008 (118.4)
3200 (126.0)
3622 (142.6)
(cont'd)
20-13
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side V i e w
0 1 1 . 5 (0.45)
SECTION B B
20-14
SECTION A A
SECTION DD
S U P P L E M E N T A L R E S T R A I N T S Y S T E M ( S R S ) (If H V A C m a i n t e n a n c e is required)
The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS Includes a driver's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag
collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
circuits.
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)

Climate Control
Air Conditioning
Special T o o l s
C o m p o n e n t Location
Index
A / C Refrigerant Oil
Replacement
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
Index
Circuit Diagram ....................
C o n d e n s e r Fan Circuit
Troubleshooting ...............
Radiator and C o n d e n s e r F a n s
C o m m o n Circuit
Troubleshooting
Heater Valve Cable
Adjustment
Compressor Replacement
('98-00 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Check
('98-00 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Overhaul
('98-00 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Relief Valve
Replacement
('98-00 model)
Compressor Replacement
('01 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Check
('01 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Overhaul
('01 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Relief Valve
Replacement
('01 model) ........................
C o n d e n s e r R e p l a c e m e n t .....
21-2
21-3
21-6
21-7
21-8
21-10
21-12
21-13
21-14
21-16
21-17
21-18
21-19
21-21
21-22
21-23
21-24
Component Location
Index
General Troubleshooting
Information
DTC Troubleshooting
Index
Symptom Troubleshooting
Index
System Description
Circuit Diagram
DTC Troubleshooting
ECT Sensor Circuit
Troubleshooting
Climate Control Power and
Ground Circuits
Troubleshooting
Recirculation Control Motor
Circuit Troubleshooting ...
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting
In-car Temperature Sensor
Replacement and Test
Outside Air Temperature
Sensor Replacement
21- 26
21- 28
21- 29
21--30
21--31
21--32
21--34
21--50
21 -51
21 -52
21 -53
21 -55
21 -56
Sunlight Sensor Replacement
21 -57
and Test
21 -58
Power Transistor Test
Climate Control Unit Remova I
21 -58
and Installation
Climate Control Unit
Disassembly and
21 -59
Reassembly
Refer to the 1998-2001 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) for items not shown in this section.

The air conditioning and climate control has been changed to suit the Accord V6.
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)

Special Tools
Ref.No.
Tool N u m b e r
07SAZ-001000A
Description
Backprobe Set
I
21-2
Qty
2
in
Air Conditioning
\
I
/
/
/
EVAPORATOR
R e m o v a l a n d Installation, page 21-46
EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS
CONDENSER
Replacement, page 21-24
RECEIVER/DRYER
COMPRESSOR
('98-00 m o d e l s )
Clutch Check, page 21-16
C l u t c h O v e r h a u l , p a g e 21-17
Relief Valve R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-18
COMPRESSOR
('01 m o d e l )
Clutch Check, page 21-21
Clutch O v e r h a u l , p a g e 21-22
Relief Valve R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-23
(cont'd)
21-3
Air Conditioning
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY,

RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
CONDENSER FAN RELAY,
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
( L o c a t e d in t h e u n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y b o x )
T e s t , page 22-52
21-4
f HEATER VALVE CABLE

Adjustment, page 21-13
HEATER UNIT/CORE
EVAPORATOR
moval and Installation, page 21-46
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service Manual
i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-22
BLOWER UNIT
R e m o v a l a n d Installation,
page 21-26
i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
BLOWER UNIT C O M P O N E N T S
BLOWER RESISTOR
D U S T AND POLLEN FILTER

MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-21
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-23
HEATER CONTROL PANEL

Removal a n d Installation, page 21-24
Disassembly and Reassembly, page 21-24
HEATER FAN SWITCH
Test, page 21-23
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R
Test, page 21-20
21
Air Conditioning
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement
CO
(D
(D
(7)
(D
(D
(3D
21-6
D i s c h a r g e h o s e t o t h e c o m p r e s s o r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9 . 8 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )

D i s c h a r g e h o s e t o t h e c o n d e n s e r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9 . 8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
C o n d e n s e r l i n e t o t h e c o n d e n s e r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9 . 8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
C o n d e n s e r l i n e t o t h e r e c e i v e r / d r y e r : 9 . 8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
R e c e i v e r l i n e t o t h e r e c e i v e r / d r y e r : 9 . 8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
R e c e i v e r l i n e t o t h e e v a p o r a t o r : 1 3 N - m (1.3 k g f - m , 9.4 I b f f t )
S u c t i o n h o s e t o t h e e v a p o r a t o r : 31 N - m (3.2 k g f - m , 2 3 I b f f t )
S u c t i o n h o s e t o t h e c o m p r e s s o r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
C o m p r e s s o r t o c o m p r e s s o r b r a c k e t (8 x 1.25 m m ) : 2 2 N - m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
C o m p r e s s o r b r a c k e t t o e n g i n e b l o c k (10 x 1.25 m m ) : 4 4 N - m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )

Symptom
Recirculation control doors do
not change between Fresh and
Recirculate.
Blower motor runs, but one or
more speeds are inoperative.
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit
Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page
21-14)
Blower Motor Circuit
21-15)
Blower motor does not run at all. Blower Motor Circuit

21-15)
Condenser fan does not run at

all (but radiator fan runs w i t h
the A/C on).
Condenser Fan Circuit

Troubleshooting (see page 21-10)
Both fans do not run w i t h the

A/C on.
Radiator and Condenser Fans

C o m m o n Circuit Troubleshooting
(see page 21-12)
Compressor clutch does not

engage.
Compressor Clutch Circuit

21-39)
A/C system does not come on

(both fans and compressor).

21-41)
Heater Control Power and Ground
Circuits Troubleshooting, refer to
(see page 21-19)
Both heater and A/C do not

work.
Also check for

Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box
Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Blown fuse No. 56 (40A) in the underhood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
Poor ground at G202 and G401
connectors
box
connectors
box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and No. 58
(20A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's underdash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
box
connectors
connectors
Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the underhood fuse/relay box, No. 3 (7.5A) in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box,
and No. 13 (7.5A) in the passenger's
connectors
21-7
Air Conditioning
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No.6 (15A)
No.42 (50A)
No. 13 (7.5 A)
No.54 (40A)
No.41 (100A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
GRN
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
RELAY
BLU/YEL
BLOWER
MOTOR
RELAY
RED
BLK
YEL/BLK
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
- GRN -
XL
BLU/BLK
G202
GRN
RADIATOR
XX
FAN
SWITCH A
/Closed : Above\
\199F(93 C) /
FAN C
(_
RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR
CONDENSER
FAN
MOTOR
BLK
WHT/GRN
1
-LL
G201
21-8
G101
G201
RADIATOR
FAN
SWITCH B
/Closed: AboveN
l225F (107C)/
^t-Hj27)-
A/C
PRESSURE
SWITCH
2
1
BLU/RED
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
<
RED
HEATER CONTROL PANEL
Air Conditioning
Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 58 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses
OK ?
4. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the

condenser fan relay 4P socket with a j u m p e r wire.
C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.
JUMPER
WIRE
2. Remove the condenser fan relay f r o m the underhood fuse/relay box, and test it, refer to the '98-01
BLU/YEL
is the relay OK ?
Does the condenser
fan run?
NO - Replace the condenser fan relay.

the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d .
1
2
4

the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
1
2
4
Is there battery
voltage?
YEL/WHT
NO Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. I
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.

21-10

the radiator fan control module 8P connector and
body ground with the 8P connector connected.

the condenser fan 2P connector and body ground.
C O N D E N S E R F A N 2P C O N N E C T O R
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL MODULE


,
I YEL/WHT
Is there
Is there
battery
continuity?
voltage?
YES Replace the condenser fan motor.

Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the
condenser fan relay and the radiator fan control
module.H
NO Check for an open in the wire between the

condenser fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G201.
NO Perform the radiator fan control module input

tests (see page 10-20).
10. Disconnect the condenser fan 2P connector.
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and the No. 2
terminal of the condenser fan 2P connector.
1
BLU/YEL
'BLU/YEL
C O N D E N S E R F A N 2P C O N N E C T O R
Is there
continuity?
condenser fan relay and the condenser fan.B
21-11
Air Conditioning
Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 57 (20 A) and No. 58 (20 A) fuses in
the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A)
fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses
9. Using a Backprobe Set, measure the voltage

between the No. 20 terminal of the PCM connector
A (32P) and body ground w i t h the PCM connectors
connected.
OK ?
NO Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.

2. Remove the condenser fan relay f r o m the underhood fuse/relay box.
GRN
12 13 14 15
25 26 27
17
18 19 20
28 29
30
21
10
23
24
32

the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d .
Is there battery
YEL/WHT
voltage?
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the PCM connector A(32P). If the connections are
g o o d , substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM.B
NO - Repair open in the w i r e between the radiator
fan relay, the condenser fan relay and PCM.
Is there battery
voltage?
NO Perform the radiator fan control module input
tests (see page 10-20).
6. Reinstall the condenser fan relay.
7. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
21-12
jam
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A),
then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
heater valve arm (C).
B
5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C)
to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve
arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable
housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
B
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve

cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and
disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air
mix control linkage (C).
3. Set the temperature control dial on MAX COOL

(60F or 18C) with the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the air mix
control linkage (C) as shown above. Hold the end of
the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D),
then snap the heater valve cable housing into the
cable clamp (A).
21-13
Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement ('98-00 model)
1. If the compressor is marginally operable, run the
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning
work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off.
preset buttons.
Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the

suction (A) and discharge (B) lines from the
compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
contamination.
3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

4. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/
charging station, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from
the condenser fan shroud (B), then disconnect the
compressor clutch connector. Disconnect the
condenser fan connector (C), then remove the wire
harness clips (D) from the condenser fan shroud.
Remove the cruise control actuator cable (E) from
the clamp. Loosen the lower mounting bolt, then
remove the upper mounting bolts and the
condenser fan shroud. Be careful not to damage
the radiator fins when removing the condenser fan
shroud.
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 I b f f t )
6x1.0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
8. Remove the mounting bolts and the compressor.

Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
removing the compressor.
8x1.25 mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
-6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 I b f f t )
21-14.
on
9. Remove the bolts, the suction service valve (A) and
the O-ring (B) from the compressor.
11. Install the compressor in the reverse order of

removal, and note these items:
2 5 . 5 N - m (2.6 k g f - m , 18.8 I b f f t )
10. If necessary, remove the mounting bolts and the

compressor bracket.
If you're installing a new compressor, you must

calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed from it, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the right O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
Use refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for HFC134a DENSO piston type compressor only.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
the container once dispensed, and never mix it
with other refrigerant oils.
Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
installing the compressor and the condenser fan
shroud.
Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Charge the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 21-56), and test its
performance, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
21-15
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Check ('98-00 model)
1. Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for
color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is
damage, replace the clutch set (see page 21-17).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating
the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set w i t h a
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag
(see page 21-17).
3. Measure the clearance betweenn the pulley (A) and

the pressure plate (B) w i t h a dial indicator. Zero out
the indicator, then apply battery voltage to the
compressor clutch. Measure the m o v e m e n t of the
pressure plate w h e n the voltage is applied. If the
clearance is not w i t h i n the specified limits, the
pressure plate must be reshimed (see page 21-17).
Clearance: 0.5 + 0.15 m m (0.020 + 0.006 in)
NOTE: The shims are available in three
thicknesses: 0.1 m m , 0.3 m m and 0.5 m m .
21-16
4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not

w i t h i n specifications, replace the field coil (see
page 21-17).
Field Coil Resistance:
3 . 4 - 3 . 8 ohms at 68F (20C)
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('98-00 model)

A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872,
or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939,
3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap

ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the
pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley and
compressor.
A
1. Remove the center bolt while holding the pressure

plate with a commercially available A/C clutch
holder.
13.2 N-m (1.35 k g f m , 9.76 Ibfft)
2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B),

taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the
number and thickness of shims as nesessary, then
reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its
clearance (see page 21-16).
4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground

terminal (A). Remove the snap ring (B) with snap
ring pliers, then remove the field coil (C). Be careful
not to damage the field coil and compressor.
.A
(cont'd)
21-17
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('98-00
model) (cont'd)
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of
Install the field coil with the wire side facing
down, and align the boss on the field coil with the
hole in the compressor.
Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces
with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum
solvent.
Install new snap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the groove.
Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the pulley.
Compressor Relief Valve

Replacement ('98-00 model)
2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug
the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
the system and the compressor oil from running
out.
A
1 3 . 2 N m (1.35 k g f m , 9 . 7 6 Ibf ft)
B
3. Clean the mating surfaces.
4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief
valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief
valve.
6. Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
7. Charge the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
21-18
Compressor Replacement ('01 model)

1. If the compressor Is marginally operable, run the
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning
work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off.
preset buttons.
7. Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the

suction line (A) and discharge line (B) from the
compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
contamination.
3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

charging station, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from
the condenser fan shroud (B), then disconnect the
compressor clutch connector. Disconnect the
condenser fan connector (C), then remove the wire
harness clips (D) from the condenser fan shroud.
Remove the cruise control actuator cable (E) from
the clamp. Loosen the lower mounting bolt, then
remove the upper mounting bolts and the
condenser fan shroud. Be careful not to damage
the radiator fins when removing the condenser fan
shroud.
8. Remove the mounting bolts and the compressor.

removing the compressor.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
21-19
Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement ('01 model) (cont'd)
9. If necessary, remove the m o u n t i n g bolts and the
compressor brecket.
10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3
21-20
Ibfft)
10. Install the compressor in the reverse order of

If you're installing a new compressor, you must
calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed f r o m it, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
Replace the O-rings w i t h new ones at each fitting,
installing t h e m . Be sure to use the right O-rings
Use refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for HFC134a DENSO piston type compressor only.
To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
the container once dispensed, and never mix it
w i t h other refrigerant oils.
absorption.
Be careful not to damage the radiator fins w h e n
installing the compressor and the condenser fan
shroud.
Evacuate the system, refer to '98-01 Accord
Charge the system, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 21-56), and test its
performance, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
Compressor Clutch Check ('01 model)

1. Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for
color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is
damage, replace the clutch set (see page 21-22).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating
the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag
(see page 21-22).
4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not

w i t h i n specifications, replace the field coll (see
page 21-22).
Field Coil Resistance:
3.4~3.8 o h m s at 68F (20C)
3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and

the pressure plate (B) w i t h a dial indicator. Zero out
the indicator, then apply battery voltage to the
compressor clutch. Measure the movement of the
pressure plate w h e n the voltage is applied. If the
clearance is not within the specified limits, the
pressure plate must be reshimed (see page 21-22).
Clearance: 0.5 + 0.15 m m (0.020 + 0.006 in.)
NOTE: The shims are available in three
thicknesses: 0.1 m m , 0.3 m m and 0.5 m m .
12V
21-21
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('01 model)
A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872,
or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939,
3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap

ring (A) w i t h snap ring pliers, then remove the
pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley and
compressor.
1. Remove the center bolt (A) while holding the

pressure plate w i t h a commercially available A/C
clutch holder (B).
A
13.2 N-m
(1.35 k g f - m ,
9.76 Ibfft)
Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B),

taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the
number and thickness of shims as nesessary, then
reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its
clearance (see page 21-21).
21-22
4. Remove the screw f r o m the field coil ground

terminal (A). Remove the snap ring (B) w i t h snap
ring pliers, then remove the field coil (C). Be careful
not to damage the field coil and compressor.
Compressor Relief Valve

Replacement ('01 model)
5. Reassemble the clutch In the reverse order of
Install the field coil with the wire side facing
down, and align the boss on the field coil with the
hole in the compressor.
Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces
with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum
solvent.
install new snap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the groove.
Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the pulley.

charging station, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug
the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
the system and the compressor oil from running
out.
A
1 3 . 2 N m (1.35 k g f - m , 9 . 7 6 I b f f t )
3. Clean the mating surfaces.

4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief
valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief
valve.
6. Evacuate the system, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
7. Charge the system, refer to '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 21-56), and test its performance,
refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 2144).
21-23
Air Conditioning
Condenser Replacement
2. Remove the coolant reservoir, but do not
disconnect the reservoir hose from the coolant
reservoir and the radiator.
5. Remove the bolts and the upper mount brackets (A),

then remove the condenser (B) by lifting it up. Be
careful not to damage the radiator and condenser
fins when removing the condenser.
A
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the upper mount

brackets from the radiator.
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N m {1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
4. Remove each bolt, then disconnect the discharge

line (A) and condenser (B) line from the condenser.
Plug or cap the lines immediately after
contamination.
6. Install the condenser in the reverse order of

If you're installing a new condenser, add
refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8), refer to the '9801 Accord Service Manual (see page 21-32).
Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
installing them. Be sure to use the right O-rings
absorption.
Be careful not to damage the radiator and
condenser fins when installing the condenser.
Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Charge the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
21-24
21-25
Climate Control
A / C PRESSURE SWITCH
RADIATOR FAN
O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
T e s t , p a g e 21-56
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
CONDENSER FAN RELAY,
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
( L o c a t e d in t h e u n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y b o x )
T e s t , p a g e 22-52
21-26
CONDENSER FAN
E
HEATER VALVE CABLE
A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 21-13
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Test, p a g e 21-57
HEATER UNIT/CORE
BLOWER UNIT
BLOWER UNIT C O M P O N E N T S
Test, page 21-22
B L O W E R M O T O R HIGH R E L A Y
Test, p a g e 22-52
POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-58
D U S T AND P O L L E N FILTER
n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
EVAPORATOR
R e m o v a l a n d Installation, page 21-46
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R
Test, page 21-20
CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT
R e m o v a l and Installation, page 21-58
Disassembly and Reassembly, page 21-59

Test, page 21-23
IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
Test, page 21-55
MODE CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-21
21
Climate Control
How to Retrieve a DTC
The climate control unit has a self-diagnosis function.
Running t h e Self-diagnosis Function
T E M P E R A T U R E C O N T R O L DIAL
A / C O N
T E M P E R A T U R E INDICATOR
Q H F U L L
A/C OFF U U
MODE
AUTO
r
AUTO
AUTO BUTTON
OFF
J
J \I
qf^l
))
OFF BUTTON
2. Set the temperature control dial on M A X COOL, then slowly to M A X HOT.

3. After 1 minute, press the AUTO button and then the OFF button. Continue to hold both buttons d o w n . If there is
any abnormality in the system w h e n both buttons are pressed, the temperature indicator will light up the segment
(A to N) corresponding to the error. The temperature indicator will then alternate every second between
displaying " 8 8 " (all segments lit) and the error segment. If there is no abnormality, the segments will not light up.
Resetting the Self-diagnosis Function
Turning the ignition switch OFF will cancel the self-diagnosis function. After completing repair work, run the selfdiagnosis function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
21-28

To retrieve the DTC, you must run the self-diagnosis function (see page 21-28), In the case of multiple problems, the
respective indicator segments will come on. If indicator segments A, C, E, G, I, and L come on at the same time, there
may be an open in the c o m m o n ground wire of the sensors.
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
DTC
(Temperature
Indicator
segment)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Page
Detection Item
An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit

A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit
An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit
A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit
An open in the sunlight sensor circuit
A short in the sunlight sensor circuit
An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit
A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit
A n open in the air mix control motor circuit
A short in the air mix control motor circuit
A problem in the air mix control linkage, door, or motor
An open or short in the mode control motor circuit
A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor
A problem in the blower motor circuit
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
21-34)
21-35)
21-35)
21-37)
21-37)
21-38)
21-39)
21-40)
21-41)
21-41)
21-42)
21-43)
21-44)
21-45)
21-29
Climate Control
Symptom
|
|
Also check for
ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting
The blower motor does not run
(see page 21-50)
connectors
immediately even through the
engine is fully warmed up
NOTE: The temperature control
dial or button must be set
between 64F (18C) and 90F
(32C)
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit
Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's
Recirculation control doors do
not change between Fresh and
Recirculate.
connectors
Condenser Fan Circuit
Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the underCondenser fan does not run at
hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
all (but radiator fan runs with
the A/C on).
box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Radiator and Condenser Fans
Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and No. 58
Both fans do not run w i t h the
C o m m o n Circuit Troubleshooting
(20A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box,
A/C on.
(see page 21-12)
and No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's underdash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G201
connectors
Compressor Clutch Circuit
Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the underCompressor clutch does not
hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
engage.
21-39)
box
connectors
A/C system does not come on
connectors
(both fans and compressor).
Climate Control Power and Ground
Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the underBoth heater and A/C do not
Circuits Troubleshooting (see page
hood fuse/relay box, No. 3 (7.5A) in
work.
21-51)
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box,
and No. 13 (7.5A) in the passenger's
connectors
21-30
System Description
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R S
CXI
B
4
r1
\
3
8
1
11
2
12
13
14
5
15
10
16
17
18
19
20
r1
8P CONECTOR ( on Circuit Diagram)

Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wire color
BLK/YEL
WHT/YEL
RED/WHT
BLU/ORN
ORN/BLK
BLU/RED
BRN/YEL
BLK
Signal
IG2 (Power)
+ B (Power)
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
BLOWER MOTOR HIGH RELAY
POWER TRANSISTOR
BLOWER FEEDBACK
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
GROUND
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OP CONECTOR ( O on Circuit Diagram)

Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Wire color
PNK/BLK
YEL/GRN
GRN/RED
GRN/WHT
BLU/BLK
BLU/WHT
RED/YEL
RED/BLK
RED/WHT
RED
YEL/GRN
WHT/RED
GRY
BRN
BRN/WHT
YEL/RED
BLU/GRN
LT GRN/BLK
GRN/YEL
GRN/BLK
Signal
AIR MIX POTENTIAL
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
FRESH
RECIRCULATE
MODE DEF
MODE VENT
AIR MIX HOT
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH or TAILLIGHT RELAY
AIR MIX COOL
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DRIVER'S)
SENSOR C O M M O N GROUND
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
AIR MIX POTENTIAL + 5 V
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
MODE 4
MODE 3
MODE 2
MODE 1
'
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
21-31
Climate Control
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
/ I G I OX
- W H T + 0 BAT )
\IG2 O y -
No.42 (50A)
No.41 (100 A)
&
No.6(15A)
BLK/YEL
No.3 (7.5A)
YEL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
No.54 (40A)
No.56 (40A)
No.58 (20A)
No.57 (20A)
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
GRN
GRN
I-
BLU/BLK
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
RELAY
BLOWER
MOTOR
RELAY
RED
BLU/YEL
BLK
YEL/BLK
-6RNCOMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
GRN
G202
> ]
RADIATOR / f *
FAN
SWITCH A
/Closed : Above*
\199 F(93C) /
S
" @
ECTX
R E D / W H T
S G
CONDENSER
FAN
MOTOR
RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR
PCM
t \ RADIATOR
i ) FAN
SWITCH B
I
/Closed: Above\
.225F(107 C)/
BLK
"
2
1
G201
21-32
BLU/RED
G101
G201
BLK
1
G401
VS
A/C
PRESSURE
SWITCH
2 / C \ 1
-L^^L
YEL/GRN
YEL/BLK
BLU/RED
BLK/YEL
-^T}-VW^#4-
WHT/YEL
--{2}-VW W-
A : IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E
SENSOR
B : O U T S I D E AIR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
C : SUNLIGHT S E N S O R
D:EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
YEL/GRN
S5V
S-COM
>AMD-P
>M-COOL
21
OM-HOT
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
RELAY
AIR M X
CONTROL
MOTOR
J M-VENT
S-COM Q-
JM-DEF
!>MODE1
)MODE2
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
MODE
CONTROL
MOTOR
>MODE3
)MODE4
MULTIPLEX
C O N T R O L UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
REC
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL
MOTOR
|G2'
: BP C O N N E C T O R
: 20P C O N N E C T O R
BLK/YEL
G401
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC indicator light A: A n open in the in-car
temperature s e n s o r circuit
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-55).
Check for continuity between the No. 16 terminal of

the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
2 terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P
connector.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 20P C O N N E C T O R
2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No.

2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor.
*Check for a change in resistance by heating or
cooling the sensor w i t h a hair drier.
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL/RED
IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
YEL/RED
h
1
IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
Is there
continuity?
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the climate
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor B
1 terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P
connector.
RESISTANCE
1
50
10
68
20
86
30
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
104F
40 C
YEL/GRN
TEMPERATURE
*ls the resistance

on the graph?
within the specifications
I YEL/GRN
shown
IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
N O - Replace the in-car temperature sensor.

Is there
continuity?
3. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.

Y E S Check for loose wires or poor connections at
the climate control unit 20P connector and at the incar temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away, replace the original climate
control u n i t . B
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.
21-34
D T C indicator light B: A short in the in-car

temperature s e n s o r circuit
DTC indicator light C: A n open in the outside

air temperature s e n s o r circuit
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page

21-55).
1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see

page 21-56).
2. Test the in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-55).

2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor.
* D i p the sensor in ice water the and measure the
resistance. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and
check for a change in resistance.
Is the resistance
on the graph?
shown
NO Replace the in-car temperature sensor.

the climate control unit 20P connector and body
ground.
CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
YEL/RED
RESISTANCE
kQ
Is there
continuity?
YES Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the climate control unit and the in-car
temperature sensor H
NO Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit. 11
14
-10
32
0
50
10
68
20
86
30
104 F
40 C
TEMPERATURE
*ls the resistance

on the graph?
shown
N O - Replace the outside air temperature s e n s o r .
(cont'd)
21-35
Climate Control
1 terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P
connector.

2 terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P
connector.
1
11 12
3
13
4
14
15
16
7
17
8
18
9
19
10
20
11 12 13 14
10
15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL/GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN/WHT
YEL/GRN
O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
Is there
YES
continuity?
Go to step 5.

control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor.
Is there
continuity?
YES Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the climate control unit 20P connector and at the
outside air temperature sensor 2 P connector. If the
control u n i t . B
NO - Repair open in the w i r e between the climate
sensor.
21-36
D T C indicator light D: A short In the outside

air temperature s e n s o r circuit
1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see
page 21-56).
DTC indicator light E: An open in the sunlight

sensor circuit
1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
2. Test the outside air temperature sensor (see page

21-56).
Is the resistance
on the
shown
graph?

1 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
NO Replace the outside air temperature sensor, I I
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

WHT/RED

ground.
WHT/RED
1
S U N L I G H T S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
10
11 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I BRN/WHT
Is there
continuity?
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the sunlight sensor.
Is there
continuity?
Y E S R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire

between the climate control unit and the outside air
temperature sensor. H
NO - Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
replace the original climate control unit.H
(cont'd)
21-37
Climate Control
2 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2 P connector.
D T C indicator light F: A short in the sunlight

s e n s o r circuit
1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

ground.
i YEL/GRN
YEL/GRN
11
12
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
S U N L I G H T S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
WHT/RED
Is there
continuity?
sensor.
5. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2 P connector.
Is there
continuity?

between the climate control unit and the sunlight
sensor.
6. Reconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.

NO - G o t o step 4 .
7. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-57).
4. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
Is the sunlight
sensor
OK?
Y E S - Check for loose wires or poor connections at

sunlight sensor 2P connector. If the connections are
g o o d , substitute a known-good climate control unit,
replace the original climate control u n i t . H
NO - Replace the sunlight sensor.
6. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-57).

Is the sunlight
sensor
OK?
Y E S - Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

NO -Replace the sunlight sensor.H
21-38
DTC Indicator light G: A n o p e n in t h e

evaporator temperature sensor circuit
1 . Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
4 . Check for continuity between the No. 1 4 terminal of

2 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
2 . Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No.

2 terminals of the evaporator temperature sensor.
1
11 12
9 ^0
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
BRN
BRN
U

40
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - Goto step 5.
30

control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor
RESISTANCE
20
10
50
1 0
68
20
86
30
F
C
TEMPERATURE
Is the resistance
on the
within
the specifications
shown
graph?
Y E S - G o t o step3.
NO Replace the evaporator temperature
sensor.
(cont'd)
21-39
Climate Control
5, Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of
1 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
D T C indicator light H: A short in the

evaporator temperature s e n s o r circuit
1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
CLIMATE C O N T R O L U N I T 20P C O N N E C T O R
2. Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see step 2

on page 21-39).
11 12
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Is the resistance
on the graph?
shown
YEL/GRN
YES
G o t o step 3.
YEL/GRN
NO Replace the evaporator temperature

sensor, m
Is there
continuity?

evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good
control u n i t . B
NO - R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the climate
control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor. 11

ground.
11
12
13
14
10
15
16
17
18
19
20
BRN
Is there continuity?
Y E S -Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the climate control unit and the
evaporator temperature sensor.
NO -Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
replace the original climate control u n i t . B
21-40
DTC Indicator light I: An open in the air mix

control motor circuit
D T C indicator light J : A short in the air mix

control motor circuit
1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.

1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.
3. Check for continuity between f o l l o w i n g terminals
of the climate control unit 20P connector and the air
mix control motor 7P connector.
20P:
7P:
No. 1
No. 3
No. 7
No. 2
No. 9
No. 1
No. 11
No. 5
No.13
No. 7

climate control unit 20P connector terminals No. 1,
7, 9, 11 and 13 individually.
RED/
YEL
RED/WHT
PNK/BLK
PNK/BLK
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL/GRN
RED/YEL
GRY
RED/WHT
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | 20
GRY
YEL/
GRN
Is there
continuity?
YES Repair any short to body ground in the

wire(s) between the climate control unit and the air
mix control motor. H
YEL/
GRN
PNK/BLK
RED/WHT
RED/YEL
LO
GRY
NO
G o t o step 4.
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R
Is there
continuity?
YES- Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the climate control unit 20P connector and at the air
mix control motor 7P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good climate control
unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original climate control unit.H
NO Repair any open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the air mix control
motor. H
(cont'd)
21-41
Climate Control
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the s a m e
terminals for voltage.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 20P
CONNECTOR
DTC indicator light K: A problem In the air
mix control linkage, door and motor

1. Test the air mix control motor, refer to the '98-01
Is the air mix control motor OK ?

RED/YEL
RED/WHT
PNK/BLK
3
11
12 13
14
15 16
10
17
18 19
20
YES- Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

NO
Go to step 2.
2. Remove the air mix control motor, refer to

Is there any
voltage?
Y E S Repair any short to power in the wire(s)

between the climate control unit and the air mix
control motor. This short also damages the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the climate control unit.
3. Check the air mix control linkage and door for

smooth movement.
Do the air mix control linkage and door
smoothly?
move
YES- Replace the air mix control motor H

NO -Repair the air mix control linkage or door.H
NO Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

replace the original climate control unit.
21-42
D T C indicator light L: An open or short in the

mode control motor circuit
1. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same

terminals for voltage.
BLU/BLK

climate control unit 20P connector terminals No. 5,
6, 11, 17, 18,19 and 20 individually.
| ^ |
BLU/WHT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GRN/
BLK
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
YEL/
GRN
BLU/GRN
LT G R N / B L K
Is there any
GRN/
BLK
GRN/YEL
(U) (Q)
Is there
;o)
(D
(h
(0)
continuity?
voltage?
Y E S - Repair any short to power in the wire(s)

between the climate control unit and the mode
control motor. This short also damages the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the climate control unit B
YES Repair any short to body ground in the wire

(s) between the climate control unit and the mode
control motor.
(cont'd)
21-43
Climate Control
continuity between f o l l o w i n g terminals of the
climate control unit 20P connector and the m o d e
control motor 7P connector.
7P:
20P:
No. 1
No. 5
No. 2
No. 6
No. 7
No. 11
No. 3
No. 17
No. 4
No. 18
No. 5
No. 19
No. 6
No. 20
D T C indicator light M: A problem in the mode

control linkage, doors and motor
1. Test the mode control motor, refer to the '98-01
Is the mode control motor
OK?
Y E S - S u b s t i t u t e a known-good climate control unit,

replace the original climate control unit.
W i r e side of female
BLU/BLK
YEL/GRN
2. Remove the mode control motor, refer to the '98-01

terminals
I^BLU/WHT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
3. Check the mode control linkage and doors for

smooth movement.
Do the mode control linkage and doors
smoothly?
move
Y E S -Replace the air mix control m o t o r .

NO - Repair the mode control linkage or d o o r s .
M O D E C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e
Is there
terminals
continuity?

mode control motor 7P connector. If the
control unit.
NO Repair any open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the mode control motor.
21-44
DTC indicator light N: A problem In the

blower motor circuit
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and turn the blower
fan speed knob to HIGH.
4. Connect the No. 4 and No. 5 terminals of the power

transistor 5P connector with a jumper wire.
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
Does the blower motor
run?
_Q_
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the
power transistor 5P connector.
BLU/RED
tJ
BLK
JUMPER WIRE

the power transistor 5P connector and body ground.
Does the blower motor run at high

3
4
speed?
NO - Repair open in the wire between the power

transistor and the blower motor.
5
BLK

Is there
continuity?
NO Check for an open in the wire between the
power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G401.
(cont'd)
21-45
Climate Control
the climate control unit 8P connector and the No. 3
terminal of the power transistor 5P connector.

terminal of the power transistor 5P connector.
f^l
2
5
1
r1
3
8
BLU/RED
ORN/BLK
ORN/BLK
Is there
Is there
continuity?
continuity?
Y E S G o t o step 12.
YES
G o t o step 10.

control unit and the power transistor.
ground.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the climate

control unit and the power transistor.
ground.
/ -
1
5
4
rl
6 rJ 7
l
...
1
4
3
8
3
8
r1
BLU/RED
ORN/BLK
continuity?
continuity?
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the climate control unit and the power
transistor.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the climate control unit and the power
transistor.
NO
21-46
5
r1
Is there
Is there
G o t o step 13.
ra
14. Test the power transistor (see page 21-58).
Is the power
transistor
OK?
YES Check for loose wires or poor connections at

power transistor 5P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good climate control
unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original climate control unit.
20. Remove the blower motor high relay, and test it,
22-52).
Is the relay
YES
OK?
Go to step 2 1 .
NO Replace the blower motor high relay.

NO
Replace the power transistor.
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check the No. 56
(40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box.
Are the fuses
2 1 . Connect the No. 4 terminal of the blower motor

high relay 5P connector to body ground w i t h a
jumper wire.
OK ?
X L
YES
NO
G o t o step 16.
Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.

tr
16. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the blower motor 2P

connector to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
BLU/RED
JUMPER
WIRE
B L O W E R M O T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R

JUMPER
WIRE
BLU/RED
run?
NO -Repair open in the wire between the blower
motor high relay and the blower motor.

run?
YES - Go to step 18.

NO
Go to step 3 1 .
(cont'd)
21-47
Climate Control
the blower motor high relay 5P connector and body
ground.

terminal of the blower motor high relay 5P
connector.

BLK/YEL
1
4
/
0
3
5
1
4
BLU/ORN
Is there battery
BLU/ORN
voltage?
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the blower
motor high relay and the No. 3 fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H


the blower motor high relay 5P connector and body
ground.
BLK
Is there
continuity?
N O - Check for an open in the wire between the
blower motor high relay and body g r o u n d . If the
w i r e is OK, check for poor g r o u n d at G401
21-48
Is there
continuity?

blower motor high relay 5P connector. If the
control unit. M
control unit and the blower motor high relay H
3 1 . Disconnect the jumper w i r e .

the blower motor relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d .
32. Disconnect the blower motor 2P connector.

B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T

the blower motor 2P connector and body ground.
B L O W E R MOTOR 2P C O N N E C T O R
YEL/BLK
Is there battery
YES
NO
Is there battery
voltage?
Go to step 37.
Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
voltage?
YES - Replace the blower motor.

G o t o step 34.

the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground.
NO
35. Remove the blower motor relay f r o m the underhood fuse/relay box, and test it, refer to the '98-01
Is the relay
BLK/YEL
OK?
NO Replace the blower motor relay.
Is there battery
YES
voltage?
G o t o step 39.

fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and
the blower motor relay.
(cont'd)
21-49
Climate Control
40. Check for continuity between the No. 2 t e r m i n a l of
the blower motor relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d .
ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting

1. Check the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Does the malfunction
^ []
lamp come on?
Y E S Refer to the fuel and emissions section of

(see page 11-3).
NO
BLK
indicator
Go to step 2.
1
3
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector.

Is there
continuity?
Y E S - R e p a i r open in the wire between the blower

motor relay and the blower motor.

ground.
N O - C h e c k for an open in the w i r e between the

blower motor relay and body g r o u n d . If the w i r e is
OK, check for poor g r o u n d at G202.
Is there approximately
RED/WHT
volts?
r1
Y E S - Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the climate control unit 8P connector and at the ECT
sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good climate control unit, and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control u n i t . H
NO Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the ECT sensor.
21-50
Climate Control Power and Ground Circuits Troubleshooting

1. Check the No. 54 (40A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, the No. 3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 13 (7.5A)
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses

ground.
OK ?
Y E S G o t o step 2.
WHT/YEL
NO Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.

ground.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T BP C O N N E C T O R
Is there battery
voltage?
BLK/YEL
NO -Repair open in the wire between the No. 13

fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the climate control unit.

ground.
Is there battery
voltage?
M l IWl
4^5
6 L
J1 7
-v
3
8
BLK

fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and
the climate control u n i t . B
Is there
continuity?
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the climate control unit 8P connector. If the
connections are good,substitute a known-good
control u n i t . B
N O - Check for an open in the wire between the
blower motor high relay and body ground. If the
wire is OK, check for poor ground at G401.
21-51
Climate Control
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's underdash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuses

terminals of the climate control unit 20P conector
and body ground individually.
OK ?
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck. H

2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
connector.
GRN/WHT
GRN/RED
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

the recirculation control motor 7P connector and
body ground.
Is there
Y E S R e p a i r any short to body ground in the wire

(s) between the climate control unit and the
recirculation control motor.
NO
BLK/YEL
continuity?
Goto step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON(II), and check the same

wires for voltage.
Is there battery
voltage?
GRN/WHT

recirculation control motor and the No. 3 fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.B
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

6. Test the recirculation control motor, refer to
Is there any
Is the recirculation
control
motor
voltage?
OK?
Y E S - Repair any short to power in the wire(s)

between the climate control unit and the
recirculation control motor. This short also
damages the climate control unit. Repair the short
to power before replacing the climate control unit.

21-52

Troubleshooting
continuity between the f o l l o w i n g terminals of the
climate control unit 20P connector and the
recirculation control motor IP connector.
20P:
7P:
No. 3
No. 5
No. 4
No. 7
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.

the A/C presure switch 2P connector and body
ground.
A / C P R E S S U R E S W I T C H 2P C O N N E C T O R
GRN/WHT
GRN/RED
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
BLU/RED
9)
GRN/RED
U
GRN/WHT

7P CONNECTOR
volts?
W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e terminals
Is there
continuity?
YES -Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the climate control unit 20P connector and at
recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the
control unit.
NO
G o t o step 10.

terminals of the A/C pressure switch.
NO -Repair any open in the wire(s) between the

climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor.
A / C PRESSURE SWITCH
11. Remove the recirculation contol motor, refer to

12. Check the recirculation control linkage and doors
for smooth movement.
Do the recirculation
move
smoothly?
YES
control linkage and
doors
Replace the recirculation control motor B
NO - Repair the recirculation control linkage or

doors.
Is there
continuity?
(cont'd)
21-53
Air Conditioning
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
10. Using a Backprobe Set, measure the voltage

between the No. 27 terminal of the PCM connector
A (32P) and body ground w i t h the PCM connectors
connected.


ground.
/
12
13
14
15
25
26
27
17
18
19
20
28
29
30
21
10
23
24
BLU/RED
YEL/GRN
r>^
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
volts?
Y E S - Repair open in the wire between the PCM

and the A/C pressure switch. H
volts?
Y E S - C h e c k for loose wires or poor connections at

A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the
control u n i t . B
N O - Repair open in the w i r e between the climate
control unit and the A/C pressure switch fl
N O - Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the PCM connector A (32P). If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM.B
11. Check for proper A/C system pressure.
Is the pressure
within
specifications?
Y E S -Replace the A/C pressure s w i t c h . B

N O - Repair the A/C pressure problem. B
21-54
Climate Control
In-car Temperature Sensor
Replacement
In-car Temperature Sensor Test

Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling
the sensor with a hair drier.
Remove the in-car temperature sensor (A) from the

dashboard, then disconnect the 2P connector (B)
and the air hose (C). Be careful not to damage the
sensor and the dashboard.
Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and

No. 2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor with
the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
J
1
2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.

Be sure to connect the air hose securely.
RESISTANCE
(kPJ
TEMPERATURE
21-55
Climate Control
Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement
1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the outside air
temperature sensor. Release the lock, and remove
the outside air temperature sensor.
Outside Air Temperature Sensor

Test
Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance.
Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a
change in resistance.
Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and
No. 2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor
with the specifications shown in the graph; the
resistance should be within the specifications.
RESISTANCE
(kPJ
104 F
4 0 C
TEMPERATURE
21-56
Sunlight Sensor Replacement

1. Remove the sunlight sensor from the dashboard,
then disconnect the 2P connector. Be careful not to
damage the sensor and the dashboard.
Sunlight Sensor Test

Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the voltage
between the terminals with the (+) probe on the No. 1
terminal and the () probe on the No. 2 terminal with
the 2P connector connected. The voltage will not
change under the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent
lamp. Voltage should be:
3.63.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct
sunlight.
3.33.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight.
WHT/RED
YEL/GRN
21-57
Climate Control
Power Transistor Test
Climate Control Unit Removal and

Installation
1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the power

transistor.
4 terminals of the power transistor. If should be
approximately 1.4 1.5 kQ .
If the resistance is within the specifications, go to
step 3.
If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the power transistor.
1. Remove the center panel together with the climate

control unit, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the climate
control unit (A) from the center pagnel (B).
POWER TRANSISTOR
1
4
3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No. 3 terminal

(ORN/BLK) (A) in the 5P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground.
B
3. Install the control unit in the reverse order of
removal. After installation, operate the control unit
controls to see whether it works properly.
4. Run the self-diagnosis function to comfirm that
there are no problems in the system (see page 2 1 28).
4. Connect a 1.2 3.4 W bulb (B) between the No. 3

and the No. 4 cavity on the 5P connector.
5. Reconnect the 5P connector to the power transistor.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the
blower motor runs.
If the blower motor does not run, replace the
power transistor.
If the blower motor runs, replace the climate
control unit.
21-58
Climate Control Unit Disassembly and Reassembly

1. Remove the fan switch (A) and temperature control (B) dials, then remove the front (C), temperature control (D)
and fan switch (E) panels. Remove A/C switch (F), MODE control switch (G), AUTO switch (H), OFF switch (I),
recirculation control switch (J), front defroster switch (K) and rear defogger switch (L) buttons.
2. Reassemble the control unit in the reverse order of removal.
21-59
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (If Electrical maintenance is required)

collision, all SRS service w o r k must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
circuits.
Body Electrical
Relay and Control Unit Locations
Connectors and Harnesses
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
Battery
Relays
Power Relay T e s t
22-2
22-4
22-23
22-26
22-29
22-30
22-31
* Gauges
Gauge Bulb R e p l a c e m e n t
Circuit Diagram
22-32
22-33
Safety Indicator System

22-38
* Stereo Sound System

22-40
22-41
Audio Unit C o n n e c t o r R e p l a c e m e n t
22-42
Radio Remote Switch Test
22-42
Homelink Remote Control System

22-43
Test
22-43
Power Seat ('01 Sedan)

22-44
22-45
Motor T e s t
22-46
Switch Test/Replacement
22-47
Seat Heaters-Canada
22-48
22-49
NOTE; Refer to the '98
01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8007, for the items not shown in this section.
Outline of V6 Model Chenges

1998 model:
The ABS control unit location has been changed; related component locations are included.
A blower motor high relay and a radiator fan control module have been added; related componet locations
are included.
The wire harness and ground locations have been changed.
The bulb locations in the gauges have been changed.
The stereo sound system has been changed.
Homelink remote control system has been added; related information is included.
Circuit diagrams which differ f r o m those in the '98 Accord Service Manual have been included.
1999 model:
There are no changes to the 1998 model.
2000 model:
There side airbag system has been added; related information is included.
The engine wire harness has been changed.
Circuit diagrams which differ f r o m theose in the '98-99 Accord Service Manual have been included.
2001 model:
The seat heater relay location has been changed
The ABS/TCS control unit, TCS relay, and TCS indicator have been added.
The wire harness and ground locations have been changed.
The passenger's power seat has been added in the sedan.
Circuit diagrams which differ f r o m those in the '98-01 Accord Service Manual have been included.
Relay and Control Unit Locations

Engine Compartment
S E A T H E A T E R R E L A Y (Canada)
('98-00 m o d e l s )
[Wire colors: B L K / Y E L , B L K ,
LWHT/BLK and W H T / G R N
TCS RELAY
('01 m o d e l )
[Wire colors; G R N / Y E L ,
i B R N / B L K , R E D / B L U and
HEADLIGHT
RELAY 1
HEADLIGHT
RELAY 2
HARM RFI AV
HORN RELAY
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
BLU
MULTI-RELAY
BOX
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
RELAY
ELD UNIT
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY
fWire colors: Y E L / G R N , B L K ,
L B R N / B L K and W H T / G R N
ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAY
f Wire colors: Y E L / R E D ,
^BRN/BLK, W H T / B L U and WHT
I
22-2
INTERMITTENT
WIPER RELAY
Wire colors: G R N / B L K ,
WHT, BLK, G R N / R E D ,
and B L U / W H T
Dashboard
BLOWER M O T O R HIGH RELAY
CONTROL MODULE
ABS C O N T R O L UNIT
('98-00 m o d e l s )
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
('01 m o d e l )
22-

Connector Index
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n n u m b e r s h a v e b e e n a s s i g n e d t o i n - l i n e c o n n e c t o r s . T h e n u m b e r is p r e c e d e d b y t h e letter "C" f o r c o n n e c t o r s , " G " f o r g r o u n d
t e r m i n a l s or " T " f o r n o n - g r o u n d t e r m i n a l s .
Harness
Engine Compartment
Starter cable
Battery g r o u n d cable
Engine g r o u n d cable
Engine w i r e harness
Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t wire

harness
Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
harness
Dashboard w i r e harness B
(left b r a n c h )
(right branch)
Dashboard w i r e harness A
T1,T2and( + )
T3
G1and (-)
T4
G2
C103 t h r o u g h C108
T101 and T102
G101 a n d G 1 0 2
G201 t h r o u g h G205
G301 a n d G 3 0 2
Dashboard
Location
O t h e r s (Floor, Door,
T r u n k , a n d Roof)
(see p a g e 22-5)
(see p a g e 22-5)
(see p a g e 22-5)
(see p a g e 22-6)
C201 t h r o u g h C204
(see p a g e 22-12)
C103andC104
C301 a n d C302
C 3 0 1 , C 4 0 1 a n d C402
G401
C201 t h r o u g h C 2 0 3 a n d
C403
C 2 0 4 , C302 a n d C401
G501 and G502
(see p a g e 22-14)
Left s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s
Right side w i r e harness
Rear w i r e h a r n e s s
(see p a g e 22-16)
(see p a g e 22-16)
C501 t h r o u g h C505 a n d
C582
G503 and G504
C501 a n d
C551 t h r o u g h C557
G551 a n d G 5 5 2
C581 t h r o u g h C586 a n d
C851
G581
C 5 5 4 a n d C601
G601
C502
M o o n r o o f wire harness
Roof wire harness
D r i v e r ' s p o w e r seat w i r e h a r n e s s
C551
P a s s e n g e r ' s p o w e r seat w i r e
h a r n e s s ('01 S e d a n )
Driver's door w i r e harness
C701
C631 a n d C632
Passenger's door w i r e harness
Left rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s
C553
R i g h t rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s
C581
Ignition switch harness
C404
SRS m a i n harness
C503
SRS f l o o r harness (Sedan)
OPDS wire harness

(with side airbags)
Rear w i n d o w d e f o g g e r w i r e
harness
22-4
Notes
C556, C557, C583 a n d

C584
G801
C505 a n d C851
C851
(see p a g e 22-18)
(see p a g e 22-24)
(see p a g e 22-20)
(see p a g e 22-28)
(see p a g e 22-30)
(see p a g e 22-30)
(see p a g e 22-31)
(see p a g e 22-22)
(see p a g e 22-32)
(see p a g e 22-34)
(see p a g e 22-36)
(see p a g e 22-37)
(see p a g e 22-38)
(see p a g e 22-38)
(see p a g e 22-39)
(see p a g e 22-42)
(see p a g e 22-42)
Connector to Harness Index

Starter Cable
Connector or Terminal
T1
T2
Ref
1
2
Cavities
Location
Right s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Battery
Connects t o
Starter m o t o r
Battery positive terminal
Notes
Ref
6
5
Cavities
Location
Left s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
C o n n e c t s to
Transmission housing
Body g r o u n d via battery
g r o u n d cables
Battery negative terminal
Notes
Battery Ground Cable

C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l
T3
G1
(
Battery
Engine Ground Cable ('99 model)

T4
G2
Ref
8
7
Cavities
Location
M i d d l e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
C o n n e c t s to
Valve cover
Body g r o u n d via engine
g r o u n d cable
Notes
Cavities
Location
Left s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
C o n n e c t s to
Transmission housing
Body g r o u n d via engine
g r o u n d cable
Notes
Engine Ground Cable ('00-01 models)

T4
G2
Ref
4
3
22-5

Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness ('98-99 models)
Ref
42
27
28
15
Cavities
4
2
2
10
4
16
41
2
2
1
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t

Middle of engine compartment
39
45
40
2
6

35
18
14
13
32
3
3
3
2
3

M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
29
38
7
9
12
6
8
10
2
19
20
21
11
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
25
31
16
4

Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
U n d e r m i d d l e of dash
Under m i d d l e of dash
Under m i d d l e of dash
25
33
36
34
31
44
30
37
1
5
23
2
1
2
2
1
4
1
3
2
1
14
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
C104
24
10
C105 (Junction connector)

C106 (Junction connector)
T101
T102
G101
22
17
3
43
26
20
8

Alternator
Alternator
A/T clutch pressure control valve A
A / T clutch p r e s s u r e control v a l v e B
T r a n s m i s s i o n range s w i t c h (A/T g e a r
position switch)
CKP sensor
Coolant temperature gauge sending
unit
E n g i n e coolant t e m p e r a t u r e ( E C T )
sensor
Radiator fan s w i t c h B
E x h a u s t g a s recircuration ( E G R )
control s o l e n o i d v a l v e
Idle air c o n t r o l (IAC) v a l v e
Ignition coil
Ignition control m o d u l e (ICM)
Intake air t e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) s e n s o r
Lock-up control s o l e n o i d v a l v e and
shift control s o l e n o i d v a l v e A
Mainshaft s p e e d s e n s o r
M A P sensor
No. 1 fuel injector
No. 2 fuel injector
No. 3 fuel injector
No. 4 fuel injector
No. 5 fuel injector
No. 6 fuel injector
Oil pressure s w i t c h
PCM connector B
PCM connector C
PCM connector D
Primary heated o x y g e n sensor
(Primary H02S)
Radiator fan switch A
Second clutch pressure switch
Shift control solenoid valve B
Shift control solenoid valve C
Starter solenoid
TDC sensor
Third clutch pressure switch
T h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n (TP) s e n s o r
VTEC pressure switch
VTEC s o l e n o i d v a l v e
C103
22-6
Right
Right
Right
Right
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
Location
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
Connects to
h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-14)
Engine g r o u n d via engine

wire harness
Notes
(cont'd)
22-7

Connector t o Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness ('00-01 models)
Alternator
A/T clutch pressure control valve A
A/T clutch pressure control valve B
T r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e (TR) s w i t c h ( A / T
gear position switch)
CKP s e n s o r
E n g i n e c o o l a n t t e m p e r a t u r e (ECT)
sensor
E x h a u s t g a s r e c i r c u r a t i o n (EGR)
control solenoid valve
Idle air c o n t r o l (IAC) v a l v e
Intake air t e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) s e n s o r
Lock-up control solenoid valve and
shift control solenoid valve A
M A P sensor
No. 1 fuel injector
No. 2 fuel injector
No. 3 fuel injector
N o . 4 fuel injector
No. 5 fuel injector
No. 6 fuel injector
N o . 1 ignition coil
N o . 2 i g n i t i o n coil
Oil pressure switch
PCM connector B
PCM connector C
PCM connector D
22-8
Ref
46
28
29
15
Cavities
4
2
2
10
4
16
41
2
2
2

40
36
14
33
3
2
3

30
39
7
10
13
49
45
43
8
9
11
48
44
42
2
19
20
21
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
25
31
16

M i d d l e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Under middle of dash
Right
Right
Right
Right
side
side
side
side
of
of
of
of
Location
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
Connects to
Notes
(cont'd)
22-9

Engine Wire Harness
('00-01
models) (cont'd)
Primary H02S
Radiator fan switch A
Radiator fan switch B
Secondary clutch switch pressure
switch
Shift control solenoid valve B
Shift control solenoid valve C
Starter solenoid
TDC sensor
Third clutch pressure switch
T h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n (TP) s e n s o r
VTEC p r e s s u r e s w i t c h
VTEC solenoid valve
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
T101
T102
G101
(Junction
(Junction
(Junction
(Junction
G102
22-10
connector)
connector)
connector)
connector)
Ref
12
26
51
34
Cavities
4
2
2
1
37
35
32
50
31
38
1
5
24
2
2
1
4
1
3
2
1
14
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
25
10
22
17
18
23
3
47
27
20
8
14
20
Alternator
Location
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
C o n n e c t s to
B o d y g r o u n d via e n g i n e w i r e
harness
Body g r o u n d via engine wire
harness
Notes
22-11

Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness
Ref
1
2
6
22
23
5
20
45
1
2
22
31
25
30
21
40
12
42
26
28
4
Cavities
12
22
4
10
2
4
2
26
16
12
23
1
2
2
4
2
3
4
1
2
3
18
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
19
24
33
39
32
34
29
7
18
2
2
2
3
2
2
1
4
4
Behind right headlight
Behind right of front b u m p e r
Behind m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r
27
41
7
8
2
4
4
16
R i g h t s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
10
11
18
38
37
13
2
2
16

Under right side of dash
C202
14
U n d e r right side of dash
C203
15
C204
16
22
G201
35
G202
17
G203
36
G204
43
G205
44
ABS control unit connector A
ABS control unit connector B
A B S fail-safe relay
ABS modulator unit
ABS pump motor
A B S p u m p m o t o r relay
ABS right front wheel sensor
ABS/TCS control unit connector A
ABS/TCS control unit connector B
ABS/TCS control unit connector C
ABS/TCS modulator unit
A/C compressor clutch
A/C pressure switch
Condenser fan motor
Cruise control actuator
Diode (Lighting)
ELD u n i t
H i g h b e a m cut relay
Left h o r n
O u t s i d e air t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r D (see p a g e 22-25)
c o n n e c t o r C (see p a g e 22-25)
P o w e r s t e e r i n g p r e s s u r e (PSP) s w i t c h
Radiator fan m o t o r
Right front parking light
Right front side marker light
Right headlight (High beam)
Right headlight (Low beam)
Right horn
Seat heater relay
Secondary heated oxygen sensor
(Secondary H02S)
Security h o o d switch
Taillight relay
TCS relay
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector
D (see p a g e 22-23)
C (see p a g e 22-23)
B (see p a g e 22-23)
A (see p a g e 22-23)
W a s h e r level s w i t c h
Windshild washer motor
C201
I
* 1:
* 2;
'98-00 m o d e l s
'01 m o d e l
22-12
Location
Behind condenser fan motor
Inside u n d e r - h o o d fuse/relay box
B e h i n d m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r
Connects to
Notes
* 1
* 1
-x- -|
* 1
*2
*2
*2
*2
Canada
Canada
* 1
*2
Canada
(see p a g e 22-16)
(see p a g e 22-16)
Dashboard wire harness B
(see p a g e 22-16)
Dashboard wire harness A
(see p a g e 22-18)
B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness
c o m p a r t m e n t wire harness
22-13

Connector to Harness index (cont'd)
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness
A B S left f r o n t w h e e l s e n s o r
B r a k e f l u i d level s w i t c h c o n n e c t o r A
Ref
16
6
Cavities
2
1
Location
B r a k e f l u i d level s w i t c h c o n n e c t o r B
12
20
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
11
2
2
6
2
( /
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r E (see p a g e 22-24)
c o n n e c t o r C (see p a g e 22-24)
Engine m o u n t control solenoid valve
EVAP purge control solenoid valve
Intermittent w i p e r relay
Left f r o n t p a r k i n g l i g h t
Left f r o n t s i d e m a r k e r l i g h t
Left h e a d l i g h t ( H i g h b e a m )
Left h e a d l i g h t ( L o w b e a m )
Seat heater relay
Test tachometer connector
Windshield wiper motor
C103
20
17
21
19
13
1
8
2
14
Left s i d e o f
Left s i d e o f
Left s i d e o f
B e h i n d left
B e h i n d left
B e h i n d left
B e h i n d left
B e h i n d left
Left s i d e o f
Left r e a r o f
Left s i d e o f
C104
15
10
C301
20
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
C302
10
16
G301
18
G302
'01 m o d e l
22-14
3
13
2
2
4
2
5
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
headlight
of front b u m p e r
headlight
headlight
kick p a n e l
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
C o n n e c t s to
Notes
*
E n g i n e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-6)
E n g i n e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-6)
(see p a g e 22-16)
Dashboard w i r e harness A
(see p a g e 22-18)
B o d y g r o u n d v i a left e n g i n e
B o d y g r o u n d via left e n g i n e
22-15

Dashboard Wire Harness B (Left Branch)
Ref
5
13
12
16
14
1
Cavities
4
4
14
16
14
20
22
11
10
8
7
9
6
7
5
2
7
8
20
U n d e r left s i d e of d a s h
In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r s
C401
15
22
C402
C402
G401
17
Brake s w i t c h
C a b l e reel
C o m b i n a i o n light switch
Data link c o n n e c t o r (DLC)
Daytime r u n n i n g lights control unit
c o n n e c t o r 0 (see p a g e 22-24)
c o n n e c t o r P (see p a g e 22-24)
c o n n e c t o r Q (see p a g e 22-24)
Ignition switch
Immobilizer control unit
Intermittent dwell time controller
PGM-FI m a i n relay
Windshield wiper/washer switch
C301
Location
Connects to
Dashboard wire harness A
(see p a g e 22-18)
Security system w i r e harness
(Optional)
(Optional)
Body g r o u n d via d a s h b o a r d
w i r e harness B
D A S H B O A R D W I R E H A R N E S S B (left b r a n c h )
22-16
Notes
Canada
USA
Dashboard Wire Harness B (Right Branch)

Ref
15
12
11
3
1
4
3
1
2
8
Cavities
7
2
4
20
8
2
22
7
7
16
16
10
16
5
6
4
8
7
16
Under
Under
Under
Under
C202
14
C203
13
U n d e r r i g h t side o f d a s h
C403
Air mix control m o t o r
Blower motor
B l o w e r m o t o r h i g h relay
Climate control unit connector A
Climate control unit connector B
Evaporator t e m p e r a t u r e sensor
Heater c o n t r o l p a n e l
Heater f a n s w i t c h
Mode control motor
c o n n e c t o r J (see p a g e 22-25)
c o n n e c t o r K (see p a g e 22-25)
Power transistor
Radiator fan control m o d u l e
Recirculation control m o t o r
C201
Location
U n d e r m i d d l e of d a s h
r i g h t side
m i d d l e of
m i d d l e of
r i g h t side
of dash
dash
dash
of dash
Connects to
Notes
AUTO A/C
AUTO A/C
AUTO A/C
MAN. A/C
MAN. A/C
AUTO A/C
Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t
w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-12)
(Optional)
22-17

Dashboard Wire Harness A
Location
m i d d l e of dash
of floor between front
Connector or T e r m i n a l
Accessory socket
A / T gear position console light/parking
pin switch
A u d i o unit
Clock
C r u i s e c o n t r o l unit
Cruise main switch
Cruise main / T C S switch
Driver's seat heater s w i t c h
Driver's u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box
c o n n e c t o r 1 (see page 22-24)
Driver's u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box
c o n n e c t o r K (see page 22-24)
Gauge assembly connector A
Gauge assembly connector B
Gauge assembly connector C
G l o v e box light
Hazard w a r n i n g switch
In-car temperature s e n s o r
Left tweeter
M o o n r o o f switch
Multiplex control unit (driver's)
connector B
Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
connector B
Parking brake switch
Ref
29
32
Cavities
2
4
17
16
37
7
7
31
2
20
5
14
5
8
6
18
Behind
Middle
seats
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
18
11
10
12
27
14
38
9
8
5
14
22
16
2
10
2
2
6
22
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
23
22
36
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r s w i t c h
c o n n e c t o r H (see p a g e 22-25)
c o n n e c t o r 1 (see p a g e 22-25)
PCM connector A
Right tweeter
Shift lock solenoid
30
21
6
18
M i d d l e of floor between f r o n t
seats
Behind m i d d l e of dash
22
18
28
20
34
32
2
2
Sunlight sensor
SRS m e m o r y erase signal (MES)
SRS unit
C204
15
4
33
26
2
2
8
22
Behind
Behind
Middle
seats
Behind
Behind
Middle
Behind
C302
39
16
B e h i n d left s i d e o f d a s h
C401
40
22
B e h i n d left s i d e of d a s h
C501
42
18
C502
Behind i n s t r u m e n t panel
C503
13
C503
13
C503
13
C504
41
C505
35
Middle of floor
C582
25
16
B e h i n d r i g h t s i d e of d a s h
22-18
C o n n e c t s to
audio unit
middle of dash
left s i d e o f d a s h
instrument panel
i n s t r u m e n t panel
m i d d l e of dash
left kick p a n e l
Notes
*1
*2
gauges
gauges
gauges
glove box
m i d d l e of dash
left s i d e o f d a s h
i n s t r u m e n t panel
instrument panel
left kick p a n e l
middle of dash
instrument panel
of floor between front
m i d d l e of dash
left kick p a n e l
of f l o o r
right side of dash
*2
*3
Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s B (see
p a g e 22-16)
Left s i d e w i r e h a r e n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
(see p a g e 22-24)
M o o n r o o f w i r e h a r n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
(see p a g e 22-30)
SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e '9801 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 22-39)
SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e ' 9 8 01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 22-39)
SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e '9801 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 22-39)
(Optional)
SRS f l o o r h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e ' 9 8 01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 22-39)
R i g h t s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e
22-21)
* 1
'00 Sedan
'00 C o u p e
USA
'00 Sedan
with side
airbags
'00 C o u p e
C582
Ref
25
G501
18
G502
19
G503
G504
24
*1:
* 2:
* 3:
Cavities
6
Location
Behind right side of dash
Connects to
R i g h t s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-20)
Body g r o u n d via dashboard
w i r e harness A
wire harness A
w i r e harness A
w i r e harness A
Notes
*2
'98-00 m o d e l s
'01 m o d e l
'00-01 S e d a n , '01 C o u p e
22-19

Right Side Wire Harness (Sedan)
Ref
16
2
13
4
3
3
11
7
Cavities
2
2
1
3
3
4
2
20
15
17
14
18
1
1
2
2
1
10
Right quarter panel

Right quarter panel
Right B-pillar
M i d d l e of rear shelf
Right side of floor
G582
G583
G584
C701
10
G851
12
G581
10
A B S r i g h t rear w h e e l s e n s o r
Front passenger's side airbag inflator
Passenger's door switch
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat b e l t s w i t c h
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r
Passenger's side impact sensor
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay b o x
c o n n e c t o r A (see p a g e 22-25)
c o n n e c t o r G (see p a g e 22-25)
Right rear d o o r s w i t c h
R i g h t rear s p e a k e r
R i g h t s i d e seat b e l t t e n s i o n e r
W i n d o w antenna coil connector A
C581
*
*
*
*
1:
2:
3:
4:
' 0 0 m o d e l w i t h o u t seat h e a t e r
'98-99 m o d e l
' 0 0 m o d e l w i t h seat h e a t e r
'01 m o d e l
22-20
Location
U n d e r r i g h t s i d e o f rear seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Right B-pillar
U n d e r passenger's seat
Connects to
Notes
*4
*1
*2
*3
*4
Canada
#4
R i g h t rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s ,
refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 2237)
Dashboard wire harness A ,
refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 22lo;
SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e
M a n u a l (see p a g e 22-39)
S R S m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat w i r e h a r n e s s
(see p a g e 22-22).
O P D S w i r e h a r n e s s , refer t o
B o d y g r o u n d v i a r i g h t side
wire harness
*4
#4
* 4
*2
#4
Right Side Wire Harness (Coupe)

Ref
16
13
12
10
10
15
14
5
Cavities
2
1
3
3
4
2
2
20
17
18
7
2
1
16
Right quarter panel

M i d d l e o f rear s h e l f
C582
C583
C584
C585 ( C o n n e c t s t o C586)
C586 ( C o n n e c t s t o C585)
C851
4
8
11
1
1
4
A B S r i g h t rear w h e e l s e n s o r
P a s s e n g e r ' s door s w i t c h
P a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt s w i t c h
Passenger's s e a t h e a t e r
Passenger's s i d e a i r b a g i n f l a t o r
Passenger's side i m p a c t sensor
P a s s e n g e r ' s u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box
c o n n e c t o r A (see page 22-25)
P a s s e n g e r ' s u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box
c o n n e c t o r G (see page 22-25)
R i g h t rear s p e a k e r
W i n d o w antenna coil connector A
C582
G581
*
*
*
*
*
*
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Location
U n d e r r i g h t side of rear seat
R i g h t B-pillar
Under passenger's seat
Connects to
* 1
*2
*3
*5
Canada
Dashboard wire harnessA

(see p a g e 22-18)
Dashboard wire harnessA
(see p a g e 22-22)
Notes
O P D S w i r e h a r n e s s , refer t o
B o d y g r o u n d via r i g h t s i d e
wire harness
* 4
*5
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
'00-01 m o d e l w i t h o u t seat h e a t e r
'98-99 m o d e l s
'00-01 m o d e l w i t h seat h e a t e r
'00 m o d e l
'01 m o d e l
'00-01 m o d e l s
22-21

Connector to Harness index (cont'd)
Passenger's Seat Wire Harness (4-way Adjustable) ('01 model)
P a s s e n g e r ' s p o w e r seat a d j u s t m e n t
switch connector A
P a s s e n g e r ' s p o w e r seat a d j u s t m e n t
switch connector B
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat b e l t s w i t c h
Recline m o t o r
Slide m o t o r
C701
22-22
Ref
4
Cavities
6
Location
R i g h t s i d e o f p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
7
5
1
6
3
3
4
2
2
10
Connects to
R i g h t s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-20)
Notes
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Ref
15
3
14
11
13
1
12
9
4
10
7
8
2
6
5
Socket
A
A/C compressor clutch relay
B
Blower motor relay
C
Condenser fan relay
D
Diode
ELD unit
Horn relay
Headlight relay 1
Headlight relay 2
Radiator fan relay
T1
T101
Terminal
18
4
7
4
3
4
16
2
3
4
4
4
4
Connects t o
Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Not used
Battery positive cable (see page 22-5)

Engine wire harness (see page 22-6)
22-23
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector t Fuse/Relay Box index (cont'd)
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Ref
11
Terminal
10
14
C
D
Diode
Diode
E
F
10
7
1
2
4
9
20
6
18
H
1
J
K
L
M
5
13
12
14
23
15
6
18
2
18
Socket
Multiplex control unit

connector A
N
24
22
0
P
Q
R
Reverse relay
S
Starter cut relay
T
Turn signal/hazard relay
U
21
16
17
26
19
27
18
24
20
25
20
7
22
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
22-24
Connects t o
Left side w i r e harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-24)
Left side w i r e harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-24)
Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-14)
Not used
Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-14)

Driver's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Driver's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
No used
Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-18)
Service check connector
Not used
Ignition switch harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-38)
(Plugs directly into the fuse box)
SRS w i r e harness, refer to the '98-01
page 22-39)
Dashboard w i r e harness B (see page
Dashboard wire harness B (see page
Dashboard wire harness B (see page
Optional connector
Optional connector
Optional connector
Optional connector
Accord Service Manual (see

22-16)
22-16)
22-16)
Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Ref
10
15
4
9
5
1
2
3
8
Terminal
20
4
4
18
3
20
G
H
I
J
K
Multiplex control unit connector
6
18
12
17
13
11
3
18
18
16
16
24
14
16
4
4
Socket
A
Accessory relay
B
C
D
Diode
Diode
Diode
E
Connects to
Right side wire harness (see page 22-20)
Roof wire harness (see page 22-20)
Not used
Passenger's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord

Service Manual (see page 22-34)
Passenger's door wire harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 22-34)
Right side wire harness (see page 22-20)
Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16)
Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-16)
(Plugs directly into the fuse box)
Power window relay

Rear window defogger relay
16
15
14
22-25
Power Distribution
Fuse t o Components Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse
Number
41
42
43
44
45
Amps
Wire color
100A
50A
20A
WHT
RED/GRN
20A
RED/YEL
46
47
15A
20A
WHT/GRN
WHT/YEL
Fuse/relay
box socket
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
20A
15A
30A
40A
20A
40A
40A
40A
40A
20A
20A
59
20A
22-26
Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected

Battery, Power distribution
Ignition switch (BAT)
Right headlight, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
Not used
Left headlight, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
Hight beam indicator, Hight beam cut relay
PGM-FI main relay, Data link connector (DLC)
Ignition key light and key interlock solenoid, ABS control unit (BLS)
Cruise control unit, PCM, Horn relay
High m o u n t brake light, Brake failure sensor, Trailer lighting connector
ABS front and rear solenoids

ABS p u m p motor
WHT
No. 1, 7, 8, 15 and 16 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
WHT/BLU
TCS relay
BLU
W r f f T G R N " " Rear w i n d o w defogger relay
No. 9, 10, 1 1 , 12 and 13 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
YEL
No. 2, 4, 5 and 6 fuses (in passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
YEL/GRN
Blower motor
YEL/BLK
Radiator fan motor
BLU/BLK
Condenser fan motor
BLU/YEL
Fan control module (Radiator fan control module)
WHT
A/C compressor clutch
RED
Driver's and front passenger's seat heaters (Canada)
WHT/GRN
WHT/GRN
WHT/GRN
BODY
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Fuse Number
1
Amps
15A
2
3
10A
7.5A
Wire Color
RED/WHT
RED/BLU (or GRN)
BLK/WHT (or GRN)
BLK/YEL
7.5A
YEL/BLK
5
6
7.5 A
15A
7.5A
YEL/GRN
7.5A
7.5A
YEL/BLK
Fuse/relay box socket
YEL
10
11
12
7.5A
15A
30A

YEL/RED
BLK/YEL
GRN/BLK
13
7.5A
BLU/ORN

YEL/RED
BLK/YEL

PGM-FI main relay
SRS unit (VA)
SRS unit (VB)
Blower motor high relay, Climate control unit, Heater
control panel, Fan control module (Radiator fan control
module), Recirculation control motor, Rear w i n d o w
defogger relay, Seat heater relay
ABS control unit, Power mirror actuators, Power mirror
defoggers (Canada), ABS/TCS control unit ('01 model)
Optional connector
Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
Alternator, Cruise control unit, Cruise control main
switch indicator, ELD unit, Engine mount control
solenoid valve, Evaporative emission bypass solenoid
valve, Evaporative emission purge control solenoid
valve, Gauge assembly, PCM, Primary and Secondary
heated oxygen sensors, Vent shut solenoid valve, TCS
switch ('01 model)
Multiplex control unit (driver's) (All '98-99 models
and '00 Sedan), Windshield washer motor (All '98-99
models and '00-01 Sedan), OPDS unit (with side
airbags)
Accessory socket relay
Optional connector
Back-up lights, Brake failure sensor, Clock, DRL
indicator light, Gauge assembly, Multiplex control unit
(passenger's), Shift lock solenoid, Trailer lighting
connector
Ignition coils
Windshield wiper intermittent relay, Windshield wiper
motor, Windshield washer motor ('00-01 Coupe),
i Multiplex control unit (driver's) ('00-01 Coupe)
PCM, PGM-FI main relay
(cont'd)
22-27
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Amps
30 A
20 A
20A
20 A
20A
10 A
20 A
Wire Color
GRN
RED
RED
BLU
WHT/RED
RED/BLU
WHT/YEL
8
9
20 A
20 A
10
10 A
(Sedan)
15 A
(Coupe)
BLU/BLK
WHT/GRN
WHT/RED
RED/GRN
11
12
13
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A

WHT/BLU
WHT/YEL

14
15
16
22-28
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
GRN
GRN/WHT
WHT/BLK

Moonroof motor
Power seat rear up-down motor, Recline motor
Passenger's power seat, Slide motor ('01 Sedan)
Power seat front up-down motor, Slide motor
Passenger's power seat, Recline motor ('01 Sedan)
Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
Moonroof open relay, Moonroof close relay, Left rear
power w i n d o w motor (Sedan),
Passenger's power w i n d o w motor
Audio unit
Audio unit, Accessory socket
Heater control panel, A/T gear position console light,
Driver's seat heater switch light (Canada), Audio unit,
Gauge lights, Cruise main switch light, Moonroof
switch light, Clock, Hazard warning switch light,
Glove box light, Vanity mirror lights, Front parking
lights, Front side marker lights, Rear side marker
lights, License plate light(s), Taillights, Trailer lighting
connector, Climate control unit
Courtesy lights, Trunk light, Ceiling light, Spotlights
PCM, Heater control panel, Security indicator,
Multiplex control unit (door), Gauge assembly, Clock,
Climate control unit
ABS control unit
Multiplex control unit (door)
Right rear power w i n d o w motor (Sedan)
Ground Distribution
Ground t o Components Index
NOTE: All ground wires are BLK unless otherwise noted.
Ground
G1
G2
G101
and
G102
('00-01
models)
G201
G202
G203
G204
G205
G301
G302
G401
G501
G502
G503
G504
G551
G552
G581
G601
G801
Component or circuit grounded

Battery, Transmission housing
Engine block
PCM (PG1 and PG2 are BLK; LG1 and LG2 are BRN/BLK), Idle air control solenoid valve, Radiator
fan switch, PGM-FI main relay, EGR control solenoid valve, Shift control solenoid valve assembly,
A/T gear position switch, Engine coolant temperature switch, Ignition coils ('00 model)
Shielding between the PCM and these components (all have BRN/BLK wires); CKP sensor, TDC
sensor, Primary and secondary heated oxygen sensors, Mainshaft speed senser, Countershaft
speed sensor, VTEC pressure switch, Data link connector (DLC), Immobilizer control unit
Condenser fan motor, Radiator fan motor, Right headlight (low beam), Right front parking light,
Right front side marker light, Right front turn signal light, Hood switch (security), Washer level
switch, Windshield washer motor
Seat heater relay ('98-00 models), Blower motor relay, ELD unit, A B S fail-safe relay, Power steering
pressure switch, Cruise control actuator
A B S pump motor, A B S / T C S modulator unit ('01 model)
ABS control unit (2 wires), A B S / T C S control unit ('01 model)
ABS control unit (2 wires), A B S / T C S control unit (2 wires) ('01 model)
Left headlight (low beam), Left front parking light, Left front side marker light, Left front turn signal
light
Brake fluid level switch, Windshield wiper motor, Intermittent wiper relay, Seat heater relay
('01 model)
Multiplex control unit (driver's), Turn signal/hazard relay, Power window master switch, Driver's
door key cylinder switch, Driver's door lock switch, Driver's door lock knob switch, Ignition key
switch, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada), Data link connector (DLC), Combination
switches (3 wires), Heater control panel (2 wires), Fan control module (Radiator fan control
module), Blower motor high relay, Power transistor, Climate control unit
Moonroof switch, Moonroof open relay, Moonroof close relay, Driver's seat heater switch, Front
passenger's seat heater switch, Glove box light, Transmission range switch (A/T gear position
switch), Clock, Audio unit, Accessory socket, Gauge assembly, Cruise control unit, Cruise control
main switch, OPDS unit ('00 Sedan with side airbags), Fuel gauge sending unit ('00 Coupe), Front
passenger's seat belt switch ('00 model), Memory erase signal (MES) connector ('01 model), Cruise
control main/TCS switch ('01 model)
Audio unit
Power mirror switch, Left power mirror defogger (Canada), Driver's power window motor, Power
window master switch (2 wires), High mount brake light, Driver's seat belt switch, Left rear door
lock knob switch, Driver's power seat switch (2 wires), Driver's seat heater (Canada)
Fuel pump (FP), Fuel gauge sending unit (All '98-99 models, '00 Sedan, and '01 model)
Multiplex control unit (passenger's), Power window relay, Accessory relay, Vanity mirror lights,
Spotlights, Passenger's door key cylinder switch, Passenger's door lock switch, Passenger's door
lock knob switch, Front passenger's seat heater, Right power mirror defogger (Canada), Right rear
door lock knob switch, OPDS unit (Coupe with side airbags, '01 Sedan with side airbags) Front
passenger's seat belt switch ('01 model), Front passenger's power seat switch (2 wires) ('01 model)
Tail lights (right, left), License plate light, Trunk latch switch, Trunk key cylinder switch (security),
Trunk actuator (security), Brake light failure sensor, Trailer lighting connector
S R S unit (2 wires), Memory erase signal (MES) connector ('00 model)
22-29
Battery
Battery Test
A battery can explode if you do not f o l l o w the

proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully and keep
sparks and open flames away f r o m the battery.
Use either a JCI or Bear ARBST tester, and f o l l o w the
manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of
these computerized tester, f o l l o w this conventional test
procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is
between 70F (21C) and 100F (38C).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
If the case is damaged, replace the battery.
If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the indicator EYE.
If the EYE indicates the battery is charged, go to
step 4.
If the EYE indicates a low charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the
surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps
for 15 seconds.
6. Record battery voltage.
If voltage is above 9.6 volts, the battery is OK.
If voltage is below 9.6 volts, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the EYE
shows the battery is charged, plus an additional 30
minutes. If the battery charge is very low, it may be
necessary to bypass the charger's polarity
protection circuitry.
If the EYE indicates the battery is charged w i t h i n
3 hours, the battery is O K . B
If the EYE indicates the battery is not charged
w i t h i n 3 hours, replace the battery.
22-30
Relays
Power Relay Test
Identify the relay, then do the test listed for i t
Normally-open t y p e A:
NOTE: Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual for

the relay input test except that it is mentioned in this
manual (see page 22-52)
Check for continuity between the terminals.
Relay
TCS relay
Test
Normally-open type A
There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No.

2 terminals w h e n power and ground are connected to
the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals.
There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and
No. 2 terminals w h e n power is disconnected.
- TCS relay ('01 model)
22-31
Gauges
Gauge Bulb Replacement
Bulb Location
ABS INDICATOR
L I G H T (1.26 W )
HIGH B E A M
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
\
INDICATOR
I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W )
\
L I G H T (1.26 W )
I M M O B I L I Z E R I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W )
W A S H E R L E V E L INDICATOR
L I G H T (1.26 W)
(Canada)
DRL INDICATOR
L I G H T (1.26 W )
(Canada)
T C S INDICATOR
L I G H T (1.26 W )
('01 m o d e l )
SIDE AIRBAG INDICATOR

L I G H T (1.26W)
{'00-01 m o d e l s
A/T GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR LIGHTS
(1.4Wx7)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL

INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.26 W )
G A U G E LIGHT
(3.78 W )
G A U G E LIGHTS
(3.78 W )
G A U G E LIGHT
(3.78 W )
LOW FUEL INDICATOR

L I G H T (3.78 W )
G A U G E LIGHT
(3.78 W )
22-32
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.26 W )
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.26 W )
BODY
Circuit Diagram
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
0-BLK
No.6
C (15A)
j
}
No.9
(7-5A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BLU/RED
G401
G302
(cont'd)
22-33
Gauges
Circuit Diagram {cont'd)
PCM
BLU
/From
\
previous
\page
WHT/YEL
B21
/From
BLU
YEL
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
B11
previous
\page
/
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT)
GAUGE
FUEL
GAUGE
FUEL DRIVE CIRCUIT
ECT DRIVE CIRCUIT
SPEEDOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
DRIVE CIRCUIT
TACHOMETER
TACHOMETER
DRIVE CIRCUIT
MICRO CONTROLLER and SUB S Y S T E M CIRCUIT
C2
C11
B3
(SCS)
BLU/WHT
YEL-GRN
YEL/BLU
v
PCM
FUEL
GAUGE
UNIT
FUEL
GAUGE
SENDING
UNIT
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT)
SENDING UNIT
PCM
('00-01 models)
BLK
1
G552
('98-99 models)
22-34
B13
(RXD)
B14
(TXD)
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
or TAILLIGHT
RELAY
{Canada;
(cont'd)
22-35
Gauges
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD
RELAY
LEFT
RIGHT
GRN/BLU
GRN/YEL
GRN/BLU
GRN/YEL
JL
LEFT
TURN
SIGNAL
LIGHTS
RIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
LIGHTS
SRS UNIT
BLU
GRN/BLU
FUEL
GAUGE
SENDING
UNIT
1
G552
22-36
BODY
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
v
RED/WHT
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
LIGHT
(LED)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR
LAMP (MIL)
(1.26W)
CRUISE
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.26W)
LOW
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(LED)
SIDE AIRBAG
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.26W)
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
B6
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Driver's)
RED/BLU
GRN/ORN
BLU/BLK
YEL/RED
PCM
RED/BLU
('00-01 models)
YEL/RED
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
SWITCH
(OH : Unbuckled '
VOFF: Buckled
,
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
SWITCH
/ O N : Engine stopped '
\ O F F : Engine running ,
BLK
G551
22-37
Safety Indicator System

Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
No.47 (20A)
- < A J >
( + ) - B L K *
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No.41 (100A)
N o . 4 2 (50A)
BAT
I TRUNK
LATCH
J SWITCH
BLK
G601
22-38
BODY
fl
; Coupe
WHT/YEL
WHT'BLK
WHT/BLK
WHT/BLK
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (Driver's)
PCM
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
ABS CONTROL UNIT
TRAILER LIGHTING
CONNECTOR
6[1]
0 WHT/BLK '
WHT/BLK
d)
HIGH MOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT
(21W)
BLK
-5"
G601
G551
22-39
Stereo Sound System

TWEETERS
PASSENGER'S DOOR SPEAKER

AUDIO UNIT
R e m o v a l , p a g e 22-124
C o n n e c t o r R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 22-38
ANTENNA LEAD
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER
RADIO R E M O T E SWITCH
Test, page 22-38
REAR SPEAKERS
22-40
WINDOW ANTENNA
Test, page 22-126
Repair, page 22-126
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH

BATTERY
No.41 (100A)
No.42 (50A)
-
BLK
No.54 (40A)
VOL.
H VOL.
DOWN [ UP
()
g (A)
' BAT
T O f
ACC>
N 0 . 8 (7.5A)
WHT/BLK
YEL/BLK
Q
I
g
iI I
0501
(With security alarm system)
22
Stereo Sound System

Audio Unit Connector Replacement
W h e n replacing an audio unit connector, match the
wires to the cavities listed in the f o l l o w i n g table.
Cavities 1, 1 1 , 12, and 13 are not used.
Connect to
ACC (Main stereo power
supply)
Radio remote switch
GEN/RED
Security IN
BLU
Right rear speaker ( )
RED/YEL
Left rear speaker ( + )
BLU/YEL
Front passenger's speaker
RED/GRN
(+)
Right tweeter ( + )
Driver's door speaker ( + )
BLU/GRN
Left tweeter ( + )
Lights-on signal
RED/BLK
WHT/GRN Constant power
Security OUT
BLK
BRN/WHT Right rear speaker ( -)
GRY/WHT Left rear speaker ( )
Front passenger's door
BRN/BLK
speaker( - )
Right tweeter ( )
Driver's door speaker ( )
GRY/BLK
Left tweeter ( - )
Dash lights brightness
RED
controller
Ground (G502)
BLK
'98-00 models
Radio Remote Switch Test

1. Remove the 2 screws (A) f r o m the radio remote
switch (B).
B
Wire
WHT/RED
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
14*
15
16
17
18
19
20
2. Remove the radio remote switch (B) f r o m the

steering wheel by removing the 2 screws, and
disconnect the 2P connector (C).
3. Measure resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2
terminals in each switch position according to the
table.
Qj
foj
(Si
> o
Position
OFF
AUDIO/CH
(SEEK)
Resistance
Approx. 3.6 k Q
Approx. 780 Q
Approx. 360 Q
(VOL
UP)
(VOL DOWN)
3 "4 "5
6 7 8 " 9 10
11 12 13 1415 16 17 18
22-42
Approx. 100 0
Homelink Remote Control System

Circuit Diagram
Test
Turn on the spotlight.
BATTERY
(+)
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
If the spotlight comes on, the Homelink's power and

ground circuits are OK. If the Homelink w i l l not open
the customer's garage door, check that the Homelink
is programmed properly (see the owner's manual) or
call Homelink at 800-355-3515. On the Internet, go to
www.homelink.jci.com
If the spotlight does not come on, check for these
problems:
- A blown No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box.
- An open in the WHT/BLU wire between the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and
spotlight.
- A n open in the BLK wire between the spotlight and
G581.
G581
22-43
Power Seat
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable):
N O T E : R e f e r t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l , P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 6 , f o r t h e d r i v e r ' s p o w e r s e a t .
22-44
Circuit Diagram - 4-way Adjustable

BATTERY
No.41 (100A)
(4^*
No.55 (40A)
BLK
YEL/GRN
No.3
(20A)
No.5
(20A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
WHT/RED
B1
B3
POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
O
FORWARD
B4
BLK
BACKWARD
A2
A4
BLU
BLU/YEL
SLIDE
MOTOR
BACKWARD
FOR- '
WARD
B5
B2
B6
YEL
YEL/GRN
BLK
RECLINE
MOTOR
JOL
G581
G581
Power Seat
Motor Test
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjutable):
3. Test the motor. When the motor stops running,

disconnect battery power immediately.
1. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-2).

Recline m o t o r :
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors f r o m the adjustment
switch.
Terminal
B5
B6
Forward
Backward
A2
A4
Forward
Backward
Position
\^
Slide motor;
\^
Terminal
Position
\^
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

check for an open in the power seat wire harness
between the 6P connector and the 2P connectors. If
the harness is OK, replace the motor (see page 202).
22-46
Switch Test/Replacement
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable);
1. Remove the adjustment switch cover (A) from the
passenger's seat by removing the 2 screws (B), and
pulling off the adjustment switch knobs (C).

switch position according to the table.
Terminal
A2
A4
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Position
SLIDE
SWITCH
RECLINE
SWITCH
FOR
WARD
BACK
WARD
FOR
WARD
BACK
WARD
-o
-o
o
o
o
o
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors (D) f r o m the

adjustment switch (E), then remove the switch f r o m
the cover by removing its 2 mounting screws.
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs.
22-47
Seat Heaters - Canada

SEAT HEATER RELAY

{'98-00 m o d e l s )
Test, p a g e 22-52
i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .
i FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT C U S H I O N HEATER
' Test, p a g e 22-199
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l ,
.FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT-BACK HEATER
i n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .
DRIVER'S SEAT-BACK HEATER

Test,page 22-199
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l .
DRIVER'S SEAT CUSHION HEATER

Test, page 22-199
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .
SEAT HEATER RELAY

{'01 m o d e l )
Test, p a g e 22-52
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH
Test/Replacement, page 22-199
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l .
22-48
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH

Test/Replacement, page 22-199
Circuit Diagram
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No. 41 (100 A)
No.42 (50A)
BLK
No.59 (20A)
TH : THERMOSTAT
TON ; Below 9 3 F ( 3 4 C ) 1
l O F F : Above 1 0 9 F
BR : BREAKER
(43C)J
SEAT HEATER RELAY
f O N : Below 8 6 F ( 3 0 C ) 1
[OFF: Above 1 2 2 F (50C)J
HI . High
LO : Low
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
COMBINATION LIGHT
SWITCH (DX, LX)
(DX, LX)
TAILLIGHT
TAILLIGHT RELAY (EX)
RELAY (EX)
WHT/BLK
RED/BLK
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
DRIVER'S SEAT
HEATER
SEAT HEATER
(Without side airbag)
1
G202 ("98-00 models)
G302 ('00 model)
22-49
Restraints
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
S R S Unit Identification
D T C Troubleshooting Index
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index ..........
NOTE: Refer to the '98-01 M Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008,

for the items not shown in this section.
23-2
. 23-3
23-4
SRS
SRS Unit Identification
'98 Model
MAKER
IDENTIFICATION M A R K
KEIHIN
M2
SRS UNIT
I
23-2

'98 Model
KE1H1N (M2) SRS unit
DTC
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-5
8-6
9-1
Detection Item
Open in driver's airbag inflator
Increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator
Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's
airbag inflator
Short to power in driver's airbag inflator
Short to ground in driver's airbag inflator
Open in passenger's airbag inflator
Increased resistance in passenger's airbag inflator
Short to another wire or decreased resistance in
passenger's airbag inflator
Short to power in passenger's airbag inflator
Short to ground in passenger's airbag inflator
Internal failure of SRS unit
Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, could

mean internal failure of the unit or a faulty indicator
light circuit. Refer to Troubleshooting Intermittent
Failures (see page 23-45)*
Internal failure of the SRS unit. If intermittent, could
9-2
mean internal failure of the power supply (VB line).
Refer to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures (see
page 23-45)*
SRS airbag deployed (SRS unit must be replaced)
10-1
* 1: Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008.
Notes
(see page 23-74)*
(see page 23-74)*
(see page 23-76)*
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
page
page
page
page
page
23-78)*
23-80)*
23-82)*
23-82)*
23-83)*
(see page 23-85)*

(see page 23-86)*
(see page 23-88)*
(see page 23-88)*
(see page 23-88)*
23-3
SRS
Symptom Troubleshooting index
'98 Model
SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting,
refer to '98-01 Accord Service
Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23264)* .
SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting,
The SRS indicator light stays on
refer to '98-01 Accord Service
after the ignition switch is turned on
Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23(II).
264)* .
* T. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008.
Symptom
SRS indicator light doesn't come on.
23-4
Also check for
Service Manual index
N O T E : Refer t o t h e f o l l o w i n g list t o l o o k u p
D T C s , s y m p t o m s , f u s e s , connectors, wire
h a r n e s s e s , specifications, m a i n t e n a n c e
s c h e d u l e s , a n d g e n e r a l service
information:
D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Indexes
ABS/TCS Components
Automatic Climate Control
Automatic Transaxle
SRS
19-9
21-29
14-7
11-3
23-3
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Indexes
A/C
21-7
A B S / T C S C o m p o n e n t s .................. 1 9 - 1 0 , 3 1
Automatic Climate Control ................. 21-30
Automatic Transaxle
14-8
Cruise C o n t r o l S y s t e m
4-43
Fan C o n t r o l s
10-15
Fuel and E m i s s i o n s
11-6
SRS
.....23-4
Steering
17-4
Fuse/Relay Indexes
A / C C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Relay ............ 22-23
A / C C o n d e n s e r Fan Relay
22-23
B l o w e r M o t o r Relay
22-23
ELD (Electrical L o a d D e t e c t o r )
22-23
H e a d l i g h t Relay
,
22-23
Horn Relay
22-23
P o w e r Distribution
22-26
R a d i a t o r Fan Relay
22-23
U n d e r - d a s h Fuse/Relay B o x , D r i v e r ' s .... 2224
U n d e r - d a s h F u s e / R e l a y Box, P a s s e n g e r ' s ..
22-25
U n d e r - h o o d Fuse/Relay B o x
22-23
Connector and W i r e Harness Indexes
C o m p o n e n t C o n n e c t o r s (to harness) ... 22-5
G r o u n d s (to c o m p o n e n t s )
22-29
In-line C o n n e c t o r s (to harness)
22-4
Specifications section
Section 2
Maintenance section
Section 3
General Information section
Section 1
A/C Compressor
Replacement
A / C Compressor Clutch
Inspection
Overhaul
A / C C o m p r e s s o r Relief V a l v e
Replacement
A / C Condenser
Replacement
10-2
10-8
10-13
A / C C o n d e n s e r Fan C i r c u i t
Troubleshooting
21-10
A / C Pressure S w i t c h Circuit
Troubleshooting
21-53
A/T Assembly
Removal
Installation
14-114
14-121
A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid

Valves
Test
14-108
Replacement
14-109
A / T Countershaft Assembly
D i s a s s e m b l y / l n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14172
Installation
14-192
A / T Countershaft 1st Gear
Replacement
14-173
A / T Countershaft 3 r d Gear
Replacement
14-173
A / T Differential
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x .............. 14-201
A / T Gear Position Indicator
Replacement
14-144
A / T Gear Position Indicator S y s t e m

14-138
Circuit Diagram
14-139
Test
14-143
A / T Hydraulic Controls
Test
14-104
A / T Mainshaft Assembly
D i s a s s e m b l y / I n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14169
Installation
14-192
A / T Secondary Shaft Assembly
Inspection
14-177
Installation
14-192
A
A/C
Circuit Diagram
A / C C o n d e n s e r Fan A s s e m b l y
Test
Replacement
21-3
21-8
21-14,19
.....21-16,21
2 1 - 1 7 , 22
ABS/TCS Components
C o m p o n e n t Location Index ............. 19-8, 24
19-12,46
Description
19-32
ABS-TCS Control Unit
How-to Information
Replacement
19-25
19-82
ABS-TCS Modulator Unit

19-80
Accumulator Body
Air Cleaner E l e m e n t
Replacement
11-97
Alternator
C o m p o n e n t Location Index ................... 4-25
Replacement
4-31
Overhaul
4-35
Alternator-compressor Belt
A/C Compressor
,
Charging System
Inspection/Replacement
Charging System
Alternator-compressor Belt A u t o tensioner
4-25
4-25
4-31
4-33
ATF
Inspection
Replacement
14-112
14-113
ATF Cooler
Repair
14-127
ATF Cooler Lines a n d Hoses

Replacement
10-2
14-128
ATF Pump
Inspection
14-163
Audio Unit
Replacement
22-42
Audio/Entertainment
22-40
22-41
A / T Shift Cable
Replacement
Adjustment
14-133
14-136
Automatic Climate Control

Description
Circuit Diagram
21-26
21-31
.21-32
A / T Shift Lever
Removal
Installation
14-129
14-130
14-132
A u t o m a t i c Transaxle
Description
Test
14-18
14-101
ABS Control Unit

Replacement
19-22
21-18, 23
ABS Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting
19-18, 76
21-24
ABS Modulator Unit
19-21
(cont'd)
Service IVIanuaB Index

(cont'd)
Connectors
(See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s I n d e x )
Coolant
Replacement
Battery
Charging System
Test
Wiring System
4-25
-
Blower Power Transistor

Test
..........21-58
19-4
B r a k e Pads
19-2
.....4-50
B u m p e r S p o i l e r , Rear
Replacement
20-6
10-2
Coolant Temperature Gauge

Test
Troubleshooting
10-5
10-5
Coolant Temperature Gauge Sending Unit

Components
10-2
Cooling System
10-2
Test
Components
10-7
Cooling System
10-7
Cooling System
Countershaft Bearing Hub/Bearing
Replacement
c
Camshaft
Inspection
Installation
Coolant Reservoir
10-2
14-175
6-40
6-50
4-25
4-26
4-27
Countershaft Bearing, Torque Converter

Housing
Replacement
14-168
C o u n t e r s h a f t Idler Gear
installation
14-195
Charging System Indicator

C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x ................... 4-25
Countershaft Reverse Selector H u b

Replacement
14-173
CKP ( C r a n k s h a f t P o s i t i o n ) S e n s o r
Replacement
Countershaft Speed Sensor

Replacement
6-56
Climate Control Power and Ground

Circuits
Troubleshooting
21-51
Climate Control Unit

How-to Information
21-28
21-58
21-59
Connecting Rod Bearings

Replacement
7-3
7-3
7-10
Connecting Rod Bolts

C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x ..................... 7-3
Inspection
7-21
Connecting Rods
Inspection
Cruise Control Actuator Solenoid

Test
4-50
Cruise C o n t r o l C o m m u n i c a t i o n Circuit
Troubleshooting
4-45
Cruise Control M a i n S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
4-48
Cruise Control Set/Resume/Cancel S w i t c h

T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t .................................. 4-49
Cruise Control S y s t e m
4-41
4-42
Cruise Control Unit

I n p u t Test
4-46
Cylinder Head Assembly

6-3
R e m o v a l .................................................. 6-31
Installation
6-51
Cylinder Head, Bare
Inspection
6-36
Countershaft Bearing, A / T Housing

Replacement
14-156
Charging System
Circuit Diagram
Troubleshooting
Connecting Rod Bearing Caps

4-54
22-30
Brake Calipers
Overhaul
Brake Pedal Position S w i t c h

Test
10-10
Cruise C o n t r o l A c t u a t o r Cable
Adjustment
7-3
7-7
Crankshaft
Inspection
Removal
Installation
Crankshaft M a i n Bearings
Replacement
Crankshaft Oil Seal, Pulley End
Installation
14-110
7-3
7-7, 14
7-12
7-24
7-3
7-8
7-3
7-29
Crankshaft Oil Seal, T r a n s m i s s i o n End

7-3
Installation
7-29
Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft Thrust Washers
Cruise Control Actuator
Test
Replacement
D
Differential Carrier Bearing O u t e r Races, A
IT
Replacement
14-204
Differential Carrier Bearings, A / T
Replacement
Inspection
14-202
14-205
Differential Carrier, A / T
Replacement
14-202
Differential Oil Seals, A / T

Replacement
14-203
Differential Pinion Gears, A / T

Inspection
14-201
Distributor
Replacement
4-14
4-19
4-20
Drive Plate
7-3
7-6
DTCs
6-17
D4 Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting
7-3
4-51
4-52
14-93
Front Driveshaft A s s e m b l y
Resassembly
16-3
ECT S e n s o r
Front S e a t s
Circuit Diagram
22-44
22-45
ECT S e n s o r C i r c u i t
Troubleshooting
EGR Valve
Emblems
Replacement
End Cover, A / T
Removal
Engine Assembly
Removal
Installation
E n g i n e Block A s s e m b l y
10-2
21-50
10-2
20-8
14-151
5-2
5-11
7-3
E n g i n e Block E n d C o v e r
7-3
E n g i n e Block, B a r e
Inspection
Repair
7-3
7-15
7-17
E n g i n e M o u n t Control S o l e n o i d V a l v e
4-55
E n g i n e M o u n t Control S y s t e m
Troubleshooting
4-55
4-56
4-57
E V A P Control S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x .............. 11-103
E x h a u s t Manifold
9-3
E x h a u s t Manifold G a s k e t
Replacement
9-3
E x h a u s t Pipe
Replacement
Description
Circuit Diagram
11-7
11-30, 39
Fuel G a u g e
Test
11-94
Fuel Injection S y s t e m (PGM-FI)

11-50
Fuel Injectors
Replacement
11-80, 82
Fuel L i n e s a n d H o s e s
Inspection
Fuel P r e s s u r e Regulator
Replacement
11-91
I C M (Ignition C o n t r o l Module)
Input Test
4-14
4-21
Idle C o n t r o l S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x ................. 11-85
Adjustment
11-86
Ignition Coil(s)
Test
Troubleshooting
4-14
4-22
4-23
Ignition S y s t e m
Inspection
4-14, 15
4-16, 17
4-18
Ignition W i r e s
Test/Inspection
4-14
4-22
In-car T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r
Replacement
Test
21-55
21-55
Intake Air S y s t e m
11-95
11-92, 93
Fuel S u p p l y S y s t e m
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
11-87
11-88
11-89
Fuses
(See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s Index)
G
Gauges
Intake Manifold
.22-33
G e n e r a l Information
(See s e c t i o n 1)
Interlock S y s t e m
Intermediate Shaft A s s e m b l y
Disassembly
Removal
Resassembly
Installation
H
Heater H o s e s a n d Pipes
10-2
Heater V a l v e
10-2
K e y Interlock S o l e n o i d
Test
Heater V a l v e C a b l e
Adjustment
Fan Control Module

I n p u t Test
10-20
Homelink R e m o t e Control S y s t e m
Test
Fan Controls
10-14
10-16
Hood
Replacement
Frame
Repair C h a r t
IA (Intake Air) B y p a s s C o n t r o l V a l v e
Test
11-101
9-2
14-145
14-146
16-14
16-14
16-16
16-18
9-4
Final Driven G e a r , A / T
Replacement
14-202
20-12
H 0 2 S , Primary
Replacement
H 0 2 S , Secondary
Replacement
21-13
22-43
22-43
K e y Interlock S y s t e m Circuit
Troubleshooting
14-149
14-99
20-7
L o c k - u p Control S o l e n o i d V a l v e
Test
14-103
11-84
L o w Fuel Indicator
Replacement
22-32
11-84
(cont'd)
Service Manual Index

(cont'd)
Lubrication S y s t e m
Test
8-3
8-4
Park Pin S w i t c h
Test
PCM
PCV Valve
Test
Main Valve Body
Removal
Repair
Resassembly
Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly
14-157
14-159
14-160
.... 14-
161
Installation
14-190
Piston Pins
14-150
4 55
11-102
7-3
Piston Rings
Replacement
7-3
7-22
Mainshaft Bearing, Torque Converter

Housing
Replacement
14-167
Pistons
Removal
Replacement
7-3
7-12
7-18
Mainshaft Sealing Rings

Replacement
14-171
Power S e a t Linkage
Mainshaft S p e e d Sensor
Replacement
14-110
Power Seat Motors

Test
Power Seat Switch

Test/Replacement
Maintenance
Multiplex C o n t r o l Unit, Driver's
Input Test
14-147
Power Steering Lines and Hoses

Replacement
o
Oil Filter
Replacement
Oil P a n
Lubrication System
8-5
.....7-3
7-3
Oil P r e s s u r e S w i t c h
Test
L o w E n g i n e Oil I n d i c a t o r C o m p o n e n t s .
8-4
Lubrication System
8-4
Oil P u m p , E n g i n e
Lubrication System
Overhaul
Lubrication System
Oil, E n g i n e
Replacement
O u t s i d e Air T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r
Replacement
Test
....7-3
7-3
8-7
8-5
21-56
21-56
P
Park L e v e r Position S t o p
Inspection/Adjustment
P o w e r S t e e r i n g Fluid R e s e r v o i r
14-153
20-4
10-17
Radiator F a n S w i t c h
Test
10-2
10 21
Radiator F a n S w i t c h Circuit
Troubleshooting
10-19
Radiator H o s e s a n d Pipes
10-2
Radio R e m o t e S w i t c h
Test
22-42
Recirculation C o n t r o l Motor Circuit

Troubleshooting
21 52
Refrigerant Oil
Replacement
21-6
Regulator V a l v e B o d y
D i s a s s e m b l y / l n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14164
22-46
22-47
17-3
Rocker Arm A s s e m b l y
Removal
6-36
6-37
Rocker A r m s
Test
Inspection
6-10
6-38
17-12
Power Steering Pump

Test
Replacement
Overhaul
17-3
17-7,8
17-13
17-14
P o w e r S t e e r i n g P u m p Belt
Inspection/Adjustment
17-10
_
Radiator
Test
Replacement
Radiator F a n Circuit
Troubleshooting
10-2
10-8
10-13
Radiator and Condenser Fans C o m m o n

Circuit
Troubleshooting
21-12
Radiator C a p
Test
10-2
10-7
Radiator Fan Assembly

Test
Replacement
10-2
10-8
10-13
S a f e t y Indicator S y s t e m
22-38
Seat Heaters
22-48
C i r c u i t D i a g r a m .................................... 22-49
S e a t W i r e H a r n e s s , Driver's ..
Installation
20-5
S e a t , Front
20-2
20-3
Secondary Shaft Bearing, Torque

Converter Housing
Replacement
14-168
S e c o n d a r y S h a f t Idler G e a r B e a r i n g
Replacement....................................... 14-179
Servo Body
Shift C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d V a l v e s
Replacement
Test
14-107
14-107
Shift Lock S o l e n o i d
Test
Replacement
14-149
14-150
Shift Lock S y s t e m Circuit

Troubleshooting
14-96
Spark Plugs
Inspection
4-14
4-24
Specifications
Starter
Test
4-7
Replacement
4-8
O v e r h a u l ................................................... 4-9
Starter Solenoid
Test
4-3
..4-4
4-5
Steering
Troubleshooting
Inspection
17-3
17-6
17-9
Steering Column
17-3
Steering Gearbox
Overhaul
17-3
17-20
Steering Lock
T i m i n g Belt
Inspection
Removal
Installation
Wire Harnesses
Wiring S y s t e m
Relay a n d C o n t r o l U n i t L o c a t i o n s ..... 22-2, 3
11-98
1
6-18
6-19
6-22
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve

Replacement
14-106
Test
14-106
Removal
Installation
14-154
14-192
Transmission Range S w i t c h
Test
Replacement
14-140
14-141
1st/2nd Clutch Assembly

Disassembly
Inspection
Resassembly
14-180
14-183
14-185
3rd Clutch Pressure S w i t c h

Replacement
3rd/4th Clutch Assembly
Inspection
Valve Guides
Inspection
Replacement
6-44
6-45
Valve Seals
Removal
6-43
Valve Seats
Repair
6-47
17-3
Valve Springs
Removal
Sub-frames
Replacement
6-43
20-9
Sunlight Sensor
Replacement
Test
21-57
..21-57
Valves
Adjustment
Removal
Inspection
Installation
6-13
6-43
6-44
6-49
VTEC Lost M o t i o n A s s e m b l i e s / S p r i n g s
Inspection
6-39
VTEC Solenoid Valve

Test
TCS Indicator Circuit

Troubleshooting
6-9
19-78
22-31
19-81
TDC Sensors
Replacement
6-55
Thermostat
Test
Replacement
10-9
10-12
2 n d Clutch Pressure S w i t c h
Replacement
17-19
Steering Wheel
Troubleshooting
17-3
S t e e r i n g Rack G u i d e
Adjustment
TCS S w i t c h
Test
Throttle Cable
Adjustment
11-96
11-99
11-100
4-6
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
Troubleshooting
T C S Relay
Test
Throttle Body
Test
w
Water Pump
Inspection
Replacement
10-2
10-9
10-10
Wheel Speed Sensors

Inspection
Replacement
19-82
19-83
14-111
14-111
14-170, 183
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
" Portions of materials contained herein have been reprinted under

license from America Honda Motor Co., Inc. License Agreement AH220 ."

1998-2001 Honda Accord v-6 B7xa

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

1998-2001 Honda Accord v-6 B7xa

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Introduction

h o w t o service this vehicle correctly a n d safely.

Fuel and Emissions

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS)

Chassis and Paint Codes

Chassis and Paint Codes

Chassis and Paint Codes

Identification Number Locations

Warning/Caution Label Locations

Under-hood Emission Control Label

Parts Marking Locations

1HG CG1 6 4 * W A 000001

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

Chassis and Paint Codes -1999 Model

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

Chassis and Paint Codes - 2001 Model

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle

Warning/Caution Label Locations

Engine and Evaporative Families

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA

W HNX V 03.0 FF1

SPARK PLUG GAP

MOTOR CO. , LTD

W HNX R 0130 AAA

Under-hood Emission Control Label (1999 Model)

Engine and Evaporative Families

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA

H O N D A MOTOR CO. , LTD

Engine and Evaporative Families

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA

Y HNX V 03.0 FF1

SPARK PLUG GAP

NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.

Y HNX R 0130 AAA

Under-hood Emission Control Label (2001 Model)

Engine and Evaporative Families

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV

(IN) 0. 220. 02mm

SPARK PLUG GAP

1 HNX V 03.0 M5U

NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.

1 HNX R 0130 AAF

Standards and Service Limits

1.3 m m (0.05 in.)

0.15 m m (0.006 in.)

0.02 m m (0.001 in.) m a x .

0.05 m m (0.002 in.)

27.5 m m (1.083 in.)

11.0 m m (0.43 in.)

Brush spring tension (new)

9 3 0 kPa (9.5 k g f / c m , 135 psi)

2 0 0 kPa (2.0 k g f / c m , 28 psi)

120.95 - 121.05 m m ( 4 . 7 6 2 - 4.766 in.)

0.15 m m (0.006 in.)

0.03 m m (0.001 in.) m a x .

0.04 m m (0.002 in.)

Cam lobe height

0.05 m m (0.002 in.)

0.20 m m (0.008 in.)

34.615 m m (1.3628 in.)